H12 VXCVXCV

0
Printday: 2007-01-27
Item
Description
Model No.
Information
JLZ040412.xls
File
1
RANGE 4 HOT PLATES+OVEN
7BTOE2M44
COFFEE MACHINE M-2
CQFS22MM
UNIVERSAL MACHINE KU 2-4E
540101
REFRIGERATOR 300L
MR-300
7, 7-2
WATER BOILER 151
BE3M
DISHWASHER WT38
WT38M
12
COFFEE MACHINE
HD7448
14
IRONING BOARD WALL MOUNTED
620135
15
MICROWAVE OVEN
RE-R40SM
10
16
TILTABLE FRYING TABLE
168032S
11
18
REFRIGERATOR 113L
ER45M
12
19
WASHER-EXTRACTOR
EW402F60
13
20
DRYING TUMBLER EDE 425 M.60
167049
14
ADD
WASHER-EXTRACTOR
W455H
15
ADD
TUMBLE DRYER
T4130
16
1 0 NMBEEii
OS
O-
2069914
^ ^ ' ^
LOiÂMT
Exclusive Sales of
B] E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment
How to contact us...

Loipart AB
P.O. Box 694
S-441 IBAIingss
SWEDEN
Phone:
Telefax:
Telefax spare parts:
+46 322 66 83 60
+46 322 63 77 47
+46 322 66 83 99
E-mail:
Internet:
loipart@loipart.se
www.loipart.conn
LMPA
CUSTOMER INFORMATION
February 2005
Loipart AB took over the marine sales and project organisation of Electrolux
Professional Marine Division on 1^' of November 2003. As a result Loipart AB gained
World exclusivity and became the sole supplier of Electrolux Food and Laundry
Marine appliances and all Spare Parts for these.
Loipart Ltd, with over 25 years of experience, is the largest turnkey supplier of
Catering areas in the World and Electrolux the largest manufacturer of Marine
equipment. This means that all customers, both past, present and future, have the
convenience of a one in-house availability for all Electrolux Food and Laundry Marine
products and Spare Parts, as well as Loipart turnkey Galleys, Pantries and Provision
stores.
In order to help our Customers we have an After Sales Organization placed in
Alingss to whom you are always welcome with Technical Questions and Problems.
You can reach the After Sales People on the following Addresses:
Manager
Jan-Oiof Gustafsson
Tel: +46-322-66 83 68
Fax:+46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: ian-olof.qustafsson(S)lolpart.se
Joe O'Kane
Tel: +46-322-66 83 79
Fax:+46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: ioe.okane^loipart.se
Stefan Engelbrektsson
Tel: +46-322-66 83 89
Fax:+46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: stefan.enqelbrektsson@loipart.se
^ 3
Mssr^^MMJ^wA
CUSTOMER INFORMATION
February 2005
Loipart AB took over the marine sales and project organisation of Electrolux
Professional Marine Division on 1^' of November 2003. As a result Loipart AB gained
World exclusivity and became the sole supplier of Electrolux Food and Laundry
Marine appliances and all Spare Parts for these.
Loipart Ltd, with over 25 years of experience, is the largest turnkey supplier of
Catering areas in the World and Electrolux the largest manufacturer of Marine
equipment. This means that all customers, both past, present and future, have the
convenience of a one in-house availability for all Electrolux Food and Laundry Marine
products and Spare Parts, as well as Loipart turnkey Galleys, Pantries and Provision
stores.
To strengthen our After Sales Service in USA we have founded a new group
company, Loipart LLC, based in Ft Lauderdale, USA. Loipart LLC provides the same
service as Loipart AB in Sweden but is focusing on our American based customers.
For fastest possible service, please assign all Marine Spare Part enquiries
and Purchase Orders to your contact person according to the list below.
The enquiries and orders can be sent by fax or e-mail:
Loipart LLC
Morten Mathiesen
Tel: +1-954-522-8377
Fax: +1-954 522 8376
E-mail: aeneralmaiKaioipartllc.com
Area responsibility: USA
LOIPART AB
Britt-Marie Almberg
Tel: +46-322-66 83 62
Fax: +46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: britt-marie.almberqgiioipart.se
Area responsibility: Norway, Denmark and Finland
Maj Hellberg
Tel: +46-322-66 83 69
Fax: +46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: mai.hellbera(g)loipart.se
Area responsibility: Europe and Africa
(excl. Great Britain, Sweden, Norway, Denmark and Finland)
Anette Smetana
Tel: +46-322-66 83 91
Fax: +46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: anette.smetana@loipart.se
Area responsibility: Great Britain, Sweden, Asia, Far and Middle East, Oceania,
South America and Canada
Bank information
For Loipart AB
Bank: Nordea Bank Sweden AB
P.O Box 340
SE-441 27 Alingss
Sweden
For Loipart LLC

Bank: HSBC Bank USA
1600 SE 17th Str.
Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33316
International Payments:
Account No: 3050 17 04019
IBAN account No:
SE55 3000 0000 0305 0170 4019
Swift Code: NDEASESS
All Payments:
Acc. No. 156717573
Swift Code: MRMDUS33
Domestic Payments:
Postgirot: 111192-1
Bankgirot: 5693-8442
Notice:
Please make sure that the invoice number is
transferred as a reference with your
payment.
No withdrawals for bank charges outside
Sweden are accepted.
For more information, please contact:

For USA
Morten Matiiiessen
Loipart LLC
Tel: +1-954-522-8377
Fax: +1-954-522-8376
E-mail: morten(g)loipartllc.com
For Rest of Tlie World

P-O Nygrdh
Loipart AB
Tel: +46-322-66 83 78
Fax: +46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: Der-olof.nyqardh@loipart.se
^3
PO
CO
iR*
"=si
m
Ol
ES^BSSd
t
PO
^3
W
^
)
Ol
i\D
H Electrolux
Ranges,
electric
, ^
STAINLESS STEEL EXECUTION
COMPACT DESIGN - LARGE

CAPACITY ON A SMALL SURFACE
ADJUSTABLE FLANGED FEET
INCLUDING FRONT HAND RAIL

AND ROLLING RACK
STORAGE CABINET OR OVEN FOR

2/1 GN PANS WITH NON-TILT
GUIDES FOR SAFETY
MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS OF

VDE/CE
TWO SIZES, SEVEN MODELS
IPX 4
9 8 % RECYCLABLE BY WEIGHT
H ^ H H H J H / - ^ *
(^^c!
Model 7BTSE2M40
/ffi
7ilSE
^9p ^S|
^.s
! -'^
{llp ^m ^ 9 ^ B
Model 16 82 06M
ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL AB
MARINE DIVISION
SE 441 82 Alingss, Sweden
Phone
+46 322 74 000
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail
pa.marlneinfo@electrolux.se
\ i
These ranges are made entirely of AISI 304

stainless steel with a pressed, one piece top with
sealed hot plates to meet the highest hygiene
standards. Stainless steel control panel with
splash proteCTion to control knob entry points.
Thermostatic plate control with a 6 position
rotary switch for accurate temperature control.
Monobloc models and top units are mounted on
height adjustable feet.
The models with oven are provided with a
thermally insulated cooking chamber, made in
stainless steel, with 3 pairs of non-tilting runners. Thermally insulated, double-walled oven
door mounted on a spring hinge. Stainless steel
handle. Ample sized oven dimensions
530x650x300 mm with grid shelf in chromed
steel with integrated rolling protection. Heating is by means of 2 independent incoloy elements in rustproof alloy for heating to high
temperatures, positioned above and below the
oven floor in easy deanable, stainless steel.
Thermostatic temperature control adjustable
up to 320C with a choice of upper or lower
heating.
Side and rear guard rails are available as optional
extras.
For further specifications and optional extras,
please see overleaf
2-031
DOC.NO.
EDITIONS
2-03 I B M
03.04
Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm
RANGES, ELECTRIC
Model 7BTOE2M40, 7BTOE2M44
Model 7BTSE2M40, 7BTSE2M44
1 C
[
^
oooo
f
"
<^~
l ^ w * ;-:-l
'
1'1
48
6C 4
593
48.
oooooo
OO
oo oooo
^
1
O
593
48
604
I
700
700
&
Model 7BTOE3M40, 7BTOE3M44
^
954
593
700
-112
700
700
Side view, all models:
Model 16 82 06M
58
H75|
Elearical connertion
Rolling rack
Front hand rail
Storage cabinet 680x640x420 mm
(models 16 81 13, 16 82 20 only)
5. Oven 4.7 kW
(not models 16 81 13, 16 82 20)
593
20
850
700
Hotplates
16 82 06M
7BTSE2M40
Oven
4.7 kW
7BTSE2M44
3
7BTOE2M40
7BTOE2M44
Voltage V*
440 3 -60
7BTOE3M44
Loading
kW
Max amps
in phase
15.1
21.8
440 3 -60
9.3
440 3 -60
gross
80
100
45
60
80
100
120
130
52.
12.2
0.740
20.2
400 3 -50
400 3 -50
net
Shipping
volume
m
13.4
400 3 -50
440 3 -60
7BTOE3M40
150' - 0
Weight kgs
0 2 3 0 mm
2.6 kW
14
19.2
18.4
27.7
1.100
25.2
*other voltages available on request
Optional extras
PNC
92
92
92
92
16 01
16 02
16 03
16 61
2-031
Subject to dianges without notice.
M.,
112
Specifications
0155
mm
1.5 kW
700
'
Model
.55
j30
1.
2.
3.
4.
Model
48
'
-112U.
7HRF2
7HRF3
7HRSR
7HRSL
Description
S/s rear h a n d rail, L = 7 0 0
S/s r e a r h a n d rail, L = 1 0 5 0
S/s r i g h t s i d e h a n d rail
S/s left s i d e h a n d rail
mm
mm
Installation
The range is to be bolted to deck Center oflegs see
installation drawing above.
ff
540
^0
-1108!
PR 700
- CUCINE ELETTRICHE
INSTALLAZIONE, USO E MANUTENZIONE
Pag.
- ELECTRIC COOKERS
INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Page
- ELEKTROHERDE
INSTALLATION, GEBRAUCH UND WARTUNG
Seite
13
Page
17
Pag.
21
, - FOURNEAUX ELECTRIQUES
' INSTALLATION, EMPLOI ET ENTRETIEN
- COCINAS ELECTRICAS
INSTALACION, USO Y MANTENIMIENTO
- ELEKTRISCHE FORNUIZEN
<^ INSTRUCTIES VOORINSTALLATIE, GEBRUIK EN ONDERHOUD Pagina
25
- SPIS, EL
INSTRUKTIONER FR INSTALLATION OCH BRUK
Sidan
29
- ELKOMFURER
INSTALLATION, BRUG OG VEDLIGEHOLDELSE
Sida
33
- COZINHAS ELECTRICAS
INSTRUCgOES PARA A INSTALAQAO E USO
Pag.
37
- HAEKTPIKEZ KOYZINEZ
OAHriEI TIA THN EFKATAZTAZH KAI TIA THN XPHZH
ZeiSa
41
DOC. NO. 5958 706 03

EDITION 1
9908
DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITA
ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL SPA
VialeTreviso 15
33170 PORDENONE
Dichiara sotto la propria autorita che le macchine appartenenti a
questa documentazione, descritta nella targhetta di identif icazione, sono conforme alle seguenti disposizioni legislative:
- European Directive 73/23/CEE (L.V.D.)
- European Directive 89/336/CEE (E.M.C.)
- European Directive 93/68/CEE (Amendment)
- European Directive 90/396/CEE (Gas Directive)
- Approval: VDE
Data: Pordenone 02.03lrt(98
Nome:
Piettt
skbile Stabilimento)
DECLARATIONE OF CONFORMITY
ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL SPA
VialeTreviso 15
33170 PORDENONE
Declares on own authority that the machine present in this
documentation, described in the identification plate, conforms to
the legislative directions of the directive:
- European Directive 73/23/CEE (L.V.D.)
- European Directive 89/336/CEE (E.M.C.)
- European Directive 93/68/CEE (Amendment)
- European Directive 90/396/CEE (Gas Directive)
- Approval: VDE
Date: Pordenone 02
Name:
Pie
(Rd|46frsabne Stabilimento)
(iC)
e)
O
& ^
ID
C:)^:)
3
^
O
^
SCHEMI Dl INSTALLAZIONE
INSTALLATION DIAGRAM
INSTALLATIONSPLAN
SCHEMAS D'INSTALLATION
ESQUEMA PARA LA INSTALACION
INSTALLATIESCHEMA
INSTALLATIONSRITNING
INSTALLATIONSDIAGRAM
ESQUEMAS DE INSTALAQAO
ZXEAIArPAMMATA EfKATAZTAEHZ
iL
b
^pw
.'"4.
450
Jlfijj.
0
0
350
hsrr
IT
Q
54
n =HII
1 1
^ ~
000
700
@@ @@ @@ @
II I
-1-^-
II
000
o
o
ET
52 I |.
1
540
E
fiO
60 .
[op
!| I
13
i;^
MARINE
version
MARINE
version
m
7t)0
1
I. MAIN FEATURES
1.
Do not wash the appliance with water jets.
DESCRIPTION OF APPLIANCE
This booklet describes a number of appliance models.

For more detailed information about the model in your possession, refer to "Technical Data" table.
2.
TABLE TECHNICAL DATA
Installation drawing (see fig. 1)

I - Power supply cord entry
MO0EI.$
IS
top
1p
1
cflblrwt
cabinet
t. ov*n
tM
1Mtf2
1, tmmti t. ovmt
MarfiM
Uartn
POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGE (VOLT)
230 3400 3N
230 3400 3N
230 3400 3N
230 3400 3N
230 3400 3 N
400 3440 3-
400 3440 3-
FREQUENCY (Hz)
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
5,2
9,3
9,3
14,5
9,3
9,3
14,5
4,95
4,95
4,95
MAXIMUM POWER
COOKING TOP (Kw)
MAXIMUM POWER OVEN
FORNO (Kw)
MAXIMUM POWER
(Kw)
POWER SUPPLY CABLE
SECTION (mm)
5,2
9,3
9,3
14,5
14,25
14,26
19,45
4x1.5
5x1,5
4x2,5
5x1,5
4x2,5
5x1,5
4x10
5x1,5
4x10
5x2,5
4x2,5
4x2,5
4x4
4x4
PLATES (1.5Kw)-(Nr)
PLATES (2,6 Kw) - (Nr.)
i n va
Do not use products containing chlorine (bleach, hydrochloric

acid etc.) even diluted, to clean steel surfaces.
Do not use corrosive substances (i.e. muriatic acid) to clean the
floor under the appliance.
For more information, refer to the chapter on "Care and
maintenance".
4. SAFEGUARDING THE
ENVIRONMENT
4.1.
All the packaging materials used are environmentally friendly.

They may be stored at no risk or burnt at an authorised incineration plant. Plastic materials suitable for recycling are marked with
the following symbols:
/ \
3.
PRECAUTIONS
Before installing or using the appliance, carefully read this

instructions booklet, in as much as it contains important information concerning the safety, operation and maintenance of the
appliance.
o.
Keep this instructions booklet in a safe place for future consultation by other users or purchasers in the event that the appliance
is resold.
Packaging
PE
/ \
polyethylene : external wrapping film, instructions

booklet bag and gas injectors bag
polypropylene: top packaging panels and straps
PP
/ \
PS
expanded polystyrene: protective surround elements
4.2. Use
The appliance has been designed and perfected under laboratory testing conditions to offer exceptional levels of performance.
However, to minimise energy consumption (electricity, gas and
water), we recommend tuming the appliance off when not in use
for long periods and not using it, for example, with the door open
as this may impair the oven's performance. We also recommend
preheating the appliance immediately prior to use.
4.3. Cleaning
To minimise the emission of pollutants Into the environment, we
recommend cleaning the appliance (externally and, where necessary, internally) with products which are at least 90% biodegradable.
Important; Installation and maintenance of tine aDOliance

and its conversiort to a different oas SUDDIV. must onlv be
oerformedfova auatified installer authorised bv the
manufacturer.
This appliance is intended for industrial use only and is specifically designed to cook food. Any other use of the appliance is
deemed improper.
The appliance must only be used by trained staff and must be
supervised at all times when in use.
Switch off the appliance if it breaks down or malfunctions.
Only contact the technical service centre authorised by the
manufacturer for repairs and only use original spare parts.
Failure tocomply with the above requirement may jeopardise
the safety of the appliance and render the guarantee null and
void.
4.4
Disposal
The appliance must be disposed of properly at the end of its
service life.
The appliance is made from 90% recyclable materials (stainless
steel, iron, aluminium, galvanised sheet steel, etc.). These materials may therefore be scrapped in accordance with local waste
disposal regulations at a conventional recycling plant.
Make the appliance unusable by cutting off the power cord. Also
remove any compartment or interior closure device fitted on the
appliance to prevent persons from becoming trapped inside.
rr INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLfiTsj

1.
POSITIONING
Place the appliance under Its extraction hood to insure the

removal of all vapors generated whilst the appliance is working.
Adjust the height and level of each cabinet by regulating the
adjustable feet.
Whenever the appliance is to be placed near external or
dividing walls, kitchen furniture etc., it is recommended that
these be made of uninflammable materials; if this is not the case,
then the same must be covered with uninflammable heat resistant
materials. Close attention must be paid to fire prevention laws
and standards.
Carefully peel off the plastic covering from the external panel,
if some of the glue remains attached it can be easily removed
using a suitable solvent.
Close the holes on the side of the appliance by means of the
plugs supplied.
1.1
ASSEMBLY APPLIANCES (fig. 2)
Remove the spacers from the holes "A" and "B".
Provisionally set side by side the appliances. Level the height
of the appliances and then separate them.
Apply a thin adhesive tape "C" on the edge of the upper top that
goes alongside.
Apply on the upper side of the top a seam "D" of sealant (c.r.
059611).
Set side by side the appliances, fastening them through the
holes "A" and "B" with screws M5x20. Fasten them by means of
nuts and washers.
Clean the sealant in eccess with a special spatule and remove
the adhesive tape.
2.
Before carrying out the electric connection, make sure that the
voltage and frequency rated on the appliance data plate
conform to those of the mains supply.
To accede to the main terminal board you just need to remove
the lower panel of the oven.
The power supply cable must be flexible and of a type matching
at least the qualities of a rubber-type cable H05RN-F and it must
be protected by a stiff plastic pipe.
The cable shall be connected to the main terminal board according to the instructions of the wiring diagram attached to the
appliance and then fastened by means of a cable clamp.
The appliance shall be connected to the mains through a
suitable automatic circuit breaker that leaves a gap of at least
3mm between its contacts.
The maximum leakage current is 1 mA/kW.
The appliance must be earthed. To this purpose, inside the
appliance, near the main terminal board, there is a screw
marked with the symbol + to which must be connected the
earth wire.
The appliance shall be included in a correctly dimensioned
equipotential. The connection is carried out by means of a screw
marked with the symbol "^, which is located near the front left leg.
The manufacturer declines any liability in case of no respect
of this safety rule.
2.1
SAFETY DEVICE
The appliance is equipped with a safety device having automatic
reset, which cuts in whenever the temperature exceeds the
maximum limit as set at factory and it interrupts the power supply
to the resistors.
If the safety device cuts in, it will be necessary to ask for an
authorized technician to eliminate the cause.
Wamina!
The sealatt beains polvmerlzîon stat^na from the external
surface; rt is recommended not to touch ttje sealant In the first
three hours after application in order to avoid ar^y trimming.
1.2
ELECTRIC CONNECTION
ASSEMBLY OF TOP APPLIANCE ON SUPPORT
See the relative enclosed assembly instructions for the

installation.
10
III. INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

This appliance is intended for industrial use, and must only
be used by trained staff.
1.
INTRODUCTION
This appliance should be used only for cooking foodstuffs and it

shall not be used for other purposes.
Our appliances have been designed and optimised by means
of laboratory tests to guarantee high levels of performance and
efficiency. However, to save energy (electricity, gas and water)
avoid using the appliance under no-load conditions or conditions
that impair optimal operation (e.g. with the doors/lids open).
Also, when possible, pre-heat the appliance before use.
2.1
SWITCHING ON THE COOKING TOP (fig. 3)
Switch on the main switch installed ahead of the appliance.
Turn control knob "A" of the desired plate so that the Index on
the front panel points towards one of the six available positions,
bearing in mind that position "1" corresponds to minimum power
and that position "6" corresponds to maximum power.
The green pilot lamp lights on to Indicate that the appliance is
live.
In orderte adjust the plates heat, first set the knobs on position
"6"; once the maximum temperature or the boiling point has
been reached, bring the knob on a lower setting.
Warning: during operation the cooking tops become very hot.
2.
HOW TO USE THE COOKING TOP
All plates have a temperature limiting device, which interrupts

the power supply whenever the temperature reaches 450 C.
The temperature limiting device reset is carried out automatically.
In order to ensure correct use and energy saving, you must
observe the following:
- use pots and pans with a flat bottom and a diameter not smaller
than the one of the hot plates;
- turn on the plate only after having positioned the utensil on top;
- do not leave the plates on with no pots or when the pot on top
is empty.
- do not spill cold liquids on the hot plates.
2.2
SWITCHING OFF
Turn the appliance control knobs on "off' position.
11
3.
HOW TO USE THE OVEN
The resistor operating system is controlled by a four-positions

selector, whereas the temperature inside the chamber is controlled by a thermostat.
The selector enables to choose the type of heating by switching
on the most appropriate heating elements:
"off" position
"appliance on" position
upper and lower heating elements
lower resistor
upper resistors
Note:
All cooking processes must be carried out with the oven door
closed.
3.1
TURNING ON THE OVEN (fig. 4)
Turn selector knob "C" for resistor control on one of the
operating positions.
The green pilot lamp lights on to indicate that the appliance is live.
Turn thermostat knob "D" to the setting corresponding to the
desired cooking temperature which ranges between 140 and
320 C. The yellow pilot lamp lights on to indicate that the
resistors are on. Its turning off indicates that the set temperature
has been reached.
4.
CLEANING AND SERVICING
Before proceeding with any cleaning or maintenance operations, make sure that the power supply is disconnected at the
mains.
To reduce the emission of harmful subtances into the
atmosphere, clean the appliance (externally, and internally when
necessary) with products featuring over 90% biodegradability.
Clean the stainless steel surfaces daily with warm water and a
neutral soap, rinse thoroughly and dry carefully.
The cleaning of the said surfaces should never be effectuated
using aggressive detergents, common wire wool, brushes or
similar implements.
Clean the plates with a damp cloth, then turn them on for a few
minutes as to let them dry quickly; finally lubricate them with a
thin layer of alimentary oil.
If the appliance is not going to be used for an extended period
then the following precautions should be observed:
- Disconnect the power supply.
- Apply a protective film of Vaseline oil on the stainless steel
surfaces.
- Make sure that the premises is aired regularly.
CAUTION
Do not wash the appliance with direct or high pressure water jets.
For the cleaning of the appliance do not use products containing
chlorine, bleach, chloric acid etc. even if diluted.
Do not use corrosive substances such as hydrochloric acid
when cleaning the pavement surrounding the appliance.
Do not spray cold liquids onto the hot plates.
When scrapping the appliance, onbserve all regulations
governing waste displosal in the country of installation.
Our appliances are manufactured using more than 90 % metal
(stainless steel, iron, aluminium, galvanaised sheet metal) and
therefore these may be recycled in conventioani waste recovery
sites in compliance with current standards in the country of
installation.
Render the appliance completely inoperative by removing the
power cable and any other closure device (where fitted) to avoid
the risk of children being trapped inside.
4.1
SUGGESTIONS
It is advisable to periodically check the appliance (at least once
a year). To this end we advise you to obtain a maintenance
contract.
3.2
SWITCHING OFF
Turn the appliance control knobs to the "off' position.
Switch off the appliance at the mains.
12
SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE

CATALOGO PARTI Dl RICAMBIO
H] Electrolux
ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL
" MARINE" - ELECTRIC COOKER

CUCINE ELETTRICHE "MARINE"
PR700
Factory PNC
168023
168024
168025
168026
9731
Pag.
1
2
3-4
Model
Ref.
Page
RCF/E2M0
RCF/E2M4
RCVF/E3M0
RCVF/E3M4
a
b
c
d
1,2
1,2
1,3
1,3
Main view
Electric component
Spare parts list
4 hot piates, 400 V

4 hot piates, 440 V
6 hot piates, 400 V
6 hot piates, 440 V
Vista generale
Componentielettrici
Lista ricambi
Brand:
Country:
From ser. nr. / Da Ser. Nr. / 844
Ed. 00-05
Doc. Nr.:
2-04 009

Pag.: 1
Ed. 00-05
Doc. Nr.:
2-04 009

Pag.: 2
Ed. 00-05
Doc. Nr.:
2-04 009
Electric cookers
Cucineelettriche
PNC
Ref.
PNC
Ref.
i023
168024
a
b
168025
168026
c
d
Pos
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
32
33
33
34
35
36
37
38
38
51
51
52
52
53
54
Code
004244
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
054111
054113
004266
0A5459
*
*
053339
004586
004584
005369
*
059044
*
004253
004254
025020
004255
050766
052725
058613
054144
005962
*
*
*
054112
301
052220
002449
*
*
003931
003929
003930
004014
051905
051906
Descrizione
Description
Pagina 1: Vista generale
Page 1: Main view
Griglia
Traversa mobile L 370
Ghlera
Traversa mobile L 350
Traversa fissa
Traversa 1,5 m
Colonnina
Ripiano 6 piastre
Ripiano 4 piastre
Tappo
Guarnizione tappo
Supporto corrimano
Guarnizione laterale forno
Guida
Magnete
Cerniera portina
Corrimano 700 mm
Corrimano 1050 mm
Perno
Maniglia
Porta
Maniglia
Supporto scrocco
Molla
Chiusura forno
Cruscotto
Porta
Griglia
Controporta
Cerniera
Copricerniera
Morsettiera
Suola
Piedino 3/4" Marine
Fianco Sx
Fianco Dx
Fianco destro
Guarnizione superiore forno
Tappo
Vite
Confezione tappi ripiano
Schienale
Schienale
Grate
Crosspiece
Ring nut
Crosspiece
Crosspiece
Crosspiece
Column
Top panel
Top panel
Plug
Gasket
Support
Gasket
Runner
Magnet
Hinge
Handrail
Handrail
Pin
Handle
Door
Handle
Support
Spring
Fastening
Control panel
Door
Grate
Inner door
Hinge
Hinge cover
Junction box
Bottom
Foot, Marine
Left panel
Libretto d'uso
Side panel
Gasket mm.596
Plug
Screw
Set of plugs
Rear panel
Rear panel
Pagina 2: Parti elettriche
Page 2: Electric component
Piastra 2600 W, 400 V, Dia. 220 mm

Piastra 2600 W, 440 V
Piastra 1500 W, 400 V, Dia. 145 mm
Piastra 1500 W, 440 V
Staffa per piastra
Staffa per piastra
Electric plate 2600 W,

Hinge, for plate
Hinge, for plate
Ref. / Notes
cd/
cd/
cd/
ab/
cd
cd
ab/
cd/
cd
cd
cd
art.
art.
art.
art.
art.
art.
art.
art.
art.
art.
art.
516842400
516841100
516842300
516841900
516842100
516841200
870822403
870822304
546811800
546811600
516836200
art. 517856500
art. 517856600
art. 508888200
art. 514886600
art. 516840800
ab/
cd/
art. 521884601
art.0521884501
art.502883302
art. 546811700
400
440
400
440
V
V
V
V
ab /
cd /
art. 502883203
art. 502894604
ac/
bd/
ac/
bd/
2600 W
2600 W
1500W
1500W
o
Q
CO
From ser. nr. / [) a Ser. N r . / 8 4 4

Pag. 3
Ed. 00-05
Doc. Nr.:
2-04 009
Electric cookers
Cucineelettriche
PNC
Ref.
PNC
Ref.
i023
i024
a
b
168025
168026
c
d
Pos
55
56
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
Code
051907
004552
004558
059257
004269
052099
059238
005370
005011
004274
004270
004271
053816
025245
005010
004268
053342
010227
005377
Descrizione
Description
Pagina 2: Parti elettriche
Page 2: Electric component
Molla per piastra

Cruscotto
Cruscotto
Indice manopola
Limitatore di temperatura
Termostato
Commutatore
Resistenza di caduta
Lampada gialla tonda
Manopola
Manopola x termostato
Manopola
Guarnizione per manopola
Molla
Lampada verde tonda
Commutatore
Molla
Guarnizione
Resistenza forno
Spring, tor plate

Control panel
Control panel
Pointer
Thermostat
Thermostat
Change over switch
Heating
Lamp
Knob
Knob for thermostat
Knob
Gasket, for knob
Spring
Lamp
Change over switch
Spring
Gasket
Heating element
Ref. / Notes
ab
cd
bd

Pag.: 4
Ed. 00-05
Doc. Nr.:
2-04 009
R12
R14 /^
'^^
/iramI
\^
/^
/iram
j-m-,U]
^
\
RI 1
R13
KU
R14
R12 / ^
"^
/ j ( n o 1 N^
R15
-{D
4
/ ^
/|ramI
R13
/Iram
Hl
MDy
R15
/^
f\rmuiI
\
23 4
HIJLBI
r-%"'
pJzL.
j
'fp pi
B2
P3P: P:
Me],
41]
_,
^J^
/|nan
5ll 2 3 4
B4 p J t i
1t1
=3 P'
^B,y|
=3p
B2
pa
/|ramI
Melj
H 1 JL. PI ^ i
^_F
5ll 2 3 4
B3 r_L_i_ _i
Pi PI p;
B4
*_F
B5 p >. . " ,
B5
pj p'
Pi
ii|j
440V- 3 50/60H2
14.25KW 21A
LII.2L3
"
EQUI POTENT I EL
POT. AUSGLEICH
LAMPADE 440V
PIASTRE 440V
440V~ 3 50/50HZ
14. 25KW 21A
BUB5
\\Z
POS. 5
P3 PI
B7
POS.
0
1
BB
1 2 3|4
C
A B
6 7 8 9
D E F G

^

^
0
5
5
4
3
2
1
3|4
P2
MA
MORSETTIERA ALIMENTAZI ONE

BORNE D'AL I MENTATION
MAIN TERMINAL BOARD

ANSCHLUSSKLEMMEN
B7
COMMUTATORE FORNO
SELECTEUR FOUR
COMMUTATORE
SELECTEUR
RES ISTENZE
RESIETANCES
LAMPADA SEGNALAZIONE
LAMPE TEMOIN
TERMOSTATO
THERMOSTAT
LIMITATORE DI TEMPERATURA
THERMOSTAT DE SECURITE
COMMUTATOR OVEN
WHLER BAKHOFEN
COMMUTATOR
WHLER
RESISTANCES
HE IZKORPER
PILOT LIGHT
SIGNALLAMPE
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
TEMPERATURE LIMITING THERMOSTAT
TEMPERATUR BEGRENZER
B1*B6
R1*R15
HUH2
Fl
F2
Mod.:ELECTRIC COOKER PR700
From s.n.
602847700
rrff
. .-!ga
o^
1-...
- T ^
.J^
Jk
= i
LOiPART
Coffee machines, manual/automatic
Model CQAIM
STAINLESS STEEL
EASYTOUSE
NOZZLE EASILY REMOVABLE FOR

CLEANING
DURABLE ENAMELLED HOT

PLATE WITH ROLLING RACK
Made ofhigh poUshed stainless steel plate.

Available in manual or in automatic version.
They are equipped with one respeaiveiy two
hotplates.
Brews according to the flow through principle guaranteeing fresh oxygen saturated water for each brew, which uses the coffee to its
maximum.
The machines are delivered with one or two
1.8 litre jugs and 25 pes offilter paper. A 1.5
meter longelectrical cord with plug is included.
For further specifications of the different
models and optional extras, please see overleaf
LOIPART AB
P.O. Box694
SE44118 Alingss, Sweden
Phone
+46322668360
Telefax
+46322637747
E-maii
ioipart@ioipart.se
Exclusive Sales of
Sd E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment
5-885
DOC.NO.
EDITION 16
5-885L
03.06
COFFEE MACHINES, MANUAL/AUTOMATIC

Scale 1:10
Dimensions mm
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Hot plate
Upper hot plate (models FS22MM and FS22AM only)
Water fdling with cover (manual models only)
Water conneaion, delivered with 1 meter rubber hose 1/2" (automatic models only)
Electrical connection, 1.5 meter cord with earthed plug type Schuko5
Rolling rack
Specifications
Model
CQFSllMM
No. of jugs
supplied
Water feeding
manual
CQFS22MM
CQAIM
CQFS22AM
Extra hot
Capacity
keeping plate
cups/h
Max amps
in phase
230V
U5V
Weight kgs
net
gross
7.3
2.4
230 1 -50/60
or 115 1-60
150
10
20
2.3
2.4
Optional extras
Model
CQSHP2M
CQSHPIM
FILTERHOLD
Description
Hot keeping plate 0.19 kW for 2 jugs

(dimensions 360x190x60 mm)
Hot keeping plate 0.095 kW for 1 jug
(dimensions 185x190x60 mm)
Extra filter holder
CQACOl
Glass jug 1.8 Itrs
CQAC02
Set of 1000 filter papers
5-885
Subject to changes without notice.
Shipping
volume m^
2.3
automatic
Loading kW
Voltage
Voltage V
230 1-50/60
or 115 1-60
230 1-50/60
or 115 1-60
Weight kgs
net
gross
1.5
Model CQSHP2M
0.130
A TASTE OF THE FUTURE

Manual
c o FFE E
QUEEN;
COFFEE QUEEN
M-1, M-2, DM-2, DM-4
OFFICE TERMOS
SE
Svenska
GB
English
Energisnl kaffebryggare.
Kapacitet 1,8 liter eller 2 x 1,8 liter.
Ltt att installera och anvnda
Power saving coffee machines.

Capacity 1,8 litres or 2 x 1,8 litres.
Simple installation and easy to use.
Din aterfrsljare / Your retail dealer
Rev. 060404
Innehll / Table of contents
1. Installation och igangsttning / Installation and start

2. Bryggning av kaffe / Brewing of coffee
3. Skotselrd / Maintenance
4. Viktigt
4. Important
5. Kontroil/tgrd
5. Possible solution
6. Sprngskiss - Exploded view
7. Reservdelsfrteckning
7. Sparepartlist
3-5
6-7
8-9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
8. Elschema / Electrical diagram

17
18
19
20
21
Garanti och Service
Office
Ml
M2
DM2
DM4

Placera maskinen./ Placing machine.
1 .Placera maskinen p ett plant vattenttt underlag. SE
'-'^-^C:^j
Locate the machine on a flat level and waterproof surface. GB
Elektrisk koppling / Electrical coupling

2.
OBS!
SE
Detta galler endast M-1, M-2 och Office. Anslut stickproppen till ett separat jordat vgguttag.
230 V, 10 ampere.
OBS!
Detta galler endast DM maskiner. Anslut kaffebryggaren till ett 3-fas uttag
Maskinen skall installeras av en behrig elektriker!
Bryggaren r ej omkopplingsbar och fr endast installeras till eintet med den spanning
som r markerad p bryggaren och skall utfras av behrig elektriker. Fast installation.
En huvudbrytare skall monteras fore maskinen, med mer an 3 mm kontaktgap.
CAUTION!
GB
This applies to M-1 ,M-2 and Office machines only. Connect the plug to a separate wall socket.
240 V, 13 amp. (230 V, 10 amp).
CAUTION!
This applies to DM machines only. Connect coffee brewer to a 3-phase socket
All maintenance and installations must be done of an authorized personel.
The brewer is not reconnectable and may only be installed to the electric supply network with a
voltage that is stated on the brewer and shall be carried out by an Authorized Electrician.
A main switch should be assembled before the machine, with a minimum contact gap of 3mm.

Kontrollera vrmeplattor/ Hotplate function
II = ovre vrmeplatta
II = upper hotplate
I = nedre vrmeplatta
I = lower hotplate
S.Koppia p manverbrytare; I for nedre vrmeplattor och II for ovre vrmeplattor.

Kontrollera att lampoma i l<napparna tnds och
att plattorna blir varma. Koppla sedan ifrnmanverbrytama I och II.
SE
Tum on control switches placed on the machines

left and the right side. (I and II).
Ensure that the lamps tum on and that the hot
plates get warm.
Tum off control switches I and II.
GB
Bryggning med endast vatten/ Brewing with water only.
Grfrsta bryggningarna med endast vatten.

(For att rensa och tylla upp vattensystemet).
1. Sattfilterhllaren p plats utan filter och kaffe.
Lyft upp locket och fyll p frskt kranvatten.SE
Do the first brewings with water only.
(To clean and filling up water system).
1. Place filter holder without filter and coffee.
2. Lift up the cover and fill the machine with
fresh tap water. GB
Bryggning med endast vatten/ Brewing with water only.

Stall kannan p plattan under filterhllaren. SE
Vnta i 2 minuter s att systemet avluftas.
I = nedre vrmeplatta
for bryggning
Koppia p manverbrytare I for bryggning.

Bryggindikatorlampan skall nu tndas och vattnet
skall brja rinna ner i kannan.
Bryggningen tar cirka 6 minuter
f fV'fl il!in!!!!!llliiir^!1lilirrrP;Ti|pii
'*'-*'^" A"
Place the pot on the hot plate under the filter holder. GB
Wait two minutes so that the system is aired-out.
Turn on control switch I for brewing.
The control lamp which indicates that brewing is in
progress shall now be lit and the water shall start pouring
through the filter holder into the pot.
Brewing will take about 6 minutes.
I=
lower hotplate
for brewing
2. Bryggning av l<affe / Brewing of coffee.

2.1.
Placera ett 90mm filter i filterhllaren. SE
Place a 90mm filter in the filter holder. GB
2.2.
Hall i en portion kaffe -100/125 gram
s.k.restaurangmalning (malning mellan kokoch
brygg).
Bred ut kaffet jmnt i filtret. SE
Add coffee, restaurant / catering grounded coffee).

Make sure that the coffee is evenly spread. GB
2.3.
Sattfilterhllaren p plats. SE
Place the filter holder. GB
2.4.
Lyft p locket och hall i en kanna (1,8L) frskt
kranvatten. SE
Lift up the lid and pour in a pot of fresh tap water

(1,8L).GB
2. Bryggning av kaffe/ Brewing of coffee.
2.6.
Om Ni vill varmhlla en kanna och samtidigt
brygga en ny:
Placera kannan som skall varmhllas p den
ovre varmhllningsplattan. Koppla p
manverbrytare II. SE
2.5.
Stall kannan under fiiterhllaren och satt p
locket. SE
Place the pot under the

filter holder and close the
cover. GB
II = upper hotplate
OBS! Detta galler endast modellerna M-2,

DM-4
Koppla p manverbrytare I for bryggning.
SE
I = for bryggning
I = for brewing
Turn on control switch I for brewing. GB

-
- ,
If a second brewing is necessary, keep the

first pot at the required temperature by
placing on the upper hot plate.
Turn on control switch II. GB
Under bryggningen (6 min)

lyser kontrollampan.
II = upper hotplate
During the brewing.(about 6 minutes) GB

the controll lamp is lit.
Please Note! This applies only to models

M-2,DM-4,A-2andDA-4.
J V.
3. Skotselrd Maintenance
/y^\
Fore varje bryggning. SE

Sklj kannan.
Before each brewing. GB

Rinse the decanter.
y
OBS! SE
Maskinen fr ej verspolas
eller nedsnkas i vatten.
CAUTION! GB
The machine should not be
Submerged in water orWashed in a
dishwasher
(^
Varje dag. SE
Diska kannan och filterhllaren med
rengringsmedel for kaffemaskiner.
Torka rent spridarmunstycket och omrdet runt
detsamma.samtvrmehllen.
Anvnd endast en mjuk trasa och flytande
rengringsmedel som inte repar.
Each day. GB
Wash the pot and the filterholder with liquid solution for coffee machines. Clean the spray
nozzle and the sun-ounding area.
Clean the hot plate.
Use a soft rag and liquid solution that does
not scratch.
3. Skotselrd /Maintenance.
Varje vecka. SE
Each week. GB
Rengring
Hall 50 ml rengringsmedel / avkalkningsmedel for
kaffemaskiner i en kanna och fyll den med kallt vatten.
Hall sedan blandningen av vatten och
rengringsmedel i maskinen och genomfor en
bryggning utan pappersfilter och kaffe i filterhllaren.
Efter detta maste minst 3 bryggningar ske med enbart
rent vatten for att sklja bort alia rester av
rengringsmedlet.
Regelbunden anvndning av rengringsmedelfr
kaffebryggare reducerar uppbyggnaden av kalk dar
detta rett problem.
Kontrollera att halen i spridarmunstycket ej r
blockerade av kalk.
Skruva bort spridarmunstycket och rengr halen vid
behov.
Vid anslutning till vatten med hg kalkhalt
rekommenderas att ett kalkfilter monteras fore
maskinen.
Vid utvndig rengring anvnd mjuk trasa och
flytande rengringsmedel som inte repar.
Descaling and cleaning.

Pour 50 ml descaling / cleaning solution in a pot
and fill it up with cold water.
Pour the mixture in the machine and proceed with
a brewing without a filterpaper or coffee.
Rinse by brewing at least 3 times with clean water
so that the particles from descaling solution
disappear.
Regular descaling/cleaning will ensure optimum
brewing performance and a longer life of the
machine.
Check that the spray nozzle is unblocked.
Dismount and clean if necesserily.
In areas with high level lime problem, a
descaling filter should be mounted.
Surface cleaning. Use a soft rag and liquid
solution that does not scratch.
;i\
Om du ska diska glaskannan i en diskmaskin. SE

Tag av locket och placera glaskannan upp och ned i
diskmaskinen.
When dishing the glasspot in a dishwasher. GB

Dismantle lid and place glasspot up
and down in dishwasher.
4. Viktigt.
Viktigt
Gr inte ingrepp i bryggaren. Felaktiga tgarder kan leda til! personskador och funktionsfel.
Bryggaren bor st p ett plant underlag for att den skall arbeta tillfredsstllande.
Bryggaren skall placeras p ett vattenttt underlag s att eventuellt utickande vatten blir synligt.
Se til! att det inte bildas veck p anslutningsslangen nr bryggaren skjuts p plats.
Bryggarens tillopps och WS-anslutning skall kontrolleras regelbundet. Kontrollera att inte ngon
lcka haruppsttt i samband med installationen.
Vattenanslutningenkanalltidinnebravissriskfrlckageoavsettskerhetsutrustning.
Lmna inte bryggaren helt utan tillsyn nr den r igng. Stang vattenkranen d maskinen inte
anvnds.
Vid alia ingrepp I bryggaren maste denna gras spnningsls t. ex. genom att stickproppen tas ur
vgguttaget, detta galler M-1, M-2, Office termos. Vid arbete med DM-2, DM-4, maste
arbetsbrytaren sls av och lsas.
Allt installationsarbete maste utfras av behrig personal.
VARNING
For att undvika skada p glaskannan eller
att den p annat olmpligt satt grs obrukbar!
Tvtta noggrant fre anvndning.
Vrm inte upp rengringsmedel i kannan
Rengr inte med material som kan orsaka repor
eller sprickor i glaskannan.
Varmhll aldrig glaskannan p spis, vrmehll eller liknande.
Undvik att stta i kannan mot hart material.
Kassera kannor som har en spricka, r repad
eller uppvrmd tom.
Servera inte kaffe i riktning mot en levande.
Br aldrig tv glaskannor i en och samma hand.
10.
4. Important.
Important.
Do not make any alterations to the machine. Such measures may cause personal injury and the
machine to fail.
The machine should stand on a flat surface so that it will function properly.
The machine should be placed on a water-proof surface so that any leakage is easily noticeable,
make sure there is no bendage on the connection tube when machine is pushed into its place.
The tube connections should be regularly checked. Make sure that no leakage has occurred in
connection with installation.
Do not leave the machine unattended while using. Close water connection when not using
machine.
The machine must be disconnected from electrical supply before any maintenance.
This applies to single-phase current machines. Before any maintenance disconnect the plug from
the wall socket.
Before any maintenance with double-machines: Tum off the headswitch andlock it.
All maintenance and Installations must be done of an authorized personel.
WARNING
TO AVOID BREAKAGE
AND INJURY
DO NOT BOIL LIQUIDS IN POT
DO NOT CLEAN WITH MATERIALS THAT SCRATCH.
DO NOT USE ON RANGE TOP OF ANY KIND.
DO NOT BUMP
DISCARD IF CRACKED, SCHRATCHED, OR HEATED EMPTY.
DO NOT POUR TOWARDS PEOPLE.
DO NOT CARRY TWO DECANTERS IN ONE HAND.
WASH BEFORE USING.
11.
5. Kontroll/Atgrd.
Symptom
Kontroll/Atgrd.
(Siffror i parantes hnvisartill detaljnunnmer 1 sprngskissen.)
A. Brytaren () tnds inte.
1. Kontrollera anslutningen tili vgguttaget/arbetsbrytaren.

2. Kontrollera skringen tili vggutaget/arbetsbrytaren
(10 amp).
3. Kontrollera om vrmeplattan biir varm, om s r fallet
byt brytare
4. Kontrollera anslutningen till brytare
B. Vrmeplattan blir ej varm

fastn brytaren tnds.
1. Kontrollera anslutningen tili elementet

2. Trasigt element, om s r fallet byt ut det.
C. Bryggaren ngar kraftigt.
1. Maskinen kan vara i behov av avkalkning.

2. Spridarmunstycket kan vara igensatt.
3. Veck p slangen ?
4. Tilloppet till bryggelementet kan vara igensatt.
D. Byggindikatorlampan
tnds inte, bryggaren brjar
ej att brygga.
1. verhettningsskyddet har lst ut. Aterstlles

med knappen p densamma. Orsak se punkt C.
2. Kontrollera mikrobrytaren.
3. Kontrollera fiottren .
E. Bryggindikatorlampan tnds,
men bryggaren brjar ej att brygga.
1. Kontrollera anslutningen till bryggelementet

2. Bryggelementet kan vara trasigt.
12.
Li^
5. Possible solutions.
Fault
Possible Solution
(Number in brackets refer to the exploded view)
A. Switch does not light.
1. Check plug connection to wall socket.

2. Check fuse in plug.
3. Check if hot plate becomes warm, if so
replace switch.
B. Hot plate does not become

warm although switch is lit.
1. Check connection to element.

2. If element defective, replace.
C. Brewer omits excess steam.
1. Machine may require descaling.

2. Spray nozzel may need unblocking.
3. Hose, may be bent?
4. Inlet to boiler may be blocked. Descale.
machine - if boiler still defective - replace.
D. Brewing lamp does not

light, machine will not brew.
1. Trip-switch has activated - reset with button.

For possible fault / solution see C.
2. Check microswicth.
3. Check float.
E. Brewing lamp is lit but

machine will not brew.
1. Check connection to boiler.

2. Boiler unit may need replacing.
13.
6. Sprngskiss/ Exploded View
M1, M2, DM2, DM4, Office termos
Filterhllare for kaffefilter 90mm

14.
7. Reservdelsfrteckning.
Benmning
Bestaun, nr.
Detalj.nr.
IVI1
M2
DIVI2
DM4
Office
termos
(an al de laljer)
Vrmehllstallrik
Vrmehliselement
Termos vac 1,9 liter
Lock med sil
Strmstllare enkel
Strmstllare dubbel
Brygg indikator
Plasttank
Spridarmunstycke
Bryggelementkpl.
Backventil
verhettnlngsskydd
Kallvattenslang
Hetvattenslang
Brytpinne
Flottr
Mikrobrytare
Fot
Ntsladd inkl. plint
Ntsladd
Serveringskanna
Lock, serverkanna
Filterhllare/rostfri
120811
160101
1103256 Office
1204041
160801-04
160802-04
160804-03
120400
120427
120501
120612
160212-03
150502
150504
180170
120402
160821
1203202
160522
160523
110303
110402
1102016
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
20
20
21
22
23
2
2
1
0
0
2
2
2
2
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
0
1
2
2
2
4
4
2
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
0
1
2
2
2
Funktlonsbeskrivning
Kaffebryggare fr manuell vattenpfyllning.
I tanken finns en flottr som aktiverar en mikrobrytare nr vatten fylls p.
Mikrobrytaren aktiverar i sin tur bryggelementet och bryggningen startar.
Under bryggningen lyser brygglampan p maskinens hgra sida.
D vattnet rslut i tanken s bryts strmmen tili bryggelementet och brygglampan slacks.
Den nedre vrmeplattan r alltid pkopplad d bryggaren r pslagen.
Den ovre vrmeplattan aktiveras med en separat strmbrytare.
Maskinen rfrsedd med verhettnlngsskydd som aterstlles manuellt efter det att
strmmen har brutits
15.
.
-
7. Spare parts list.
Description
Art. no.
Detail no.
IVI1
IVI2
DM2
DIVI4
Office
termos
( a m ount ler uni' )
Hot plate
Hot plate heater
Thermos vac 1,9 litr.
Cover and strainer
Main switch single
Main switch double
Brewing lamp
Plastic tank
Spray nozzle
Boiler compl.
Non return valve
Trip switch
Cold water hose
Hot water hose
Pin
Float
Micro switch
Feet
Connection lead
Connection lead
Glass decanter
Lid, glass decanter
Filter holder/stainless
120811
160101
1103256
office
1204041
160801-04
160802-04
160804-03
120400
120427
120501
120612
160212-03
150502
150504
180170
120402
160821
1203202
160522
160523
110303
110402
1102016
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
20
20
21
22
23
2
2
1
0
0
2
2
2
2
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
0
1
2
2
2
4
4
2
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
0
1
2
2
2
.
-
Instructions
Coffee machine for manual water filling.
In the tank there is a float which activates a microswitch when water is filled.
Microswitch activates element unit and brewing starts.
Duhng brewing the brewlamp is lit.
When the tank is empty the current to the boiler is cut and the brewlamp is switched off.
The bottom hot plate is always heated when the machine is switched on.
The upper hot plate is turned on with a separate switch.
The machine is equipped with an overheating protection which is manually restored when the
current has been cut.
16.
8. Elschema/ Electrical diagram
230 V-v-
OFFICE
B1 Huvudbrytare/brytare for element E1
B2 Mikrobrytare for element E2
B3 Aut. verhettningsskydd for element
E2
84 Man. verhettningsskydd for element E2
51 Signallampa for brytare B2
52 Signallampa for element E2
E1 Underhllsvarmeelement (Ej termos)
E2 Bryggelement
B1 Main switch/switch for element E1

B2 Microswitch for element E2
B3Aut. High limit for element E2
B4 Man. High limit for element E2
51 Lamp for switch B1
52 Lamp for element E2
E1 Hot plate element (Exclude termos machine)
E2 Brewing element
17.
8. Elschema/ Electrical d i a g r a m
SI
Q
B?
(b
B3
S2(X)E2'
El
230 V^-
O-
B4
rr
77
M-1
M-1

B3 Aut. verhettningsskydd for element E2
B4 Man. verhettningsskydd for element E2
E1 Underhallsvrmeelement
E2 Bryggelement
B1 Main switch/switch for element

E1
B3 Aut. High limit for element E2
E1 Hot plate element
E2 Brewing element
18.
SI
o
&
&
B3
0-
B4
S2
S3(X)E3i
I El PE2
230 Vô-
0ef
BS
rTtn
M-2
M-2

82 Brytare for element E2
B4 Aut. verhettningsskydd for element E3
E1 Nedre underhllsvarmeelement
E2 Ovre underhllsvarmeelement
E3 Bryggelement

B2 Switch for element E2
B4Aut. High limit for element E3
E1 Bottom hot plate element
E2 Upper hot plate element
E3 Brewing element
19.
rn'O
-<g)
SI
Bl
B2
B3
El
S2 (X)B2
<^
B4
// // /
s 8-
SI
Bl
B2
B3
S2 (X) Eac
Bl
<5
B4
// //"/
DM-2
DM-2
B1 Huvudbrytare/brytare for element E1-E2

B3 Aut. Overhettningsskydd for element E2
B4 Man. Overhettningsskydd for element E2
Bl Main switch/switch for element E1

E2
El Hot plate element
E2 Brewing element

E1 Underhllsvanneelement
E2 Bryggelement
20.
SI
Bl
B4
B3
B2
S2
S3 (X) E3t
l E l PE2
c
*m
1|
BS
fTTTI
n^
R 8-
SI
Bl
S eN o-
O-
l~J^9
B3
B2
34
S2
S3 CO ES'
iBl EE2
%3
om
i|
B5
^rrn
DM-4
DM-4

82 Brytare for element E2
B4Aut. verhettningsskydd for element E3
E1 Nedre underhllsvarmeelement
E2 Ovre underhllsvarmeelement
E3 Bryggelement

B2 Switch for element E2
E1 Bottom hot plate element
E2 Upper hot plate element
E3 Brewing element
21.
COFFEE QUEEN
M-l, M-2, DM-2, DM-4
OFFICE
Galler endast Sverige / Sweden only
Garantibestmmelser
2 rs garanti p delar.
Gllerfrbristflligheter i konstruktion, material eller tillverkning.
For att garantin skall galla frutsttes att sktselinstruktionerna har fljts, att sklig
aktsamhet har lakttagits och att felanmlan har gjorts utan drjsmal, samt att berrd
utrustning inte anvnts i awaktan p service om risk finns att skadan eller bristen
skulle frvrras.
Garantin omfattar inte frbrukningsartiklar som glas, normalt underhall som
rensning av silar och filter, fel p grund av froreningar, kalk eller fel spanning,
tryck eller justering av vattenmngd.
Garantin omfattar ej heller fljdskador som orsakats avfel p eller felaktig hantering
av apparaten.
Garantin upphr att galla efter reparation eller liknande ingrepp av foretag annat an
av oss rekommenderat.
Office Queen Termos
2 rs garanti lmnas p felaktiga delar insnda till Coffee Queen AB.
COFFEE
FOR SERVICE
QUEEN
OF
SWEDEN
Vniigen kontakta din aterfrsljare
FOR SERVICE
Please contact your retail dealer
Din aterfrsljare / Your retail dealer
COFFEE QUEEN AB, Box 960,671 29 ARVIKA, besksadress; Korpralsv 1B,

Tel vxl; +46 (0)570-47700, service +46 (0)570-47730, lager +46 (0)570-47720, Fax; +46 (0)570-47719
E-mail: info@coffeequeen.se www.coffeequeen.se
Art. nr/Art.no.1704031
=!L
cn
.^
I
^
n=[k
o = ^
mms^^j?^(;^îj^,^^..
c=J.
Driving ynitsi
stationary liigh-base casing

continuous electronic
speed control
automatic off-switch according
to DIN ES regulations
driving device for
attachments in front
performance: 800 W a t t
stationary casing
2 working speeds
pulse
two driving devices for
attachments in front and on top
performance; 600 W a t t
llL '
.1
J. ^
RWTiiV
A 2-2
Icy 2-4 E
lêchhicaldata:'p:ge-20'bnWrds
Krefft Grokchentechnik GmbH

Ersatzteilliste Kernstck KU 2-4 E
Spare Part List Motor Unit KU 2-4 E
Liste de Pieces Dtaches Noyau de Base KU 2-4 E
230 V, Art.Nr. 541103, 1/N/PE 50 Hz
Pos. Art. Nr.
Item Art. No.
Pos. No.d'
article
840082
1
840294
2
3
840103
840094
4
5
840099
840100
6
7
840098
8
840085
9
840101
840090
10
11
840091
12
840298
840096
13
14
840083
840299
15
840088
16
840092
17
840295
18
19
O.Abb.
20
840313
21
840143
102162
22
840977
23
Benennung
Denomination
Denomination
Preisgruppe
Price Group
Cl des prIx
Sechskantwelle / Hexagon shaft / Arbre hexagonal

Getriebedeckel oben / Gear cover / Couvre - engrenage
Dichtung fr Getriebedeckel / Gasket for gear cover / Joint p. couvre - engrenage
Radialdichtring / Radial gasket / Bague d' tanchit radiale
Sicherungsring / Safety ring / Circlip extrieur
Nilosring / Nilosring / Bague
Kugellager/ Ball bearing / Roulement billes
Stirnrad / Cylinder gear / Roue dente
Pafeder / Feather key / Clavette parallele
Distanzbuchse / Distance shell / Douille d'cartement
Zweilochmutter / Round nut with holes / Ecrou deux trous
Ritzel komplett / Pinion shaft assembly / Pignon compl.
Kugellager/ Ball bearing / Roulement billes
Ritzelwelle / Pinion shaft / Arbre de pignon
Resitex - Zahnrad / Fibre gear/ Roue dente compl.
Scheibe / Disc / Disque
Sechskantmutter / Hexagon nut / Ecrou hexagonal
Getriebegehuse / Gear housing / BoTte vitesse
Getriebe komplett / Gear compl. / Couvre compl.
Bimetall - Temperaturschalter
Sechskantschraube / Hexagon screw / Vis hexagonale # M 5 x 18 DIN 933
Fcherscheibe / Toothed Washer / Rondelle # A 5,3 DIN 6798
Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrique #
M 5 x 1 2 DIN 84 A2
Bundbuchse / Liner / Douille
Scheibe / Flat Washer / Disque
Filzstck / Felt piece / Piece de feutre
Dichtung fr Getriebedeckel oben / Gasket for gear cover, upper /
Joint p. couvre - engrenage, dessus
Getriebedeckel oben / Gear cover, upper / Couvre-engrenage, dessus
Motor kpl. / Motor compl. / Moteur compl., 230 V, 0,8 kW
Unterlegscheibe / Disc / Disque / A 5,3 x 14 A2
Zylinderschraube mit Innensechskant / Cylinder socket head cap screw / Vis tete
cylindrique six pans creux# M 5 x 25 DIN 912
Befestigungsleiste / Fastening element / Element de fixation
Drehzahlgeber / Impulse transmitter / Tt transmetteur de vitesse
Federring / Spring Washer # B 3 DIN 127
Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrique #
M 3 x 8 DIN 84
Kohlebrste mit Feder / Carbon brush with spring /
Balai de charbon avec ressort
Rotor kpl. mit Entstrplatine (Pos. 38) / Armature compl. with screening unit / Indult
compl. / 230 V
Entstrplatine fr Motor / Screening unit / 230V
15
12
01
11
01
01
08
16
00
02
02
21
08
13
13
00
00
21
auf Anfrage
08
00
00
00
24
25
26
27
840114
840093
840105
840104
28
29
30
31
840081
840327
840034
840617
32
33
34
35
840150
840128
840140
840152
36
840145
37
840328
38
840329
39
40
840118 0-Ring fr Motorabdichtung / Sealingring /

840106 Getriebefliefett (500g - Tube) / Gear grease, 500 g tube /
Graisse engrenages, tube de 500 g
840331 Feinsicherung fr Steuerplatine MS-1 (Pos 67) / Fine-wire fuse /
840330 Feinsicherung fr Elektronikplatine ROS 55 (Pos 88) / Fine-wire fuse /
841455 Sicherheitsschalter in Aufstecknabe / Savety-switch /
41
42
43
stand Nov. 2002
nderungen vorbehalten.
00
00
03
01
13
36
00
01
01
06
00
00
03
auf Anfrage
by question
auf Anfrage
by question
00
10
00
00
17
Seite 1 von 5

230 V, Art.Nr. 541103, 1/N/PE 50 Hz
Pos. Art. Nr.
Benennung
Denomination
Item Art. No.
Denomination
Pos. No.d'
article
44
840991 Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrique #
M 5 x 2 0 DIN 84
45
M 5 x 1 2 DIN 84 A2
46
840316 Schutzkappe fr -Schalter (Pos 109) / Protecting cap / # (ab Jan. 2002)
47
840161 Potiachse (Einzelteil aus Pos 88) /
Pot wheel shaft / Arbre de la potentiometre
48
840315 berstromschutzschalter 4 A, 230 V / Overload breaker 4 A 230 V /
Interrupteur maximum 4 A 230 V / (ab Jan. 2003)
840141 Isolierung / Insulating material / Isolement phonique
49
50
840140 Unterlegscheibe / Disc / Disque # A 3,2 DIN 125
51
840783 Zylinder - Blechschraube / # 2,9 x 9,5 DIN 7971
52
840034 Unterlegscheibe / Pot wheel shaft / Arbre de la potentiometre /#
A 5,3x14 A2
840037 Gummifu / Rubber cushion / Amortisseur caoutchouc
53
840011 Bodenplatte / Base plate / Plaque de base
54
55
840320 Netzanschluleitung (3 x 0,75mm') / Connecting cable /
Cable d' alimentation
56
840053 Knickschutztlle / Cable guard / Tuyau de protection p. cables
57
840051 Zugentlastunsschelle / Clip / Collier p. cables
58
840177 Haltemutter / Nut / Ecrou de fixation
840321 Kernstckgehuse / Housing / Carter
59
60
840016 Traggriff / Handle / Poigne
61
840986 Linsen-Blechschraube/Parker screw/Ecrou # B 4,2x16 DIN 7981 A2
62
840323 Dichtung fr Motorentlftung / Gasket / Joint
63
840322 Motorentlftung / Venting for motor /
64
840324 Trgerwinkel fr Steuerplatine / Holding device for control system /
65
M 4 x 25 DIN 84 A2
66
102151 Fcherscheibe/Toothed Washer/Rondelle # A4,3 DIN 6798 A2
67
840319 Steuerplatine MS-1 / Control system /
840317 Strmelder "bertemperatur" / Operational monitoring system for motor /
68
69
840031 Zylinderstift mit Kreuzschlitz / Toothed Washer / Rondelle
70
840029 Linsensenkschraube / Oval countersunk screw / Vis tete fraise bombe
71
840125 Zylinderschraube mit Innensechskant / Cylinder socket head cap screw /
Vis tete cylindrique six pans creux # M 5 x 14 DIN 912 A2
72
840326 Aufstecknabe kpl. vormontiert (ohne Sicherheitsschalter Pos. 43) /
Mounting hub compl. pre-assembled (without pos. 43) /
Moyeu fixer, montage prliminaire complet
73
840296 Dichtung (schwarz) / Gasket (black) / Joint
74
840325 Aufstecknabe (Einzelteil) / Mounting hub (component part) /
Moyeu fixer (element)
75
840013 Klemmhebel / Clamping lever / Levier de blocage
840042 Tellerfeder / Disc spring / Ressort disques
76
77
840012 Lagerzapfen / Trunnion / Tourilion
78
840041 Dichtungsring / Gasket / Bague d' etanchit
79
840030 Anschlagschraube / Stop screw / Vis d' arret
80
840124 Pahlse / Cylindrical tube / Tube cylindrique
81
M 5 x 1 6 DIN 84 A2
82
M 3 x 1 2 DIN 84
stand Nov. 2002
Preisgruppe
Price Group
Cl des prix
00
00
02
02
13
05
00
00
00
01
08
09
02
05
04
22
18
01
02
17
01
00
00
25
18
08
01
01
31
02
26
13
00
08
01
01
01
00
00
Seite 2 von 5

230 V, Art.Nr. 541103, 1/N/PE 50 Hz
Pos. Art. Nr.
Item Art. No.
Pos. No.d'
article
83
840134
84
150167
85
840040
86
840135
87
840136
88
cAbb
840318
840332
89
840137
90
91
840300
840109
92
840046
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
840139
840286
840035
840043
840034
840027
840973
840978
Stand Nov. 2002
Benennung
Denomination
Denomination
Zentriemng fr Potiachse / Centering / Bague de centrage
Knebel / Knob / Manette
Sttzfu / Supporting foot / Pied de support
Unterlegscheibe / Disc / Disque # A 5,3 DIN 125
Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrlque #
M 5 x 1 4 DIN 84
Elektronikplatine ROS 55 / Electronic control / Regulation lectronique
Isolierplatte zwischen Platine und Motor / Isulation between electronik control
and motor/ Isolement p. Regulation lectronique
Steckerleiste / Female multipoint connector /
Douille connecteur multibroche
Kernstckunterteil mit Gewicht / Sode with weight / Socle avec poids
Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrlque #
M 3 x 1 8 DIN 84 A2
berstromschutzschalter 4 A, 230 V / Overload breaker 4 A 230 V #
Interrupteur maximum 4 A 230 V (bis Jan. 2003)
Platinensttze / Standard / Bras - trteau
Zwischenplatte / Plate / Plaque intermdiaire
Scheibe / Disc / Disque /
Bundbuchse / Liner / Douille
Unterlegscheibe / Disc / Disque # A 5,3 x 14 A2
Gewindebolzen / Threaded bolt / Boulon filet
Sechskantmutter / Hexagon nut / Ecrou hexagonal # M 3 DIN 934 A2
Fcherscheibe / Disc / Disque # A 3,2 DIN 6798 A2
Preisgruppe
Price Group
Cl des prix
02
02
04
00
00
28
02
12
42
00
13
02
05
00
00
00
00
00
00
Seite 3 von 5
Ersatzteilliste KU 2-4 E, 230 V, AN 540103
stand Nov. 2002
Stand Nov. 2002
Seite 4 von 5
Ersatzteilliste KU 2-4 E, 230 V, AN 540103
stand Nov. 2002
Stand Nov. 2002
Seite 5 von 5
.=!k
C=A
om
rr-' i'ijiVS
f r::f .f>>
c .. i-?>i
p-..L,,?\.
gLOiPAMT
Exclusive Sales of
H E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment
Refrigerators & Freezers, MR/MF
Model MR-400
LOIPRT AB
P.O. Box 694
SE 441 18 Aiingss, Sweden
Phone
+46 322 66 83 60
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-maJI
!oipart@loipatlse
This range of refrigerators and freezers intended for storage of refrigerated and frozen
food is specially developed for marine use.
DESIGN
Reliable, easy to clean and durable construction.
Exterior and interior are made of stainless
steel quality AISI 304.
Hygienic top cover is standard (not models MR/MF 120).
Fitted with fan forced air circulation.
CFC and HCFC free R404a refrigerant
and 60 mm thick polyurethane insulation.
EASY TO INSTALL
Removable refrigeration unit evaporator,
condenser, compressor) located on the top of
the cabinet (models 300,400, and 550 only).
Reversible door equipped with lockable
handle and easy removable magnetic door
gasket.
EASY TO USE
GN adapted.
9 Clean cooler air conducted through an
special cold air filter built in to the base of the
cabinet is reducing the compressor running
time and saving power.
Refrigerators fitted with an automatic
defrost and automatic melt water evaporation.
Freezers fitted with a fast and efficient automatic hot gas defrost and frame heater.
9 Thermostatically controlled temperature,
micro processed digital thermostat-thermometer combination.
EASY TO MAINTAIN
Delivered with 2 m cord and plug.
150 respective ly 140 mm high adjustable
marine feet.
Easy removable shelf holders.
Delivered with chromium plated wire
shelves.
Warning alarm for dirty condenser fJter.
models, please see overleaf.
11-860
DOC. NO.
EDITION 3
11-860L
08.04
REFRIGERATORS & FREEZERS MR/MF 120, 300, 400, 550

Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm
MODELS MR/MF 300,400 AND 550:
750 -560-
Detail of marine foot
wy/////////2
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
100 mm free space necessary

for ventilation and service
1. Control panel
2. Electrical connection, 2 m cord with plug included
3. Adjustable marine feet (+50/-10)
The unit is to be levelled and bolted to deck.
Specifications - refrigerators (operating temperature: +2 to +8C)

Capacity
litres
Wire
shelves
incl.
MR-300
315
MR-400
404
MR-550
530
Model
Refrigerant
R404A
Voltage V*
Power
kW
0.4
230 1-50/60
Fuse, slow
A
10
Dimensions mm
Weight kgs
Shipping
volume m^
net
gross
1380
830
740
105
135
1.2
1590 1040
950
115
140
1.4
1900
1260
125
155
1.6
1350
' available in 115 1 "60, other voltages available on request

Specifications - freezers (operating temperature: -18 to-25C)
Capacity
litres
Wire
shelves
ind.
MF-300
315
MF-400
404
MF-550
530
Model
Refrigerant
R404A
Voltage V*
230 1-50/60
* available in 115 1-60, other voltages available on request
Power
kW
0.5
Fuse, slow
A
10
Dimensions mm
Weight kgs
Shipping
volutne m^
net
gross
1380
830
740
105
135
1.2
1590
1040
950
115
140
1.4
1900
1350
1260
125
155
1.6
MODELS MR/MF 120:

Detail of marine foot
760
1. Control panel
2. Electrical connection, 2 m cord with plug included
3. Adjustable marine feet (+60/-0)
The unit is to be levelled and bolted to deck.
Operating temperature:
refrigerators +2 to +8C
freezers -18 to-25C
Specifications
Model
Type of cabinet
MR-120
refrigerator
MF-120
freezer
Capacity
litres
Wire
shelves
incl.
Refrigerant
120
R404A
Voltage V*
Power
kW
Fuse, slow
A
Weight ^ s
net
gross
73
92
Shipping
volume m^
0.3
230 1-50/60
' available in 115 1 -60, other voltages available on request
10
0.4
0.710
11-860
REV 06/2003
SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860HOLLOLA
TEL +358 3 5520 600

FAX+358 3 5520 612
E-mail skycolcl@skycold.fi
REV 06/2003
lUMiiB
'NMBI J M B
' H I ^ Jjggf' fggg^jgg^
Before use and installation
Receiving the goods
Installation
Start-up
Use
Use SMD12 control unit
Malfunction codes
Cleaning by the user
Malfunction
Guarantee
PRODUCT INFORMATION - TUOTETIEDOT
Type of unit / Tyypi
Serial number / Valmistusnumero
Place and date of purchase / Ostopaikka ja -aika
SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860HOLLOLA
TEL +358 3 5520 600

FAX+358 3 5520 612
E-mail skycold@skycold.fi
REV 06/2003
I ^pf'
J^gjgj^j^^ ^ ^ ^ ^g"
PLEASE READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.

KEEP THESE INSTRUCTIONS FOR FURTHER USE AND OTHER USERS.
FOLLOWING THESE INSTRUCTIONS CONTRIBUTES PROPERAND LONGTERM
FUNCTION OF THE UNIT FOR MAXIMUM EFFICIENCY AND MINIMUM SERVICE
AND REPAIR COSTS.
FOR GUARANTEE, SEE PAGE 8.
THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO UNITS MR, MF AND MRF 2/2
Examine the unit before accepting the delivery.

In case of any damage, please note the waybill and report
to yourfonwarder and supplier immediately.
Guarantee does not cover damages due to transportation.
Unpack the unit at sight.

Remove the protection films on outer surfaces of the unit.
Cabinet shall be fixed to a deck through the three
09 mm bolting holes existing in the flange of each
adjustable stainless steel feet. If necessary feet can be
welded to a deck.
Feet can be adjusted after bolt-mounting.
Ensure the unit is level (use spirit level if needed).
This ensures doors and locks work properly.
Uneven installation may twist the chassis.
Make sure the area below the cabinet is clear to allow
free condenser air circulation.
100 mm free space above the cabinet is necessary for
ventilation and service.
SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860HOLLOLA
TEL +358 3 5520 600

FAX+358 3 5520 612
REV 06/2003
Should the unit still be cold when taken in, humidity will condensate
on its surface In wintertime. Do not plug on the unit until it has dried
and reached the room temperature.
Protect the cabinet from direct sunlight and other objects radiating heat,
such as owen, radiator etc.
The ambient temperature must not rise above +32C or fall below +5C.
Ensure the voltage and frequency band is fitted with the cabinet and
connect the unit to earthed socket protected with a 10 amp. fuse.
Let the cabinet stay on its final place for 2 hours before
starting-up. The time is needed for the machinery
lubrication oil to run into the oil compartment of
compressor.
Clean the unit thoroughly before start-up with mild
dish washing solution or other suitable detergent.
Do not use scouring powder.
Unpack the shelf package and set the shelves in place.
f
:, "
l-, \ \
î|'.- '
\.^.. j
\
\
'..' '
/
LI' 'p
Do not add any products until the unit has reached

the required operation temperature.
^'\~'
"1 i
Cold Line Marine cabinets are made for storage of chilled and frozen food.
Operating temperature for chiller is + 2C...+ 8C and for freezer - 18C...- 25C.
Food which contains vinegar, such as pickels, sallad dressing and
lingonberry jam, shall be stored in covered receptacles. Vinegar may
damage the evaporator.
Cabinet shall not be used outdoors or exposed to rain.
SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860 HOLLOLA
TEL +358 3 5520 600

FAX+358 3 5520 612
REV 06/2003
4
*
1 ^ * ,
SMD12
/ ; 7 \ ^1
,^1
t LJL
. *
SMD12
1^
-1*11
?S
JI
r^
A
0
1. Electronic thermostat and thermometer

with automatic functions preset at the
factory
2. Display
3. Info menu button and alarm reset button
4. Temperature set button
5. PLUS-button
6. Main switch and MINUS-button
START-UP AND STANDBY

Push the main button 6, and the display shows three parallel
dashes - - for 3 seconds.
1 ^
Pushing the button 6 will start up the unit or put it into standby.
Standby STATUS gives an OFF-indication on display.
To disconnect the unit unplug the cabinet.
TEMPERATURE ADJUSTIMENT
During normal operation, the display shows the inside
temperature of the counter.
Temperature adjustment range for chiller is + 2 C...+15 C
and for freezer - 25 C...+ 5 C.
Pushing the button 4 will indicate the temperature set value.
Should you want to increase the temperature, first push the
button 4 and immediately after that, simultaneously push
the button 5.
Should you want to decrease the temperature, first push the
button 4 and immediately after that, simultaneously push the
button 6.
The button 4 should be kept pushed during the whole operation.
DEFROSTING
The cabinet is provided with an automatic defrosting and melt
water evaporation system. The display will indicate defrosting
with a text dEF.
SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860 HOLLOLA
TEL +358 3 5520 600

FAX+358 3 5520 612
REV 06/2003
^ 8 ^ ^ ^ ^ ' ' jiii|l|ffl'*ffl JS^ SSB^ fSS3&
if the unit fails to work properly, there will be an audible alarm signal and
an alarm flashing on the display. Push button 3 to stop alarm signal.
If the display shows:
E1, there is fault in the temperature sensor. Call for service.
E2, there is a fault in the defrost sensor. The unit will work, but there is no
temperature reading displayed. Defrosting takes place as programmed.
Call for service.
E3, there is a fault in the condenser sensor. Call for service.
Hi, the inside temperature of the cabinet is too high.
LO, the inside temperature of the cabinet is too low.
CLN, it is time to clean the condenser filter. For cleaning instructions
see this page.
Turn the power OFF and unplug the unit from power.
Clean the cabinet with a moist cloth with detergent.
Never use running water to clean the cabinet.
Clean stainless steel surfaces with mild water
blended dishwashing solution or other suitable
detergent. Do not use scouring powder.
Clean the gasket with mild water blended dishwashing
solution or other suitable detergent. Do not use sharp
instruments or solvent of any kind.
After cleaning, spray or wipe the gasket with silicone to make it more pliable
and dirt resistant.
Clean the cooling unit condenser air filter regularly i.e. twice a month. Dusty filter
leads to decreased capasity, continious running of the compressor and the possible
damage of the cooling unit.
Remove the filter and rinse it with running water.
Shake off water and replace.
SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860HOLLOLA
TEL +358 3 5520 600

FAX+358 3 5520 612
,^
REV 06/2003
I ^^s ^ ^
^^^Bji^^y j^CT'*'^ ^^P^îk ^ ^ ^
^^3 ^^k
The unit does not start

Make sure the operation switch (page 5, button 6) is on.
Check the plug connection.
Check the fuse.
The unit does not reach the required temperature or does not chill at all
Make sure the operation swith (page 5, button 6) is on and the signal
lamp is illuminated.
Check the plug connection.
Check the fuse.
Check the thermostat settings (page 5)
Check the condenser filter (page 6)
Provide free air circulation under and above the cabinet.
For control unit malfunction codes, see page 6.
SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie17
FIN-15860 HOLLOLA
TEL +358 3 5520 600

FAX+358 3 5520 612
REV 06/2003
^îBniiik ^ r ^ ^ J i i B
II
This guarantee is valid for 12 months from the date of purchase and shall
apply to possible failures in materials or workmanship.
The quarantee is valid only when the unit is used solely for purposes,
stated in this manual.
The quarantee expires if the unit is being used against installation, use
and maintenance manual.
All units are supplied under our terms and conditions of sale, a copy of
which may be obtained upon request.
The quarantee does not apply to
defects caused by faulty installation
defects due to ignoring maintenance and cleaning by the user
defects caused by natural wear
defects caused by improper use of the unit
settings, repairs or spare parts due to negligence, non-attention
or not following these installation, use and maintenance
instructions
The manufacturer Skycold Oy or his selling agents is not at any time or any
circumtances liable for direct or indirect losses of resulting effects caused
by an unfit of badly mantained unit.
Skycold Oy reserves the right to make any changes or improvements
without prior notice.
When claiming for warranty, the serial number of your cabinet is needed.
For further information, please contact the manufacturer SKYCOLD OY.
SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860 HOLLOLA
TEL +358 3 5520 600

FAX +358 3 5520 612
E-mail skycold@skycold,fi
REV 06/2003
p w y ' ' l ^ B y IM88BM ^ ^ ^ M k
\t\
^^Siflfljl^W ^ i ^ g g p i i ' '
BHHBMjdmgB ^ ^ ^ [ lyBgi''
I
F_.-3^
SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860HOLLOLA
BBMBW
TEL +358 3 5520 600

FAX+358 3 5520 612
Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MR-300

Part.no
SP4000
Compressor
Kompressori
Condenser
Condenser fan
Lauhdutin
Lauhdutinpuhallin
Condenser, plastic fan shrouds

Condenser fan blade
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Lauhdutinpuhaltimen suojus
Lauhdutinpuhaltimen siipi
Hyrystin
Hyrystinpuhaiiin
Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Condensing temp, sensor
Accumulator
Filter drier
Service valve
Capillartube
St- ja ohjausyksikl^
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi
Sulatusanturi
Lauhtumisanturi
Pisaranerotin
Kuivain
Huoltoventtiili
Kapillaari
SP4170
SP4180
SP4190
Condensate tube
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp
Haihdutusputki
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja
MA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-3
MA1138
Grid shelf
Shelf bracl<et
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gaslcet
Condenser filter
Lankahylly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana
SP4010
SP4020
SP4030
SP4040
SP4050
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4120
SP4130
SP4140
SP4150
SP4160
Part.no
SP4200
Cooling unit MR, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1
Stjalka
Ovitiiviste
Lauhduttimen suodatin
Electrolux
LU-VE
ELCO
LU-VE
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Fermod
Fermod
Cooling unit MR, 115V 60 Hz ~1
ML60TG
SP4210
STVF100
VNP 10-20/563, 10/38W
CF21
0 200, sucking, angle 26
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
ST1K20C3
30x150,3/8"
30 g
1/4"
0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m
SP4220
SP4230
SP4040
SP4050
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4120
SP4130
SP4140
SP4150
SP4160
0 1/4"
3G1,5 3 m
KK-4
SP4170
SP4180
SP4190
Condensate tube
Mains cable clamp
MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-3
MA1138
Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket
Condenser filter
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
P1359, 775 x823 mm

10x246x470 mm
Compressor
Condenser
Condenser fan
Condenser fan blade
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Accumulator
Electrolux
LU-VE
ELCO
LU-VE
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Filter drier
Service valve
Capillartube
ML60TR
STVF 100 115V 082059103
VNP 10/38 W 115V
CF21
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
ST1K20C3
30x150,3/8"
30 g
1/4"
0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m
0 1/4"
3G1,5 3 m
KK-4
Fermod
Fermod
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
P1359, 775 x823 mm

10x246x470 mm
Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line IVIF-300

Part.no
Part.no
SP4300
Cooling unit IVIF, 230V 50/60 Hz -1
SP4400
Cooling unit MF, 115V 60 Hz - 1
SP4260
Compressor
Kompresse ri
Electrolux
SP4020
Condenser
Lauhdutin
LU-VE
MP12FG
SP4330
Compressor
Electrolux
STVF 100
SP4220
Condenser
LU-VE
SP4030
Condenser fan
Lauhdutinpuhallin
STVF 100
ELCO
VNP 10-20/563, 10/38 W
SP4230
Condenser fan
ELCO
VNP 10/38 W 115V
SP4040
SP4050
Condenser fan blade
LU-VE
CF21
SP4040
LU-VE
CF21
SP4050
Condenser fan blade
SP4060
Evaporator
Hyrystin
h=110,d=100, Lmax445
SP4060
Evaporator
SP4070
Evaporator fan
Hyrystinpuhallin
Centaur
CN52B3
SP4240
Evaporator fan
Centaur
CN2B2
SP4270
Control unit
SP4090
Display
St- ja ohjausyl<sikk
Lae
SSD90C65E-C
SP4540
Control unit
Lae
SSD90C65U-C115V
Nytt
Lae
SMD12RU
SP4090
Display
Lae
SP4100
SMD12RU
Lmptila-anturi
Lae
ST1K20C1
SP4100
Lae
ST1K20C1
SP4110
Sulatusanturi
Lae
ST1K20C2
SP4110
Lae
ST1K20C2
SP4120
Lauhtumisanturi
Lae
ST1K20C3
SP4120
Lae
ST1K20C3
SP4130
Accumulator
Pisaranerotin
30x150,3/8"
SP4130
Accumulator
30x150, 3/8"
SP4140
Filter drier
Kuivain
30 g
SP4140
Filter drier
30 g
SP4150
Service valve
Huoltoventtiili
1/4"
SP4150
Service valve
1/4"
SP4280
Capillartube
Kapillaari
0 1,24mm, L = 5500 m
SP4280
Capillartube
0 1,24mm, L = 5500 m
SP4170
Condensate tube
Haihdutusputki
0 1/4"
SP4170
Condensate tube
0 1/4"
SP4180
Verkkojohto
3G1,5 3 m
SP4180
3G1,5 3 m
SP4190
Mains cable clamp
Vedonpoistaja
KK-4
SP4190
Mains cable clamp
SP4290
Defrost solenoid valve
Sulatuksen magneettiventtiili
Danfoss
EVR3, 3032F 1206
SP4290
Danfoss
E V R 3 , 032F1206
SP4310
Coil for solenoid valve
Magneettiventtiilin kela
Danfoss
EVR3 230V IP67 018Z6732
SP4320
Danfoss
E V R 3 115V 60HzlP67 018Z 6710
SP4340
Magnetic door switch
Magneetti ovikytkin
230 V
SP4350
115V
MA1071-3
Frame heater
Ovenkarmivastus
230 V SIL+CUF, L=3700mm
MAI 071-6
Frame heater
MA1070
Grid shelf
Lankahylly
MAI 070
Grid shelf
MA1137
Shelf bracket
Hyllynkannatin
AISI 304
MA1137
Shelf bracket
AISI 304
SP8010
Door Handle
Oven vedin
Type 571
SP8010
Door Handle
Type 571
SP8020
Door Hinge
Oven sarana
Type 402
SP8020
Door Hinge
Type 402
SP8030
Marini. leg
Stjalka
2" round, AISI304
SP8030
Marine leg
2" round, AISI304
MAI 072-3
Door c;asl<et
Ovitiiviste
PI 359, 775 x 8 2 3 mm
MAI 072-3
Door gasket
P I 359, 775 x 8 2 3 mm
MA1138
Condenser filter
10x246x470 mm
MA1138
Condenser filter
10x246x470 mm
MP12FR

h=110, d=100, Lmax445
KK-4
IVIarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MR-400

Part.no
Part.no
SP4000
Cooling unit iUR, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1
SP4200
Cooling unit MR, 115V 60 Hz - 1
SP4010
Compressor
Kompressori
Electrolux
ML60TG
SP4210
Compressor
Electrolux
ML60TR
SP4020
Condenser
Lauhdutin
LU-VE
STVF 100
SP4220
Condenser
LU-VE
STVF 100 115V 082059103
SP4030
Condenser fan
Lauhdutinpuhallln
ELCO
VNP 10-20/563, 10/38 W
SP4230
Condenser fan
ELCO
VNP 10/38 W 115V
SP4040
LU-VE
CF21
SP4040
LU-VE
CF21
SP4050
Condenser fan blade
Lauhdutlnpuhaltimen siipi
SP4050
Condenser fan blade
SP4060
Evaporator
Hyrystin
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
SP4060
Evaporator
SP4070
Evaporator fan
Hyrystinpuhallln
Centaur
CN52B3
SP4240
Evaporator fan
Centaur
CN2B2
SP4080
Control unit
St-ja ohjausyksikk
Lae
SSD90C30E
SP4250
Control unit
Lae
SSD90C30U
SP4090
Display
Nytt
Lae
SMD12RU
SP4090
Display
Lae
SMD12RU
SP4100
Lmptila-anturi
Lae
ST1K20C1
SP4100
Lae
ST1K20C1
SP4110
Sulatusanturi
Lae
ST1K20C2
SP4110
Lae
ST1K20C2
SP4120
Lauhtumisanturi
Lae
ST1K20C3
SP4120
Lae
ST1K20C3
SP4130
Accumulator
Pisaranerotln
30x150,3/8"
SP4130
Accumulator
30x150,3/8"
SP4140
Filter drier
Kuivain
30 g
SP4140
Filter drier
30 g
SP4150
Service valve
Huoltoventtiili
1/4"
SP4150
Service valve
1/4"
SP4160
Capiiiartube
Kaplllaari
0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m
SP4160
Capiiiartube
0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m

h=110, d=100, Lmax445
SP4170
Condensate tube
Haihdutusputki
0 1/4"
SP4170
Condensate tube
0 1/4"
SP4180
Veri^kojohto
3G1,5 3 m
SP4180
3G1,5 3 m
SP4190
Mains cable clamp
Vedonpoistaja
KK-4
SP4190
Mains cable clamp
KK-4
MAI 070
Grid shelf
AISI 304
MA1137
Shelf bracket
Type 571
SP8010
Door Handle
Fermod
Type 571
Door Hinge
Fermod
Type 402
MA1070
Grid shelf
Lankahylly
M M 137
Shelf bracket
Hyllynkannatln
SP8010
Door Handle
Oven vedin
Fermod
SP8020
Door Hinge
Oven sarana
Fennod
Type 402
SP8020
SP8030
Marine leg
Stjalka
2" round, AISI304
SP8030
Marine leg
2" round, AISI304
MA1072-2
Door gasket
Ovitilviste
P1359, 775 x 1 0 3 3 mm
MAI 072-2
Door gasket
P1359, 775 x 1 0 3 3 mm
MA1138
Condenser filter
10x246x470 mm
MA1138
Condenser filter
10x246x470 mm
AISI 304
IViarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line IVIF-400

Part.no
Part.no
SP4300
Cooling unit MF, 230V 50/60 Hz ~1
SP4260
Compressor
Kompresse ri
Electrolux
MP12FG
SP4330
Compressor
Electrolux
MP12FR
SP4020
Condenser
Lauhdutin
LU-VE
STVF 100
SP4220
Condenser
LU-VE
STVF100
SP4030
Condenser fan
Lauhdutinpuhallln
ELCO
VNP 10-20/563, 10/38W
SP4230
Condenser fan
ELCO
VNP 10/38 W 115V
SP4040
LU-VE
CF21
SP4040
LU-VE
CF21
SP4050
Condenser fan blade
Lauhdutinpuhaltimen slipi
SP4050
Condenser fan blade
SP4060
Evaporator
Hyrystin
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
SP4060
Evaporator
SP4070
Evaporator fan
Hyrystinpuhallin
Centaur
CN52B3
SP4240
Evaporator fan
Centaur
CN2B2
SP4270
Control unit
St- ja ohjausyksikk
Lae
SSD90C65E-C
SP4540
Control unit
Lae
SSD90C65U-C115V
SP4090
Display
Nytt
Lae
SMD12RU
SP4090
Display
Lae
SMD12RU
SP4100
Lmptila-anturi
Lae
ST1K20C1
SP4100
Lae
ST1K20C1
SP4110
Sulatusanturi
Lae
ST1K20C2
SP4110
Lae
ST1K20C2
SP4120
Lauhtumisanturi
Lae
ST1K20C3
SP4120
Lae
ST1K20C3
SP4130
Accumulator
Pisaranerotin
30x150,3/8"
SP4130
Accumulator
30x150,3/8"
SP4140
Filter drier
Kuivain
30 g
SP4140
Filter drier
30 g
SP4150
Service valve
Huoltoventtiili
1/4"
SP4150
Service valve
1/4"
SP4280
Capillartube
Kapillaari
0 1,24mm, L = 5500 m
SP4280
Capillartube
0 1,24mm, L = 5500 m
SP4170
Condensate tube
Haihdutusputki
0 1/4"
SP4170
Condensate tube
0 1/4"
SP4180
Verkkojohto
3G1,5 3 m
SP4180
3G1,5 3 m
SP4190
Mains cable clamp
Vedonpoistaja
KK-4
SP4190
Mains cable clamp
SP4290
Danfoss
EVR3, 3032F1206
SP4290
Danfoss
E V R 3 , 032F 1206
SP4310
Danfoss
E V R 3 230V IP67 018Z6732 SP4320
Danfoss
E V R 3 115V 60HZIP67 018Z 6710
SP4340
Magneetti ovikytkin
230 V
SP4350
Magnetic door sw/itch
1I5V
MAI 071-2
Frame heater
Ovenkarmivastus
MAI 071-5
Frame heater
SP4400
Cooling unit MF, 115V 60 Hz ~1

h=110, d=100, Lmax445
KK-4
MA1070
Grid shelf
Lankahylly
MAI 070
Grid shelf
MA1137
Shelf bracket
Hyllynkannatin
AISI 304
MA1137
Shelf bracket
AISI 304
SP8010
Door Handle
Oven vedin
Type 571
SP8010
Door Handle
Type 571
SP8020
Door Hinge
Oven sarana
Type 402
SP8020
Door Hinge
Type 402
SP8030
Marine leg
Stjalka
2" round, AISI304
SP8030
Marine leg
2" round, AISI304
MAI 072-2
Door gasket
Ovitiiviste
P1359, 775 x 1 0 3 3 mm
MAI 072-2
Door gasket
P I 359, 775 x 1 0 3 3 mm
MA1138
Condenser filter
10x246x470 mm
MA1138
Condenser filter
10x246x470 mm
IVIarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MR-550

Part.no
SP4000
SP4010
SP4020
SP4030
SP4040
SP4050
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4170
SP4180
SP4190
Compressor
Condenser
Condenser fan
Condenser fan blade
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, ntrol sensor
Accumulator
Filter drier
Service valve
Caplllartube
Condensate tube
Mains cable clamp
Haihdutusputki
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja
MA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-1
MA1138
Grid shelf
Shelf bracl<et
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket
Condenser filter
Lankahylly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana
Stjalka
Ovitiiviste
SP4100
SP4110
SP4120
SP4130
SP4140
SP4150
SP4160
Part.no
SP4200
Cooiing unit MR, 230V 50/60 H]: ~1

Kompressen
Lauhdutin
Lauhdutinpuhallin
Lauhdutinpuhaltimen slip!
Hyrystln
Hyrystinpuhallin
St- ja ohjausyksil<k
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi
Sulatusanturi
Lauhtumisanturi
Pisaranerotin
Kuivain
Huoltoventtilll
Kapillaari
Electrolux
LU-VE
ELCO
LU-VE
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Fermod
Fermod
ML60TG
STVF 100
VNP 10-20/563, 10/38W
CF21
Cooling unit MR, HSV 60 Hz -1
0 1/4"
3G1,5 3 m
KK-4
SP4100
SP4110
SP4120
SP4130
SP4140
SP4150
SP4160
SP4170
SP4180
SP4190
Compressor
Condenser
Condenser fan
Condenser fan blade
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Accumulator
Filter drier
Service valve
Caplllartube
Condensate tube
Mains cable clamp
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI359, 775 x1343 mm
10x246x470 mm
MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-1
MA1138
Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket
Condenser filter

h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
ST1K20C3
30x150,3/8"
30 g
1/4"
0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m
SP4210
SP4220
SP4230
SP4040
SP4050
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
Electrolux
LU-VE
ELCO
LU-VE
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
ML60TR
STVF 100 115V 082059103
VNP 10/38 W 115V
CF21
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
ST1K20C3
30x150,3/8"
30 g
1/4"
01,24mm, L = 4000 m
0 1/4"
3G1,5 3 m
KK-4
Fermod
Fermod
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1343 mm
10x246x470 mm
Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MF-550

Part.no
Part.no
SP4300
Cooling unit MF, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1
SP4400
Cooling unit MF, 115V 60 Hz ~1
SP4260
Compressor
Kompressen
Electrolux
SP4020
Condenser
Lauhdutin
LU-VE
MP12FG
SP4330
Compressor
Electrolux
MP12FR
STVF100
SP4220
Condenser
LU-VE
STVF100
SP4030
Condenser fan
Lauhdutinpuhallin
ELCO
SP4040
LU-VE
VNP 10-20/563, 10/38W
SP4230
Condenser fan
ELCO
VNP 10/38 W 115V
CF 21
SP4040
LU-VE
SP4050
Condenser fan blade
CF21
SP4050
Condenser fan blade
SP4060
Evaporator
Hyrystin
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
SP4060
Evaporator
SP4070
Evaporator fan
Hyrystinpuhallin
Centaur
CN52B3
SP4240
Evaporator fan
Centaur
CN2B2
SP4270
Control unit
St- ja ohjausyksikk
Lae
SSD90C65E-C
SP4540
Control unit
Lae
SSD90C65U-C115V
SP4090
Display
Nytt
Lae
SMD12RU
SP4090
Display
Lae
SMD12RU
SP4100
Lmptila-anturi
Lae
ST1K20C1
SP4100
Lae
ST1K20C1
SP4110
Sulatusanturi
Lae
ST1K20C2
SP4110
Lae
ST1K20C2
SP4120
Lauhtumisanturi
Lae
ST1K20C3
SP4120
Lae
ST1K20C3
SP4130
Accumulator
Pisaranerotin
30x150,3/8"
SP4130
Accumulator
30x150,3/8"
SP4140
Filter drier
Kuivain
30 g
SP4140
Filter drier
30 g
SP4150
Service valve
Huoltoventtiili
1/4"
SP4150
Service valve
1/4"
SP4280
Capilliirtube
Kapillaari
0 1 , 2 4 m m , L = 5500 m
SP4280
Capillartube
0 1,24mm, L = 5500 m
SP4170
Condensate tube
Haihdutusputki
0 1/4"
SP4170
Condensate tube
0 1/4"
SP4180
Verkkojohto
3G1,5 3 m
SP4180
3G1,5 3 m
SP4190
Mains cable clamp
Vedonpoistaja
KK-4
SP4190
Mains cable clamp
SP4290
Danfoss
EVR3, 3032F1206
SP4290
Danfoss
E V R 3 , 032F1206
SP4310
Danfoss
E V R 3 230V IP67 018Z6732 SP4320
Danfoss
E V R 3 115V60HzlP67 018Z6710
SP4340
Magneetti ovikytkin
230 V
SP4350
115V
MAI 071-1
Frame heater
Ovenkarmivastus
MAI 071-4
Frame heater

h=110, d=100, Lmax445
KK-4
MAI 070
Grid shelf
Lankahylly
MAI 070
Grid shelf
MA1137
Shelf bracket
Hyllynkannatin
AISI 304
MA1137
Shelf bracket
AISI 304
SP8010
Door Handle
Oven vedin
Type 571
SP8010
Door Handle
Type 571
SP8020
Door Hinge
Oven sarana
Type 402
SP8020
Door Hinge
Type 402
SP8030
Marine leg
Stjalka
2" round, AISI304
SP8030
Marine leg
2" round, AISI304
MAI 072-1
Door gasket
Ovitiiviste
PI359, 775 x 1 3 4 3 mm
MAI 072-1
Door gasket
P I 359, 775 x 1 3 4 3 mm
MA1138
Condenser filter
10x246x470 mm
MA1138
Condenser filter
10x246x470 mm
Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MRC-300
Part.no
SP4450
Central cooling unit M RC, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1
SP4290
SP4310
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4390
SP4560
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
MAI 070
MA1137
Solenoid valve
Sliut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Mains cable clamp
Grid sheif
Shelf bracket
SP8010
Door Handle
SP8020
Door Hinge
SP8030
Marine leg
MA1072-3 Door gasi<et
Magneettiventtiiii
Magneettiventtiiiin lêia
Paiioventtiili
Palloventtiiii
Imupalnesdln
Suiatusvastus
Haihdutusvastus
Hyrystin
Hyrystlnpuhaiiin
St- ja ohjausyl<slkk
Nytt
Lmptlla-anturi
Sulatusanturl
Verkkojohto
Part.no
SP4550
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
EVR3, 032F1206
EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
230 V/160 W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E
Vedonpolstaja
3G1,5 3m
KK-4
SP4290
SP4320
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4410
SP4570
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
Lankahyiiy
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana
Stjalka
Ovitiiviste
AiSI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AiSI304
P1359, 775 x823 mm
MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-3
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Fermod
Femnod
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
Central cooling unit MRC, 115V 60 Hz ~1

Solenoid vaive
Coil for solenoid vaive
Shut vaive
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Mains cable clamp
Grid sheif
Sheif bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Fermod
Fermod
EVR3, 032F 1206

115V60HzlP67, 018Z6710
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
115V/160W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3m
KK-4
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AiSI304
P1359, 775 x823 mm
Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MFC-300

Part.no
SP4500
Central cooling unit M FC, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1
Part.no
SP4600
SP4290
SP4310
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4390
SP4560
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
MA1071-3
Solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Mains cable clamp
Frame heater
Magneetti venttiili
Magneettlventtiilin kela
Palloventtiili
Palloventtiili
Imupainesdin
Sulatusvastus
Haihdutusvastus
Hyrystin
Hyrystinpuhallin
St-ja ohjausyksikk
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi
Sulatusantuh
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja
Ovenkarmivastus
EVR3, 032F1206
EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP12 1/2", 034L0023
400 W
230V/160 W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3 m
KK-4
MA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MA1072-3
Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket
Lankahylly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana
Stjalka
Ovitiiviste
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
P1359, 775 x823 mm
Danfoss
ânfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
l.ae
Fermod
Fermod
Central cooling unit lUFC, 115V 60 Hz - 1
SP4290
SP4320
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4410
SP4570
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
Solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Mains cable clamp
MA1071-6 Frame heater
MA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
MAI 072-3 Door gasket
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Fermod
Fermod
EVR 3, 032F 1206

EVR 3 115V60HZIP67, 018Z6710
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
115V/160W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3 m
KK-4
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x823 mm
IVIarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MRC-400
Part.no
SP4450
Central cooling unit M RC, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1
SP4290
SP4310
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4390
SP4560
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
Solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
IVIains cable clamp
IVIagneettiventtiili
IVIagneettiventtiiiin l<ela
Palloventtiili
Palloventtiiii
Imupainesdin
Suiatusvastus
Haihdutusvastus
Hyrystin
Hyrystinpuhallin
St- ja ohjausyl<sil<k
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi
Sulatusanturi
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja
MA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MA1072-2
Grid shelf
Shelf bracl<et
Door Handle
Door Hinge
iViarine leg
Door gasket
Lankahylly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana
StjalKa
Ovitiiviste
Part.no
SP4550
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Fermod
Fermod
Central cooling unit IMRC, 115V 60 Hz ~1
EVR3, 032F1206
EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
230V/160W
h=110,d=100, Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3m
KK-4
SP4290
SP4320
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4410
SP4570
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
Solenoid valve
Coii for solenoid valve
Shut vaive
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1033 mm
iVIA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-2
Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket
Control unit
Display
Mains cable clamp
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
EVR3, 032F 1206

115V 60Hz 1P67,018Z 6710
GBC 6 S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
115V/160W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3m
KK-4
Fermod
Fermod
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1033 mm
Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MFC-400

Part.no
SP4500
SP4290
SP4310
SP4360
SP4370
Part.no
SP4600
Central cooling unit MFC, 230V 50/60 Hz -1

Solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
MagneettI venttiili
Magneettiventtillin kela
Palloventtiili
Palloventtiili
SP4380
SP4390
SP4560
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
MA1071-2
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Mains cable clamp
Frame heater
Imupalnesdin
Sulatusvastus
Haihdutusvastus
Hyrystin
Hyrystinpuhallln
St- ja ohjausyksikk
Nytt
Lmptlla-anturi
Sulatusanturi
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja
Ovenkarmivastus
MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Lankahyl ly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
SP8020
Door Hinge
SP8030
Marine leg
MA1072-2 Door gasket
Oven sarana
Stjalka
Ovitiiviste
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Fermod
Fermod
EVR3, 032F1206
EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400 W
230V/160W
SP4290
SP4320
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4410
SP4570
h=110, d=100, Lmax445

CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3m
KK-4
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100
Central cooling unit MFC, 115V 60 Hz ~1

Solenoid valve
230VSIL+CUF, L=4100mm
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
MAI 071-5

Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Mains cable clamp
Frame heater
AISI 304
Type 571
MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Type 402
2" round, AISi304
P1359, 775 x1033 mm
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-2
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Fermod
Fermod
EVR 3, 032F 1206

EVR 3 115V60HzlP67, 018Z6710
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC 10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
115V/160W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3m
KK-4
115VSIL+CUF, L=4100mm
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1033 mm
Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MRC-500
Part.no
SP4450
Central cooling unit IMRC, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1
SP4290
SP4310
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4390
SP45':-0
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
Solenoid valve
Shut vjlve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Mains cable clamp
Magneettiventtllli
Palloventtiili
Palloventtiill
Imupainesdin
Sulatusvastus
Haihdutusvastus
Hyrystin
Hyrystinpuhallin
St- ja ohjausyksikk
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi
Sulatusanturl
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja
MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MA1072-1
Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasl<et
Lankahyl ly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana
Stjalka
Ovitiiviste
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Fermod
Fermod
Part.no
SP4550
Central cooling unit MRC, 115V 60 Hz ~1
EVR3, 032F 1206

EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8",009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
230V/160W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K2aC2
3G1,5 3m
KK^
SP4290
SP4320
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4410
SP4570
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
Solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Mains cable clamp
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1343 mm
MA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-1
Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Fermod
Fermod
EVR3, 032F 1206

115V60HzlP67, 018Z6710
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
115V/160W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3 m
KK^
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
P1359, 775 x1343 mm
IVIarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MFC-550

Part.no
SP4500
SP4290
SP4310
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4390
SP4560
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
MA1071-1
MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-1
Part.no
SP4600
Central cooling unit MFC, 115V 60 Hz - 1
3G1,5 3m
KK-4
SP4290
SP4320
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4410
SP4570
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
MAI 071-4
Solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Mains cable clamp
Frame heater
Danfoss EVR 3, 032F 1206

Danfoss EVR 3 115V60H2IP67, 018Z6710
Danfoss GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
Danfoss GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
Danfoss KVP12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
115V/160W
h=110,d=100, Lmax445
Centaur CN2B2
Lae
SSD90C30U
Lae
SMD12RU
Lae
ST1K20C1
Lae
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3m
KK-4
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1343 mm
MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-1
Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket
Fermod
Fermod
Central cooling unit IVFC, 230V 50/60 Hz ~1

Solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Magneetti venttiili
Palloventtiili
Palloventtiili
Imupainesdin
Sulatusvastus
Control unit
Display
Mains cable clamp
Frame heater
Haihdutusvastus
Hoyrystin
Hyrystinpuhallin
St- ja ohjausyksikk
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi
Sulatusanturi
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja
Ovenkarmivastus
Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket
Lankahylly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana
Stjalka
Ovitiiviste
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Fermod
Fermod
EVR3, 032F1206
EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP12 1/2", 034L0023
400 W
230V/160W
h=110, d=100,Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1343 mm
ÎI4CIIÎ I T
Rev 09 2003
Spare parts - Arctic Coid Line IVIarine IVIR-120

Part.no
Part.no
SP4760
Cooling unit MNCL, 230V 50/60 Hz ~1
SP4470
Cooling unit MNCL, 11SV 60 Hz - 1
SP4580
Compressor R
Kompressori
Electrolux
SP4430
Condenser
Lauhdutin
LU-VE
IVIL40TG
SP4210
Compressor
Electrolux
ML60TR
STFT 14121
SP4220
Condenser
LU-VE
QLZ06/0018-2524
CL180-6mm
SP4230
Condenser fan
SP4040
ELCO
LU-VE
STVF 100 115V 082059103

VNP 10/38 W 115V
SP4440
Condenser fan
Lauhdutlnpuhallin
MVL
SP4460
Evaporator
Hyrystin
ECO
SP4070
Evaporator fan
Hyrystinpuhallin
Centaur
CN52B3
SP4050
Condenser fan blade
SP4080
Control unit
Lae
SSD90C30E
Lae
Lae
SIVID12RU
ST1K20C1
SP4060
SP4240
Evaporator
Display
St- / ohjausyksikk
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4120
Sulatusanturi
Lae
ST1K20C2
Lauhtumlsanturi
Lae
ST1K20C3
SP4130

Accumulator
Pisaranerotin
SP4140
Filter drier
Kulvain
SP4150
Service valve
Huoltoventtiili
SP4660
Capiliartube
Kapillaari
SP4490
Condensate tube
Haihdutusputki
SP4510
Connection cable 3x1,0 2,5 m
Kojeliitosjohto 3x1,0 2,5 m
27904-2,5M-801
SP4160
SP4520
Chassis plug standard
Capiliartube
Condensate tube
Mains cable clamp
488-191
KK-4
SP4170
SP4190
Kojeliitin, runko, uros

Vedonpoistaja
SP4190
Mains cable clamp
KK-4
SP8010
Door handle
Oven vedin
Type 571
SP8010
Door handle
Type 571
S10001
S10006
Hinge upper left frame

Hinge upper right frame
Sarana yls vasen karmiin
S10001
S10006
Hinge upper left frame

Hinge upper right frame
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Centaur
Lae

h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SP4090
Display
Lae
SMD12RU
SP4100
Lae
ST1K20C1
30x150,3/8"
SP4110
Lae
ST1K20C2
30 g
1/4"
SP4120

Accumulator
Lae
ST1K20C3
SP4250
SP4130
0 1,0 mm, L = 2870 mm SP4140

0 1/4"
SP4150
PK-Cables
CF21
Sarana yls oikea karmiin
Filter drier
Service valve
30x150,3/8"
30 g
1/4"
0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m
0 1/4"
SI0002
Hinge lower left frame
Sarana alas vasen karmiin
S10002
Hinge lower left frame
SI 0007
Sarana alas oikea karmiin
S10007
Hinge lower right frame
SI 0004
Hinge lower right frame

Hinge upper door
Sarana yls oveen
Hinge lower door
Sarana alas oveen
S10004
S11004
Hinge upper door
S11004
SI0003
Hinge bushing
Saranaholkki
S10003
Hinge lower door

Hinge bushing
047310
Door right hinged
Ovi oikea
047310
Door right hinged
047300
Door left hinged
Ovi vasen
047300
Door left hinged
SP5530
Gasket, door D4
mIeOOl
Shelf bracl<et
Tiiviste, ovi 04
Hyllynkannatin
mIeOOl
Shelf bracket
LM1302
Grid shelf
Lankahyl ly
GN1/1
Ll\/I1302
Grid shelf
GN1/1
SP8030
Marine leg
Stjalka
2" round, AISI304
SP8030
Marine leg
2" round, AISI304
Primo
135950
DI 66N
jsqijin
miim ^
COOZ'ZO'K
O.Sl+'"O.Z h
yW'lONPnuOo;
^ VlOllOH098SkNld
/^9i)ueei|uei||){S3)|
iuej6e|p6uuij|/
Atnwim
m 'U|u 8snj / i ) \ m
ZH09 '~I 'Agil
Vl 'U|u asnj / mn^ ZH9/0S 'l 'A0E2

Nnwy
-NlinilHIWl
NiiMid
]d
3d| 1 N
Y
1dl
3d
r
i (
/ ^W EV 2VSS IS 3111 8" 61 111 111 211 5151 /l \] i] 1

J
1
J r
, ^
xny 1
fp
i (Hl sn1 EN 2i IN N
VVVVTTTTT
0 0
ii] lî [i[
]0C306(ISS
3iDH3
mr-\
9^
i
r^
pmiAl^
=Jk
=JV.
=Jk
=.
m \ J^
<=A.
=A
C=A
=!V.
itiiiaiirtMi'iiiir'"'^*jaa^5ig
C=A
-^g
4^
=Jk
LOiPART
Water boilers, electric
Model BE3M
SEMI-AUTOMATIC
STAINLESS STEEL EXECUTION
THERMOSTAT CONTROL
SAFETY CUT-OUT
NON DRIP TAP
WATER FEED ARM WITH VALVE

AS STANDARD
All water boUers are constructed of heavy

gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in
a polished finish. The water fittings are of
chromium plated brass.
Large bore draw-olf tap, water level gauge,
overflow, water inlet connection as well as a
dome cover arefittedas standard.
The boilers are intended for mounting directly on counter or bench top. Alternatively they may be installed on wall or floor,
subject to specially designed brackets respectively stands are provided.
The boilers have an on/ofi^sv^tch with pilot
lamp and auto reset low water level safety
cut-out.
For further specifications and optional extras, please see overleaf.
LOIPART AB
P.O. Box694
SE44118 Alingss, Sweden
Phone
+46322668360
Telefax
+46322637747
E-mail
loJpart@iolpart.se
Exclusive Sales of
BQ E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment
5-996
DOC.NO.
EDITION!
5-996L
11.06
WATER BOILERS, ELECTRIC

Scale 1:10
Dimensions mm
Dimensions mm
Model
BE2M
335
BE3M
420
BE4M
500
BE5M
570
Bullkhead brackets
(optional extra)
1. Gauge glass
2. Water inlet valve
3. Water connection 15 mm
4. Water tap
5. Thermostat
6. Pilot lamp
7. Cable entry
8. Overflow 0 22 mm
9. Suggested securing (not included)
10. Bulkhead brackets (optional extra)
Specifications
Model
BE2M
Optional extras
Capacity
litres
Voltage V
Loading
kW
10
BE3M
15
BE4M
20
BE5M
25
230 1-50/60
Weight kg
net
gross
11
12
10
13
12
15
Shipping
volume
m3
Model
Description
SBOIOA Set of s/s wall brackets

405018 Swivel arm with draw-off tap for el.water boiler
0.080
Installation
The water boilers are delivered with a 1.2 m electric cord.
Connect it to a suitable electrical supply circuit with isolating switch and according to ship's code. Water inlet pipe and valve should be conneaed
to a suitable cold water supply fitted with an isolating stopcock. Secure the unit by fitting angle bars or similar as shown above (not delivered with
the boiler).
For bulkhead mounting:
Set of 2 pes. wall brackets available as optional extra.
5-996
MANUAL
Water boilers BE
Introduction
Maintenance
The Burshaw range of water boilers are manufactured

from top quality 304 stainless steel. All models are fitted with a thermostat enabling the customer to determine the required temperature. In addition they are also
fitted with an automatic cut-out.
The efficiency of any water boiler can be impaired if

scale is allowed to build up. Ensure that the scale
deposits are removed periodically from the inside of
the boiler and tap by using a descaling agent. At the
end of a working day the inner and outer surfaces of
the boiler and lid should be wiped dry to avoid the
build up of scale.
Loading and capacity

Model
BE2
BE3
BE4
BE5
Litres
10
15
20
25
Voltage
230V
230V
230V
230V
Hz
50
50
50
50
kW
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
Warning
This appliance must be earthed!
All boiler are supplied complete with 13 amp. cable and
should be plugged into a suitable 13 amp. supply. In the
event of damage to the main lead, the supply cord should
only be fitted by an authorized service agent.
Water inlet and valve (where applicable) should be connected to a suitable cold water supply fitted with an isolating stopcock.
Model
BE8
BE10
BE12
Litres
36
45
55
Voltage
230V
380/440V
230V
Hz
50
50-60
50
M/V
6.0
6.0
6.0
Please note that the manufacturers guarantee will

be void If faults arise due to the excessive build
up of scale.
Safety
It is dangerous to drape towels or teacloths over
the boiler obstructing the vent hole in the boiler
lid.
Care should be taken when removing the lid to
avoid possible injury from steam.
This appliance should never be cleaned with a
water jet.
Operating instruction
1.
First assuring that the draw off tap is in the OFF

position.
Fill the boiler with cold water to the level, indicated on the front of the boiler. DO NOT OVERFILL.
2.
Switch on the eletrical supply after filling.
3.
Turn the thermostat control knob in a clockwise

direction to the maximum setting. When the
water boils turn the control knob in an anticlockwise direction to the desired retaining
temperature below 100 C.
4.
Draw off water by opening the draw off tap

remembering to REPLENISHTHE BOILER
WITH WATER FROM TIME TO TIME.
Warning
This appliance must be earthed!
Model BE10 must be wired by a qualified electrician
using flexible conduit to 30 amp. supply via a safety
isolating switch with a contact gap of at least 3.0 mm in
all poles. Precautions should be taken during installation regarding the leakage of current.
Although all Burshaw boilers are fitted with manual
reset trip free safety cutouts to protect the heating
elements from the occasional boil dry situation It is
essential that the user ensures that the elements are
covered with at least 25 mm of water at all times.
In the event of the boiler being accidently allowed
to boil dry, the boiler should be allowed to cool down
before refilling with water.The boiler will reset automatically.
Please note this safety feature will not operate until
the boiler has cooled down sufficiently.
In any communication with our service department

please quote model & serial no. of the boiler in question which is quoted on the rear of the appliance,
Installation instruction
*=?
T
140
75
t
<
Gauge glass
Water inlet valve
Water connection 15 mm
Water tap
Thermostat
Pilot lamp
Cable entry
Overflow 0 22 mm
Suggested securing
(not included)
10. Bulkhead brackets
(optional extra)
Voltage V*
BE2M
335
BE5M
Loading kW
Weight kg
net
gross
10
11
BE3M
15
12
BE4M
20
10
13
BE5M
25
12
15
Shipping
volume
m3
0.080
Optional extras
Model
BE4M 500
BE2M
230 1 -50/60
Model
BE3M 420
Specifications
Capacity litres
>
Dimensions mm
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Model
0 292
Description
SB010A Set of s/s wall brackets

405018 Swivel arm with draw-off tap for el.water boiler
570
Installation
The water boilers are delivered with a 1.2 m electric
cord.
Connect it to a suitable electrical supply circuit with
isolating switch and according to ship's code. Water
inlet pipe and valve should be connected to a suitable
cold water supply fitted with an isolating stopcock.
Secure the unit by fitting angle bars or similar as
shown above (not delivered with the boiler).
For bulkhead mounting:
Set of 2 pes. wall brackets available as optional extra.
The boilers are intended for mounting directly on
counter or bench top. Alternatively they may be installed on wall or floor, subject to specially designed
brackets respectively stands are provided.
The boilers have an on/off switch with pilot lamp and
auto reset low water level safety cut-out.
Wiring diagram
Burshaw Boilers BE2-5, 3 kW

with temperature limit
05,08,06
AAA/V^
Voltage: 380-440 3-50/60
WIRING DIAGRAM
MODELS BE 10
MODEL 541 13
?
Z
<
<
lY t _4
K1
O
^
d
3 ; CC
LJ
<
>
i/i
i/j CH
_1
UJ
fO
O
CD L, en
<
X
Lu
0.
<
1
CM UJ
n
V
1-
1T n
CM
CD
Q id
X
(^
COMA
8
1 't./o.O(S
GROUP
BURSHAW Q>0>Les 3r.'Yl

MANUAL AND SEMI AUTOMATIC
EXPLODED PARTS DIAGRAM
DV/G,NO Bg}4ttf
ISSUE
DATE
ORAWtJ
&
GK
BURSHAW
Item No.
Boiler Spares List ( Serial No.400000-t-)
Qty
Code
Lid Knob with finger plate
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
M808
L713A
L750A
L730
N/A
M823
N/A
L731
L732
SB001
1
1
M822
M820
1
1
1
1
1
1
L722
M802
M802A
N/A
L716
M779
Thermostat Knob
Relay (Used on special voHages only)
20
21
22
Feed Arm Elbow

Feed Arm Tube
Feed Arm Valve
Water Feed Assembly (Parts 9,10,20,21,22)
M781
D224A
L758
1
1
L756
L755
23
24
25
Overflowfitting22mm coupling
Overflow washer 3/4 in BSP
Back Nut 3/4 in BSP
Overflow assembly (parts 23,24,25)
Special Tap for guage glass (parts 5-10)
1
1
SB004
L769A
1
1
1
L771
L770
SB013
1
1
1
1
1
1
SB002
SB700A
SB701A
SB702A
SB703A
L753A
1
1
T651
M834
1/2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
26
Boiler Lid with l<nob (10-25 litre)

Pilot Light (Red) 15mm Diameter
Tap Top Assembly for Standard Tap
Tap Spring (included in part 5)
Washer for Tap (Neoprene)
Standard Tap body
Back Nut
Tap Fibre Washer
Standard Tap Complete (parts 5 -10)
Safety cut-out (included in part 13)
Push button cutout (Used on 1 lOv boilers)
Element 3kw with Cut-Out
Silicone washer for element
Fibre washer for element
Element Nut (included in 13)
Thermostat 3kw
Thermostat 6kw
27
Gauge glass assembly 10 litre (parts 28,29,30)

28
Gauge glass tube

Level indicator ball (red)
Gauge glass olive
29
30
ITEMS NOT SHOWN

Base cover plate (10-25 Litre)
Anti-splash lid (10-25 Utre)
Bulk Head Brackets (10-25 litre)
Cona Limited
Unit 3 Island Farm Avenue
West Moiesey, Surrey, KT8 2UZ
Tel: 020 8941 9922 Fax: 020 8941 9955
M788
1
1
M796
SB010A
206991^
=A
=A.
OU
C=A
c=A.
c==A.
- ^
' . - tiSW-i.^
4^
"
"4
'
-.
d O o V ^^^^^ ^3 aar
KB ^W B8B ^W
Dishwasher WT 38
Model WT38
Model WT38
with stand 16 94 66
HIGH CAPACITY
EASY CLEANING
FOUR WASH PROGRAMMES
SUPERB DISHWASHING RESULT
LOW WATER AND DETERGENT

CONSUMPTION
FULLY AUTOMATIC
EASY INSTALLATION
AND SERVICE
W T 38 is a compact, front loading machine

for undercounter installation with a high
capacityprovidingefficient dishwashing. The
large wash chamber can take tableware up to
a height of30 cm and GastroNorm sizes. The
exterior, door, wash tank, tank filter, washand rinse arms and nozzles are made of
stainless steel, quality AISI304 (SS 2333).
Smooth surfaces and a fully pressed wash
tank with rounded corners facilitate cleaning.
W T 38 has four wash cycles, one for lightly
soiled dishes, one for normally soiled and one
for heavily soiled dishes. For particularly
dirty dishes or for other specific needs a
continuous wash can be chosen. The rotating

wash and rinse arms contribute towards efficient dishwashing with a perfect result. T h e
final rinse only starts when the correct temperature has been reached.
Water consumption is only 3.3 litres of fresh
water per wash. T h e machine is very easy to
operate as all automatic controls are integrated. The machine is equipped as standard with
a detergent pump and rinse aid pump.
The machine can also be supplied with an
optional stand, which raises the working
height to 850-900 mm.
For fiirtherspecifications and optional extras,
please see overleaf.
LOiPART AB
P.O.B0X694
SE 44118 Allngss, Sweden
Phone
+46322668360
Telefax
+46322637747
E-mail
lQipart@ioipart.se
Exclusive Sales of
BD E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment
7-079
DOC.NO.
EDITION 9
7-079L
11.05
DISHWASHER, WT 38
Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm
1. Water connection hose

L=1.0m,ISO-G3/4B
2. Inlet for detergent and rinse aid
hoses
3. Equipotential screw (earth screw)
4. Elearical conneaion, 1.5 m cord
included
5. Drain oudet 0 18 mm int.
6. Working top, depth=620 mm,
possible to remove if necessary
by under counter installation
7. Marine legs
(If necessary to fix machine to a
counter, simple arrangements -not
a part of delivery- are sufficient.)
820 850
750-1000'
1010
Specification:
Water consumption 1/rack
Recommended water hardness
Recommended water pressure (flow)
Rinse water temperatur
Pump output
Sound level
Detail of marine leg

for dishwasher
3.3
max 5 dH
300-600 KPa
80-85C
0,75 kW
< 66 dB
Specification
Loading kW
Model
PNC
Drain
pump
502 346
WT38
*Max.
amps in
phase
Voltage
440 3-60
11.6
400 3-50
12.7
502 019
Capacity
racks/hour
Working cydesis
Rinse
water
heater
Tank
Total
Prog.
1
2.0
6.85
90
Prog.
2
Prog.
3
Weight kgs
Prog.
1
Prog.
2
Prog.
3
net
gross
Shipping
volume
m3
33
20
12
68
75
0.470
120 240
' Other voltages available on request

Optional extras
Model
16 94 66
Description
Stand
52550
Racks - see leaflet 7-605 (1 plate rack,

1 glass rack and 1 cutlery holder are
supplied as standard with the WT 38)
Detail of marine leg for stand
^^-^
f
k
TL t
548
tiU=
-l85l<
-450450
J
wl
Stand - optional extra

Scale 1:25
-r 1 1 +
120V4-^
/ / > ' < ? - ^ 010 (3x)
-05O-
1070'
7-079
GB UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER
Page 3
INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
DE
UNTERBAUGESCHIRRSPLER
INSTALLATION, BEDIENUNG UND WARTUNG
Seite 19
NL
TAFELMODEL VAATWASMACHINE
INSTALLATIE, GEBRUIK EN ONDERHOUD
Pag. 35
[sTl GOLVDISKMASKIN
Sid 53
INSTALLATION, HANDHAVANDE OCH UNDERHALL
DK
INDBYGNINGSOPVASKEMASKINE
INSTALLATION, DRIFT OG VEDLIGEHOLDELSE
Side 69
Fl
ASTIANPESUKONE
ASENNUS, KYTT JA HUOLTO
Sivu 85
Side 101
NO INNEBYGD OPPVASKMASKIN
MONTERING, BRUKOG VEDLIKEHOLD
MFR
IT
ii ES
PT
LAVE-VAISSELLE
INSTALLATION, EMPLOI ET ENTRETIEN
Page 117
LAVASTOVIGLIE SOTTOTAVOLO
INSTALLAZIONE, USO E MANUTENZIONE
Pag. 133
LAVAVAJILLAS EMPOTRABLE
INSTALACION, USO Y MANTENIMIENTO
Pag. 149
MQUINA DE LAVAR LOIQA DE ENCASTRAR

INSTAU\gO, UTILIZAQO E MANUTENQO
Pag. 165
GR n A Y N T H P I O n i A T Q N
IEX.
E f K A T A I T A I H , XPHZH KAI ZYNTHPHIH
DOC. NO.
EDITION: 1
5956.380.05
06.2005
181
GB !
\ )
Mm
CONTENTS
GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS
Pag.
A1
HANDLING
Pag.
A2
UNPACKING
Pag.
A3
DISPOSAL
Pag.
A4
TECHNICAL DATA
Pag.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE INSTALLER/MAINTENANCE PERSON
Pag.
B1
WATER CONNECTION
Pag.
B2
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
Pag.
B3
WARNING MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE CONTROL PANEL
Pag.
B4
DETERGENT/RINSE-AID DISPENSERS AND SETTINGS
Pag.
10
85
SETTING THE DISPENSERS
Pag.
11
86
MAINTENANCE
Pag.
12
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER
Pag.
13
CI
STARTING
Pag.
13
C2
WASH CYCLES
Pag.
14
C3
OPERATION
...Pag.
14
C4
END OF WORK AND DAILY CLEANING
Pag.
15
C5
UNDERCOUNTER
DISHWASHER
WITH
INCORPORATED CONTINUOUS WATER SOFTENER
Pag.
16
C6
WARNING MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE CONTROL PANEL
Pag.
17
TROUBLESHOOTING
Pag.
18
GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS
WARNING
CAREFULLY READ THE INSTALLATION, OPERATING
AND
MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE INSTALLING THIS APPLIANCE. INCORRECT INSTALLATION, ADAPTATIONS OR ALTERNATIONS
COULD
CAUSE
DAMAGE
TO
PROPERTY OR INJURY TO PERSONS. MALICIOUS
DAMAGE, DAMAGE DUE TO NEGLIGENCE, OR TO
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH INSTRUCTIONS AND
REGULATIONS, OR TO INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR UNAUTHORISED TAMPERING INVALIDATE ANY WARRANTY AND RELIEVE THE
MANUFACTURER OF ALL LIABILITY.
Carefully read this instructions booklet, as it contains important advice for safe installation, operation and maintenance.
Keep this booklet to hand in a safe place for future
reference by other operators.
2. Installation should be carried out by qualified
engineers, in accordance with current regulations and with the manufacturer's instructions.
3. The appliance should only be used by persons specifically trained in this operation.
4. Switch off the appliance in the event of failure or
malfunctioning.
Only have the appliance repaired by a service centre
authorised by the manufacturer and ask for original
spare parts.
Lift the appliance using a lift truck, remove the base

and position the appliance
Rgure2
where it is to be installed.
A1
HANDLING
Use suitable means to move the appliance: a lift truck
or fork pallet trucks (the forks should reach more than
halfway beneath the appliance).
A2
,.;;'>
RgureS
Remove the protective film and ensure that the packaging material is disposed of correctly in compliance
with the regulations in force in the country where the
product is to be used.
A3
All the packaging materials are environment friendly.

They may be kept without danger, recycled or burned
in a special waste incineration plant. Recyclable plastic
components are mari<ed as follows:
UNPACKING
6
PE
" ^
r"
y^^j^
r^
Hi
>
If
Figure 1
Wear protective gloves to unpack.
DISPOSAL
polyethylene
polypropylene
polystyrene
foam
external wrapping film.

Instruction bag.
top packaging panels,
straps
protective surround elements.
Wood and cardboard components may be disposed of

according to local regulations in force. Appliances that
have reached the end of their service life should be
suitably disposed of. The appliance should be dismantled according to regulations in force. AI! metal
parts are in stainless steel (AISI 304) and are removable. Plastic parts are marked with the symbol of the
material.
A4
TECHNICAL DATA
LS6/ET5
MODEL
WT37/WT38
Supply voltage:
400...415-3N-
400...415-3N~
- convertible to
220...240- 3~
220...240-3~
- single-phase version
220...2401N~
220...2401N-
- USPH version
400...440- 3~
400.,.440- 3~
Frequency
Hz
50o60
5 0 0 60
Max. power input
kW
6.85/9.05(*)-9.85/12.05(*)
5.35/7.55{*)-6.85/9.05(*)
Boiler heating elements
kW
6.0-9.0
4.5-6.0
Tank heating elements
kW
2,2
2.2
kPa[bar]
50...700 [0.5.,.7]
50...700 [0.5...71
Wafer supply press, for pressure boiler versions
kPa [bar]
200...300 [2...3]
200...30[2...3]
Water supply temperature
50
50
Water supply hardness for models without

incorporated continuous water softener
fH/dH/cH
14/8/10 max
14/8/10 max
Electric conductivity of water for models without

incorporated continuous water softener
nS/cm
<400
<400
Water supply hardness for models with

incorporated water softener
"iWdWcH
40/22,4/28 max
40/22,4/28 max
Concentration of chlorides in water
ppm
<20
<20
Rinse cycle water consumption
3.8
3.8
Boiler capacity
12
12
Tank capacity
23
23
Standard cycle time with water supply at 50C
sec.
90-120-240
90-120-240/120-180-300/300-420-600
Legal noise level Leq
dB(A)
<65
<65
IPX4
IPX4
Net weight for models without incorporated

continuous water softener
kg
68
68
Net weight for models

kg
71
71
H07RN-F
H07RN-F
Water supply press, for atmospheric

versions
boiler
Protection rating
with
incorporated
Power supply cable
(*) = If activated by software, coincidence of tank and boiler heating elements.
Tabel 1
400..415V3N
220...240V3
400...440V 3
220...240V1N
5.35 WW
5x2.5
16A3P+N
4x2.5
16A3P
4x4
2GA3P
3x6
30A 1P+N
6.85 kW
5x2.5
16A3P+N
4x2.5
16A3P
4x4
20A3P
3x6
40A 1P+N
7.55 kW
5X4
2SA3P+N
4x2.5
16A 3P
4x6
32A3P
3x10
40A1P+N
9.05 kW
5X4
32A 3P4-N
4x4
20A 3P
4x8
32A3P
3x10
50A1P+N
9.85 kW
5X4
32A 3P+N
4x4
20A3P
4x8
32A3P
3x10
50A1P+N
12.05 kW
5X4
32A 3P+N
4x4
20A 3P
4x8
32A3P
3x10
50A1P+N
C = Power supply cable

8 = On/Oft switch
Tabel 2
Standard cycle time may vary should the inlet water temperature and/or the boiler heating elements be different from
that indicated above.
Figure 4 Installation diagram for models without incorporated continuous water softener
Legend Figure 4
A - Water inlet pipe with 0 3/4" G fittings
C - Outlet pipe l 40 mm (^) - i 20 mm (*).
R|
- Power supply
S - Pipe inlet for detergents
Q - Unipotential screw
C^) - Only for model with free-fall drainage
(*) - Only for model with drain pump
vi)
Figure 5 Installation diagram for models with incorporated continuous water softener
Legend Figure 5
A - Water inlet pipe with 3/4" G fittings
C - Outlet pipe i 40 mm {^) - i 20 mm (*).
I - Power supply
S - Pipe inlet for detergents
Q - Unipotential screw
C^) - Only for model with free-fall drainage
(*) - Only for model with drain pump
B INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE INSTALLER/MAINTENANCE PERSON

Install a disconnecting switch with a capacity at
least equal to that given in the technical data table,
a 30mA residual current circuit breaker and an
overcurrent device (magnetothermal cut-out with
manual reset or fuse) between,the appliance and
the mains power outlet.
- On the model with drain pump:

position the outlet pipe at a height anywhere between
750 and 1000 mm from the floor.
Check that about 4 litres of water flow out of the outlet
pipe during the rinse cycle.
RATING PLATE
The rating plate contains identification and technical
data and is located on the right-hand side panel of the
appliance (Figure 6).
B2
(..0,:
Figure 8
CAUTION
THE EARTH AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SHOULD BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH NATIONAL REGULATIONS.
Figure 6
B1
WATER CONNECTION
Position the dishwasher and level the appliance by
turning the relative height-adjustable feet
(Figure 6).
Connect the appliance water supply pipe "A"
(Figure 4) to the mains, fitting a cut-pff coci<, the filter provided and a pressure gauge between the
appliance and the mains (Figure 7).
Before carrying out the electrical connection, check

that the voltage and frequency on the appliance
rating plate correspond to those of the mains electricity supply.
The earth wire at the terminal end must be longer
(max. 20 mm) than the phase wires.
Connect the earth wire of the power supply cable to
an efficient earth clamp. The appliance must also
be included in a unipotential system, the connection being made through the screw "Q" (Figure 4)
marked with the symbol "'^". The unipotential wire
must have a cross section of 10 mm^.
Power
supply
configuration)
f
400...415V
3N
(standard
Figure 7
Checl< that the dynamic water supply pressure,

measured between the appliance and the main, is
between 200 and 300 kPa for machines with pressure boiler and between 50 and 700 kPa for
machines with atmospheric boiler (test while dishwasher tank or boiler is filling with water). If the
pressure is too high, fit a suitable pressure
reducer on the inlet pipe.
- On the model with free-fall drainage:

connect the waste outlet pipe "C" (Figure 4) to the
main drain pipe, fitting a trap, or place the outlet pipe
over an "S" trap set into the floor.
Figure 9
Open the power supply terminal board and insert the
jumpers provided as follows: one jumper between terminals 2 and 4 and another between terminals 4 and 6,
Using a suitable power supply cable (see technical data
table), connect the three phases to terminals 1,3 and 5,
the neutral to terminal 6 and the earth wire to the terminal ^ .
Power supply 400...440V 3
Connections provided for energy control

This appliance Is designed for an external energy consumption control.
Figure 10
Open the power supply terminal board and insert the
jumpers provided as follows: one jumper between terminals 2 and 4 and another between terminals 4 and 6.
table), connect the three phases to terminals 1, 3 and 5
and the earth wire to the terminal 4r.
Power supply 220...230V 3
Figure 11
Open the power supply tenninl board and insert the
jumpers provided as follows: one Jumper between terminals 1 and 2, one between terminals 3 and 4 and
another between terminals 5 and 6. Using a suitable
power supply cable (see technical data table), connect
the three phases to terminals 1, 3 and 5 and the earth
wire to the terminal ^ .
Power supply 220...230V 1N
Figure 13
Connect the energy peak controller across terminals 11
and 12.
Safety devices
An automatic reset thermoamperometric protective
device incorporated in the windings of the electric
pump cuts off the electricity supply in the case of
malfunctioning.
In the event of water mains failure, a device prevents water in the boiler from returning Into the
mains.
An overflow pipe, connected to the drainage outlet,
maintains the water in the tank at a constant level.
On models with a drain pump, a supplementary
level control device activates if the main level control device is faulty.
Failure to comply with safety rules and regulations
relieves the manufacturer of all liability.
B3
WARNING MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE

CONTROL PANEL
A1
Figure 12
Open the power supply terminal board and Insert the
jumpers provided as follows: two jumpers between terminals 1,3,5 and another two between terminals 2, 4
and 6.
table), connect the phase and neutral to terminals 5 and
6 respectively and the earth wire to the terminal ^ .
CAUTION
A normally open (n.o.) contact of the
controller must be connected across
terminals 11 and 12. When this contact
closes the boiler heating elements are
disconnected. Using the dishwasher in
these conditions may increase the cycle
time.
NO WATER
Check that the cock is open.

Check that the water inlet filter is clean.
Check the minimum mains pressure (not less than
50kPa).
Check that the overflow pipe is inserted (for
appliances without drain pump only).
B1
INEFFICIENT DRAINAGE
Check if the overflow has been removed.

Check for obstruction on the waste outlet pipe and
the overflow aperture.
B2
TANK WATER LEVEL TOO HIGH
Checl< for obstruction on the waste outlet pipe and

Connections for automatic detergent dispenser

(Figure 14)
C1..C8 CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE

[E1..E8| CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE
-
The appliance continues to operate, but appropriate checl<s by a technician are recommended.
F21..F22 CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE
B4
DETERGENT/RINSE-AID DISPENSERS AND

SETTINGS
If the appliance is connected to a water softener or
osmotic device, contact the detergent supplier for a
.^specific product.
^ i'eristaltic dispensers (rinse-aid and detergent) require
periodic maintenance. The internal hose of the rinseaid dispenser should undergo periodic maintenance
(at least once or twice a year).
r l | i l . Dishwasher with incorporated detergent disl l i ' penser pump (Figure 14).
Pump "R" dispenses about 0.9 g/s of detergent. When
the appliance Is filled with water for the first time In the
day, it dispenses about 48 g of detergent in 50 sec,
thereby providing a concentration of 2 g/l. Pump "R"
dispenses about 8 g in 8 sec. at each cycle.
Dispenser operating time may be changed, following
the instructions given in the next paragraph.
Insert the hose provided in the kit into the detergent
container.
2. Dishwashers with incorporated peristaltic
rinse-aid dispenser pump (Figure i 4).
Pump "S" dispenses about 0.1 g/s of rinse-aid. It dispenses 0.4 g In 4 sec. at each rinse.
Dispenser operating time may be changed, following
the instructions given in the next paragraph,
insert the hose provided in the kit into the rinse-aid
container (in the versions without Incorporated rinseaid dispenser only).
3. Dishwashers with incorporated rinse-aid
diaphragm dispenser pump (Figure 14).
Pump 'T" is installed in appliances with pressure boiler.
Dispensed amounts may be changed according to the
instructions given In the paragraph below.
Insert the supplied hose Into the rinse-aid container (in
the versions without incorporated rinse-aid dispenser
only).
10
Figure 14
There is a ready-made impression "N" to be perforated
(0 8 mm) for positioning the detergent concentration
measuring sensor.
Inside the tank there is a hole "P" (0 10 mm) closed
with a plug, which may be used for mounting a liquid
detergent injector.
The Ecotemp versions have a hole "N" (0 22 mm) closed with a plug. The sensor and liquid detergent injector should be installed without prejudicing the
watertlghtness of the appliance.
Electrical connections for automatic detergent and
rinse-aid dispensers
Terminals are available on the power supply terminal
board for the electrical connection of external dispensers worthing at 220...240 V. Max. power 30 VA.
RgurelS
Connect the detergent dispenser between terminals 7 and 9. These connection points are live for a
set time during filling of the tank and at the start of
the wash cycle (see paragraph "Setting the dispensers").
Display of programming mode:
Initial amount of detergent:
C*n J .^ L
Setting the activation time:
Figure 16
Connect the rinse-aid dispenser between terminals 8 and 9. These connection points are live
during filling of the tank and at the end of the rinse
cycle for a set time (see "setting the dispensers"
paragraph).
MANUAL ACTIVATION
Whenever the detergent containers are replaced, it
may be necessary to activate the dispensers manually
in order to fill the hoses and eliminate any air.
Simultaneously press the buttons, as shown in the
figures below. If necessary, repeat this operation
several times.
^ ^
Initial amount of rjnse-aid:
Amount of detergent during the cycle:

DETERGENT DISPENSER
DISPENSER RINSE-AID
In the appliances with pressure boiler, the diaphragm

dispenser pump may be manually activated by pressing screw "D" (Figure 14).
B5
SETTING THE DISPENSERS
1) Peristaltic dispensers
All operations should be carried out with the appliance
switched on, the door open and no cycle selected.
Amount of rinse-aid during the cycle:
LEGEND
^
Increase
Decrease
Confirm or select next parameter
Exit from programming mode:

I
SEQUENTIAL START
Press the Indicated buttons simultaneously for 5
seconds:
GEn
Notes for external dispensers:

- \fdEt:
(S / the detergent dispenser only operates during wash pump operation; terminals 7-9
of the main terminal board are powered at the
same time.
11
Close the water supply cock.

Completely drain the tank.
Remove and carefully clean the filters.
Completely drain the incorporated dispenser
hoses, removing them from the containers. Repeat
the procedure described in the paragraph "Manual
activation" at least 3 times.
Completely drain the boiler by simultaneously pressing the buttons as shown in the figure.
the detergent dispenser only operates during filling electrovalve operation for restoring the boiler level; terminals 7-9 of the main
terminal board are powered at the same time.
-
if r j? r r 5 / the rinseâid dispenser only operates during filling electrovalve operation for restoring the boiler level; terminals 8-9 of the main
terminal board are powered at the same time.
i f ' ' ff r Sc* the rinse-aid dispenser only operates during wash pump operation; terminals 8-9 of
the main terminal board are powered at the same
time.
For connections, see the wiring diagram.
Example:
Supposing that an external detergent dispenser has
been connected with a tank concentration measuring
ênsor, a standard setting could be as follows:
d ln:Q the dispenser is not activated during filling of
the tanlc.
dEt:
'8 1 the dispenser is activated during wash
, pump operation and, thanks to the concentration
measured by the conduction sensor, the correct
amount of detergent is dispensed2) Rinse-aid diaphragm dispenser
'*
To ehange the dispensed amount, turn *(D- on screw

"D" accordingly (Figure 14).
Suggestion: to check the effectiveness of the rinseaid, look at frsshjy washed glasses against the light.
Drops of water remaining on the glass indicate an
insufficient amount while streaks indicate an excess.
Changing the detergent/rinse-aid type

If changing to a different detergent/rinse-aid type
(even one by the same manufacturer), you must rinse
the suction and pressure hoses with fresh water before
ponnecting the new detergent/rinse-aid container,
bthenwise, the mixing of different types of detergent/
rinse-aid will cause crystallisation, which may result In
a breakdown of the dosing pump. Failure to observe
this condition will invalidate the guarantee and product
^|iability.
B6
iUiAINTENANCE
Descale the boiler, the internal surfaces of the tank
and the appliance water piping once or twice a
year.
Descale the rinse and wash jets every month using
vinegar or a descaling agent.
The intemal hose of the rinse-aid and detergent
peristaltic dispenser should undergo periodic maintenance (once or twice a year).
ProSonged period of inactivity
If the dishwasher is not to be used for a long time, proceed as follows:
12
1^ I 1
hjji^
A buzzer indicates completion of drainage.

Spread a thin film of Vaseline oil over all the stainless steel surfaces.
Preventive maintenance
The preventive maintenance call may be activated
(see sen/ice manuals).
Upon reaching the set number of cycles (e.g. 20000),
CAin
appears on the display.
This message advises calling a qualified technician for

a general check-up of the state of the appliance.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER
Our appliances have been studied and optimised to give high performance. This appliance must be used exclusively
for the purpose for which it has been designed, i.e. for washing disheis with water and specific detergents. Any other
use is to be considered improper.
This appliance does not carry out the rinse cycle should there be no supply water; it stops all functions with an error
message "A1" (also see "Warning messages").
_^__
(,::)
I!E
_ _ ^
Carry out a couple of cycles without dishes to flush out any industrial grease which has remained in the
tanl< and piping.
Avoid washing decorated dishes.
Do not allow silvenware to come into contact with other metals.
Do not allow food to dry on the dishes.
Remove large food scraps from the dishes to prevent clogging the filters.
Pre-wash the dishes by spraying them with cold or lukewarm water, without using any detergent.
Use automatic dispensers for the detergent.
If there is no automatic dispenser, pour a non-foaming detergent into the tanl< when the water has reached
the washing temperature.
CONTROL PANEL
LEGEND:
A = on/off
B = drain/self-cleaning cycle
K = display
D = "tank" indicator light
E = "boiler" indicator light

J = wash cycle 1
H = wash cycle 2
F = wash cycle 5
Figure 17
The temperature shown on the display is that of the boiler if the indicator light "E" is on or of the tank if the light "D" is
on. The tank temperature is displayed during the wash cycle and the boiler temperature during the rinse cycle.
CI
STARTING
Open the water supply cock.
Switch on at the mains.
Open the door and check that all the components
are in their correct position.
Close the door and press button "A".
For atmospheric versions only:

Warning, this dishwasher does the first tank filling
through several consecutive hot rinse cycles, while the
display shows the message FILL (flowing).This system
let save up to 30% of time than traditional models.
If the door is opened during this stage the message
"CLOSE" will appear on the display:
The indicator light of button "A" (Figure 17) comes on,

indicating that the dishwasher is powered and that
water is being introduced and heated. The word "FILL"
is shown on the display during the entire filling and
heating stage:
The filling and heating stage has finished when the display shows the tank temperature:
TILL
13
To display the boiler temperature during heating of the

tanl(, open the door and press the button "J"
(Figure 17).
- Cycle III
C2
WASH CYCLES
The wash cycle includes one wash with hot water and
detergent (min 55 C or min 150 F for Marine USPH
versions) and one rinse with hot water and rinse-aid
(min 82 C or min 180 F for Marine USPH versions).
Only for models with incorporated water softener
Table of times
Standard cycle time with supply water at 50 G.
LS6/ET5/WT37
lai \m m
90" 120" 240"
WT38M
120" 180" 300'
WT38MED
300" 420" 600"
A device lengthens the cycle time if the water in the

Îboiler has not reached the minimum temperature for
correct rinsing.
The cycle times and the temperature may be personalised (e.g. increase of the rinse time and temperature).
The cycle times should only be set by a specialised
technician.
C3
OPERATION
The filling and heating stage has finished when the display shows the tank temperature:
For very dirty dishes: press button "F' (Figure 17) (see
table of times).
n .
if the salt container is empty, the message SRL u IS

displayed at the start of the cycle. Place the salt in the
special container, following the instructions given in
the section "Undercounter dishwasher with incorporated continuous water softener".
To stop the wash cycle, just press the selected
cycle button or open the door.
To continue the wash cycle, just press the selected
cycle button or close the door. The cycle starts
again from where it stopped.
At the end of the wash, the dishwasher emits a
series of beeps and "END" blinks on the display:
, END] % [
Open the door and remove the rack containing the
clean dishes.
WARNING
The appliance will not remove burnt food deposits
from dishes. Dishes with burnt-on food deposits
should be cleaned mechanically/chemically (for
example, pre-wash under running water) before
putting them in the dishwasher.
Change the water in the tank at least twice a day.
The appliance is then ready for use:

Open the door.
Pour the required amount of detergent into the tanl<
I
(in models without automatic dispenser).
Insert the rack containing the dirty dishes.
Close the door and select the suitable wash cycle;
the corresponding indicator light comes on and the
wash cycle starts:
- Cycle I
For lightly soiled dishes: press button "J" (Figure 17)
(see table of times).
Cycle II (recommended)
For normally dirty dishes: press button "H" (Figure 17)
(see table of times).
Type of racks and loading
RgurelS
YELLOW rack: for 18 plates with maximum diameter of 240 mm.
Figure 19
GREEN rack: for 12 bowls with maximum diameter
of 240 mm.
14
END
Switch off the dishwasher by pressing button "A"

(Figure 17).
Figure 20
BLUE rack for glasses: the glasses should be placed upside down.
Switch off at the mains.

Close the water supply cock.
Replace the filters and the overflow.
Remove the top and bottom jets " P and "I", unscrewing the ring nut "H".
Figure 21
YELLOW container for cutlery: insert 15 items, with

the handles pointing downwards, in each container.
Available as accessories: dividers for glasses and
rack for dishes with maximum diameter of 320 mm.
Note: if only one type of dish rack is to be used, it is
advisable to choose the GREEN rack.
C4
END OF WORK AND DAILY CLEANING
The appliance Is designed to carry out an automatic
cleaning cycle to help flush out any residues and to
guarantee greater health and hygiene:
Open the door and take out the rack containing the
clean dishes.
Remove the tank filters and the overflow "W".
Figure 22
Figure 23
Unscrew plugs "L" from the rinse jets and clean
using a water spray. Do not use sharp implements
to clean the nozzle holes, which could othen/vlse be
damaged.
Remove filters "C" and "D" and clean them under a
water spray.
Remove the filter "Z" and clean away any remained
food in order to avoid blocking the draining system.
Figure 24
Close the door.

Select the drain cycle by pressing button "B"
(Figure 17).
Upon completion of cleaning operations, replace the

parts removed previously.
The message "CLE" ("CLEAN") will be displayed

throughout the drain cycle:
Cleaning the exterior surfaces

Before carrying out any cleaning operations, turn off
the power at the mains.
Clean the stainless steel surfaces using warm soapy
water; never use detergents containing abrasive substances nor steel scrapers, common wire wool, brushes or scrapers; rinse thoroughly using a wet cloth and
carefully wipe dry. Clean the control panel using a soft
damp cloth and a neutral detergent if necessary.
Do not wash the appliance using direct or high-pressure water jets. To reduce the emission of pollutants
into the environment, clean the appliance (externally
and where necessary internally) with products having
a biodegradability of over 90%).
After a few minutes, 3 beeps indicate the end of the

cleaning cycle and "END" blinks on the display:
15
C5
UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER WITH

INCORPORATED CONTINUOUS WATER
SOFTENER
These models have a continuous softener in the
dishwasher water circuit. By means of special resins,
this device removes the calcareous substances from
the feed water, supplying decalcified water for
washing.
For the continuous softener to work properly the resins
must be regenerated periodically, with frequency
depending on the hardness of the water and the number of wash cycles carried out.
Unlike conventional water softeners, this continuous
softener does not require machine stops for regenerating the resins.
Pour approx. 1.5 kg of coarse salt [NaCO in container

"A" (an amount sufficient to fill the salt container up to
the rim) using the special funnel supplied (Figure 26).
Salt container
,^The water can only be softened if there is salt in the
^special container. The salt container must be filled
" when the dishwasher is used for the first time and
whenever the message SRL 0 is displayed at the
start of a wash cycle.
^No salt in the container
If the message SRL Q is displayed at the start of a
wash cycle, it means that the salt container is empty.
Wash cycles can be started just the same, even if the
display signals no salt; in which case the water used
for washing is not softened.
IMPORTANT:
Open the salt container only when the
message 5RL 0 is displayed. Opening
the cap when the message SRL
0 is
not displayed can cause spilling of the
saline solution and compromise correct
machine operation.
How to fill the salt container

:f Switch off the dishwasher by pressing button "A"
(Figure 17).
Figure 26
IMPORTANT:
only salt may be placed in the salt container. Do not introduce any other chemical substances such as detergent, rinse
aid or descaling agent, since these
would inevitably damage the appliance.
Such damage invalidates any warranty
and relieves the manufacturer of all liability.
Remove any traces of salt from the filling hole, the

container thread and the closing cap seal.
Refit the cap of container A, turning it clockwise
and making sure it Is tight.
IMPORTANT:
The message SRL
0 may appear for
several wash cycles even after toppinglip the salt, as the salt must circulate in
the entire system. Correct operation of
the dishwasher is not, however, affected.
The salt container always has water in it, therefore it is

normal if water comes out during filling.
i Unscrew cap "A" (Figure 25) of the salt container,

turning it anticlockwise.
Rinse-aid container
In undercounter models with incorporated continuous
water softener, the rinse-aid container is located in the
front panel of the appliance (Figure 27).
Figure 25
Figure 27
16
How to fill the rinse-aid container

Unscrew cap "B" (Figu re 27) turning it anticlockwise.
Pour the rinse-aid in container "B" up to the rim.
IMPORTANT:
Only introduce rinse-aid in the rinse-aid
container. Do not introduce other chemical substances such as detergent,
descaling agent or salt, since these
would inevitably damage the appliance.
Such damage invalidates any warranty
and relieves the Manufacturer of all liability.
Refit the cap of container "B", turning it clockwise

and making sure it is tight.
C6
WARNING MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE

CONTROL PANEL
AI
NO WATER
Check that the cock is open

Check that the water inlet filter is clean
Check the minimum mains pressure (not less than
50 kPa)
Check that the overflow pipe is inserted (for
appliances without drain pump only)
B1
INEFFICIENT DRAINAGE
Check if the overflow has been removed.

B2
TANK WATER LEVEL TOO HIGH

|C1..C8| CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE

(1..E8| CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE
-
The appliance continues to operate, but appropriate checks by a technician are recommended.
[F21..F221 CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE
17
ifi
Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional
SERVICE MANUAL
mo
I,.
o TANK
o BaLER
S PJO,
I-
PTANK
0 BOILER
00
0
0
0
.
o TANK
o BOILER
RI
0
0
Q
CONTENTS:
This document contains the instruction to change parameter settings of electronic

board by means of user interface.
EDITION:
03.2006
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional
P. 1/93
H:
Ell6Ct/I*olllX
EleCtPOniC OishWaStier
SERVICE MANUAL
INDEX
f ")
1. KEYBOARDS
1.1 HOODTYP Style
1.2 UNDERCOUNTER Style
3
3
4
2. MANUAL ACTIVATION OF DETERGENT AND RINSE AID DISPENSERS

2.1 Detergent Dispenser Activation
2.2 Rinse Aid Dispenser Activation
5
5
5
3. RINSE PUMP MANUAL ACTIVATION
4. DETERGENT AND RINSE AID DOSAGE
utn
5. COUNTERS
unt
III
General Parameters
Counters
8
8
6. TEMPERATURE SETTING
Factory Parameters
7. CYCLE SETTING
CYCLE DIAGRAM
&. 3 /
dffi
11
Cycle 1 Parameters
13
Cycle 2 Parameters
Cycle 3 Parameters
13
13
Drain/Cleaning Cycle Parameters
13
8. OTHER PARAMETERS
aPn
Dishwashing Parameters
Sil
14
14
*" O n
Read Only Parameters
14
n J. P
r c f
'-ru r
Communication and HACCP Parameters
14
Configuration Parameters
15
Parameters for automatic hood type dishwashers
16
9. SPECIAL FEATURES
9.1 RESIN REGENERATION CYCLE
9.2 MEDICAL LINE DISHWASHER WITH DOOR/HOOD LOCK DEVICE
9.3 DETERGENT AND RINSE AID LEVEL SENSORS ACTIVATION
9.4 dISHWASHER WITH INCORPORATED CONTINUOUS WATER SOFTENER
17
17
17
17
18
10. MAIN BOARD CONFIGURATION

10.1 CODE->Prog. TABLE
10.2 PROGRAMMING SHEETS
19
19
24
11. DEFAULT VALUES
33
12. USER INTERFACE AND MAIN BOARD CONNECTORS

12.1 MAIN MALFUNCTIONS NOT DUE TO THE MAIN BOARD
12.2 CONNECTORS LAYOUT
33
33
33
13. ALARM MESSAGES AND TROUBLESHOOTING
33
1 4 . 1 4 . LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR SUBSEQUENT VERSIONS
33
DOC. NO. abo.446.06
'
P.2/93
ELI
Electrolux
Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn

1. KEYBOARDS
1.1.
HOOD TYPE Style
10] 10]
dIEtl
( ')
dB ti
Fig. 1.1
Detergent dispenser
Manual Activation.
^R,:
5S ^
S
(^
(^y
IQ
MS_M
R,
1 ^ Cl
O
Fig. 1.3
Rinse Pump
Manual Activation
(used to EMPTY BOILERi)
Fig. 1.2
Rinse Aid Dispenser
Manual Activation.
SETTING MODES:
To enter into one setting mode (Fig. 1.4, Fig. 1.5) the appliance should be in stand-by: switch on the
appliance, no cycles selected. Is useful keep door open to avoid start cycle in case of not
simultaneously pressure of the two keys.
ran
fflB
r r
fflrr oo
u c *1
0
BBS'
00
Fig. 1.6
Next Parameter Family OR
Increase Parameter Value
(In setting mode only)
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
Fig. 1.5
Enter into Factory Parameters
(Hold down buttons for at least
five seconds).
Fig. 1.4
Enter into General Parameters
(l-iold down buttons for all least
five seconds).
opo "
S8B
ppr"
lu o
mm
888:
mm
888:
OH m
m
-s~^
Fig. 1.7
Decrease Parameter Value
Copyright=2005 by Electrolux Professional
BdB
s m
Fig. 1.8
Confimi Value and go
to next Parameter
(Insetting mode only)
m
Q
3881
( ^
l^fa]
P.3/93
Electrolux
SERVICE IVIANUAL
EFS ^ Dishwashing Systems Platfoim

1.2.
UNDERCOUNTER Style
o. Q 0
dEh
O.
o TANK
O BOILER
gp
o TANK
O BOILER
Fig.1.1
Detergent dispenser
Manual Activation
Q B S (TflTTsTJ S ^ a
<^
^^^
^
>
S 0 ffl a
Fig.1.2
Rinse Aid Dispensr
Manual Activation
Flg.1.3
RJnse Pump
Manual Activation
(used to EMPTY BOILER)
SETTING MODES:
To enter into one setting mode (Fig.1,4, Fig.1.5) the appliance should be in stand-by: switch on the
appliance, no cycles selected. Is useful keep door open to avoid start cycle in case of not
simultaneously pressure of the two keys.
p H S[Sr,
o]rara
OTANK
O BOILER
r
i,
OTANK
o BOILER
P
O
o TANK
O BOILER
0.
S0
Fig. 1.4
Enter into General Parameters
(Hold down buttons for at least five
seconds).
Fig.1.5
Enter Into Factory Parameters
(Hold down buttons for at least five
seconds).
0 00
B[gii:isrL^R|^ B
ass|ggg:i^^Ria a
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
Fig.1.6
Next Parameter Family
OR
Increase Parameter Value
(in setting mode only)
Fig.1.7
Decrease Parameter Value
Fig.1.8
Confimi Value and go to next Parameter
Copyrigiit 2005 by Electrolux Professional
P.4/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
2. MANUAL ACTIVATION OF DETERGENT AND REVSE AID

DISPENSERS
When replacing detergents may be necessary activate the dispensers to fill hoses.
2.1.
Detergent Dispenser Activation

Switch on the dishwasher.
Press and hold down CYCLE_2 and CYCLE INFINITE keys, after two Tjeep' the detergent dispenser
starts work for 20 sec.
oEt o
.ii
H0
B m
2.2.
Rinse Aid Dispenser Activation

Press and hold dovm CYCLE_1 and CYCLE INFINITE keys, after two Tjeep' the rinse aid dispenser
starts work for 40 sec.
rsi ,o
3. RINSE PUMP MANUAL ACTIVATION

Use this fimcrion to empty the boiler (if the dishwasher is not to be used for a long time, for maintenance operation: ex. before replacing
main board).
Close the door and press and hold down DRAIN and CYCLE INFINITE keys. A buzzer signal indicates the
rinse pump activation and the display shows three blinkinglines. Three beeps indicate the cycle end.
raraiQ
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
Copyright 2005 byElectrolirx Professional
P.5/93
Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfoim
SERVICE MANUAL
4. DETERGENT AND RINSE AID DOSAGE

bl this paragraph is explained how to set the working time for the detergent and rinse aid dispenseis.
For each dispenser there are two parameters: the initial time and the time during cycle execution.
Cfn General Parameters

Sym.
d In
r in
Parameter Description
Unit
Min
Factory
Defaolt
Max
Initial Detergent Dosage (during filling tank)
[s]
240
90
Initial Rinse Aid Dosage (starts when tank filled)
ts]
180
10
dt
Detergent Dosage During Cycle Execution (during wash phase)
[8]
182(*)
rR ,
Rinse Aid Dosage During Cycle Execution (when refilling boiler)
[s]
62()
How change the duration:

Switch OFF and switch ON the dishwasher,
Enter into the USER SETTING mode by pressing and hold down ON/OFF and CYCLE_1 keys for at least five seconds the display
shows u f t (Fig.3.1);
Press CYCLE_INFINITE. The display shows alternatively the symbol a i t and the duration in seconds (Fig.3.2 and 3.3);
NOTE: If User Interface v.3.00 tank led is on if value correspond to factoiy default (Default 1, HOOD TYPE).
Use CYCLE_1 key to decrease the duration and CYCLE_2 key to increase (Fig.3.3);
After settled the duration press CYCLE_INFINrrE key to store value, the display shows the next parameter (Fig.3.4) and the
corresponding yahie (Fig.3.5);
In the same way is possible to change the other duration; when fmished switch OFF and switch ON.
Dim
En
Fig.3.1
Enter Into User Mode
(press for 5 sec).
mn
0. S
^v:
10
i n OS
lU o
In
SS
D
Fig. 3.2
Initial detergent dosage
Fig. 3.3
Change duration.
(Tank LED Indicates default).
m 0
Fig. 3.4
Initial rinse aid dosage
dEt
fl.
oo
Cris
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
ass
Fig. 3.5
Change duration
Q 0, a
Fig. 3.6
Cyde detergent dosage
Fig. 3.7
Change time activation
(Tank LED Indicates default)
Fig. 3.8
Cyde rinse aid dosage
1
0
Fig.3:9
Change time activation
P.6/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
(*) Note for external dispensers:

. If dBt:
18 I
the detergent dispenser works when WASHING PUMP is being activated; at the same time voltage
is supplied between connectors LI7-LI9 (main terminal box);
. If dEk:
iSi
the detergent dispenser works when LOADING EV is being activated to re-fill boiler level; at the
same tiine voltage is supplied between connectors LI7-LI5 (main terminal box);
. If r/? r S /
the rinse aid dispenser works when LOADING EV is being activated to re-fill boiler level; at the same
time voltage is supplied between connectors Llj-Lls (main terminal box);
. If -/?; S ?
the rinse aid dispenser works when WASHING PUMP is heing activated; at the same time v
supplied between connectors LIj-Lls (main terminal box);
- For electrical connections refer to electric diagram -
Example
Supposefliereis connected an external determent dispenser with a probe into the tank. A typical setting could be:
a in 2
dEt:
'
/S
ta
the dispenser is not activated duringfillingtank;

I
the dispenser is supplied during washing phase and the probe automatically dose the right detergent
afnount.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.7/93
s:
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
5. COUNTERS
This Parameter Family collects cycle counters and water consumption counters.
For water consumption counters a flow meter must be installed. See rPi, (calibratioii parameter) into o r n section ( Other Parameters).
Cnb
Counters
Sym.
^ <^
Cycles performed counter.

3. symbol and two numbers blink consecutively. The cycle number is
obtained by joining the two nvmibers. Ex. L "U ->
means
10042 cycles executed.
Cycle counter (resettable).
This counter is sknilar to
but is resettable by user (see " St parameter
below).
Water Consumption.
(only for dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener).
CountsUl of water consumption.
Water Consumption.
(only for dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener).
Counts litres of water consumption.
The total consumption is given by adding n o c [m^Jandt [1] values.
Water Consumption: resettable counter, [present up to software version 3.12]
Counts the litres of water and is resettable by user ( s e e ' ' 5t parameter below).
f *^j.
ffnr
iii
S t
Min
Max
Factory
Default
[m']
ra
[1]
Reset resettable counters: C

andL >c
To reset put 1 this parameter, switch off and then on again: c"c
and t <t
will show zero. Note that C J C is used to count cycles for t n> > message
(see next parameter, O c J ) .
nuH
Store thousand of cvcles after that i. n > message appears on display.

Ex. If this parameter is settled to 20, . ' > message appears when C J C
reach 20.000 cycles.
Drain/Cleaning cycles performed.
Similar to rar
hut counts Cleaning Cycles.
.
Numbers of cycles that can be made after a regeneration cycle (only for
dishwashers with non-continuous water softener) [See paragraph 9.1 resin
regeneration cycle.].
Regeneration cycle counter (only for water softener dishwasher)
[See paragraph 9.4 Dishwashers with incorporated continuous water
softener].
nrE
only counts efficient regeneration cycles, i.e. those carried
out with salt in the special container (only for dishwashers with incorporated
continuous water softener)
Counter of regeneration cycles done without salt in the special container, (only
for dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener) [See paragraph 9.4
Dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener].
(^C O
^ r y
ff^P
il
Unit
,- ff C
EGIO
20
SSG
uc Oo
n\
Fig.4.1
USER setting mode
(press for 5s)
ass
r uro
Fig. 4.4
CYCLES
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
^n
Fig. 4:3
Counters Fam
OJ PJ 0,
SS
n in"
U
L III. 0
Fig.4.2
Next Family
lUo
g 0 0.
JFig. 4.5 0.
Thousand.
c yco
U TIT o
Dl
Fig. 4.6
Units.
O.PJ Q
Rira y
Fig. 4.7
Next counter.
P.8/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
6. TEMPERATURE SETTING
In this paragraph is explained how to change temperature thresholds and all parametersrelatedto boiler and tank.
f/?r
Sym.
btl
Boiler Temperature: THRESHOLD.

When boiler temperature reaches this value, heaters switch off.
Boiler Temperature HISTERESIS, (represent dead band).
Heater switch on if boiler temperature is below: b t l bkH
Boiler Temperature: HIGH LIMIT.
When boiler temperature reaches this value t t alarm appears.
htH
bH ,
i
Factory Parameters
bio
bfl
bRJ
bP
bSt
bkd
kkl
kkH
kH ,
j. ^ Q
^ P (_
Put 0 to disable t t alarm.

Boiler Temperature: LOW LIMIT.
During boiler warm-up, temperature must increase at least OL O C otherwise
t 3 warning appears.
Put 0 to disable C 3 warning.
Boiler Filling Timeout
If filling time is longer than bFi,R
t alarm appears.
Put 0 to disable fl alarm.
Boiler Temperature Adjust
Boiler Priority (enable boiler wait function)
0=disabled
l=enabled
Booster Function
Overheat gap over Boiler Temperature Threshold
Boiler temperature negative differential: when the dishwasher is in standby,
boiler threshold becomes:
(Used to save e n e r ^ during machine inactivity by keeping boiler water at a
lower temperature).
Tub Temperature: THRESHOLD
When tank temperature reaches this value, heater switch off
Tub Temperature: HISTERESIS, (represent dead band).
Heater switch on iftank temperature is below: C C1. ' CCn
Tank Temperature: HIGH LIMIT.
When tank temperature reaches this value t j alarm appears.
Put 0 to disable . J alarm.
Tank Temperature: LOW LIMIT.
During tank warm-up, temperature must increase at least Dt O C otherwise
c c warning appears.
Put 0 to disable C C warning.
Tank Filling Tmieout.
If fiUiiig time is longer than kr >. ^H i alarm appears.
Put 0 to disable n
< alarm.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
Unit
Min
Max
Factory
Default
[C]
45
95
78
[C]
10
[C]
98
96
[C]
10
[min]
42
[C]
PC]
15
rc]
20
:[C]
40
85
63
PC]
30
PC]
95
75
[C]
10
[min]
42
20
P.9/93
Electrolux
EFS ^ Dishwashing Systems Platform
SERVICE MANUAL
To modify thresholds do the following:

Switch OFF and switch ON the dishwasher;
Enter into the FACTORY SETTING mode by pressing and hold down ON/OFF and CYCLE_2 keys for at leastfiveseconds (Fig,5.1);
PressCYCLEINFINTFE. The display showsaltemativelythesymbol o t t (Fig.5.2) and the corresponding value Q (Fig.5.3);
Use CYCLE_1 key to decrease the value and CYCLE_2 key to mcrease (Fig.4.3);
Press CYCLE INFITE key to confirm. The display shows the next parameter (Fig.4.4) and the corresponding value (Fig.4.5);
In the same way is possible to change the other parameters; whenfinishedswitch OFF and switch ON.
rao
PR[r
btr"L
00
ni
yd
Fig. 5.1
Factory setting mode
000
SOS
0 00
htH
(O o
^^s
&Sfor
000
00
'oH ,
n
Dj
o. g ^
fQ-;
~j.
Fig. 5.5
Change value & Store
^ bu o o
00
Fig. 5.6
Tank temp. High limit.
la
Fig. 5.4
Boiler Temp Hysteresis
Fig.5.3
Fig. 5.2
reshol
Boiler temp, threshold
Fig. 5.7
At the end the display will show again 'FAC and by pressing CYCLE_2 key (Fig.4.9) is possible to change cycle duration (see next
paragraph).
ffl
ff^ro(.
mm
r o
FR[
Fig. 5.9
Factory setting mode
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
000
Flg. 5.10
Next Family
[!^ i:
ij ^
Fig. 5.11
Cycle 1 Family: ENTER
Copyright 20U Dy Jilectrolux Professional
P.10/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
EFS - Dishwashmg Systems Platform

7. CYCLE SETTING
In this paragraph is explained how to change cycle phases duration (see Tab.l next page).
Switch on the dishwasher;

Enter into the FACTORY SETTING mode: press and hold down ON/OFF and CYCLE_2 keys for at least 5 seconds (Fig.5.1);
Press CYCLE_2 key to select CYCLE_1 parameters.
Press CYCLE_INFINrrE. The display shows alternatively the symbol (Fig.5.2) and the corresponding value (Fig.5.3);
Use CYCL_1 key to mcrease the value and CYCLE_2 key to decrease (Fig.5.3);
Press CYCt.E_lNFINlTE key to confirm. The display shows the next parameter (Fig.5.4) and the corresponding value (Fig.5.5);
In the same way is possible to change the other parameters;
paB
0
fSf
r
FRC
Fig. 6.1
Factory setting mode.
SSS
tn<'
r ^
t o
Fig.6.2
Select next class.
ass.
SQS
rasa
Fig. 6.3
Cycle 1 Family; ENTER
Lr,
0am
Fig. 6.4
Wasti duration [min].
Q^D
Sh i
Rg. 6.5
Ctiange value & Store.
BS
Cs's
Fig. 6.6
VVash duration [sec].
Fig. 6.7
Change value & Store.
After settled all parameters referring Cycle 1, by pressing CYCLE_2 key is possible to change the Cycle 2 parameters (Fig.5.8,5.9) and so
on.
O O O
ru*"
O O O
i nS \
aQ
mn
Q
FIg. 6.8
Cycle 1 Parameters.
'
Flg. 6.9
Cycle 2 Parameters: ENTER
HS
Fig. 6.10
VVash duration [min].
raoo
LHE\
a 1
n
FIg. 6.11
Cycle 2 Parameters:
next Family
DOC. NO. 5956.446:06
O
H3:
im
FIg, 6.12
Cycle 3 Parameters:
ENTER
Ln3l
a
m
Fig. 6.13
Wash duration [min].
P. 11/93
Electrolux
SERVICE IVIANUAL

CYCLE DIAGRAM
CYCLE TYME
WASH
<
IPR
Ln Sh
Pfi
PRE RINSE
')
Pr
RINSE
*
- ^ >
r 1
> COLD RINSE
er
DRAIN
->i
RINSE PAUSE:
PR
FINAL
PAUSE
FP
DETERGENT
dEt
RINSE AID
rH (
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
Copyright 2005 by JEUectrolux Professional
P.12/93
Electrolux
Ti//
Syrn.
Lni
ShI
PR 1
Pr i
r ,1
SERVICE MANUAL
Cycle 1 Parameters
Unit
Min
Max
Factory
Defoult
Wash Phase Long
[min]
20
Wash Phase Short
60
35
Pause
[s]
20
Pre-rinse Duration
30
Rinse Phase Duration
[s]
10
45
16
er \
Cold Rinse Phase Duration
50
dr 1
FPI
Drain
W
W
W
40
16
60
Factory
Defoult
Final Pause at End of Cycle
L'iB Cycle 2 Parameters

Sym.
Unit
Min
Max
InE
Sh?
PRS
Prd
r ,?
cri
drS
fPS
Wash Phase Long
[min]
20
Wash Phase Short
[s]
60
45
Pause
[s]
20
Pre-rinse Duration
[s]
30
[s]
10
45
16
[s]
50
Drain
[s]
40
16
60
Unit
Min
Max
Factory
Default
In3
Shi
PR3
Pr 3
r ,3
Wash Phase Long
[min]
20
Wash Phase Short
60
40
Pause
[s]
20
Pre-rinse Duration
[s]
30
[s]
10
45
16
cr3
50
dr3
FP3
bt3
Drain
[s]
40
16
[s]
60
[C]
95
Unit
Min
Max
Factory
Defonlt
Ti/J
Sym.
rn
Cycle 3 Parameters
Boiler Temperature Threshold: only for Cycle 3.

This parameter allows haying a different rinsing temperature for the
third cycle. Only values above 45C are allowed.
Drain/Cleaning Cycle Parameters
Sym.
idr
fdr
drk
Initial Drain Phase Duration
[s]
240
40
Final Drain Phase Duration
[s]
240
60
Drain without cleaning cycle
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P. 13/93
S]
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
8. OTHER PARAMETERS
dPR Dishwashing Parameters

Sym.
IPff
di^
Pdr
rPR
r f
r ,t
PPL
CdE
!IE
IH5
HE
?HS
Unit
Mm
Max
Factory
Default
Initial Pause before start washing (for ALL cycles)
[s]
10
Delay for the 2' wash pump (PW only)
[s]
10
Active a drain phase at the end of washing phase.
[s]
40
[s]
60
[p/1]
255
255
140
255
SO
.0
255
140
255
SO
Duration of pause after rinse cycle (valid for dishwashers with door/hood
lock device) [See par. 9.2 Medical line dishwasher with door/hood lock
device].
Celsius/Falffenheit selection
0 .= C e l s i u s
1 = Fahrenheit
Rinse Temperature Display.
Enable rinse temperature probe (if installed).
0 = during rinse phase the display shows boiler temperature;
1 = during rinse phase the display shows rinse temperature;
Pulse Per Litre.
This parameter must be settled in according to flow meter installed
[present up to software version 3.121.
Number of wash cycles perforraable without detergent (only fi?r
dishwashers with external detergent level sensor - par. 9.2.1 Detergent
and rinse aid level sensors activation) [iS: 1]
ftessure sensor threshold ! [present up to software version 2,1!].
Pressuie sensor histeresis I [present up to software version,2.11 ].
Pressure sensor threshold 2 [present up to software version 2,11],
Pressuie sensor histeresis 2 [present up to software version 2.1 i].
Note: f> ir, f^3^ Ci. r , cHji paratneters emulates a two levels pressure switch, keep in mind diat value doesn't correspond to a
physical quantity.
con
Read Only Parameters
Sym.
rEl
rtS
Main Board Firmware Release
flfr
*"0
Ei\
Min
Max
r. ^
Default
Min
Max
.Default
, < \I
63
,-
Water softener board software version, (only for dishwashers with

incorporated continuous water softener).
Active column: indicates through which of the two continuous water
softener columns boiler filling is being carried out: 0 = column A and 1 =
column B (only for dishwashers with incorporated continuous water
softener).
When V n > < message appears, the parameter value becomes 3.

After maintenance, to clear
f S
Unit
message, insert 0.
WhenT fl alarm appears, the machine isfrozenand this parameter is 3.

After tnaintenance (see alarm codes document), insert 0 to enable the
machine.
This alarm appears in case of malfimctioning in the continuous water
softener. To fecilitate fault-finding, see par. E "Alarm codes that stop the
machine for models with incorporated continuous water softener".
HIP Communication and HACCP Parameters

Sym.
Sf.
Serial Device
0 = 8N1
1 = PC connection
(DAAS 8E1)
7 = HACCP network
(ECAP 8E1+LK485)
(LK485 board i s n e c e s s a r y )
9 = Dishwashers w i t h i n c o r p o r a t e d continuous
water s o f t e n e r
DOC. NO. 5956.445.G6
Unit
Copyright 2005 by Electrolvix Professional
P.14/93
H]
Electrolux
SERVICE IVIANUAL
11 = Machines with incorporated continuous water

softener that communicate with LK485 board
16 = HACCP printer (8N1)
32 = MODEM GSM
(DAAS 8N1)
33 = MODEM GSM
(DAAS 8E1)
48 = Hyper Terminal (8N1)
Hdr
Prn
bt
bH
kk
kH
CF
Sym.
k^P
Address.
This parameter specifies the address of the appliance into the
'HACCP_network'.
Works only if 'HAGCP networic' is selected (see above parameter).
Print parameter table.
HACCP 'Basic' (printer)
Boiler temperature: high limit.
Boiler temperature: gap below high limit.
HACCP'Basic'(printer)
Tank temperature: high limit.
Tank temperature: gap below high limit
255
ra
45
95
90
[C]
20
10
PC]
35
75
[C]
20
10
Unit
Min
Max
Factory
Default
85
75
Configuration Parameters
Dishwasher Model:
b = HOOD TYPE & XJNDERCGUNTER
1 = POT WASHER
2 = AUTOMATIC POT WASHER
3 = MEDICAL LINE DISHWASHER WITH LOCK DOOR/HOOD
DEVICE
hn
Boiler type:
0 = ATMOSPHERIC BOILER
1 = PRESSURE BOILER
2 = EXTERNAL BOILER
doO
Door type:
0
1
2
3
(4 Fl
=
=
=
=
AUTOMATIC HOOD
MANUAL HOOD
;FRONT LOADIHG
POT WASHER
Defmlt mode] (see Default tables):

1 = HOOD TYPE
2 = POT WASHER
3 = UNDEECOUNTER
^ ^
Jj
t
*
^^f
LES
U j
Solid State Relay (TRIAC).

0 = not enabled;
1 = SOFT START enabled;
3 = SLOW SOFT START enabled
(works only on boards with Solid State Relay).
BoilerA'ank heating swap:
0 = boiler heaters and tank heater can work simultaneously;
1 = swap enabled: tank heating starts only boiler temperature is
reached;
(Note: disablmg this fimction changes the global electrical power of
appliance; before enabling this fimction check available power, supply cable
section, fuses in according to User Manual).
Tank FiUing Mode
Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsmgcycles.
Ex: bkf = 75 means that boiler water is heated .at 75C, then follows a
rinse phase and so on imtil tank is full.
Iffat r = 0 the tank isfilledby solenoid valve in the traditional way (mode
not settable on machines with incorporated continuous water softener).
Detergent Level Switches
0 = level switches not enabled;
1 = enable detergent levelSwitches;
USER INTERFACE MODEL
8 = ACTIVE function disabled (up to version 3.11 |up to serial nr.
42100099]set to 0)
9 = hood type, under counter (up to version 3.11 [up to serial nr.
42100099]set to 1)
13 = LS5 with atmospheric boiler(up I version 3.11 |up to serial nr.
42100099) set to S)
15 = LS5 with pressure boiler (user interface without display); (np to
version 3.11 [up to serial nr. 42100099] set to 7)
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
[C]
15
P.15/93
a:
Electrolux
.C
f^lf
/?/?c
frO
SrU
bPo
SERVICE MANUAL
See parameter *" c t (family r o O) to check fhe software version

installed in the board.
Enable "regeneration cycle" key (only for dishwashers with non-continuous
water softener) [See paragraph 9.1 resin regeneration cycle].
ALARMS ENABLE
0 = alarms disabled (to disable also warnings see o i. O and C. O);
1 = alarms enabled;
If thisfimctionis disabled, faults can be detected so display do not shows
any alarm code.
Air gap with float level sensor noimally closed (the level sensor is closed
when the boiler is empty). E.g. the boiler level sensor for machines with
incorporated continuous water softener.
Forced start of a resin regeneration cycle (only for dishwashers with
incorporated continuous water softener). [See paragraph 9.4 Dishwashers
with incorporated contmuous water softenerl.
Max. rinse water hardness (only for dishwashers with incorporated
continuous water softener). After modifying, disconnect and reconnect the
machine's main power supply by means of the main switch. [See paragraph
9.4 Dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener].
Boiler heating control.
Defines the max. permissible temperature difference during boiler heating in
a time interval of 2 minutes and 30 seconds.
14
10
25
80
50
Unit
Min
Max
Factory
Default
0.1s
0.0 s.
20.0s
IS
0.1s
0.0 s.
20.0 s
200
0.1s
0.0 s.
20.0 s
IS
0.1 5
0.0 s.
20.0 s
10
0.1s
0.0 s.
20.0 s
20
0.1s
0.0 s.
20.0 s
20
250
100
250
dbG Parameters for automatic hood type dishwashers

Sym.
t 1
t ^
t 3
b H
t S
k 5
RL.
Ikh
Ikh
DELAY_K1
Time (during hood lifting) within which S3" must return to die rest position.
HOOD_TOUT
TIMEOUT - max. time allowed for complete hood opening/closing.
DELAY_K1_S3
During hood lowering, firstly S3" must cut in and then after a time
t 3 .the bottom limit switch S3.
DELAY_K
Time within which K and K' must be both closed or both open.
DELAY_S3
Time during hood lifting within which the bottom limit switch must return
to the rest position..
DELAY_S5
Time during hood lowering within which the top limit switch must return to
the rest position.
Displays the last alarm code relative to automatic hood type dishwashers.
Parameter only, valid for hood type models.
Hood hfting motor absorption threshold.
(50 units correspond to a current of approx. 1 ampere).
Paiametro valido solo per cappottine.
Soglia limite di assorbimento del mptore di sollevamento della cappotta
(50 Unit corrispondono ad una corrente di circa un ampere).
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
100
P.16/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
9. SPECIAL FEATURES
9.1 RESIN REGENERATION CYCLE
o TANK
O BOILER
The regeneration cycle is activated by pressing the button shown in the figure, for at least 5 seconds.
For this key to be enabled parameter <" C (in family i. r u) must be set to 1.
f - - ,1
At this point you can enter the number of wash cycles that can be performed after each regeneration: parameter <" t 3 in the
counters family L nt.
if ft."
is set to zero the counter is disabled, otherwise after the preset number of cycles the
message <* c u is displayed to confinn that regeneration is possible (this is an Infonnatlon-pniy message vi/lth no effect on
operation of the appliance, so you can continue to use the dishwasher). The message is cleared when the regeneration cyde is
terminated.
The number of regeneration cycles performed can be checked by consulting the parameter HfC in the t H e family of
counter;.
When there are just 15 cycles remaining before the next regeneration cycle, at the end of the wash cyde the display shows the
messages 1 0 followed by 5, at the end ofthe next wash cycle the display shows COO and , and so forth, i.e. the
display informs the user of the number of wash cycles still available before resin regeneration is required.
Before starting the regeneration cyde remove the siphon spillway.
CAUTION: if the regeneration cycle is acddentally started, it can be switched off by pressing the button shown in the figure, for
at least 5 seconds.
The hardness of the water exiting the softener can vary between 3fH -10 "fH /1.7 dH - 5.6 "dH / 2.1 cH - 7 cH.
9.2 MEDICAL LINE DISHWASHER WITH DOOK/HOOD LOCK DEVICE

The medical line dishwasher with door/hood lock device has a device that prevents door/hood opening for the entire duration of
the work cyde.
For the door/hood lock to be active, the parameter
(in the r ^ u family) must be set to .3.
The dishwasher door/hood is locked at the start of a wash cycle and is released at the end of the final pause after rinse. The
wash compartment can be accessed by stopping the work cycle in progress, as the locking device is thus disabled.
A pause at the end ofrinsecan be set by means of the parameter''
family). This parameter is common to all
3 wash cydes. Therinsewater temperature is displayed during this pause. Another final pause in the cyde can be set by setting
the parameters f'
(,r re ,rr 3_ During the final pause the display shows the time remaining for completion of the cycle.
The door/hood lock device will be deactivated at the end of the final p^^seifPifP?fP3l
For coH'ect performance of the wash cycle the pause at the end ofrinseand the final pause must assume the default values
(see Prog 032 - 034 - 035).
9.3 DETERGENT AND RINSE AID LEVEL SENSORS ACTIVATION

By setting the parameter J. t 5 (in the t. r u family) to / , management of the level sensors located inside the external
detergent andrinseaid tanks is enabled. During therinsephase, when therinseaid inside the tank has finished, the message
fnt
u appears on the display.
When the detergent inside the tank is finished, the message
is displayed and after a number of wash cydes equal
to r dE (in the dPf^ family) the dishwasher inhibits the activation of other wash cycles. Therefore the detergent level in the
tank must be restored.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
F. 17/93
EilGCtFOluX
EleCtrOnJC D i s h W a s h e P
SERVICE MANUAL
9.4 DISHWASHER WITH INCORPORATED CONTINUOUS WATER SOFTENER

Dishwashers with Incorporated continuous water softener have a continuous softener in the water circuit. By means of special
resins, this device removes the calcareous substances from the feed water, supplying decalcified water for washing.
To activate the continuous water softener, set the parameter
(in the HEP family) to the value 3 or the value / / if the
water softener board is connected to the LK485 board.
For the continuous softener to work properly the resins must be regenerated periodically with a frequency depending on the
hardness of the inlet water, the number of wash cycles carried out and the max. hardness set with the parameter 5 f" u (in the
[Fu
family).
Unlike conventional water softeners, this continuous softener does not require machine stops for regenerating the resins.
To regenerate the resins it is necessary to put kitchen salt in the special container located in the dishwasher.
In particular, the salt container must be filled when the dishwasher Is used for the first time and whenever the message
is displayed at the start of a wash cycle. The salt container holds up to 1.5 kg of salt.
li
IMPORTANT: The message

may appear for several wash cycles even after topping-up the salt, as the salt must
circulate in the entire system. Connect operation of the dishwasher is not, however, affected.
The number of regeneration cycles performed can be checked by consulting the parameter Of C in the i. fit family of
counters.
o r f only counts regeneration cycles carried out with the salt container adequately filled; there is another counter, r E 5 (in the
Cnt family) that indicates the number of regeneration cycles done without salt.
If the parameter JfU
Is set to the value i u , according to the fadory setting, the water softener outlet water hardness can
vary between 3flH - 1 0 fH/ 1.7 "dH - 5.6 "dH / 2.1 cH - 7 "cH.
Maximum outlet water hardness can be modified by setting the S r t / value. The outlet water hardness can be modified from the
value of 4 AH to 14 fH.
NB: To save the aew water hardness value, in addition to the normal parameter modification and saving operations it is necessary to
disconnect and reconnect the machme's main power supply by means of the main switch on the external board.
Water softener operation can be checked by forcing t:he regeneration of resins, without waiting
for t:he outlet water hardness to reach the set max. value ( 3 ^ u ) .
To do this, wait for the water softener to finish previous resin washing or regeneration operations and set the parameter fr
(Cfu family) to ' for regenerating column A or to ? for regenerating column B.
Switch the machine off and on again so that it carries out complete regeneration of the set column. If previous resin washing or
regeneration operations were not completed, the manual request for regeneration is not canried out.
It is possible to check which column is being used for boiler filling by querying the parameter flflf (< oo family): if RUC = 0
column 'A is used, if RRC =1 column "B" is used.
The number of litres used by the machine can be checked by querying the parameters nnc (m3) and i (litres). To calculate the
totalnumberof litres used by the machine, add the nnc andX values.
NB: In machines with incorporated continuous water softener, tank filling cannot be carried out through overflowing (btF=0) hot
only by means of successive rinse cycles (btF=75). Therefore the btF parameter must be set to 75.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.18/93
Electrolux
Eleetronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

10. MAIN BOARD CONFIGURATION

When receivmg an eleetronic board (spare part) may be necessary to configure it in according to the machine where has to be replaced.
1.
2.
3.
With the machine CODE enter into the following table and read die corresponding Prog, number;
Follow the instructions reported into the corresponding Prog.XXX sheet (next pages).
With the machine CODEfindthe Layout number in Par. 12.2 - Connectors layout.
10.1. CODE->Prog. TABLE

MODEL
CODE Prog. Layout
MODEL
CODE
Prog. Layout
WT4
400007
021
11
LS6EA/60
502041
oil
WT4B
400008
020
WT38DD
502110
Wr4D
400009
021
11
WT37
502111
046
046
WT4DB
400015
020
WT38
502112
046
IWT46
400016
020
WT 37/4.5
502117
046
m4G
400017
022
WT 38/4.5
502118
046
I/VT4DG
400018
022
I/VT37/UK
502122
046
WT4WS1
400019
024
11
WT38C
502125
033
I/VT4BWS
400027
012
WT38C60
502126
033
lT4DWS1
400028
024
11
I/VT38CUK
502127
033
1/VT4BDWS
400029
012
WT38/4.5NW
502129
I/VT4D60
400042
021
WT 38/UK
502217
046
046
LS5/1
400100
021
WT37J60
502218
046
LS5/1 DP
400102
021
WT37J50
502219
046
LS5/1WS
400103
024
LS6AH240U
502312
027
LS5/1WSDP
400110
024
m-30H208U
502313
031
LS5/3
400112
020
WT30H240U
502314
031
LS5/3 DP
400113
020
WT30H208DU
502315
031
LS5/3WS
400114
012
i;\rr30H240DU
502316
031
.S5/3WSDP
400115
012
Wt30H208RU
502317
031
LS5/3WSDPD
400117
012
I/VT30H240RU
502318
031
LB5G
400118
022
LS6H208DU
502319
027
LB5GDP
400119
022
LS6AH208U
502320
027
LS5/1DP60
400124
021
11
WT 38/60
502321
046
LS5/1DPAUS
400125
036
11
WT38/M60
502322
015
LS6EP
S02003
013
WT38MED
502323
014
LS6EP/DD
502004
013
LS6H240DU
502325
027
LS6EA/DD
502005
Oil
1:S6H208RU
502326
027
LS6EA/DD/DP
502006
Oil
LS6H240RU
502327
027
WT38TDE
502007
032
10
WT30M208U
502328
034
10
I/VT38/M50
502008
015
WT30M240U
502329
034
10
LS6EADPWS
502014
044
WT30M208DU
502339
034
10
LS6EADPWSG
502015
044
WT30M240DU
502341
034
10
Wt38WS
502016
048
WT30M208RU
502342
034
10
I/VT38WSG
502017
048
WT30M240RU
502343
034
10
I/VT38MEDWS
502018
045
WT30C208DU
502344
038
WT38PM5q
502019
039
WT30e240DU
502345
038
I/VT37LEV/9
502020
051
WT38PM60
502346
039
WT38M50/4
502029
015
WT38M60/4
502347
015
LS6EA/yK
502030
Oil
LS6EA
502520
Oil
LS6EA/UKDP
502031
Oil
LS6EA/DP
502521
Oil
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P. 19/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL

MODEL
CODE
Prog. Layout
MODEL
CODE
Prog. Layout
LS6EAH
S02S23
011
I/VT60UKCW
504162
001
LS6MCD
502524
033
LS 12 AU
504163
004
LU7PDP
503020
040
LS12UKDPCW
504164
001
LU7ADP
503021
041
ECOTEMP12SW
504165
001
lftn"U40PDP
503023 :
040
lOTeSEBI
504166
001
IOTU40ADP
503024
047
I/VT65EBIA
504167
004
LS 10
504100
002
WT65EIA
504168
004
001
001
LS14EA
504101
001
WTeSEO
504169
LS 10 UK DP
504102
002
WT65EB60
504170
ET12E
504104
003
WT 60 U/400
504171
006
-S 10/60HZ
504105
002
WT 60 U/440
504172
006
LS10CW
504107
002
WT65EBIDG
504173
001
LS 10 INS
504108
002
WT65EBASIA
504174
009
HT 1200 ins DEK
504109
001
WT65EIM50
504175
006
LS14EA/INS
504110
001
WT65EIM60
504176
006
LS I O N
504111
002
WT 60 MX 220/60
504177
001
LS 10 DP
504114
002
LS 12 CW INS
504178
001
LS 10 HD
504115
008
LS14ADP/G
504179
001
4
4
LS14EA/AU
504116
004
WT65MED
504180
010
LS14EA/60
504117
001
WT65EJ50
504183
001
LS 10 UK1
504118
002
WT65EJ60
504186
001
LS 10 UK3
504119
002
LS14AH240U
504187
028
LS 12 INS
504120
001
WT65H208U
504188
028
LS 12
504121
001
WT65H240U
504189
028
LS 12 DP
504122
001
LS12ASIACW
504190
009
LS 12 60Hz
504125
001
WT60ASIACW
504191
009
LS12CW
504128
001
LS 12 ASIANS
504192
00?
HT 1200 DEK
504129
001
WT60ASIANB
504193
009
LS14EA/ASIA
504131
009
LS14H208DU
504194
028
LS14EA/G
504133
001
LS14AH208U
504195
028
I/VT60DP
504134
001
LS14H240DU
504196
028
IWT60
504135
001
LS14H208RU
504197
028
iflfreocw
504136
001
LS14H240BU
504198
028
l/VT 60 UK DP CW INS
504137
001
WT65H208DU
504199
028
I/VT60INS
504138
001
Wr65H240DU
504200
028
lVr60CWINS
504139
001
WT65H208RU
504201
028
m 60 AU CW
504140
004
WT65H240RU
504202
028
IWT60AUN
504141
004
WT65M208U
504203
035
12
12
LS10EA
504142
002
WT65M240U
504204
035
m 60/60HZ
504145
001
WT65M208DU
504205
035
12
IWT60/60HZCW
504146
001
WT65M240DU
504206
035
12
W60N
504151
001
WT65M208RU
504207
035
12
WT 60 N INS
504152
001
WT65M240RU
504208
035
12
LS 12 HD
504153
007
LS14EAWS
504209
042
LS14EA/DD
504155
001
LS14ADPWSG
504210
042
WT65E
504156
001
LS14EAIWS
504211
042
WT65EB
504157
001
WT65EBWS
504212
042
WT65EI
504158
001
WT65BIDWSG
504213
042
WT 60 AU DP
504159
004
WT65EBIWS
504214
042
LS12UK/3CW
504161
001
WT65MEDWS
504215
043
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
4
4
P.20/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL

MODEL
lT65ROW
LS14R0W
CODE Prog. Layout

504219
504220
MODEL
052
UC5/1DP
052
UC5/1WSDP
CODE Prog. Layout

690010
021
11
690011
024
11
020
LS9P
505022
019
LD5DP
690013
LS9P DD
505033
019
LD5
690014
020
LS9A UK
505034
018
FL 620EP
698003
013
LS9P6
505035
019
ET5EDG
698004
023
I/VT55P
505038
019
LV6EP
698006
013
lflrr55P6
505039
019
H3300
698007
029
LS9ADGi
505041
018
H2500
698008
019
OT55ADG1
505042
018
H3500
698009
001
4
8
LS9PAUS
505043
019
ET5EDCW
698010
016
WT55PM50
505044
019
13
LV6EADPWS
698011
048
WT55PM60
505045
019
13
HT1200WS
698012
042
PPW1M
506010
005
HT1200IWS
506011
FL620ADPWS
048
PPW1 60 Hz
506012
005
005
698013
698014
042
PPW1 M UK
H1310SANA
698016
030
PPW1 MH
506013
005
H1510SANA
698017
010
PPW2M
506014
005
LV1200IWS
PPW2 M UK
506015
005
HT900P
698018
698022
042
019
PPW2 60 Hz
506016
005
LV900P
698023
019
PPW2V
506017
005
LD900
698024
019
m'SSO M
506018
005
LU700PDP
698033
040
l/\n"830 M UK
506019
005
LU700ADP
698034
047
IVT830 60HZ
506020
005
PWlOp M
698040
005
WT850M
506022
005
PW200M
698041
005
WT850 M UK
506023
005
PW20 V
698042
005
WT850 60 Hz
506024
005
PW100MH
698043
005
I/VT850V
506025
005
LV100M
698044
005
WT830 MH
506026
005
LV200M
698045
005
m"830EA
506215
017
HT 1200
698050
001
4
4
WT850EA
506216
017
HT 1000
698051
002
I/VT830EAG
506217
017
HT 1000 INS
698052
002
WT850EAG
017
037
5
3
HT 1200 INS
698053
001
IWT830M208U
506218
506029
OT830M240U
506030
037
I/VT830H208U
506031
037
WT830H240U
506032
037
WT850M208U
506033
037
WT850M240U
506034
037
PW1M208U
506035
037
PW1M240U
506036
037
PW1MH208U
506037
037
PW1MH240U
506038
037
PW2M208U
506039
037
PW2M240U
506042
037
FL5
690004
020
FL5DP
690005
020
LV5
690006
020
LV5DP
690007
LV5/3WSDP
690008
FL5/3WSDP
690009
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
HT 1200 DP
698055
001
ET12EIG
698056
026
ET12EI
698057
025
LV1000
698059
002
LV1200INS
698060
001
ET12EICWG
698061
001
ET12EICW
698062
025
ET12EIF
698065
050
FL620EA
698070
046
FL 620EADP
698071
046
ET5E
698076
016
ET5ED
698077
016
FL 620EP/DD
698078
013
FL620EA/DD
698079
046
FL 620EADP/DD
698080
046
020
LV6EA
698081
046
012
LV6EADP
698082
046
012
P.21/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL

Electrolux Professiphal
MODEL
Al
CODE
Prag. Layout
EtSDF
698090
049
LS10INSDP
S36220
LS 10 INS
MODEL
CODE Prog. Layout
HT1200
S47B9i
001
002
LS12UK/3CW
S47BJI
001
S37858
002
LS 12 GW
S47C1Z
001
LS 10
S39968
002
l/VT 60 CW
S47C6B
001
LS 10/fiera
S42549
002
LS 12 GW
S47CCS
001
LS 10 INS
S43062
002
WT 60
S47CCY
001
LS 10
S43327
002
WT 60 GW
S47CEA
001
HT 1000
S475CH
002
WT 60/9
S47CEH
001
LS 10 GW
S47APN
002
WT 60/9
S47CEI
001
LS 10 GW
S47CF5
002
WT60
S47CKD
001
LS 10 CW
S470U4
002
LS 12 GW
D04713
001
LS 10 GW
S47DU7
002
LS 12 CW
S34369
001
LS10CW
S47DUA
002
WT 60 giappone
334377
001
LS 10 GW
S47DUF
002
l/VT 60 giappone
S34378
001
LS 10 CW
S47E17
002
WT 60 giappone
S35178
001
LS 10 CW
S47E2C
002
WT 60 giappone
S35179
001
LS 10 GW
S47E2H
002
LS12CVV
335246
001
LS 10 GW
S47E2M
002
HT1200
335330
001
LS 10 GW
S47E2R
002
WT 60 giappone
336384
001
LS10UK1
S47E50
002
WT 60 giappone
336385
001
LS 10 CW
S47E6M
002
LS 12 GW
336846
001
HT1200
S46002
001
LS 12CW
336847
001
IWT60CW1NS
S46880
001
HT1200
339964
001
HT1000
S4734M
002
HT1200
344)472
001
WT60/9
S47539
001
ECOTEMP12
340785
003
wreora
S4756
001
WT 60/9 INS
341170
001
WT60/9
S4756P
001
HT1200
341185
001
WT60 INS
S47SGJ
001
LS 12 INS
342032
001
WT60 INS
S475GY
001
WT60/60HZ
342170
001
WT60CW
S476HA
001
LS 12/fiera
342550
001
LS 12 HD
S4775E
007
WT60/60HZ
S42617
001
HT1200
S4777U
001
WT 60 N
343119
001
LS 12 CW INS
S477BM
001
LS12GW
343488
001
l/VT 60 AU CW
S477JR
004
LS 12 INS
343563
001
IWT60INS
S477M1
001
LS 12 DP GW
343734
001
WT60INS
S477M1
001
LS12CW
343806
001
OT60NINS
S477MB
001
LS12CW
343830
001
m " 60/60HZ DP
S477QB
001
WT 60 GW INS
S44421
001
LS 12 GW INS
S477V7
001
LS6EA
3477BL
011
WT60DP
847811
001
WT37
S4784U
011
IWT60/9
S4781D
001
LS6EA
34787B
011
l/VT 60/60HZ DP
S4781I
001
FL 620EA
3478BN
011
l/VT 60/9 INS
S4786P
001
WT830 MH
346881
005
WT 60 U/230
S478KF
006
RPW1 M
34758V
005
LS 12 GW INS
S478LV
001
WT830 MH
3476YZ
005
\/VT60GWINS
S478SP
001
PPW1 MH
3477IT
005
LS 12 GW INS
S479VE
001
WT830 M
S479Q3
005
l/VT 60
S479Z3
001
PPW1 M UK
347BKQ
005
OT60
S479Z9
001
WT 60 CW INS
S47CPB
001
WT 60 AU CW
S47AP80
004
WT 60 GW INS
347CQS
001
LS12CW
S47APP
001
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.22/93
Electrolux
MODEL
CODE Prog. Layout
ECOTEMP 12 SW
S47CVG
S47CVH
S47D9Y
ECOTEMP12 SW
WT60CWINS
WT60
LS12CW
LS 12 CW
i/vreo
lT60
OT60
PPW1 MH
PPW1 MH
1/VT850M
PPW2M
PPW2M
PPW2M
PPW2M
WT850M
PPW2M
S47DCA
S47DE0
S47DMM
S47DSK
S47DWC
S47DWD
S47C37
S47DE1
843016
S44099
S44399
S45958
S47BW4
S47CFG
S47CZ1
SERVICE MANUAL
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
005
005
005
005
005
005
005
005
005
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.23/93
l
10.2.
Electrolux
Electrolux ProfesBional
SERVICE MANUAL
PROGRAMMING SHEETS
LS12-LS14/WT60-65
1.
2.
Prog. 001
Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

[F
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
Hood Type like wotting cycles.
bo f
aOO
tir u
t r c
3.
4.
Manual Hood.
Default values for Hood Type models.
h ^ k
(for this appUanpe SOFT START is NOT possible).

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.
ok r
15
LES
Deteigentlevel switches not enabled.
SelectiiserintBrfacehoodtypemodel(upto version 3.11 set to ' ) .
* C
Regeneration cycle disabled.
nLf
Alarms enabled.
Enable filiing tank by means ofrinsingcycles.

Modify Factory parameters:
FR[
Factory parameters family
ok L
5.
Atmospheric boiler.
Boiler Temperature Threshold.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.24/93
Electrolux
Eleetronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL
LS10
1.
2.
Prog. 002

[FC Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:
tap
Hood Type like working cycles.
OO (
Atmospheric boiler.
do O
Manual Hood.
i
t r c
t '5
3.
4.
(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).
at'
LES
Detergent level switches not enabled.
U t
r C
s
u
Select userinterfacehoodtypemodel(up to version 3.11 set to f).

RLr
Alarms enabled.
Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

IVIodify Factory parameters:
FRC
Ott.
5.
O t
7O
Modify Cycle parameters:

Ca } Cycle 1
Sh
V5
Short Wash Phase [s]
fi/c* Cycle 2
t IC*
She*
6.
/ Long Wash Phase [min]

H
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.25/93
H:
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
EC0TEMP12
1.
2.
Prog. 003

CF
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:
tijP
Hood Type like woiking cycles.
Atmospheric boiler.
a OO
bo
Or L
Manual Hood.
t r c
O.. c
Boiler heaters and tank heater work simultaneously. .
hb ^
The tank is filled into the traditional way.
t c S
U
r E
"
U
Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 sei to ' ) .
Alarms enabled.
3.
4.

f R[
OCL
bRJ
5.
O5
2

9oiler Temperature Adjust
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.26/93
a]
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LS12AU/WT60-65AU
Prog. 004
1. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

2. [fO
k jP
Hood Type like workiiig cycles.
OO
Atmospheric boiler.
doQ
Automatic Hood.
tSr u
trc
O_ t
atr
Default values for Hood Type inodels.

t c 5
cE
Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ')
nt C
Alarms enabled.

4. Modify Factory parameters:
F R[ Factory parameters family
u c L
5.
Modify the other parameters:

Ti? r Cycle 1
FP
fi/c'
tiJi
Final Pause [s]
Final Pause [s]
Final Pause [s]
Cycles
PP3
dPR
Cycle 2
fP?
IO
Dishwashing parameters family.

P/?
Initial Pause
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.27/93
a]
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
PW 1 - 2 / WT830 - 850
1.
2.
î^

rfu
/ Pot Washer.
t!:IP
bo 1
doo
dfi
trc
b.t
btP
L ES
Ut
3
0
2
?
un
Default values for Pot Washer models.

(for Ais appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ' ) .
\ Alarms enabled.
PRE Factory parameters family
btT
5.
Atmospheric boiler.
Front loading fimction.
Q
Q
rE
Rir
3.
4.
Prog. 005
18
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Protessional
P.28/93
Electrolux
SERVICE iVIANUAL
WT60 - 65 USPH
Prog. 006

t f C
un
n
u
kp
ho 1
doo
dFL
tre
b.t
bkf
LES
Manual Hood.
i
75
n
u
un
rE
RLr
Atmospheric boiler.
tl 1
U 1

Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ()
Alarms enabled.

f R[
bkt
18
Modify the cycle parameters:

Enter into Cycle 1 parameters family.
Rinse Phase Duration [s]
dr
C a?
'
c'S
Drain [s]

Rinse Phase Diiration [s]
dr^
f i/3
c'S
Drain [s]

<" f j
c S
dr3
?S
Drain [s]
Select Fahrenheit:
dPR
Enter into Dishwashing parameter family.
[ f
Select Fahrenheit degrees.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.29/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LS12HD
Prag. 007

[Fu
tHP
bo (
doo
dFL
krc
b^k
bkF
LES
Ui
rE
RLr
k J
0
Q
1
1
n
u
/
75

Atmospheric boiler.
Manual Hood.
Enablefillingtank by means of rinsing cycles.
Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to <)
Alarms enabled.

Cd I
ri/?
ri/3

Pf
CU
Pre-rinse Duration [s]
dr
3S
Drain [s]

Pr^
dr^
35
Drain [s]

Pf3
cO
dr3
3S
Drain [s]
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.30/93
Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfoiin
SERVICE MANUAL
LS10HD
1.
2.
Prog. 008

[f
tjP
Hood Type like woiking cycles.
OO
Atmospheric boiler.
do O
arL
t r c
Manual Hood.
0_C
at
>
LEJ
r E

Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ).
n t *"
3.
4.
Alanns enabled.

C 1 Enter into Cycle 1 parameters family.
[ ^c*
5h
f 5
Pr
SQ
dr
3B
Drain [s]

I, n 1
5 A C*
5.
1
W"
Long Wash Phase [min]

Pec
Cu
dr^
3B
Drain [s]
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.31/93
s:
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LS12-14/WT60-65ASIA
1.
2.
Switch OFF and then switch ON the machinery u

Enter into CFG parameterfamilyand set the following parameters.
c jr
f>0 r
Atmospheric boiler.
doO
Manual Hood.
QF U
t r c
_ C
0
<

Tankheaterworksonly if boiler temperature reached.
tJCr
LES
Enable filling tank by means ofrinsingcycles.

U <
* C
J
U
Alarms enabled.
3.
4.

f R[
hP
5.
Prog. 009
Boiler Priority Disabled
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.32/93
a]
Electrolux
Electrolux Professiomd
SERVICE MANUAL
WT65MED
1.
2.
Prog. 010

Cf Enter into CFG parameter family and set the fpilowing parameters:
t j '
Hood Type like worlcing cycles.
OO <
Atmospheric boiler.
do
Automatic Hood.
art,
t r c
0_ C
4.
75
U
U 1
Selectuserinter&cehoodtypemodel(up to version 3.11 set to <).
* C
U
f
3D
bH
Boiler Temperatur Threshold.
Disable boiler high Temperature alarm ( L
bnu
bSk
Booster Function.
kkL
5 5
Tub Temperature; THRESHOLD.
t.
S5
Tank high Temperature limit
c ).

L i^ /
Cycle 1 parameters family.
t o
5 h
r
3 J
HO
Drain [s]
Final Pause [s]

t. n C*
[3
fPI
r if c*
3B
i 1
dr

Alarms enabled.

f RC Factory parameters family
btT
5.
Tank healer works only if boiler temperature reached.

L t S
nu
3.
bbf
S^C*
3 ^
3S
^5
drS
VO
PPS
l5
Drain [s]
Final Pause [s]

L o3
: Sh3
r
,3
dr
1-P3
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
3?
35
Vu
Drain [s]
(5
Final Pause [s]
P.33/93
H:
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
Prog. 010
WT65MED
Set other parameters.
}PR
6.
Initial Pause [s]
LS6 6000W ATM

1.
2.

CPU Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
t jP
Hood type like working cycles.
00 <
Atmospheric boiler.
aOO
Front loading.
Ort
Default values for Undercounter models.
t r c
SOFT START ENABLED.
0_ t
Tank heater works only ifboiler temperature reached,
hk r
t c S
01
r c
3
U
Selectuserinterfacehoodtypemodel(npto version 3.11 set to )

Wt r
3.
Prog. 011
Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsingcycles.
Alarms enabled.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.34/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LS5WS / WT4WS TRIPHASE

1.
2.

[FO Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
tjr
OO t

Atmospheric boiler.
Front loading door type.
or u
<-x
3.
4.
J
}
SOFT START ENABLED.
O- t
hkr
LES
l:|
Select user interface for LSS(np to version 3.11 set to 5 ) .
Regeneration cycle enabled.
RL r
ALARMS ENABLED.

iVlodify Factory parameters:
F R[ Enter Into FAC parameter family.
OJ
Onu
Boiler Temperature Adjust.
bSk
Booster Function.

[3 Cycle 3 parameters family.
1
Vu


Modify Detergent dosage:
uEn Enter into GEn parameter family.
[nt
d lO
tu
Initial Detergent Dosage [s].
r in
Initial Rinse Aid Dosage [s].
Counters
r t 3
9.
Sh3
8.
re
Ln J
6.
7.
Default values for Undereounter models.
t r c
b t L
5.
Prog. 012
tu
Number ofcycles allowed before regeneration.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.35/93
H:
Electrolux
Electrolvix Professional
SERVICE MANUAL
LS6 PRESS
Prog. 013

2. C fu Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
bo
Front loading.
Or^
t r c
SOFT START ENABLED.
0_t
Tank heater works only if boiler ternperature reached.
hhr
: 1
ACTIVE function disabled (up to version 3.11 set t o o ) .
r C
nLf
3.
4.
If
Pressurehoiler.

Alarms enabled.

f /?L Enter into FAG parameter family and change boiler threshold.
OCi.
So
DOG. NO. 5956.446.06
P.36/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
WT38MED
1.
2.
Prog. 014

CF
ho
Atmospheric boiler.
tSOQ
Front loading.
t r c
SOFT START ENABLED.

Q_t
bt
3.
4.
Lc 5
ACTIVEfimctiondisabled (up to version 3.11 set to U).
r E
Regeneration cycle disabled
flir
Alarms enabled.

fR[
Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
bH
bRJ
bjit
Disable boiler high Temperature alarm ( t
Booster function not needed.
bed
tu
kt[
5 S
? ).
During stand-by boiler is kept at lowertemperaturethan Temperature Threshold.

Tub Temperature Threshold.
Tank high Temperature limit.
5.

f y / Cycle 1 parameters family.
Ln i
Sh
ID
<i
3 S
dr
Vu
FP
IS
r i/c*
She*
r
6.

Rise Phase Duration [s]
Drain [s]

L fIC
C!:I3
iC
5
rG
Long Wash Phsise [min]

J 5
dr^
Vfl
Drain [s]
F PS
IS

Ln3
5^3
10
<* f J
J 5
dr3
Vfl
Drain [s]
FP3
15
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.37/93
S]
Electrolux
SERVICE IVIANUAL
WT30 USPH
1.
2.
Prog. 015

[PL
c 3r
OO 1
Atmospheric boiler.
do O
Front loading.
t r c
O.. t
at
(s
t t 5
U i
ACTIVE function disabled (up to version 3.11 set to U).
r E
n {. /
3.
4.


Alarms enabled.

PR
hk a
During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold.
b 51
Booster Function not necessary.
ttl
SB
Tank Temperature Threshold.

High limit for tank temperature.
5.

r i/ / Cycle 1 parameters family.
in
Sh
1
S S

f i/c*
dr
FP
Drain [s]
Final Pause [s]

the
C*
Sh^
? C*
^ iC
t 5
c / r C*
Vu
F PS
[B
HS
Drain [s]
Final Pause [s]

^ n 3
Sh3
S S
?5
V"
Drain [s]
,3
dr3
FP3
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
Fmal Pause [s]
P.38/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
WT30 USPH
dr n
Drain parameters family.

idf
dPR
30
Initial Drain Phase Duration [s]

iPR
[
6.
Prog. 015
5
i
Initial Pause [s]

Fahrenheit.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.39/93
Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonii
SERVICE MANUAL
ECOTEMP 5
1.
2.
Prog. 016

[F u Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
t 3r
OO (
Atmospheric boiler.
doO
Front loading.
dFi
t r e

O C
ht
3.
4.
Tank and boiler heaters work simultaneously.
LCJ
U /
ACTIVEfimctiondisabled (up to version 3.11 set to u ) .
r E
n j . "
Alarms
enabled.
Switch OFF
and then switch
ON
the machine.
F R[ Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
bt L
btd
5.
SOFT START ENABLED.
1
3


CiS 1 Cycle 1 parameters family.
t n
5^ /
ID
r /
c'S
dr
HD
FP 1

Drain [s]
Final Pause [s]
r i/c* Cycle 2 parameters family.

t n C*
Sh?
i ?
r iC
CJ
dr^
Vu
Drain [s]
F Pc"
Final Pause [s]
f i ^ 3 Cycle 3 parameters family.

i n3
5^5
?*
r ,3
c'S
dr 3
Vfl
Drain [s]
FP3
Final Pause [s]
dr n Drain parameters family.

Idr
dPR

tPH
6.
Initial Pause [s]
DOC. NO. 5956.446,06
Copyright 2005 by Electrolux ProfesBional
P.40/93
B]
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
WT830EA / WT850EA
1.
2.

f f G Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
tap
Automatic Pot Washer.
OO (
Atmospheric boiler.
a OO
Automatic Pot Washer
Qr^
DefavUt values for Hood Type models.
t*C
t?
0_C
b t r
HI
U 1
r E
SelectuserinterfacehoodtypemodBl(upto version 3.11 set tc
.').
Regeneration cycle disabled,

Alarms enabled.

Modify the cycle parameter:
Cii 1 Cycle 1 parameters family.
t n
S^ /
FP
r ^?
C
i 3
Sh ?
5
c" s
fPS
r y3

Final Pause [s]

L nc

Final Pause [s]

Un 3
5h3
FP3
5.

LES
n t <*
3.
4.
Prog. 017
8
^3

Final Pause [s]
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.41/93
H:
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LS9 / WT 55 ATM
1.
2.

[f
t!iP
Hood Type like workiiig cycles.
bo
Atmosphericboer.
aOQ
Manual Hood.
oft
t r c
0_ t
Ofr
75
t t 5
u
"
Alarms enabled.

F RL Enter Into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
3?

Booster Function.

C if c* Cycle 2 parameters family.
5 ^ ^
CUB
dPR
55

L n3

iPR
6.

btC
5.
re
U 1
nur
3.
4.
Prog. 018
hiitial Pause [s]
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.42/93
a]
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LS9 / WT55 PRESS

1.
2.

[F
t jP
ho
aOO
dFL
trC
0_t
5.
Pressure boiler.
<
Manual Hood.
fl
Tank heater works only ifboiler temperature reached.
ok r
The tank isfilleduito the traditional way.
(for this appance SOFT START is NOT possible).
U i
Select user interlace hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to <)
r C
Alarms enabled.

FR[
hkc
oV
anu
o5t

Booster Function.

f i^j? Cycle 2 parameters family.
She*
r B
S5

i nB
6.
if
n v I*
3.
4.
Prog. 019
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.43/93
H:
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LS5 / WT 4 PRES
1.
2.
Prog. 020

CPU
k jP
OO <
OOQ
Hood Type like woridng cycles.

Pressure boiler.
t r c
SOFT START ENABLED.
0_C
Okr
The tank isfilledinto the traditional way.
LBS
U 1
3.
4.
IJ
u
RLr
ALARMS NOT ENABLED.

FRC
Enter into FAG parameter family.
8 i
bRJ
Booster Function.

3
1
Sh3
Vu


uf n
Enter into GEn parameter family.
din
ISS
f i n
dEk
rR
8.
O51
L ItJ
6.
7.
Selectuserinterfacewitfaoutdisplay (up to version 3.1 Iset to ')
" C
hk U
5.
Initial Detergent Dosage.
hiitial Rinse Aid Dosage.
18^
Detergent dispenser works when LOAD SOLENOID VALVE in activated.
SI
Rinse Aid dispenser works when LOAD SOLENOID VALVE in activated.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
(SXJopyright 2005 by Electroliix Professional
P.44/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LS5 / WT 4 PRES MONO

1.
2.
Prog. 021

[ Fu
tap
bo
doO
Qp L
br C
O.. C
lit
The tank isfilledmto the traditional way.
LC5
* C
Ri r
ALARMS NOT ENABLED.
Selectuserinterfacewithoutdisplay(upto version 3.11 set to )
3.
4.
rnn
6.
7.
8 C
Boiler Temperature Threshold
Onu
Boiler Temperature Adjtjst
o5t
Booster Function.

CUB
Loj
5h3
*/S


uEn
d In
/o5
<* /I
dE t
r/?
8.

P HE
Enter into FAC parameter family.
Ott
5.
Pressure boiler.

Initial Rinse Aid Dosage.
i8S
Si
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.45/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LB5G/WT4G
1.
2.
Prog. 022

r P u Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
bo
Atmospheric boiler.
aOQ
<
dFL
krc
Q_ e
at
U 1
<J
f t
3.
4.
as
OnU
OS C
Booster Function.
1
HQ


uEn
d in
lu
r In

Initial Rinse Aid Dosage [s].
EC0TEMP5 EAG
1.
2.

t i / 3 Cycle 3 parameters family.
5h3
8.

ALARMS ENABLED.
V 1J
6.
7.
Select user interface for LSS (up to version 3.11 set to <)

f-RC
bti
5.
'
Vf 5
Rir
Prog. 023
Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine^
ffC
Enter Into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
n
u Hood Type like working cycles.
tiiP
n
u Atmospheric boiler.
bo I
doo
dfi
trc
b.t
btf
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
E
3

SOFT START ENABLED.
Taiik heater works only if boiler temperature reached.
75
Enable fdling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

P.46/93
Electrolux
if 5
UI
rE
Rir
3.
SERVICE MANUAL
O
U
ACTIVEfifflctiondisabled (up to version 3.11 set to V).

ALARMS ENABLED.
LS5WS / WT4WS MONO

1.
2.

[F Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
U
OO
Atmospheric boiler.
doO
drL
t r c
f)_C
at
Js
LEJ

* C
Ri r
ALARMS ENABLED.
83
hRd
O51
Booster Function.

r y 3 Cycle 3 parameters family.
L tl 3
Sh3
6.
7.

FR[ Enter into FAG parameter family.
hkC
5.
SelectuserinterfaceforLSS (op to version 3.11 set to J ) .
3.
4.
Prog. 024
Vu


uEn Enter into GEn parameter family.
d In
iQ
r 11
Initial Rinse AidDosage [s].
8.
[nk
9.
Counters
r J. 3
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
CU
Number ofcycles allowed before regeneration.
P.47/93
R]
Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systenis Platform
SERVICE MANUAL
LS12 ECOTEMP (EUROPE)

1.
2.

r F u Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
tjP
OO (
aOQ
tSr u
f
i

Atmospheric boiler.
Manual Hood.
krc
O_^
Tank and boiler heaters work simultaneously.
bk ^
75
t C5
"
Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to
r E
Rir
3.
4.
Prog. 025
h.
ALARMS ENABLED.

iVIodify Factory parameters:
f /? r Enter into FAC parameter family.
anu
5.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.48/93
MJ
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LS12EC0TEMPUK
1.
2.
Switcli OFF and tlien switch ON the machine.

r f u Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
kjP
hot
Atmospheric boiler.
doO
dr i
tr C
at

(ibr this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).
t. C 5
tf 1
Select user interface hood type model (op to version 3.11 set to <).
CC
U
/

ALARMS ENABLED.

F fff Enter into FAG parameter family.
btt
Qt
hnu


cat
dr
Drain [s]
ry?
CUB
drd
dr3
Drain[s]
Drain [s]
dr n
dP^
jd^
Pd^
6.
Manual Hood.
fli. r
5.
1
0
ir. t
3.
4.
Prog. 026
3u
Initial Drain Phase Dutation [s]
Drain Phase Duration at the end of washing phase, [s]
DGC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.49/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LS6AH
1.
2.
Prog. 027

[F
bjP
bo
Atmospheric boiler.
tSQO
dfl
t r c
SOFT START ENABLED.
_t
otr
UC5
U )
Selectiiserinterfacehoodtypemodel(upto version 3.11 set to i),
r E
/?tr
3.
4.
Enable filling tank by means ofrinsingcycles,
ALARMS ENABLED.
bk'C
S V
Onu
C*
mSTERESlS of Tank Temperature.
i kC
^8
kkH

r H1
t n
5^ /
FP
f i/c*
S^c"
f P?
C ^3

Final Pause [s]
3B
Final Pause [s]

L ll3
Sh3
3
3E
FP3
dPR
3B

L nc

'^
Final Pause [s]

t,
6.

F RC
oka
5.
Fahrenheit.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P:50/93
H:
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LS14AH/WT65H
1.
2.
Prog. 028

[F
DO (
U
1
t r c
_C
obr
3.
4.
75
Manual Hood.
default values for Hood Type models.

Tankheater works only if boiler temperature reached.
r C
Rir

ALARMS ENABLED.

F RC Enter into FAC parameter family.
Onu
8H
t k L
tkH
a 8
C*

HISTERESIS of Tank Temperature.

[ y ' Cycle 1 parameters family.
r i/c*
Sh
PR
31
3
Pause [s]
FP
Final Pause [s]
ShE
rif5
Hh
H

Final Pause [s]

Sh3
3S
FP3
dPR

fP^
Final Pause [s]

t
6.
Atmospheric boiler.
t c S
hh L.
5.
Fahrenheit.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.51/93
H:
Electrolux
EFS - Dishwa^hing Systems Platform
SERVICE MANUAL
H3300
1.
2.
Prog. 029

[F
U
bo
Atmospheric boiler.
do O
Front loading.
or ^
t r c
0_ C
atr
3.
SOFT START ENABLED.
(5
t c 5
u 1
ACTIVEfimctiondisabled (uptoversion 3.11 settoU).
r E
nLf
Alarms enabled.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.52/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
H131 OSANA
1.
2.
Prog. 030

'f S
OO i
Atmospheric boiler.
aOQ
Front loading.
t r c
SOFT START ENABLED.
O t
btr
fS
LC S
U /
ACnVE function disabled {up to version 3.11 set t o o ) .
r E
nt r
3.
4.

Alarms enabled.

f R[
act.
Sfu
oiler Tempeiatin^ Threshold.
bRJ
C*).
5.
oka
iu
During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperatuie Threshold.
kh'Z
S5
k n 1
o 5

[^ 1 Cycle 1 parameters family.
i n }
Sh
r
V
!
Iu
1 1
3 5
Vu
dr
fPI
r f/c*
(5

Drain [s]
t i c
SA?
r iC
J S
dr S
Vu
Drain [s]
15


1. n .3
Sh3
S
i

<" 3
J S
dr
Vu
Drain [s]
FP3
6.
fP^
CUB
IS
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.53/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
WT30H
1.
2.
Prog. 031

t FG
ti/P
Atmospheric boiler.
do O
or u
hrC
SOFT START ENABLED.
D_ c
Otr
tS
Lt S
U /
r f
8H
h nu
ALARMS ENABLED.
ttH

e* fflSTERESIS of Tank Temperature.
IVIodify the cycle parameters:

CHI
t. n
r i/c"
5h
FP
5h?
Final Pause [s]

Final Pause [s]

i n 3
5^.3
3B
FP3
dPR
lx)ng Wash Phase [min]

3B
fP^
[3
1
3B

L nC

Final Pause [s]

t
6.

f f?r
bt'C
5.
GtO f
3.
4.
Fahrenheit
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.54/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
Prog. 032
WT38 MED
r Pu
J
bo (
do o
dFL
tre
b.t
bkf
LES
Medical line dishwasher with lock door/hood device.
Atmospheric boiler.
Front loading.
Default values for Undercounler models.
SOFT START ENABLED.
II I
u (
rE
HLr
3
U
ACTFVE function disabled (np to version 3.11 settoU).

Alarms enabled.

F R[
btl
bH ,
bHJ
bSt
btd
ktl

U Disable boiler high Temperature alarm (1.
U
Booster fiinction not needed.
(0
).

BS
Modily the cycle parameters:

t o t
Sh
3 S
f/? }
ri/?
3
I
,}
3S

Pause [s]
dr
Vfl Drain [s]
EP
Final Pause at End of Cycle [s].

t OC
S ^ C*
PR^
r
fC
. 3 5 Short Wash Phase [s]

S
3 S
Pause [s]
dr^
V O Drain [s]
f P(?
BO
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
Final Pause at End of Cycle[s].
Copyrignt ZV\J6 by Electrolux Professional
P.55/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
WT38 MED
C ^3

t n J
5^.3
.35
PR3
r
dPR
,3

Pause [s]
35
dr3
VG
Drain [s]
FP3

rPR
6.
Prog. 032
VS
Duration ofpause after the rinse cycle [s].
'^
LS6MCD
1.
2.

CF
tUP
ho 1
U
U

Atmospheric boiler.
aOO
Front loading.
dfl
De&ult values for Undercounter models.
t r C
_C
ac>
1. C 5
3.
Prog. 033
SOFT START ENABLED.

Detergent level switches enabled.
u >
"
Select user inter&ce hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to <).
" C
nu f
Alarms enabled.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.56/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
WT30M
Prog. 034

2. '.f
OO
aOQ
Atmospheric boiler.
Manual Hood.
Ort
brc
D c
b fr r
Lt 5
il
( C
nL f


Alarms enabled.

4. Modify Factory parameters:
FRC

bbC
SS
bH
U Disable boiler high Temperature alarm ((U
t ).
3oiler Temperature Adjust

bSt
be a
khL
kn
u Booster function not needed.

f U Dimng stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold.
S5
o 5
5. Modify the cycle parameters:

Ca 1

i O
5^ 1
if 5
5

PR
Pause [s]
dr
V C Drain [s]
FP
BS
tj?^
FinalPauseatEndofCyclels].

L nC
ShS
3 S
PR?

Pause [s]
C >C
3S
dr?
VO Drain [s]
fP?
53
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.57/93
H]
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
WT30M
[i^3

L o3
5h3
PR3
r t3
dPfl
3S
5
3J
Pause[s]
dr3
*^ Drain [s]
FP3
8Q

rPR
f
F
6.
Prog. 034
V5
Duration of pause after therinsecycle [s].

/ Fahrenheit
WT65M
1.
2.

rfu
k^P
OO 1
doO

Atmospheric boiler.
Front loading.
Default values for Undercpunter models.
t r c
SOFT START ENABLED.
0_ t
at
LES
re
RLr
3.
4.
3
U
1
ort
Prog. 035
Alarms enabled.

FRL
htx
3^
Threshold. alarm ( i.
U Boiler
DisableTemperature
boiler high Temperature
bRJ
bSt
U Boosterfimctionnot needed.
atd
III During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold
tt'C
SS
tH,
SS
ânk high Temperature limit
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
C ).
Copyright 2005 by Electrolux ProfessioiMl
P.58/93
Electrolux
Electrolilx Professional
SERVICE MANUAL
WT65M
5.
Prog. 035

f i/ '
t o
Sh
35
PR
dr
Vfl
FP

Pause [s]
ry?
Sh^
C iC
5
35

Pause [8]
or C
Hu
Drain [s]
fPl?
BO

L fl 3
5h3
r
8
35.
PR3

i3
Pause [s]
35
dr3
HQ
Drain [s]
fP3

rPR
i,
6.
3 S
Pflc*
dPR

Lie
r i/3
fifl
Drain [s]
H5
r
Duration of pause after the rinse cycle [s].
t Fahrenheit
DOu. NU. 5956.446.06
P.59/93
Electrolux
Electrolux ProfesBional
SERVICE MANUAL
Prog. 036
LS5/1DPAUS
1.
2.

[Fu
U
/
do O
or i,
Default values for Undercoanter models.
fcrc
O-k
3.
4.
Select user interface for LS5 (up to version 3.1 Iset to J ) .
r C
Rir
ALARMS NOT ENABLED.

PR[
St
Boiler Temperature Thresholi

Booster FunctiotL

[ a3 Cyde 3 parameters family.
U O3
Sh3
1
H


uEn
d in
/5S
r lO
dE t
rR
8.
atr
6.
7.
Pressure boiler.
LE5
bcL
5.
OO

u
!8E
1
S 1
Initial Rinse Aid Dosage.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.60/93
Electrolux
SERVICE iVIANUAL
PW1-PW2 / WT830 -WT850 USA

1.
ffC
kHP
bo f
doo
dFL
trc
b.k
bkF
LES
U!
rE
RLr
3.
Prog. 037
i
0
S
E
Pot Washer.
n
u
Q
5
Detergent level switches hot enabled.
n
u
Atmospheric boiler.
Front loading function.
Default values for Pot Washer models,
Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ' ) .
Alarms enabled.

f SL
bkl
BH
Boiler Temperature threshold.
biii
38
Boiler Temperature high limit.
bRJ
ktl
kkH
U
70
C* fflSTERESIS of Tank Temperature.

9
5.

CHI

5/T/
r ,I
fP}
rif?
S3
In?
< I
Shi
r iS S3
fPS S
Ca3

Ln3
Sh3
r ,3
,'V
//
S3
fP3 sn
dPR


Fahrenheit.
6.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.61/93
Electrolux
EFS Dishwashing Systems Platform
SERVICE MANUAL
WT30C (Caf Line)

1.
2.

CF
kiSP
Atmospheric boiler.
do O
iiO
or u
t r c
SOFT START ENABLED.
h^k
okF
75
LES
m>.
3.
4.
U f
"
I* C
/?t r
bkl
SW
oka
kkZ
S S

Detergent level switches enabled.
Selectuserinterfacehoodtypemodel(ap to version 3.11 sett <).

ALARMS ENABLED.
During stand-by boiler is kept at lower teinperature than Temperature Threshold.

C*
HISTERESIS of Tank Temperature.

r i/ Cycle 1 parameters family.
LO 1
Sh /
FP
L HP

unc
Sh^
3B
FmalPause[s]

Final Pause [s]

L n3
Sh3
J
35
FP3
dPR
3B
F P?
[ if J

FinalPause[s]

[
6.

F /?r
kk H
5.
Prog. 038
Fahrenheit
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.62/93
Electrolux
EFS - Oishwashing Systems Platform
SERVICE MANUAL
WT38PM50 / WT38PM60
1.
2.

[F
t a "
bo
U
1
1
^
Front loading.
h r c
0 _ t
a t r
15
L c 5
i/
ACTIVE function disabled (up to version 3.11 set to U ) .
* C
u
(


Alarms enabled.

PRC
Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold
b t c
30
a t a
11U
c n
tu
O S (T
5.

Pressure boiler.
doo
n L <*
3.
4.
Prog. 039
During stand-by boiler is kept at lwer temperature than Temperature Threshold.
Booster Function not necessary.
OS
8 J
High Umit for tank temperature.
Modily the cycle parameters:

[ i/ / Cycle 1 parameters family.
in
S^
?*
Long Wash Ptase [min]

[ i/c'
dr
VG
FP
Final Pause [s]

L nc
Long Wash Phase [niin]
Sh^
S S
C iC
c 5
dr
H8
Drainjs]
C*
FPd
[ i/J
Drain [s]
Final Pause [s]

L 15
5 ^ 5
dd
Short Wash Phase.[s]
dr
H"
Drain [s]
FPB
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
Final Pause [s]
P.63/93
H]
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
WT38PM50 / WT38PM60
drn

tOr
dPf^
3u
Initial Dram Phase Duration [s]

iPB
6.
Initial Pause [s]
LU7P / LU700P / WTU40P

1.
2.
Prog. 039
Prog. 040

Cfu
U
OO (
OQO
t r c
at
Front loading.
LES
U 1
ACTIVEftmctiondisabled (up to version 3.U set t o " ) .
r C

Alarms enabled.
3.
4.
8H
Boiler Temperature threshold.
U
OSt
Booster Function.

r y ^ Cycle 2 parameters family.
r yJ
Lie
5 ^ ^
/fl

Short Wash Phase ts]

Ln3
6.

f HZ Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
hh'C
5.
SLOW SOFT START ENABLED

Pressure boiler.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.64/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LU7A
1.
2.
Prog. 041

[F
Hood Type like working cycles,
ho
krc
0_ C
Atmospheric boiler.
Front loading.

Lt 5
U
"
Selectuserinterfacehoodtypemodel(iipto version 3.11 set to ).
ft
3.
4.
Ot
U
a DC
Booster Function.

[ )iS Cycle 2 parameters family.
t Oc
Sh^
L H3
(
ID


i n3
6.
Alarms enabled.

F R[ Enter into FAG parameter family and change boiler threshold.
ULL
5.
U
HL f
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.65/93
Electrolux
SERVICE IVIANUAL
Prog. 042
LS14WS/WT65WS
1.
2.

[F
OO (
U
t
Or 1.
tr C
O C
Atmospheric boiler.
Manual Hood.

ok r
(S
Lc 5
u
re
3
0
Selectuserinterfacehoodtypemodel(up to version 3.11 set to ' ) .

Regeneration cycle disabled (only for dishwashers with non-continuous water softener).
n t . I"
Alarms enabled.
Air gap withfloatlevel sensor normally closed.
3.
4.

FRC Factory parameters family
5.
Modify Communication and HACCP parameters:

Wr P Enter into Wf P parameter family and set the following parameters.
OcL
18
Sc r
6.
Dishwasher with incorporated continuous water softener.
WT65MEDWS
Prog. 043

2. CFu Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:
tjP
OO 1
Atmospheric boiler.
OOO
Automatic Hood.
Qr^
t r c

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible),
0_ t
Otr
Lc3
U <
Select user mterfEice hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ' ) .
r E
n t ""

Alarms enabled.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.ue
P.66/93
Electrolux
SERVICE iVIANUAL
Prog. 043
WT65MEDWS
4.

FRC

hbl.
3U
Disable boiler high Temperature alanti ( t
OnU
t k [
5 5
Tub Temperature: THRESHOLD.
s s
tH
5.
C*).
Booster Function.

[ ^
'

i O f
5^
f
L i/c"
/
t 1
35
Vu
Drain [s]
FP
15
Final Pause [s]

3
5h?
3?
,S
35
dr
Vu
PP?
15
Drain [s]
Final Pause [s]

Ln3
5h3
3S
35
VO
Drain [s]
i3
dr
fP3
dr n
Long Wash Phase [mm]

dr
11C*
Cii3
C
3^
(3
Final Pause [s]
Drain/Cleaning Cycle Parameters.

drt
Drain without cleaning cycle.

IPR
6.
hiitial Pause [s]

Wr P
Enter into HZP parameter family and set the following parameters.
5c r
7.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.67/93
Electrolux
EFS -Dishwashing Systems Platform
SERVICE MANUAL
Prog. 044
LS6WS
[fO
n
kp
u Undercounter like working cycles.
Q
E
3
i
bo 1
doo
dFL
tre
b.k
htf
LES
U 1
rE
RLr
Atmospheric boiler.
Front loading.
SOFT START ENABLED.
75
Q
3
Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsmgcycles.

Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to )
n
u
nno
1
1
Alarms enabled.
1
t
Air gap with float level sensor normally closed.
Modify Communication and HACGP parameters:

HEP
Enter into ^ t . P parameter family and set the following parameters.
5f.
Dishwasher with incorpotated continuous water softener.
WT38MEDWS
Prog. 045

2. EP
Under counter like working cycles.
OO J
Atmospheric boiler.
doo
Front loading.
dr
t r c
>_ t
1
'
SOFT START ENABLED.

hikr
iS
LES
U 1
r E
8
U
ACTIVE function disabled (up to versionS.llsettoU).

Regeneration cycle disabled (only for dishwashers wifli non-continuous water softener).
n t <*
Alarms enabled.
nnu

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.68/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
WT38MEDWS
4.
Prog. 045

FRC
Oct
30

bSk
ill
5.
hid
ID
tt'u
55
kH,
S5
tank high Temperature limit.

r if /
Sh
r
u^^
1
, /

35

Drain [s]
Ht]
f-P
IS

5h^
r
TifJ
dr
L OC
a
10
tC

J 5
dr^
Hp
Drain [s]
FPc
tS

Ln3
5h3
10
,3
df
f P3

BS
Drain [s]

Wr P
Enter into HC P parameter family and set the following parameters.
St''
7.
c ).
i n 1
6.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.69/93
H:
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
FL620 / LV6 / WT30 6000W ATM

1.
2.
Prog. 046

[f
t 3 r
Hood Type like woridng cycles.
DO (
Atmospheric boiler.
do O
Front loading.
dfl
krc
SOFT START ENABLED.

Istr
75
3.
t C5
U (
ACTIVE fimction disabled (up to version 3.11 set to U).
Cc
n i , <*
Regeneration cycle disabled

Alarms enabled.
LU700A / WTU40A
1.
2.
tjr
DO
Atmospheric boiler.
(SO O
Front loading.
t r c
1
3
0_ t
bkF
1
75

U 1
ACTrVEfimctiondisabled(uptDverslon3.11settoU).
r C
LES
n t <*
Alarms enabled

F RC Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
fetr
SI?
anu
OSt
5.
Prog. 047

[Fu
dFL
3.
4.

Booster Function.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.70/93
H:
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
LU700A / WTU40A
C i/c*

L nC
S^C*
C ^3
/ "

L n3
6.
Prog. 047
FL620WS / LV6WS / WT38WS
Prog. 048

2. [Fu
U
Undercounter like working cycles.
OO f
Atmospheric boiler.
doO
Front loading.
dPL
t r c
0_ C
bkr
1
5

U 1
ACTIVE function disabled (up to version 3.11 set to " ) .
re
nL <"
f*l
Regeneration cycle disabled (only for dishwashers with noh-continuous water softener).
Alarms enabled.
3. iVIodify Communication and HACCP parameters:

Wf ?
SOFT START ENABLED.
Lc S
C
Enter into HCP parameter family and set the following parameters.
SEr
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.71/93
Electrolux
EFS -Dishwashing Systems Platform
SERVICE IVIANUAL
ET5EDF
1.
2.
Prog. 049

[f
U
Atmospheric boiler.
daO
Front loading.
dr ^
Defeult values for Undercounter models.
t e c
SOFT START ENABLED.
h ^ t
bo
<
lit
75
3.
4.
U <
ACTIVEfimctiondisabled (up to version 3-11 set to U).
r E
nLf
Alarms enabled.

f i/ / Cyde 1 parameters family.
In
5h /
1
5

dr
FP
3u

1
Drain [s]
Final Pause [s]
f i/ c" Cycle 2 parameters family.

S h ^
35
dr^

fPc*

1
Drain [s]
*^
Final Pause [s]
t i / 3 Cycle 3 parameters family.

t. nS
5^.3
3 i
C l3
Cu
dr
Vu
Drain [s]
55
fP3
bt
Final Pause [s]

Boilertemperamre[C]
dr n Drain parameters family.

or
dPR
IPfi
5.
J u

5
hiitial Pause [s]
DOC. NO. 5956,446.06
P.72/93
H]
Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfotm
SERVICE MANUAL
ET5EDF
6.
Prog. 049

u f n Enter into GEn parameter family.
dEk
18 I
Detergent dispenser works when WASHING PUMP in activated.

7.
ET12EIF
1.
2.
Prog. 050

[Fu
k^P
bo

Atmospheric boiler.
doO
Manual Hood.
dr L
k r C
fa_t
bkf
75
LCD
3.
4.

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reachedThe tank is filled into the traditional way.
il 1
ACTIVE function disabled (op to version 3.11 set to U).
f E
Rlr
ALARMS ENABLED.

FR[
Enter into FAG parameter family.
bkl
80
Boiler
Boiler Temperature
Temperature Threshold.
Adjust.
5.

[ ^ 1 Cycle 1 parameters family.
Ln I
Sh (
r
t f^?

t i
la
dr
IB
Drain [s]
FP
Final Pause [s]

Lr>C
She*
35
r IC
la
dr ^
IB
Drain [s]
PP^
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
Final Pause [s]
P.73/93
Electrolux
SERVICE IVIANUAL
ET12EIF
[^3
Prog. 050

t 1 i f
Sh3
3 1
Cu
P u
Drain [s]
13
dr3
fP3
bk
"^zJ

H
3
Final Pause [s]
o S
Boiler temperature[C]
6.
7.

En

dEt
rf?
8.
18 1
5 /
Detergent dispenser works when WASHING PUMP in activated.

Rinse Aid dispenser works when LOAD SOLENOID VALVE in activated-
WT37LEV/9
1.
2.

f f u
t j r
bo
Atmospheric boiler.
do O
Front loading.
dfL
t r c
SOFT START ENABLED.
Q_ C
Tank heater works only if boilertemperaturereached.
ok r
15
J. t S
u '
"
r C
n t **
3.
4.

Detergent level switehes enabled.
Select user interlace hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ' ) .
Alarms enabled.

dr n
Drain/Cleaning Cycle Parameters.

d^ k
5.
Prog. 051
Drain without cleaning cycle.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.74/93
Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfomi
SERVICE MANUAL
L14ROW/WT65ROW
Prog. 052

uf
tiSP
bo (
doo
dfl
krc
b.k
bkP
LE5
rE
Rir
3.
un
1
}

Pressure boiler.
Manual Hood.
1
n
u
1
un
3

Detergent level switches not eiâbled
Selectuser interface hood type model (optoversioD3.il setto ' )
Alarms enabled.

E R[
bkl
bRJ
bP
bSk
SV
Q
un

Boiler Priority Disabled.
Booster Function.

r a^

S^C*
fi/3
55

i n j
*?
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.75/93
s:
'"w^
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL

Electrolitx Professional
11. DEFAULT VALUES
Default 1 - Hood Type

ON/OFF +
CYCLE1 keys
Gin
-^
Cnt
33
i
fyr
i
din:
r In:
dit:
rR,:
ON/OFF +
CYCLE2 keys
10
ci/c
a >st
V nfa
i
Fflr
i
->
bkli
70 L n h
btU:
fy/
->
fy?
i
a
^ Sh h 35
InSS/t?.-
->
fyj
drn
i
Q Ln3:
-^
i
1
^Pfl
->
i
Idrz
ys 5h3-
HO fdrz
y P3z
y drkz
ron
->
fp
->
ffC
dbH,
IPRz
;
0 rEL
Birz
1 kHPz
BD dLHz
3 rtS
Rdrz
1 bo iz
a
a
s Pdrz
Prnz
<1 dooz
bk z
90 dFLz
HD
^
t tz
IS
k Sz ?0
k 3z
IS
k Hz
IQ
â
1 Pr h
Pr S:
Q PrJz
rPRz
a flff
Q f/?/;
bfl 2
5 r , h
IB
r ,S:
IB r ,3z
IB
f Fz
D f S
bH z
in krez
k Bz
bFiJ:
y cf h
crSz
a Cr3z
r ,kz
Q PBI
kk z BB b.kz
k Bz
nr
bP :
/ dr h
drS:
IB
PPLz
kH z
rfS
bSki
IB
n
u
n fP3z
CdEz
bk3z
drn
bH ,2 9B PRh
bio:
^ fPh
PRiz
fPS:
IB driz
ID bkFz
75
RL.z
LBBz
fl
3
a
Ikhz
bkd:
kklz
BB
rE z
RLrz
RR Bz
fl
frCz
kkHz
kH ,:
kia:
kFL:
'di z
75
1
EQ
BrUz
bPoz
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.76/93
SD
a
laa
BH
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL

Electrolux ProfeBsional
Default 2 - POT WASHER

ON/OFF +
CYCLEl keys
ON/OFF +
CYCLE2 keys
i
:nt
C?r
i
d
tni^nn
fRL
i
fyr
btlr
IB
c i/c
btr
dEkz
rSt
bH ,1
hLo:
hf i z
rfy
hRd:
nrE
bP
rES
^^ '
ra?
i
r In:
rR,z
>
IB
S
9S
/
5
H
1
faSt.'
bkd:
0
kklz SB
tkHz
S
tH ,: 75
/
ti o:
tFL: HO
i n h
inSl
->
Pr
r , 1cr
/-
dr
PP h
H PB^z
0
?fl
0
Pr S:
r ,Sz
-^
3H
PR i:
ryj
Ln3z
5h3z
3H
Pr3z
r ,3z
eo
crSz
D cr3z
drdz
dr3z
BO
PPSz
->
PB3z
0
3D
drn
FP3z
bk3z
dPR
->
i
tdrz
fdrz
->
fp
CFG
->
rEL
SErz
dl'dz
ri s
Rdrz
1 bo iz
?.- 300
Pdr:
BCC
Prnz
dooz
3z
15
rPBz
0
n
u
[RI 1
bk
SO
dFL z
k Hz
z a
bH z
to
krcz
10
30
iPBz
fz
PPLz
0
n
u
[dEz
r ,kz
fSi
kk
kH z
kUPz
BB b.kz
Iz
5z
15
30
15
RL.z
LE5z
Ikhz
100
Ul
rE
10 bkFz
FrOz
I
0
0
SrUz
10
RLrz
RRZ
P.77/93
1 k Bz
bPoz
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
\ dbL
HO
BO
ron
50
a]
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
EFS - Dishwashmg Systems Platform

Default 3 - UNDERCOUNTR
ON/OFF +
CYCLE1 keys
ON/OFF +
CYCLE2 keys
i
Cnt
i
d In: 50 r y f
i
fatr.-
cHc
btWr
Cfn
i
r
in:
dEk:
rf\,:
FRC
rSk
H nEH
drn
ry.'
->
an
5
Ln
fato.-
5h h
Pr tz
bfiz
r , Iz
bRJ:
er
bP
rES
bStr
:
^
bkd:
kklz
B3
5
tkH:
kH ,:
C3
->
i
il
Ln^z
Pr Bz
crdz
dr iz 30
drdz
fP iz
fPSz
Iz
Sh3z
V PR3z
Pr3z
IB r
->
,3z
dPf\
3a
iPRz
IB
3a dr3z
3a
FP3z
bk3z
ron
>
MCP
ff C
i^bC
rEL
Sfr-
1 kUPz
3 ri S
Rdrz
RCC
[RI t
Prnz
1 dooz
rPRz
n
u
n
u
c Fz
c 8
90 dFlz
bH z ta krcz
a
a
s
F?l
kk z BB b.kz
60 dLHz
Pdrz
->
i
idrz
Fdrz
cr3z
drn
PBSz
IB r ,dz
->
i
1 Ln3z
10 5h^z
SB
nrE
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
cn^
->
,kz
PPLZ
CdEz
bo iZ
'
bk z
kH z
1
t
10 bkFz
Ui
rE
RR Bz
/
n
u
kioz
FrDz
kFL.'
^Q
SrUz
la
bPoz
50
P.78/93
eao
k 3z
/5
k Hz
10
k 5r
so
1 k Bz
15 RL.z
LE5z
RLrz
75
a
a
k iz
k Bz
ikhz
15
so
0
100
81
Electrolux
SERVICE IVIANUAL

12. USER INTERFACE AND MAIN BOARD CONNECTORS

12.1
MAIN MALFUNCTIONS NOT DUE TO THE MAIN BOARD
The display sliows CL OSf with door/hood closed

No cycle sterts
A cycle fails to start
After replacing the main board only the Z"' cycle starts
Cycle time longer than that foreseen
Noisy wash pump (only on HT and PP versions)
12.2
CONNECTORS LAYOUT
LS14/WT65(6-9kW)
LAYOUT 1
lODooipniotigEiiDiii rnotmiigiiaiiai
CNt
CN5
9
f 1 17
CN?
iooi iiiDinigiKiBiieaBiiBWiiiiDiiDsieisai
I
CN3i:"
,, CN15
n r_T
I '1^ I 1
IMlO'JOODOShlMODOC
CN5
Check door/hood micro/sensor

Checic the user interface buttons (have they remained
pressed? etc)
Is a user interface button extension missing?
The main board is still configured for L;S5/WT4.
Does the boiler work?
Is the feed water at 50C?
Check the current for single phase during operation.
Ul
SB B W'G^^
2)
i U)
1
T!
IGl
Q
CN8
CNIO
CN12
CNll.
DDJIW D [WWW DtHJiWlflO WO MIHI 000 0001 MM^^^

rr-..v I 3|
TH
3 IE
"nEz
CNIO
CNU
cNia
l Oewe
M a o i leioDiooiDi mgiuiDgiioiiiKiBini looaisiioaoooniioiuiiiiogi
..;0
ttEDODHOfMM
\Z. r:.CIs|:l-&V::...:i.:;::t
iuyuuiMJmjw
KEY
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN8
CN10
CN11
CN12
CN15
CN16
Rinse pump/wash pump/solenoid valve outputs

Pressure/atmospheric dishwasher solenoid valve connection
ECOTEI\/1P transformer and detergent/rinse aid dispenser outputs
Tank/tx)iler temperature sensor inputs
Energy peak controller input
Safety and upper/lower limit switch input
Gear unit current control Input - Gear unit polarity inversion/connection
User interface inputs/outputs
Overflow/tank level/board feed input
User interface inputs/outputs and hood/door sensor input
DOC. NO, 5956.446.06
Copyright 2 0 0 5 by E l e c t r o l u x Professional
P.79/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL

LAYOUT 2
WT65 MARINE
I HD DO till OD to eom go gute DD DP CDI

CN5
iggi I gg ISO HI D i n g l OD Oil g) I lODDDDDODDDI
CN2
CNl
T T E_
HT
'o'WMMWMmW
CN5
CN3
CNl 5
3 10
H
"W&^MlnIfllMlMf3iH^
CN3
CNl
CN15
o
ICt
1
i
t^
flflB o
/ ^
TI
O
3
1
CN8
CNl 2
lilDOD^WDDJI'iMlODaJllIHliDDnmiMlHli DDDODDi MMOaDcqi

I sil
n CN12r
CNS
LAYOUT 3
12
CN16
fl
(lAMAAMMM
> n DD to IS 01 CD 030111
rogggjSHI
DcD Di DD DIP DIMM
EC0TEMP12 UK / LS14AH - WT65H /PW USA

i g g i iggoiDDOSigODIDIOaDI IODOOOOIDODI
I OD 00 OD DO 00 OB DD DO 1100 OD OD OD CH 001
CN5
CN2
CNl
CNS
CN3
T CN15
rri6n
"IWWliWfllllMMfr^
9 ~ r TM
o [HliODOOlliMMIOOflffjr
1 10
CN3
CNl
CN15
flSB o
1
1
:l
II
ICl
Ul
CN8
CN12
MDOfkQWIDIHlPlDOlHtlMiOOOOiDMObOl-DOOOOQa MMODDctn
ECN8
Zl
ODOODDODI
n n
CNl 2
1 o OB CD OD Et C U B
001
IkOOjDDDIlHiaiMM
12 I CN16 " T T
(lAMMMJUlMy
KEY
CNl
CN2
CN3
CN5
CNS
CNl 2
CN15
CN16
RInse pump/wash pump/solenold valve outputs

ECOTEMP transformer and detergent/rinse aid dispenser outputs
Tank/boiler temperature sensor inputs
User interface inputs/outputs and hood/door sensor Input
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
Copyright 2 0 0 5 by Electrolux Professional
P.80/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
EFS - Dishwasliing Systems Platform

Rlectrolux Professional
LS14/WT65(10.5kW)
UY0UT4
Igg90g]aoODm09nI limoigg09OliaiI
CN5
I lll7
CN15
CN3
nffT
{ 'te 1 1'
"WWIDMIKWMM"
O MOtOODflRtPODflQffar
CN5
I 10000 nDnagoaoaDiPcm IOOOOODOOOIK
CN2
CN1
tni:
CNl
CN15
CN3
SSB o 0
La
ICl
TI
G>J
CNa
CNIO
CN12
CN11
aooWanjrwfiODfeiiiobQioDaDifliHiiMiii
131 ITCN!0 t i CN12I
DDODDDI
GNU
CNe
MMODiHn
na
WT830EA/WT850EA
i m 19 00 00 00 OD DI 031 IS] CD 03 OD 00 001
| g ; | ! CNI6 -.4::il
fiMMMffiilM
lOVrrrl lODOQOOOQODI nm 8080(1000 OD OB 001100 OD 80 00 OB OB OB OD 00 00601
LAYOUTS
-MiaDOQIMOnHTM,
iggttggOOODOIOOOOOOODOOl lODDOSOOOOl
CN2
CN5
-CNl
1
1 1\I
:.M
. CN3 :--
: ,.CN15
miLMMM~n
I W M Di o iiliffiM"
eolDOOOlBtPOOflflMr
CN5
f-
CN3
CNI:EV":
CNlSi
sLtLa
1
TI
ICl
:
CN7
n:CN7
CNB
CNIQ
O
CNa
CNl 2
QJllMI
IE
GNtO^
rw^W o:
GNIS-
CNl I
DDDDI8
CNIl
DQJn o
nn
100 00 00 00 01 dl OD oo 00 oo dl 00 00 im UKOI Ib 10110100 OD 00 OD 00 aoAggoogg 00 00 OD 00 00 03 BO 01
MlOOOOllMOfMM;
12 1
CNI6"
1 1
(UlMilaMAAMy
KEY
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN7
CN8
CNIO
CNl 1
CN12
CN15
CN16
Rinse pump/wasti pump/solenoid valve outputs

Pressure/atmosptieric distiwasher solenoid valve connection
Tank/boller temperature sensor inputs
Hand safety system microswitch input
Energy peal^ controller Input
Safety and upper/lower limit switch Input
Hand safety system input - Gear motor current control input - Gear motor polarity inversion connection
Overflow/tank level/traard feed input
DOC. NO. 5956.446,06
P.81/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL

LAYOUT6
LS9/WT55
I OD OD OD a so sg SD os 11 Ol Od oc o OB cm
CNl
CN5
H i l I OD a 00 OD won mi CO I I CI DD og OD UDI
CN3
CN15
CN2
10
11
o
CN5
CNl
Bf
CN3
CN15
laii^G
o
IC1
TI
tiii
v;^
o
Clvl6
CNl 2
O MODDJPIMQMlPlODDJiraDDOOf QcQIHIi DDODOflj MfflHDOMfl "
CN8
LAYOUT?
IMl-fli"
n
lUlAAilMAAMJi
I OD DD og BD as 00 80 SO
PW1/PW2
100 DO Q) 00 Q] 00 00 091 10009 SO BOD] OS I
CN5
9
<g I C N 1 6
CN12
IIDODDOII
MliMflliniMl
1001 ISJODDDOQGOOOOOODOOl igDOOQSSDDOl
CNl
CN2
II
lW'IH!OllUDDDDiliFiiBW~
wiflloDuUJFMoIaW
CNS
CNl 5
CN3
nwT
I lll7
CNl
Si
CN3
CN15
O
O
L
ra
ICl
TI
o
CN8
CNl 2
o
o
CNl I
laflKroaDDoromoDjTianiaDDoroiHi (WluyjlMlLMHlMLE
12
'i
t 91EE
I0D0O0DD3I
CNl 2
CNl I
iBDWMcoogDoogog itugangpooowDoiioiiDiiaciii
MDIOODDiM
12 a CNl6
mU
~J1
UAMMUm
KEY
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN8
CN11
CNl 2
CNl S
CNl 6

Detergent/rinse aid dispenser outputs
Water feed solenoid valve output
Overflow/tank level/board feed Input
User internee inputs/outputs and hood/door sensor Input
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.82/93
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL

LAYOUTS}
LS5-WT4 / LS6-WT37-WT38
TEJ
^T
imiQtiiiBSieiiiDgai IIISIUEOKIOII
CNl
CN5
CN2
TW
o lHliDOOOlO,lMOOOMr
CN5
lESi iiiiiiiciaositDiiagggtiigtiîiiiaiiai
CN3
CNl 5
I ite
' 1 10
I II
tlW(fflDilD0flDrDtll{H10=lIiMf 0
CNl
I I
CN3
CN15
3
1
:
:
1
Ul
:i
"
TI
ICI
ISK
CN7
CN8
CN12
CN11
CM9
O woDwiDiuriioowiiiooaoo:!]! oQoooos (uraaDo^ o
ET
1r
CN12
IL
C N 7 1 CNa ,
12
CNlI
ILCN9
naroiaaDBWiB aromaacinanmuiicn iogti>niia<Di
I s m am IB I imaoai
LS6 MARINE / LS6AH - WT30H
LAYOUT 9
TEJ"
>iiao36BiaB30{iCBdai 19301(31 abiaai
CN5
CNl
CNZ
ICH iQCiisiiinaiiiiiaDiitgaiiiiigiiiK
CN3
CN15
I 'l|5 I 1'
JffT
lHHhi[ililQlHMlHliW~
~mMflHMTflwr
CN5
-w
CN3
CNl
CN15
La
ra
La
1a
ICl
,, : GN8
:.',. : : ; . C N 1 2 '
O I H P a a t D B n i H l D i POO OD Di OJlilMIOnMn o
. CN8 ,
loantflii
Tzzr
CNr2
,
llt9)C9(IlfiS006)IDI
KEY
CNl
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN7
CN8
CN9
CNl 1
CN12
CNl 5
CN16
CN17
Rinse pump/w/ash pump/solenoid valve outputs

Detergent/rinse aid dispenser outputs
Detergent/rinse aid level sensors input
Salt receptacle drain pump and low pressure solenoid valve outputs
Brine solenoid valve output
Overflow/tank level/t)oard feed input
Door microswitch connection
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.83/93
Electrolux
SERVICE IVIANUAL

WTSeiDE
LAYOUT 10
'U
'W
e
o
ivBogsa&iiBDaaDsaDt imiiDEi)taiiiBii!]i
CNl
mil iBiiC9B3i)iiiDaomeaGB[ iflDomooQiB

CN2 I II
CN3
T CN15
ItTT
I lll7
I 1te
I ti
"WMOaDODlMBfr
nMlITDlFMflTQW'
CNS
CNIS
CNl
!
fiii
1
:l
ICl
:l
CNS
CM12
CNll
IMriflflmrWHDIfcdGiflllQDDinMIliflll DOODBj MjMjOOlWri o
I DB DB 8 3 IB
LAYOUT n
nm
CNIZ
CNIt
imsiiiiDiiiaDisi lOinsjtgiaciKiiESQiaiiiii
, CIM8
LS5/1-WT4/1
^
poiti tcDiaaicisjoiiBiiffCSt lesaiiouiiai
CN2 I
CN3
CNIS
iCBoaiDiiBEQninisix iisEiinii&iioiiai
CN5
CNl
CNS
ite
lo:
II
I
I lliT
o MlDDDOKJmDDOMT
I |i
TWWMIolrffofSiffT
CN15
CN3
CNl
13
iCl
CN12
CNll
CN9
O MOniHnMDMnMinniHllMilDaeilBlIHllMllflODDODMiMOOttOl o
l i EJ:
CN12
CNll
iiacoigEDCBiisiito I isoBniiiBiioaEiraEiii
ILCN9
OBIIIBIIIII
KEY
CNl
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN7
CN8
CN9
CNll
CN12
CNl 5
CN16
CN17
Rinse pump/wash purhp/solenold valve outputs

Tank/boiler temperature sensor Inputs
Detergent/rinse aid level sensors input
Salt receptacle drain pump and low pressure solenoid valve outputs
Door lock electromagnet and brine solenoid valve output
Door microswitch connector
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.84/93
Electrolux
SERViCE iVIANUAL

WT65M
LAYOUT 12
iilBgDilggaigiloODgOl i go og og Kl im IKK
CNt
CN5
nzzn
I Hl II I HH] tg ug 19 n ID as OD I IOE 01 gt im CD I
CN3
CN2
IV
"TOfimuraMMfr
'WMWMmW
CN5
CNI5
nas
' 1^10 I
CN3
CNl
CN15
aa.Bo
[ 0J
TI
ICl
. O
CN8
CN12
5t
LAYOUT 13
CNtI
CNl 2
looaoEtogcDaicgaiii
IDDIUiDllCI
CNIt
DflifllHlIWi DflOODOn MMI1ML2.

li
I 9i ET
Tl
. CNfl _,
ggjggagggOCagoDDtlCCcpi
MOiDDOSHiBMM
12 i C M b
I li 11
MMJUUliUlMJlU
WT55PM50/WT55PM60
imGocgcocguoDOK iggggiiainiiioDOi
CN5
CNl
CN2
igoi iggooogiootiioogoigoiiiiDgooDoggDi
CN3
CNl 5
r-fWT
11
I ij
IWMMITflHMMfF
CN5
CNl
CN3
CNI5
Hl?
o
3
TI
ICl
o
CN8
CNl2
DDJTPDDJIPiDDDJITOODDQlOlH] M | ODDBDOj M W O IWl

Il
CN8
iGoggggoBi
1 3|
CN12
103 cg 00 CI og CO 00 m i
MffiiMLMl.
12 I CN16
lUWAAMAilAJUl
KEY
CNl
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN8
CNl i
CNl 2
CNl 5
CN16

Tankyboiler temperature sensor Inputs
Hood lock electromagnet output
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.85/93
a]
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
13. ALARM MESSAGES AND TROUBLESHOOTING
A Alarms that stop the dishwasher

n
Want of water
Is the water cock open?
Does the water load solenoid valve work?
Is the water feed flow a min. of 5 1/min?
Is the water inletfilterclean?
Is the load solenoid valvefilterclean?
Is the overflow inserted?
Is the main board (ATM-PRES) CN2 connector correctly positioned?
Do the tank/boiler pressure switches work properly?
B Alarms that don't stop the dishwasher

Drain not efficient
Has the overflow been removed?
Is the water drain blocked?
Is the drain pump blocked?
Are the air trap and tank pressure switch clean?
Is there a constriction in the drain tube?
Is the pump breather pipereturningto the tank clogged or constricted?
Does the tank pressure switch work properly?
Is iere a hole m the drain tube (only for versions with drain pump)?
Overflow alarm
Is tlie water drain blocked?
Are the air trap and tank pressure switch clean?
Does the tank pressure switch work properly?
Is the load solenoid vah/e blocked? (El - LOAD_EV)
Is the load solenoid valve relay stuck? (RL8 - LOAD EV)
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.86/93
Electrolux
Electrolux ProfeBsional
SERVICE MANUAL
C Alarms that stop the functioning and suggest to call the service
,'
Boiler temperature rise too fast

Does the boiler level sensorworfc properly? The boiler could be empty.
Are non-original power resistances Installed?
f ?
Boiler temperature too higii

Has the boiler temperature been changed {bkC - Increased above 90C)?
Has the software alarm value been modifieid (bW i)?
Does the boiler level sensor work properly?
Is the boiler relay stuck (see RL2, RL3, RL4)?
Tank temperature too high

is the feed water above 60C?
Has the software alarm value been modified {bH <)?
Is the rinse water temperature too high?
Is the tank relay stuck (RL5 - TUB HEAT)?
Tanic temperature sensor out of order

is the temperature sensor broken or disconnected (NT1)?
Is the temperature sensor connector correctly inserted?
f S
Tank temperature sensor out of order

Is the temperature sensor short-circuited (NT1)?
Boiler temperature sensor out of order

Is the temperature sensor broken or disconnected (NT2)?
Is the temperature sensor connector correctly inserted?
Boiler temperature sensor out of order

Is the temperature sensor short-circuited {NT2)?
During rinse phase boiler doesn't empty

Are the rinse arms clogged?
Does the rinse pump work correctly?
Is there water in the level sensor tube?
Is there scale In the boiler?
Does the boiler level sensor work property?
CAUTION: RESETTING THIS ALARM WITHOUT FIRST ELIMINATING THE CAUSE IS
DANGEROUS; THE BOILER HEATING ELEMENTS COULD WORK DRY, FURTHER DAMAGING
THE INTERNAL PARTS OF THE DISHWASHER.
CAUTION: C8 IT MUST BE MANUALLY RESET AFTER ELIMINATING THE CAUSE OF THE
MALFUNCTION.
f 9
Automatic hood out of order

See par. C I - Alann codes for automatic hood type dishwashers.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.87/93
m
Cl
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL

Alarm codes for automatic hood type dishwashers
When the alarm L 3 appears, to facilitate fault-finding another parameter providing a more detailed indication has been
introduced.
The parameter is n L and is found in the
u family.
The possible cause of the anomaly can be found (see table below) according to the value of the parameter n L .
With pot washers the cause that generated afai type alarm can also be found.
E.g.: With an automatic hood type the alami f 9 appears.
Access the parameter n u in the db u family.
Hi. ^ a
=> the top limit switch could be disconnected or intenrupted.
Hood
Pot Washer
FC_DW
S5:FC_UP\
Choex CLOSE]
MOPao
S1: D00R_C1.0SE
fî.
Appears with hood closed if the top

limit switch (FC_UP) cuts:in.
During lifting, the bottom limit switch (FC_DW)

has not retumed to the rest position.
The limit switch must retum to the rest position
within a time given by the parameter t . 5 :
a) checl< that the motor works.
- the bottom limit switch (S3) returns to the rest

position;
- the top limit switch (S5) cuts in;
- S3" does not cut in.
During the initial lifting phase the bottom limit switch

(S3) must retum to the rest position within a time given
by the parameter t . 5 othenwise the alarm b 3
appears.
-S3 could be stucl(.
- S5' could be disconnected.
On installation this alarm can occur due to incorrect
sequence of the phases: Invert the two phases on the
power supply terminal board.
Appears if during lifting S3" does not return to the rest
position within a time t 1.
3
RL^^
Appears with hood closed, if:
Appears if the bottom limit switch (FC_DW)

cuts in during lifting.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
b 3
P.88/93
Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfomi
SERVICE MANUAL
(Polarity/motor rotation direction inverted?!).
Appears If the bottom limit switch (S3) cuts in during

lifting.
On installatton this alarm can occur due to incon^ct
sequence of the phases: invert the two phases on the
RL. 5
RL.B
BL.l
Bi. 8
TIMEOUT- The time taken for hood lifting was

more than the time fixed by parameter t ^^ :
a) check that the motor wori<s.
TIMEOUT- The time taken for lifting was more than the
time fixed by parameter t c*.
Check conect operation of the:
a) motor (thermal protection N7);
b) top limit switch (S5 and S5').
The hood is open but the bottom limit switch

(FC_DW) has cut in.
Appears with hood fully open, if:
Appears if with hood fully open the "door

closed" microswitch cuts in.
Appears if with hood fully open the "door closed'

microswitch cuts in.
- 85 could be disconnected.
During lowering, the top limit switch (FC_UP)

has not returned to the rest position.
The limit switch must return to the rest position
within a time given by parameter t - fi:
a) check that the motor wori<s;
b) (Polarity/motor rotation direction inverted?!).
- the limit switch (35) returns to the rest position;

- the bottom limit switch (S3) cuts in;
- S3" cuts in.
b 3
During the initial lowering phase the top limit switch
(S5) must return to the rest position wifhin a time given
by the parameter t . 6 othenwise the alarm t 3
appears.
- S5 could be stuck.
On installation, this alarm can occur due to incorrect
powersupply terminal board.
RL ^9
RL. i
Appears if the bottom limit switch S3 cuts in before 53

during lowering.
Appears if the top limit switch (FC_UP) cuts in
during lowering.
(Polarity/motor rotation direction inverted?!).
b 3
Appears if the top limit switch (S5) cuts in during
lowering.
On installation, this alarm can occur due to incorrect
RL. il
TIMEOUT- The time taken for hood closing

was more than the time fixed by parameter
TIMEOUT- The time taken for towering was more than

the time fixed by parameter t
.^.
a) check that the motor works.
RL. .V
RL. 13
Appears during hood lowering if, after S3" cuts in, the
bottom limit switch S3 does not cut in vwthin the time
fixed by parameter t
J.
The two hand safety contacts K and K'

must be both closed or both open. If this
does not occur the alarm appears.
- One of the two relays (K or K) could be stuck or
disconnected. (See parameter t
V)
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.89/93
Electrolux
EFS - Disliwashing Systems Platform
/?L. iH
SERVICE MANUAL
Limit switch combination not allowed:

top limit switch (FC_UP) and bottom limit
switch (FC_DW) activated at the same time!
Limit switch combination not allowed.

Appears If one of the following
combinations occurs:
- top limit switch (S5) and bottom limit switch (S3) both
activated (S3 and S5 could be discornected);
- top limit switch S5 and S3" both cut in;
- bottom limit switch (S3) cut in but not S3".
/?t.?
ni.E r
Bi. SS
Ri. s 3
Hi.iH
Bi. SS
During lifting, the cun^nt absorbed by the

lifting motor has exceeded the threshold (see
parameter ikh):
a) excessive mechanical force during lifting.
During lowering, the cuaent absorbed by the
lifting motor has exceeded the threshold (see
parameter \kh):
a) excessive mechanical force during
lowering.
The hood should be stopped but the card
detects a high current absorption by the lifting
motor:
a)
b)
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
the relay RL18/RL19 could be stuck;

feeder connector CN32 could be
disconnected.
P.90/93
SJ
Electrolux
SERVICE MANUAL
D Alarms that don't stop the functioning, but suggest to call the service
Communication error
Is the connection Ijetween main tward and control panel correct? Are the connectors conectly
connected?
Are connector contacts clean?
E ?
Tank temperature low

Does the tank heating element work properly?
Are the connectors conectly connected?
Are the dishwasher feed voltage and current correct?
Is the relay RL5 on the board disconnected or faulty?
i 3
Boiler temperature low

Does/do the boiler heating element/s work properly?
Are the connectors correctly connected?
Does the possible remote control switch connected to the heating element work correctly?
Is there power at the remote control switch Input terminals?
Does relay RL2 on the board work properly?
CAUTION: IF THERE IS A MALFUNCTION ON RELAY RL2 AND THE BOILER HEATING
ELEMENTS ARE FED BY MEANS OF A REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH, THE BOARD DOES
NOT HAVE TO BE REPLACED; JUST MOVE THE BOILER HEATING ELEMENT CONNECTOR
TO ONE OF THE TWO FREE POSITIONS ON THE BOARD.
CAUTION: WHEN ONE BRANCH OF THE HEATING ELEMENT DOES NOT WORK AND THE
OTHER TWO CONTINUE TO FUNCTION, ON REACHING THE SET TEMPERATURE VALUE,
ALARM 3 DISAPPEARS AND REAPPEARS IN THE SUBSEQUENT RINSE PHASE. THIS ALSO
OCCURS WHEN A PHASE IS MISSING.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.91/93
Electrolux
Electrolirx Professional
SERVICE MANUAL
E Alarms that stop the dishwasher for models with incorporated

p?i
Water softener operation errors

This alarm appears in case of malfunctioning in the continuous water softener.
Communication errors between the mother board and

softener board
f??
This alarm appears in case of problems in communication between the mother board and water softener
board; check the connection between mother board connector Jl and water softener connector ST8.
(.f)
To facilitate the finding of faults signalled by alarm
.another parameter providing a more detailed indication of the possible cause of
malfimctipn has been introduced in the <" O O family (see table below).
f?i
Water softener conductivity sensor short-circuit

Two or more water softener conductivity sensors are short-circuited. Check the connections between the
water softener board and sensors, replacing the connection wiring if necessary.
F^l ^
Water softener conductivity sensors open

One or mote water softener conductivity sensors are disconnected. Check the connections between the
water softener board and sensors, replacing the connection wiring if necessary.
P^t
Resin temperature sensor malfunction

Replace the watersoftener electronic board.
f?', '-i
Water softener electronic board malfunction

Replace the water softener electronic board.
F^l 3
Salt water filling malfunction

The salt water container in the water softener was not completely filled within the set max. filling time.
Make sure;
the water cock is open
^
the water filling solenoid valve works correctly
the salt container solenoid valve works correctly
the feed water pressure is at least 50 kPa / 0.5 bar
the water inlet filter is clean
the filling solenoid valve filter is clean
the salt container cap is properly closed
the mother board (ATM-PRES) connector CN2 is cprrecdy positioned
the water softener board connector ST5 is correctly positioned.
PS t tu
Inefficient resin washing

After carrying out the maximum permissible nuniber of resin washes, the resins are not sufficiently cleaned
by the salt water used to regenerate them.
Make sure:
the water filling solenoid valve works correctly
the feed water pressure is at least 50 kPa / 0.5 bar
the water inlet filter is clean
the filling solenoid valve filter is clean
the mother board (ATM-PRES) connector CN2 is correctly positioned.
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.92/93
Electrolux
Electroltix Professional
SERVICE IVIANUAL
14. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR SUBSEQUENT VERSIONS

The parameters listed below, even if present inside the software, caimot be used in appliances currently in production.
Family u t O :
parameter n t a
value e ^ f t
iS3
Family S t .
iil
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06
P.93/93
CATALOGO PARTI Dl RICAMBIO

SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE
B] Electrolux
ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL
LAVASTOVIGLIE SOTTOTAVOLO
UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER
WT37 / WT38
Code
Type
PRESSIONE
502019
WT38PM50
502346
WT38PM60
ATMOSFERICA
502007
WT38TDE
502008
WT38/M50
502020
WT37LEV/9
502029
WT38M50/4
502110
WT38DD
502111
WT37
502112
WT38
502117
WT37/4.5
502118
WT38/4.5
502122
WT37UK
502125
WT38C
5021 i26
WT38C60
502127
WT38CUK
502129
V\n"38/4.5NW
502217
WT38UK
502218
WT37J60
502219
WT37J50
502321
WT38/60
502322
WT38/M60
502323
WT38 MED
502347
WT38M60/4
E Pag.
CL
2
to
o
3
CO
4
5
6
Lu
7-12
o
Ref.
Page
t
s
2356
2 3 56
u
q
a
b
c
d
e
f
V
X
y
a1
g
n
o
h
k
m
r
2 3 46
2346
2346
2 34 6
2346
2 3 46
2 3 46
2346
2346
2 3 46
2 3 46
2346
2346
2346
2346
2346
2346
2 3 46
2346
23 4 6
2346
Index
Main view
Hydraulic components
Hydraulic circuit/Atm.
Hydraulic circuit/ Pres.
Electrical components
Spare parts list
Indice
Vistagenerale
Componentiidraulici
Circuitoidraulico/Atm.
Circuitoidraulico/Press.
Componenti elettrici
Lista ricambi
CO
Q. Marchio/Brand:
J
Paese/Country:
E
Tutti / All
ijj
EC I
e
^\
DaSer. Nr. / From ser. nr.: 7214....

Page: 1
Ed. 06-02
Doc. Nr.:
6-11 803
e
Q.
om
00
UJ
Marine Version
CO
CO
CO
at
a.
CO
(D
E
LU
CQ
Ill.611803p2
Da Ser. Nr. / i=^rom ser. nr.: /214,
Page: 2
Ed. 04-04
Doc. Nr.: 6-11 803
n
E
Q.
<rj
00
o
(O
CO
I
1=
LU
DC
ill.611803p3
Da Ser. Nr. / From ser. nr.: /214.
Page: 3
Ed. 02-10
Doc.Nr.: 6-11 803
-itt^)
373
302
CD
CO
._!
m
o
a.
CO
ill.611803p4
UJ
tr
m
Da Ser. Nr, / From ser. nr.: /214....

Page: 4
Ed. 06-02
Doc. Nr.: 6-11 803
461
465
464
T3
E
Q.
ei
o
00
(O
CO
_j
(5
o.
ill.611803p5
CO
Da Ser. Nr. /From ser. nr.: /214.

LU
oc "
CD
Page: 5
Ed. 05-06
Doc.Nr.: 6-11 803
523
' Cablaggio/Wiring hardness: 590
504
51
,/^,i^
E
Q.
CO
O
522
00
526
Lii
O
CO
516 515
514
CO
CO
(0
a.
to
LU
ill.611803p6
tr '
m Da Ser. Nr. /From ser. nr.: /214 .
Page: 6
Ed. 03-12
Doc. Nr.: 6-11 803
LavastovigliesottotavotoWT37/WT38
UndercounterdishwaslierWT37/VVT38
Pos
Code
E
n
C
O
00
Description
Pagina 2: Vista generale
Page 2: Main view
101
046407
Piedinp regolabile
Adjustable foot
101
049393
Piedino regolabile
Adjustable foot
101 0L0118
102 049906
102 0L0105
103 049907
103 0L0106
104 049911
105 OL0532
106 0L0533
108 0L0187
108 0L0534
110 ; 048813
110 0L0717
111 048814
111 : 0L0718
112 048812
113 048815
114 : 049871
Descrizione
Plede a rullo
Pannello laterale;
Pannello laterale;
Pannello laterale;
Pannello laterale;
Pannello frontale
Femio porta
Tappo
Porta elux
Porta
Ass. Leva DX
Ass. Leva DX
Ass. Leva SX
Ass. Leva SX
Bronzina
Molla Porta
Schienale
Ref. / Notes
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m ,n,,p,u,a1
Up to ser. nr.: 244
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m ,n,o,p,u,a1
From ser. nr.: 245
k,l,p,q,r,s,t,u,v,x,y
Up to ser. nr.: 244
From ser. nr.: 245
Up to ser. nr.: 244
Fromser. nr.: 245
Roller
Side panel; left
Side panel; left
Side panel; right
Side panel; right
Front panel
Door catch
Plug
Door
Door
Assembly Lever right
Assembly Lever right
Assembly Lever left
Assembly Lever left
Bushing
Door spring
Rear panel
sx
sx
dx
dx
114
0L0115
Schienale
Rear panel
114
114
115
116
116
0L0109
0L0476
049872
049929
0L0108
Schienale
Schienale
Traverslno
Coperchio
Coperchio
Rear panel
Rear panel
Lower rear cover
Top panel
Top panel
116
117
117
117
118
119
119
119
119
120
120
121
122
123
124
124
124
125
126
127
0L0107 Coperchio
049875 Protezione superiore
0L0104 Protezione superiore
0L0535 Protezione superiore
047511 Piolino
049493 Ass. supporto Cesto sx
0L0516 Ass. supporto Cestp
048466 ; Ass. supporto Cesto dx
0L0516 Ass. supporto Cesto
049930 Profile adesivo 15x3
0L0113 Profilo adesivo
049931 Velcro Autoad. Maschio su vasca
0L0114 Pannello di rinforzo
0E5559 Guarnizione
049932 Guarnizione; cornice vasca
049892 Guarnizione; cornice vasca
0L0536 Guarnizione; cornice vasca
OL0531 Prot.Poliest.Trasp. 520X320
0L0112 Copertura passatubi
049931 Velcro Autoad. Femmina PVC
P
P
not for"p"
P
Up to ser. nr.: 526
From ser. nr.: 527
Up to ser. nr.: 526
From ser. nr.: 527
not for "s,t,u"

Up to ser. nr.: 244
notfor"s,t,u"
From ser. nr.: 245
s,t
u,v,x,y
Up to ser. nr.: 244
Up to ser. nr.: 244
Not for " a l "
From ser. nr.: 245
al
Up to ser. nr.: 244
Fromser. nr.: 245
P
Top panel
Upper protection
Upper protection
Upper protection
Pin
Support; for basket
Support; for basket
Support; for basket
Support; for basket
Gasket
Gasket
Stik
Insulation
Gasket
Gasket door
Gasket door
Gasket door
Gasket
Hoses protection
Stik
Up to ser. nr.: 413

Fromser. nr.: 414
Up to ser. nr.: 413
Fromser. nr.: 414
Up to ser. nr.: 244
From ser. nr.: 245
k,i,p,q,r,s,t
From ser. nr.: 245
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m,n,o,u,v,x,y,a1
k,l,q,r,s,t
P
k,l,p,q,r,s,t
From ser. nr.: 245
k,l,p,q,r,s,t
(D
Lil
z
CO
201
?
CO
"
(0
O)
ai
o:
m
2
202
202
202
202
202
202
203
GA2914
049885
049916
049876
0L0342
0L0345
049896
046878
Pagina 3: Component! idraulicl
Page 3: Hydraulic components
Condensatore per pompa lavaggio

Pompa Lavaggio
60Hz
Pompa Lavaggio
60Hz
Pompa Lavaggio
50Hz
Pompa Lavaggio
Pompa Lavaggio
Pompa Lavaggio
Fascetta 38-50
Capacitor; 16mF
Wash pump
60Hz
Wash pump
60Hz
Wash pump
50Hz
Wash pump
Wash pump
Wash pump
Hose clamp 38-50
Da Ser, Nr. / Fronnser. nr.:
/214....
h,x
k,r,s
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,m,p,u,v,y,a1
n-60Hz
0 -50Hz
l,q,t
50Hz
'^
Page: 7
Ed. 06-02
>
Doc. Nr.:
^ ^
dA
mJt
tf^^^tf%h
6-11 803
Lavastoviglie sottotavolo WT37 / WT38

Undercounter dishwasher W t 3 7 / W T 3 8
Pos
Code
Descrizione
Description
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
212
213
214
045768
048325
049828
046596
049894
046799
048326
048324
048323
048842
046257
048844
Tubo Gomma 45x55

Coll. Asp. Scafico
Guarnlz. Tappo Ter. Sc.
Tappo Terminale Sc.
OR 4*110 Asp Sc.
OR Troppo Pleno
Ghlera collettore Asp. Sc.
Filtro Asp. Pompa
Troppo pleno
Troppo pleno
Tubo 42x52
Pompa scarico
Hose
Drain manifold
Gasket
Plug; for manifold
0 Ring
0 Ring
Ring nut; for manifold
Filter; for pump
Overflow pipe
Overflow pipe
Hose
Drain pump
214
0L0690
Pompa scarico
Drain pump
214
048939
Pompa scarico
Drain pump
214
0L0527
Pompa scarico
Drain pump
215
216
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
228
229
230
231
232
233
235
235
049877
049933
049878
049856
049878
049445
049934
049470
OL0078
049908
049935
049936
047578
046878
048853
049268
068642
046946
048822
OL0095
Manicotto asp. scarico

Tubo Scarico
Tubo Scarico
Tubo Scarico
Tubo Scarico
Fasc.Torro 16-27/9
Raccordo coll.tubo marine
Tubo Pvc
Supporte Filtro
Ass. Filtro Vasca
Supporte Centr. Flltri
Supp. Ant. Flltri
Fascetta 26-38 9MM
Fascetta 28-50
Nasello per vasca
Dado ES.M14X1,5
OR 3062; 2,62X15,54
Fase. Torro. W2 8-12/7,5 1VP
Ass tubo Lavagglo
Ass tubo Lavagglo
Coupling; drain
Drain pipe
Drain pipe
Drain pipe
Drain pipe
Clip
Connection
Pipe
Filter support
t a n k filter
Support; filters
Support; filters
Hose clamp 26-38
Hose clamp 38-50
Spigot; air relief
Nut; M14x1,5
0 Ring
Hose clamp 8-12
Hose
Hose
Pagina 4: Circuito jdraullco/Atm.
Page 4: Hydraulic circuit / Atm.
not for "s,t"

notfor"u,ar
Up to ser. nr.: 521
notfor"u,a1"
From ser. nr.: 522
301
049625
Pompa perist. Brlllantante
Pump; rinse aid
301
0L0697
Pompa perist. Brlllantante
Pump; rinse aid
302
303
049905
049624
Tubo mandata; rigldo (blanco)

Pompa perist. Detergente
Delivery hose; rigid (wtiite)

Pump; detergent
303
0L0696
Pompa perist. Detergente
Pump; detergent
304
308
308
309
311
OL0478
049902
0L0283
048447
049310
Connessione
Boller atmosferico
Boller atmosferico
Isolante per boiler
Pompa rise. 230V 50Hz
Connection
Boiler
Boiler
Insulation; for boiler
Rinse pump
311
0L1079
Rinse pump
311
311
0L0020
0L1099
Pompa rise. 2P0V60Hz

Pompa rise. 20PV 60Hz
Rinse pump
Rinse pump
-a
E
Q.
CO
O
00
<
111
6CO
^
CO
_!
o
Q.
(0
Ref. / Notes
b,d,f,n,o,u
a,c,e,g,h,k,m,p,r,SiV,x,y,a1
a,c,e,gil,m,p,q,t,v,y,a1 -50hz
Up to ser. nr.: 518
a,c,e,g,l,m,p,q,t,v,y,a1 - 50tiz
From ser. nr.: 519
h,k,r,s,x - 60fiz
Up to ser. nr.: 520
ti,k,r,s,x-60tiz
From ser. nr.: 521
a,c,e,g,h,k,m,p,r,s,v,x,y,a1
k,l,q,r
s,t
b,d,f,n,o,u
a,c,e,g,h,m,p,v,x,y,a1
a,c,e,g,fi,m,p,v,x,y,a1
a,c,e,g,fi,m,p,v,x,y,a1
Up to ser. nr.: 244
From ser. nr.: 245
a,f,g,l,k,p,q,r,v,x,y
Up to ser. nr.: 521
a,f,g,l,k,p,q,r,v,x,y
From ser. nr.: 522
u,v,x,y
Up to ser. nr.: 317
From ser. nr.: 318
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,m,p,u,v,y,a1
Up to ser. nr.: 607
a,b,e,d,e,f,g,m,p,u,v,y,a1
From ser. nr.: 608
n - Up to ser. nr.: 607
n - From ser. nr.: 608
tu
CC
Da S er. Nr. / F rom ser. nr.:
/214....
Page: 8
Ed. 06-02
Doc. Nr.: 6-11 803
Lavastoviglie sottotavolo W T 3 7 / W T 3 8
Undercounter dishwasher W T 3 7 / W T 3 8
Pos
Code
311
311
311
311
311
311
312
312
Descrizione
Description
Ref. / Notes
049965
O U 102
049612
OLI100
049813
OL1101
049260
083406

Pompa rise. 220V60Hz
Pompa rise. 440V60Hz
Condensatore per pompa rise.
Condensatore per pompa rise.
Rinse pump
Rinse pump
Rinse pump
Rinse pump
Rinse pump
Rinse pump
Capacitor
Capacitor
0 - Up to ser. nr.: 607

0 - F r o m ser. nr.: 608
h,x - Up to ser. nr.: 607
h,x - From ser. nr.: 608
k,r - Up to ser. nr.: 607
k,r - From ser. nr.: 608
6,3pF - k,r,n,o
5,0(jF-a,b,c,d,e,f,g,m,p,
u,v,y,h,x,a1
313
314
314
316
316
318
318
319
320
320
321
321
322
323
324
325
326
326
327
328
0L0481
049880
OL1108
049289
0L0365
049628
0L0098
049287
049772
0L0367
049773
OL0117
046878
048824
048126
048531
048823
0L0110
047578
049459
Tubo brillantante (blu)

Manieotto asp. Risciaquo
lUlanicottoasp. Risciaquo
Raccordo 3 vie d.27
Raccordo 3 vie d.27
Trappola D'aria; boiler
Trappla D'aria; boiler
Tubo EPDM 25.5x32
Fascetta ElastiCa
Fascetta Cobra
tubo 26x37
tubo 26x37
Fascetta a vite 35 -50
Ghiera Supp. Getti Sup.
Fascetta a vite 13-20
Tubo EPDM 12x19.5
Guarnizione Supp. GettI Sup.
Guamizlone Supp. GettI Sup.
Fascetta 26-38
AirGapstd
Rinse aid pipe (blue)

Coupling; rins
Coupling; rins
Connection 3 way; diam 27-12
Connection 3 way; diam 27-12
Air trap; boyler
Air trap; boyler
Hose; diam 25
Hose clamp
Hose clamp
Hose
Hose
Hose clamp 35-50
Ring nut
Hose clamp 13-20
Hose
Gasket
Gasket
Hose clamp 26-38
Air gap
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
343
049481
049828
049460
049480
048290
048716
0L0598
048714
048632
048401
048330
048236
048979
048820
048819
049452
0L0121
Air Gap UK
Guamizlone per AG
OR per Ghiera AG
Gtiiera per A.G.
Remo risciaquo
Ass. Portagetti Rise.
Ass. Getti Lavavaggio
Tappo Getti rise.
Rondella di Fermo Lavaggio
Mozzo per Getti Lav.
Ghiera Fiss. Supp. Getti
Guarnizione LS7 e 8
Seger
Parzializzatore
Supp. Getti Inf.
Elettrovalvola; 5,5 l/min
Air gap; WRC

Gasket
0 Ring
Ring nut
Pin; for rinse jets
Rinse jet
Washing arms assembly
Plug
Lock washer
Hub
Ring nut
Gasket
C-Clamp
Flow reducer
Jets support; lower
El.valve; 5,5 l/min
El.valve; 5,5 l/min
343
343
0LO567
049626

Elettrovalvola; 10 l/min
Electric valve; 5,5 l/min

Electric valve; 10 l/min
343
0L0568
Elettrovalvola; 10 l/min
Electric valve; 10 l/min
344
345
049201
049540
Guarnizione
Ass. Tubo alim. D.
Gasket; diam 3/4

Water inlet pipe, 2100mm
345
346
c6 350
m
-j
351
o 352
o. 355
356
049378
049801
048308
068642
049268
0L0082
049477
Ass. Tubo alim. UK

Iniettore Det. AISI304
Trappola d'aria per pressest.
OR 2062x15.54
Dado M14x1.5
Fascetta Elastica su Main Board
Manometre
Water inlet pipe, WRC, 2100mm

Injection spigot
Air trap
O Ring
Nut;M14x1,5
Hose clamp
Manometer
1
Q.
Up to ser. nr.: 607

From ser. nr.: 608
Up to ser. nr.: 329
From ser. nr.: 330
Up to ser. nr.: 244
From ser. nr.: 245
Up to ser. nr.: 329
From ser. nr.: 330
Up to ser. nr.: 244
From ser. nr.: 245
Up to ser. nr.: 244

From ser. nr:: 245
a,b,c,d,e,h,l,k,
m,n,o,q,r,u,v,x,a1
f.g.p.y
f,g - Up to ser. nr.: 237

f jg - From ser. nr.: 238
Up to ser. nr.: 427
f,g - From ser. nr.: 428
a,b,c,d,e,h,k,l,m,q,r,u,a1
Up to ser. nr.: 427
a,b,c,d,e,h,k,l,m,q,r,u,a1
From ser. nr.: 428
CO
O
00
1
CO
LU
a,b,c,d,e,h,k,l.
m,n,o,q,r,u,v,x,a1
f.g.y
z.
O.
CO
t
lli
DC
CD
_1
Da Ser. Nr. / F rom ser. nr.:
/214....
v..^
Page: 9
Ed. 06-02
k,l,q,r
A >
Doc. Nr.:
^ ^
-Jl
-M
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
6-11 803
Undercounter dishwasher WT37 / WT38
li
'
Pos
Code
Descrizione
Description
Ref./Notes
357
358
359
360
361
049543
049541
072457
068121
048834
Nipplo3/4G
Valvola antiflusso
Raccordo 3/4X3/4MM OT
Filtro acqua 3/4
Ass.filtro 3/4 G
Nipple
Valve
Nipple
Filter
Filter
k,l,q,r
k,l,q,r
k,l,q,r
k,l,q,r
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m,p,u,v,x,y,a1
362
364
365
368
369
370
049201
048883
049881
048531
072393
048531
Guamizione; diam 3/4

Tubo 5x12 gomma
Pressostato
Tubo EPDM 12x19.5
Tubo EPDM 4x7.4
Tubo EPDM 12x19.5
Gasket; diam 3/4

Hose; 5x12
Pressure switch
Hose
Hose
Hose
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m,j3,uv,x,y,a1 :
370
371
372
373
379
380
381
382
382
383
383
383
384
384
385
385
385
386
386
386
387
387
388
389
390
049379
0L0349
049419
049418
Tubo gomma 11.5x19.5 WRC

Assieme tappo
Tubo; interno, pompa det.
Tubo; interno, pompa brill.
Hose; WRC
Plug assembly
Hose; internal, del. Punfip
Hose;internal, rin. aid pump
072457
068121
049650
049510
072457
049508
0L0477
0L0477
0L0318
0L0570
049473
0L0479
0L0479
0LO17O
049650
049650
0L0537
0L0423
0L0602
0L0528
0L0529
Raccordo
Assieme filtro acqua
Parzializzatore 16 l/min
Nipplo ottone 3/4"
Nipplo ottone 3/4"
Portagomma
Portagomma
Portagomma
Elettrovalvola
Elettrovalvola
Nipplo ottone 3/4"- 3/8"
Parzializzatore 5.5 l/min
Parzializzatore 10 l/min
Parzializzatore 10 t/min
Elettrovalvola
Elettrovalvola
Connettore elettrovalvola
Snsor di livello detergente
Sensore dl livello brillantante
Nipple
Assembly filter
Hydraulic shutter 16 l/min
Brass nipple 3/4"
Brass nipple 3/4
Fitting
Fitting
Fitting
Electric valve
Electric valve
Brass nipple 3/4"-3/8"
Brass nipple 3/4"- 3/8"
Brass nipple 3/4"-3/8
Hydraulic shutter 5.5 l/min
Electric valve
Electric valve
Electric valve connector
Detergent float switch
Rinse aid float switch
P
n,o - From ser. nr.: 428
v,x,y
P.v,y
x
P.v,x,y
u,v,x,y
u,v,x,y
Pagina 5: CIrculto Idraulico / Press
Page 5: Hydraulic circuit / Pres.
only for "s,t"
a,b,c,d,e,h,k;l,m,
n,o,q,r,u,v,x,a1
f.g.p-y
n,o
n,o
n,o - Up to ser. nr.: 427
n,0 - From ser. nr.: 428
P,v,x,y
P.v,x,y
"'}
._ /
402 049360 Tubo mandata; rigido

403 0L0696 Pompa perist. Detergente
408 0L0734 Boller a pressione
409 048447 Isolante per boiler
o
423 048824 Ghiera Supp. Getti Sup.
E
o. 424 048126 Fascetta a vite 13-20
ri 425 048531 Tubo EPDM 12x19.5
o
00
426 048823 Guamizione Supp. Getti Sup.
\CO 432 048290 Perno risciacquo
433 048716 Ass. Portagetti Rise.
434 0L0598 Ass. getti lavaggio
LU
5 435 048714 Tappo Getti rise.
& 436 048632 Rondelia di Fermo Lavaggio
ro 437 048401 Mozzp per Getti Lav.
c6 438 048330 Ghiera Fiss. Supp. Getti
05
439 048236 Guamizione
1
(5 440 048979 Anello elastico
o 441 048820 Parzializzatore
CL
442 048619 Supp. Getti Inf.
443 0L0566 Elettrovalvola; 20 l/m
444 049201 Guamizione
ir
m Da Ser. Nr. / From ser. nr.: /214 ....
Page: 1 0
Delivery hose; rigid

Pump; detergent
Boiler
Insulation; for boiler
Ring nut
Hose clamp 13-20
Hose
Gasket
Pin; for rinse jets
Rinse jet
Washing arms assenibly
Plug
Lock washer
Hub
Ring nut
Gasket
Retaining ring
Flow reducer
Jets support; lower
Solenoid valve; 20 l/m
GASKET; DIAM 3/4
Ed. 06-02
Doc. Nr.:
6-11 803
Undercounter dishwasher W t 3 7 / W T 3 8
Jlk
Pos
Code
445
446
450
451
452
461
462
464
465
466
467
471
472
473
474
475
476
048816
049801
048308
068642
049268
048834
049201
049904
049881
048195
049332
0L0349
049419
049026
046946
048883
L0094
Descrizione
Description
Ref. / Notes
Ass.Tubo alimentazione
Iniettore Det. AISI304
Trappola d'aria per pressost.
OR 2062x15.54
Dado M14X1.5
Ass.filtro 3/4 G
Guarnizione; diam 3/4
Tubo
Pressostato
Raccordo 3 vie
Valvola DVGW
Assieme tappo
Tubo; interno, pompa det.
Portagomma Brill.
Fase. Torro W2 8-12/7,5 IVP
Tubo gomma 5X12
Dosatore idraulico
Pipe; straight + 90 degr, 2100mm

Iniection spigot
Air trap
0 Ring
Nut; Ml 4x1,5
Filter
Gasket; diam 3/4
Hose
Pressure switch
Connection 3 way; diam 12
Solenoid valve
Plug assembly
Hose; internal, det. Pump
Rubber holder
Hose clamp 8-12
Hose; 5x12
Dispenser; for rinse aid
Pagina 6: Componenti elettrici
Page 6: Electrical components
501
501
049897
0L0279
Interfaccia utente
Interfaccia utente
User Interface
User Interface
Up to ser. nr.: 317

From ser. nr.: 318
Up to ser. nr.: 330
From ser.nr.: 331
Up to ser. nr.: 421
not for "p"
From ser. nr.: 422
Up to ser. nr.: 523
not for "p"
From ser. nr.: 524
p - From ser. nr.: 422
Up to ser. nr.: 523
p - From ser. nr.: 524
501
0L0047
Interfaccia utente
User Interface
501
0L0552
Interfaccia utente
User Interface
501
OL0726
Interfaccia utente
User Interface
501
0L0538
Interfaccia utente
User Interface
501
502
503
504
504
505
0L0726
002670
049621
049937
0L0539
0L0032
Interfaccia utente
Prolunga pulsante
Snsore reed
Assieme cruscotto E.lux
Assieme cruscotto
Membrana adesiva
User Interface
Extension
Sensor
Control panel
Control panel
Stick membrane
505
505
505
506
506
507
T3
508
E: 508
o.
ri 509
o 509
0L1116
0L0681
0L0281
049883
0L0540
048888
048736
048736
049910
0L0045
Membrana adesiva
Membrana adesiva
Membrana adesiva
Trasform. 80VA 400..440/230V
Trasform. 30VA 180/254V
Rel
Contattore K209
Contattore K209
Scheda mad re
Scheda mad re
Stick membrane
Stick membrane
Stick membrane
Transform. 80VA 400..440/230V
Transform. 30VA 180/254V
Relay; 230v, 2 cont, step 5
Contactor; 200V, 50/60H2, 25A
Contactor; 200V, 50/60H2, 25A
Main board
Main board
Scheda madre
Main board
00
t
<D
509
0L0541
UJ
509
510
511
511
512
513
513
513
513
0L0705 ! Scheda madre

049303 Filtro RFI trifase
049618 Morsettiera Princ.
0L0111 Morsettiera Princ.
048429 Fissaggio Res. Vasca
049954 Res. Vasca 2kW-230V
048924 Res. Vasca 2.2kW-230V
048925 Res. Vasca 2.2kW-200V
048998 Res. Vasca 2.2kW-440V
z
CO
CO
O
Q.
(0
(D
Main board
RFI filter; three phase
Junction box
Junction box
Bracket
Heating
Heating
Heating
Heating
element;
element;
element;
element;
230V,
230V,
200V,
440V,
not for "p"

P
Not for "m,p,u,v,x,y,a1"
Electrolux
al
u,v,x,y - Cafe Line
m,p - Medical Line
k,l,q,r,s,t
P
k,l,q,r,s,t
k,r,s
l,q,t
Uptoser. nr.: 220
From Ser. nr.: 221
Up to Ser. nr.: 421
From Ser. nr.: 422
Uptoser. nr.: 523
From Ser. nr.: 524
Uptoser. 244
From ser. 245
2,0kW
2,2kW
2,2kW
2,2kW
f.g.y
a,b,c,d,e,h,m,p,u,v,x,a1
n,o
k,r,s
LU
CD
Da Ser. Nr. / From ser. nr.:
/214....
^^
Page: 11
Ed. 05-06
Poc. Nr.:
-JS - ^
^ ^ ^ ^
dl%
6-11 803
Undercounter dishwasher W T 3 7 / W T 3 8
Pos
Descrizione
Description
Ref. / Notes
513 048990
514 049580
514 0L0366
515 046376
516 049643
518 0E5037
519 049898
519 049992
519 049899
519 049900
519 0L0343
520 067898
520 046376
521 067899
521 0L0280
522 049884
522 : 049643
523 049939
524 049940
526 049901
Res. Vasca 2.2kW-400V

Supp Sensore NTC
Supp Sensore
OR 2037
Sensore NTC
OR 6225
Res. Flangiata 6kW 230V
Res. Flangiata 4.5kW 230V
Res. Flangiata 4.5kW 200V
OR 2025-1,78X6,07
OR 2037
Premistoppa
Prennistoppa
Sonda di Temperatura
Sonda di Temperatura
Guamizione DX Crusc. El.
Guamizione SX Crusc. El.
Filtro induttivb-cap.; monofase
Heating element; 400V, 2,2kW

Support; sensor
Support; sensor
0 Ring 2037
Sensor
O-Ring
Heating element 6kW 230V
Heating element 9.0kW 230V
Heating element 6kW 254V
0 Ring
0 Ring
Stuffing box
Stuffing box
Temp, sound
Temp, sound
Gasket right
Gasket left
filter; single phase
l,q,t
Up to ser. nr.: 329
From ser. nr.: 330
527
528
529
590
590
0L0542
0L0543
0L0544
0L0049
0L0050
Elettromagnete
Guarnizione elettromagnete
Guamizione cruscotto
Cabiaggio
Cablaggio
Electromagnet
Electromagnet gasket
Control panel gasket
Wiring hardness
Wiring hardness
590
0L0465
Cabiaggio
Wiring hardness
590
590
0L0545
0L0530
Cablaggio aggluntivo
Cabiaggio aggluntivo
Additional wiring harness

Additional wiring harness
Code
a,b,c,f,g,h,l,m,p,q,t,y
u,v,x
d,e,a1
k,r,s
n,o
Up to ser. nr.: 317
From to ser. nr.: 318
Up to ser. nr.: 317
Up to ser. nr.: 317
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,
m,n,o,p,u,v,x,y,a1
P
P
P
notfor"l,k,q,r,s,t"
l,k,q,r,s,t
Up to ser. nr.: 237
l,k,q,r,s,t
f r o m ser. nr.: 238
P
u,v,x,y
x>
E
o.
cj
o
m
1
T;
1
(O
LU
6
CO
(O
CO
_i
ri
(0
o
a
IB
0)
UJ
oc
m
Da S er. Nr. / From ser. nr.:
/214 ....
Page: 1 2
Ed. 05-06
Doc. Nr.: 6-11 803
r)
ru
CC
a:
(.)
ZX
:x
CJ
cC
ro
CD
CC
>
r*
LU
CC
i.
_J
C_> CE
o
o
CC
2 : 2 : 2 :
O
Q-
LU
cr
0
0
tn
n
r
i n
CC
^s.
rf'
r r
_ j
(>
_!.
r*
LU
til
h l
2 :
0
e j
i n
IH
fi
111
CT
f^
. ^_ '^
^-
i -
U)
OL
i."
CD
i r
ri
tn
i r
Ilt
rxLuo
L
n_j_i
u-
1
fTl
7"
cr
1
-r
c/l
--- .^
CLQ-Q.
Q:c\j
o : 2 : LU
rDcx>-
IH
CC
LU
CC
i a-
V
7-
re
n
f 1
h-
z:
:^
H
CC
^1
r~~
i n
CT
11
Il 1
Ml
(1
en
IH
LJ
1
2:
III
a)il
r-j
ca
CC
f )
rr
ht
a:
rr
2 :
t )
o:
CO
LJ
f^
in
1,1
'
'
I 5006 263 00 2/3

I
I I
"
- I M
il
I I
11
1 .
.-n-
^ '
-I
II
II
i> . 1
II
>
xi>>
P.
RINSE AID
DISPENSER
MAX. 30 VA
. ENERGY
MANftGHENT
SWITCH
DETERGENT
DISPENSER
MAX. 30 VA
THREE PHASE WITHOUT

NEUTRAL CONNECTION
400-440 V 50/60 Hz
iL
"
-JT-
iv
re-
~r-
'
--
'
. 1
1 .
I-
I .1 ' ^ ^
I .j':-a/V
=.
r.^.^
^-JV
Philips HD7448 Coffee Maker
Special features:
Good value for money. The Philips HD 7448 makes good hot coffee
quickly and easily. Translucent water reservoir. The distinctive water
reservoir looks good and improves visibility of the water level. Water
level indicator on jug. Markings on the jug ensure that you use the exact
amount of water that you need.
Technical specifications:
Brewing time: 7 minutes for the full jug.
Capacity: Holds 1.31. Makes from 10-15 cups
Coffee temperature after brewing: 82- C
Colour: White/blue
Filter size: 1 x 4
Material appliance: Polypropylene
Power consumption: 1100W
Voltage: 100V,120V,230V/50-60Hz
Weight: 1.37kg
Standard features
Cord storage: at rear for safety and a neat and tidy countertop. Swing
filter. Drip-stop function. Pilot lamp for safety. Lets you know when the
coffee maker is on.
HD7448, HD7446
.^
PHILIPS
t i
II
^'-'V^
46
46
I
ENGLISH 6
DEUTSCH 13
FRANCAIS 20
NEDERLANDS 27
ESPANOL 34
I T A L I A N 0 4I
PORTUGUES 48
NORSK 55
SYENSKA6i
SUOMI 67
DANSK 73
EAAHNIKA 79
TRKQE 87
INDONESIA 94
1111*1 m a 101
Q
Z
CO
o
Z
^_HJ^
112
^j\3\\Q
Important
Read these instructions for use carefully before using the appliance and
save them for future reference.
Check if the voltage indicated on the appliance corresponds to
the local mains voltage before you connect the appliance.
Do not use the appliance if the mains cord, the plug or the
appliance itself is damaged.
If the mains cord is damaged, it must be replaced by Philips, a
service centre authorised by Philips or similarly qualified persons
in order to avoid a hazard.
Do not place the appliance on a hot surface and prevent the
mains cord from coming into contact with hot surfaces.
Keep the appliance and its cord out of the reach of children. Do
not let the mains cord hang over the edge of the table or
worktop on which the appliance is standing.
Never immerse the appliance in water or any other liquid.
Unplug the appliance before cleaning it and if problems occur
during brewing.
Preparing for use
Clean the jug and the filter holder (see chapter 'Cleaning').
Put the appliance on a flat and stable surface.
Put the plug in an earthed wall socket.
I
You can store excess cord by pushing it into the opening at the
back of the coffee maker (fig. I).
Prevent the cord from coming into contact with hot surfaces.
Flushing the appliance
Open the lid (fig. 2).
Fill the water tank with cold fresh water and put the jug in place
(fig. 5).
Do not put a filter and ground coffee in the filter holder.
ENGLISH
I Switch the appliance on by pressing the on/off switch (fig. 4).
The light goes on (HD7448 only).
Let the appliance run until the water tank is completely empty.
Switch the appliance off when all the water is in the jug.
Let the appliance cool down for at least 3 minutes before you
start brewing coffee.
Using the appliance
Brewing coffee
Open the lid (fig. 2).
Fill the water tank fresh cold with water (fig. 5).
The graduations on the left are for large cups (120 ml).
The graduations on the right are for small cups (80 ml).
Close the lid.
Place the jug on the hotplate.
Make sure you place the jug properly on the hotplate.
If you don't place the jug properly on the hotplate, the drip stop will
prevent the coffee fronn flowing into the jug and the filter may overflow
as a result.
Open the filter holder (fig. 6).
I Take a paper filter (type 1x4 or no. 4) and fold the sealed edges
to prevent tearing and folding.
In some countries this coffee maker comes with a permanent filter In
that case you should not use paper filters.
Put the filter in the filter holder.
Put pre-ground coffee (filter-fine grind) in the filter (fig. 7).
For large cups: use one heaped measuring spoon of ground coffee for
each cup.
ENGLISH
For snnall cups: use one level measuring spoon of ground coffee for
each cup.
Close the lid.
LjJ Switch the appliance on by pressing the on/off switch (fig. 4).
The light goes on (HD7448 only).
When all the water has passed through the filter, you can
remove the jug from the appliance.
Switch the appliance off after use.
Let the appliance cool down for at least 3 minutes before you
start brewing coffee again.
3 Remove the filter holder and throw the paper filter away.
If you have used the permanent filter, empty and rinse it.
Cleaning
Always unplug the appliance before you start cleaning it.
Never immerse the appliance in water.
I Clean the outside of the appliance with a moist cloth.
Detach the filter holder.
Clean the jug and the removable filter holder in hot water with
some washing-up liquid or in the dishwasher (fig. 8).
After cleaning, rinse the jug with fresh hot water.
Descaling
Regular descaling will prolong the life of the appliance and will
guarantee optimal brewing results for a long time.
In case of normal use (two full jugs of coffee every day), descale the
coffee maker
- 2 or 3 times a year if you are using soft water;
ENGLISH
- 4 or 5 times a year if you are using hard water.
Turn to your local water board for infomnation about the water
hardness in your area.
Fill the water tank with white vinegar. Do not put a filter and
ground coffee in the filter holder.
Let the appliance complete two brewing cycles.
See chapter 'Using the appliance'. Let the appliance cool down before
you start the second run.
KJLet the appliance complete two more brewing cycles with fresh,
cold water to remove all vinegar residues.
I
You can also use an appropriate liquid descaler. In this case,

follow the instructions on the package of the descaler.
Do not use a descaling powder.

Clean the separate parts (see chapter 'Cleaning').
Accessories
You can order a new jug from your Philips dealer or a Philips
service centre under type number HD7983/70 (white) or
HD7983/20 (black).
You can order a permanent filter from your Philips dealer or a
Philips service centre under reference number 4822 48050 479
(permanent nylon coffee filter).
Environment
Do not throw the appliance away with the normal household
waste at the end of its life, but hand it in at an official collection
point for recycling. By doing this you will help to preserve the
environment (fig. 9).
10
ENGLISH
Guarantee & service
If you need information or if you have a problem, please visit the Philips
website at www.philips.com or contact the Philips Customer Care
Centre in your country (you will find its phone number in the
worldwide guarantee leaflet). If there is no Customer Care Centre in
your country, turn to your local Philips dealer or contact the Service
Department of Philips Domestic Appliances and Personal Care BV.
ENGLISH
II
Troubleshooting
Problem
Solution
The appliance doesn't work.
Check if
- the appliance is plumed in,
- the voltage indicated on the
appliance corresponds to the local
mains voltage.
- the appliance is switched on.
- in all other cases, contact the Philips
Customer Care Centre.
Water leaks out of the appliance.
Check if:
- the water tank has not been filled
beyond the MAX level.
- in all other cases, contact the Philips
Customer Care Centre.
The appliance takes a long time to

brew coffee.
Descale the appliance (see chapter

'Descaling').
The appliance produces a lot of noise Check if

and steam during the brewing process.
- the water tank has been filled with
COLD water
Descale the appliance (see chapter
'Descaling').
Coffee grounds end up in the jug.
Check if
- the filter holder hasn't overflowed
because there is too much ground
coffee in the filter.
- the filter holder hasn't overflowed
because the jug jas not been placed
correctly under the filter holder
ENGLISH
Problem
Solution
- the opening in the bottom of the
filter holder isn't clogged.
- the right size of paper filter has been
used.
- the paper filter isn't torn.
The coffee is too weak
Check if:
- the right proportion of coffee to
water has been used.
- the paper filter hasn't collapsed.
- the right size of paper filter has been
used.
The coffee doesn't taste good.
Don't leave the jug with coffee on the

hotplate too long, especially not if it
only contains a small amount of coffee.
The coffee isn't hot enough.
Check if:
- the jug has been properly placed on
the hotplate.
- the hotplate and the jug are clean
(see chapter 'Cleaning').
W e advise you to brew more than
three cups of coffee to ensure that the
coffee has the right temperature.
Tips:
- use thin cups, because they will
absorb less heat from the coffee than
thick cups.
- don't use cold milk from the fridge.
There is less coffee in the jug than

expected.
Check if the jug has been properly

placed on the hotplate. If this isn't the
case, the drip stop will prevent the
coffee from flowing out of the filter.
l\3
O B
= j .
206991-
=4
=JV.
en
,A.
c=A
c==!ls
^ -_jM*f:Li
C-
^j^î^fa- K'feL'S^.-. V^h;^-^ kaaai:^^
=^
_jiiaetai1>id
Ol
S] Electrolux
Ironing boards,
wall mounted/free-standing
'\
Model 62 05 72
Model 62 Ol 35
WALL MOUNTED:
SPACE SAVING
FOLD-UP EXECUTION
ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT
FREE-STANDING:
ROBUST CONSTRUCTION
SLEEVE BOARD INCLUDED
ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT
MARINE DIVISION
Phone +46 322 74 000
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail
pa.marineinfo@electrolux.se
The wall mounted ironing board is easily

adjustable in ergonomically right working
height. When not in use, the board can be
folded up in up-right position with minimal
space need.
The robust, free-standing ironing board is

easily adjustable in ergonomically right
working height. The board is provided
with fold-away iron tray and can be
completed with a sleeve board included in
the delivery.
models, please see overleaf.
19-040
DOC.NO.
EDITIONS
19-040BM
01.01
IRONING BOARDS, WALL MOUNTED/FREE-STANDING
Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm
1590
max 900
ja_
\
<\
Ironing board, wall mounted, model 62 01 35
Ironing board, firee-standing, model 62 05 72
Specification
Weight kgs
Model
Execution
62 0135
62 05 72
wall mounted
free-standing
Shipping
net
gross
volume m^
10
0.050
0.080
Ironing board, wall mounted, installation:
6 Hote dia=o6
Max. 950
420
Up-right
position
,>-
19-040
"Adjustable min/max working height

over fit flor level.
o:
o-
>02
c==A
2069914
,!k
=A
om
c=A.
4^
c=A,
=?.
=A
^
=^
. ^-jik.l>satiju&
Ol
i\3
M LOiPART
Exclusive Sales of
8] E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment
Microwave oven RE-R40SM
Model RE-R40SM
STEEL CONSTRUCTION
UNIFORM HEATING
DIGITAL DISPLAY WITH TIMER
CONTROL BUTTONS
WARMING, STERILIZING, THAWING, DEODORIZATION
LARGE CONVEX SEE-THROUGH

WINDOW
INTERIOR LIGHT
EASYTO CLEAN
LOIPRT AB
P.O.BQX694
SE 44118 Aiingss, Sweden
Phone
+46322668360
Telefax
+46322637747
E-mail
lQipart@ioipart.se
The RE-R40SM is a domestic type ofmicrowave oven.

The revolutionary space saving design of
"round" microwave oven features an exterior
diameter that is 10% smaller than other ones
with same capacity ofmicrowave ovens.
It is easy to clean the inside of equipment
owing to the "round" cooking area.
The oven provides 'quick thawing', 'auto

cooking', 'manual cooking', 'convenient cooking' and 'deodorization by one-touch' in
ability.
Standard supply includes 1.7 m cable with
earthed plug.
For further specifications, please see overleaf.
6-926
DOC.NO.
EDITION 1
6-926L
08.04
MICROWAVE OVEN RE-R40SM

Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm
OOOO [EBIoQOQQ
320
1.
Electrical connertion, 1.7 m cable

with earthed plug included
Specification
Model
RE-R40SM
Capacity
krs
27
6-926J
Dimensions mm
Voltage
A
422
437
320
230 1 -60
Microwave
power kW
Power consumption
at fill! power
kW
Fuse
A
0.7
1.1
10
Weight kgs
net
gross
13.5
15
Shipping
volume m '
0.080
Instruction & Operation Manual
Microwave Oven
RE-R40S/RE-R40SIV!
- PREPARATION I. Suggestions for the safety.

1. Please don't take out the plug by plucking out the cord.
-/'.
Don't touch the plug with wet hands.
2. Don't put the candle-light and the light of a

cigarette on the microwave oven.
Don't
install the microwave oven near the heat

machines.
3. Please don't operate the vacant microwave oven
except "DEODORIZATION".
4. Don't operate the thick peel of the fruit

and the bottle with a cap.
5. Don't hold the food and the container
right after cooking.
Please use the
gloves from the burns.
6. Please don't use metal bowl.
7. When you clean the microwave oven,

please take out the plug.
Don't spray the
water to the machine directly.

Cleaning by benzene, alcohol and thinner is not allowed.
mi
8. Please don't lay the bowl including water,

medicine and metal.
9. Please don't use and preserve the

inflammable spray and material around the
^S'
microwave oven.
10. Please don't wrap the food with paper.

'^^^
Interior light
Operating board
Exhaust pipe
II. Introduction
Window
^
^
^
^
i
-^
'i
/
Rotation dish
Spindle
Door opening safety device

Rotation base
Handle
~^^^ V ^ t = - - ^ .
* Installation of the components: Insert the "rotation base" inside of oven and put the
rotation dish on the "rotation dish".
III. Installation
Please l<eep tiie space as per tiie beiow.
_ ^___ , - "
"
20Cm..
'
45Cm
10Cm
i>-^
OPERATION < The kinds of usable bowls >

I. The Usable Bowls.
Heat-resisting Glass
i-'i
Heat-resisting Plastic(120C)
Ceramics
^ ^ ^
K:^
*'sa!^'"
II. The below bowls needs caution.

1. Usual glass. Only for warming water and milk lightly.
2. Usual plastic. Only for warming the cold food lightly.
^j^.-i
3. Paper dish and paper bowl. ~~ Only for warming the water slightly.
.-*JL
.J* S
III. The below bowls are prohibited.

The bowl including gold and silver line
Metal bowls.
dkf^
'f
^^Ô^
IV. Using method of Wraps and Vinyl bag.

1. Wraps
You can use the wraps in warming of freezing food and stew.
You can use wraps instead of cover
'"^s> '.^^^-V^'
.<-mmf
k Notice ~~ Please don't use the wraps on fried food.

2. Vinyl Bag
You can use the vinyl bag in boiling the vegetable slightly.
Please make holes the vinyl bag in boiling the vegetable without fail.
^%Jd
<Control Panel>
Cancel
For cancel cooking
Deodorization ~
Lief intelligence ~
For removing the smell
For setting the cooking time
inside of ovens.
(1MIN: For setting the
For sterilizing the baby

bottle and
present time
steaming towel
Time ~
warming ~
For warming cooked rice
stew, steaming eggs.
This button is used

together with the button
Thawing ~
For thawing meat,
the fowls, and fishes.
"1MIN"
when setting
the present time.
START/+30SEC.~
Indication ~
The progress of
cooking is indicated.
For warming beverages.
In order to set the present time. ~ Operation: ex)ln order to 10:25
Press "time" once.

TIME
Press " I M I N " lOtimes and set 10.
IMIN
Press "time" once.
TIME
IMIN
II
Press " I M I N " 25times and set 25.
Press "time" once.
Time was set.
TIME
'W'
I) Light warming(For warming food lightly)

* If you want to warm one(1) cup of coffee, ~
1. After insert the coffee,
2,
Press the button "START"

Whenever
you
press
the
button "START", SOseconds

is added.
S'lARl/tSOShC.
3. If you want to cancel the warming,

press the button "CANCEL"
CANCEF.
s MB ' "'
kr
li) WARMING
* If you want to warm cooked rice.
1. After insert the cooked rice.
2. Press "1.COOKED RICE" once

and select No. " 1 " .
1. Cooked nee 2 Stew 3. Steamed eggs
vm
A
3. It starts automatically after 2 seconds.
Ill) STERILIZING
* If you want to sterilize the baby bott
1. Insert the baby bottle including
50ml of water.
2. Press the button"1.STERILIZING"

once and select no. "1".
1. Baby bottle 2. Steaming towl
2. It starts automatically after 2 seconds

*
Notice: Don't operate the vacant baby bottle
IV) THAWING.
* If you melt the meat, 300g
2. Press the button "THAWING" 2
1. After inserting the meat
times and select SOOg. 100g is

added every press.
THAWING
.S'S
^"
3. It starts automatically after 2 seconds

4. If the bell is ringing 10 times during thawing, open the door and turn over the meat
5. Close the door and press the "START"
START/+30SEC.
V I ) For setting the cooking time.

* If you want to warm the food for 2 minutes and 30 seconds
1. Insert the food.
2. Please press the button "1MIN"

twice
"
and press
the
button
"10SEC"3times.
1IVIIN
10SEC " ~
fej
3. Press the "START".
START/+30SEC.
"
V) DEODORIZATION
1. Press the button "DEODORIZATION". It operates for 5 minutes
DEODORIZATION
=A
c=JV.
=5b
ars
c=!V.
B\3
=Jk
-^
4^
c=Jk
Tilting frying tables
Model 16 80 35S
MARINE DIVISION
Phone +46 322 74 000
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail
STURDY AND HEAVY DUTY

DESIGN
CAST IRON PAN
THERMAL-INSULATED
HIGH CAPACITY
EASY TO MAINTAIN AND TO

CLEAN
4 DIFFERENT SIZES
The frying pan, made of cast iron, is carefiilly designed for a perfect frying result.
The casing is thermal-insulated and has a
polished stainless steel exterior. The counter-balanced lid is entirely made of polished
stainless steel.
Powerfiil, embedded heating elements and
a thermostat control provide an even and
rapidly reached surface temperature up to
300C.
The gently tilting action, possible to set in
any desired position, is operated by a reliable hand wheel gear mechanism.
The heavy column is made of polished
stainless steel. Special bolts in top facilitate
a perfect pan levelling.
Four different pan sizes are available.
For further specifications and details of the
different models, please see overleaf.
3-563
DOC.NO.
EDITIONS
3-563BM
02.04
TILTING FRYING TABLES

Dimensions mm
Scale 1:20
[SB
1.
2.
3.
4.
Thermostat control
Pilot lamp
Cable entry for power loading
Foundation frame, optional extras
- not included
5. Floor gully, optional extras
- not included
=0,50
H75
Installation
Steel foundation to be welded to deck as per measures.
To be in level in all direaions and in height. Top of foundation to be at least 5 mm
over fit floor to avoid seepage. Fill the foundation frame if possible to reduce risk of
fiirther seepage.
Bolting holes (4 pes. 0 10) are symmetrically positioned.
e
t
Dimensions mm
a
c ; M
a*
4
\
b*
320
255
278
180
37
370
305
328
200
52
dim. a and b correspond to dim. G and K

on installation drawing
Dimensions mm
Model
16 80 32S
630
550
16 80 33S
870
16 80 34S
1170
16 80 35S
870
1600
300
700
870
1650
I*
200
320
300
150
210
300
450
75
255
630
65
175
305
780
110
400
370
300
550
400
* with removable equipment - 140 mm
Specifications
Frying area
mm
Depdi
mm
16 80 32S
500x450
60
16 80 33S
700x560
Model
90
16 80 34S
1000x560
16 80 35S
700x560
3-563
Subjact to changes without notice.
180
Voltage V
440
400
440
400
440
400
440
400
3-60
3-50
3-60
3-50
3-60
3-50
3-60
3-50
Loading
kW
Max amps
in phase
5.5
Weight kgs
Shipping
volume m^
net
gross
7.2
130
145
1.050
10
13.1
180
220
1.650
14
18.4
210
265
1.700
10
13.1
190
240
1.650
Handbok
Ksikirja
Hndbok
Hndbog
Handbook
Stekbord
Paistinpannu
Stegebord
Stekebord
Frying table
3-563
DOG. NO. 520 56 85-25
EDITION 1 M 04.97
SE;
Sida.
4-6,7-9
(FU
Sivu.
4-6,10-12
(NO)
Side.
4-6,13-15
(DK)
Side.
4-6, 16-18
GB^
Page
4-6,19-21
Model
168032
168033
630
870
168034
1170
168035
870
Model
167800
320
370
167801
1600
550
700
700
700
300
b
254
304
c
278
328
1650
d
180
200
200
300
450
300
e
37
52
fig.1
320
300
150
75
255
630
65
370
400
550
400
210
175
305
780
110
15
1. Termostat
2. Signallampa
3. Kabelintag, effektledning. Ledning uppdrages 0,75
m. over frdigt golv.
4. Jngjutningsfundament (Tillbehr, ingr ej i leveransen.)
5. Golvgrop (Tillbehr, ingr ej i leveransen.)
1. Termostaatti
2. Merkkivalo
3. Kaapeliliitnt, tehonsyttkaapeli. Kaapeli vedetn 0,75 m valmiin lattian ylpuolelle.
4. Valujalusta (Lisvaruste, ei sislly toimitukseen)
5. Lattiakaivo (Lisvaruste, ei sislly toimitukseen)
1. Termostat
2. Signallampe
3. Kabelinngang, effektledning. Ledning trekkes opp
0,75 m. over ferdig gulv.
4. Innstpningsfundament (tllleggsutstyr, ikke del av
leveransen).
5. Gulvgrop (tilleggsutstyr, ikke del av leveransen).
1. Termostat
2. Signallampe
3. Kabelindgang, effektledning. Ledning ophnges
0,75 m over frdigt gulv.
4. Indstbningsfundament (tilbehr, indgr ikke i leverancen.)
5. Gulvaflb (tilbehr, indgr ikke i leverancen.)
1. Thermostat
2. Signal lamp
3. Cable access point, power cable. The cable is
drawn 0.75 m over a finished floor.
4. Base for cementing into place (Accessory, not in
eluded).
5. Recessed floor drain (Accessory, not included).
Elschema
Shkkaavio
Elskjema
Ledningsdiagram
Wiring diagram
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
16 80 32
L3 12 LI
Kontaktor
Element
Termostat
SIgnallampa
Transformator
Skring
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Kontaktori
Lampelementti
Termostaatti
Merkkivalo
Muuntaja
Sulake
NO)
-%TTO
16 80 33
16 80 34
16 80 35
L3 12 LI
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Kontaktor
Element
Termostat
Signallampe
Transformator
Sikring
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Kontaktor
Varmeelement
Termostat
Signallampe
Transformator
Sikring
(GB)
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
fig.4
Contactor
Heating element
Thermostat
Signal lamp
Transformer
Fuse
SE
Tekniska specifikationer
Modeli
168032
168033
168034
168035
Stekyta (mm)
500x450
700x560
1000x560
700x560
Stekpannans djup (mm)
60
90
90
180
Max fasstrm (A)
10
16
25
16
Effekt (kW)
5,5
10,0
14,0
10,0
Vikt (kg)
165
180
200
190
Ansiutningsspnning 1680320801 (V, Hz)
400 3-50
Anslutningsspnning 1680320501 (V, Hz)
440 3-60
Kapslingsklass
IPX4
Alimanna anvisningar
Om foreskrifter i detta och utrustningens vriga dokument inte fijs, kan dess skerhet ventyras och
leverantrens garanti- och produktansvar upphra.
Ls noggrant freskrifterna i detta dokument, eftersom det inneliller viktiga skertietsupplysningar betrffande installation, driftsskerhet, anvndning och
underfill av Produkten. Frvara handlingen s att den
r tillgnglig for alia anvndare.
Installation och testkrning maste gras av en for
andamlet utbildad tekniker och enligt tillverkarens
instruktioner. Se Installationsanvisning.
Installation av produkten, sval som dess anslutningar, skall utfras enligt gallande normer och foreskrifter.
All service, underhall samt reparation skall ske av
en for andamlet utbildad tekniker. Endast originalreservdelar fr anvndas vid utbyte. Se Reservdelskatalog*.
Handhavande och sktsel skall enbart ske av p denna produkt utbildad personal (operator).
Innan utrustningen tas i bruk skall operatoren
infrskaffa goda kunskaper i handhavande och
sktsel.
mycket noggrant g igenom skerhetsinstruktioner
och varningstexter.
Fore uppstllning
Rengr ingjutningsramen frn betongrester. Rensa de fyra
skruvhlen med en MIO gngtapp.
Uppstllning
Tag bort emballaget.
God luftcirkulation r viktig runt stekbordet. Placera
stekbordet enligt fig.1.
Stall stekbordet plant.
Montera och drag t de med brickor frsedda fstskruvarna.
Avigsna skyddsplasten frsiktigt. Eventuella limrester avigsnas med ett lmpligt lsningsmedel.
Stekhllen r vid leverans rostskyddsbehandlad med
rostskyddsolja. Rengr hallen, samt vriga delar och
tillbehr med varmt vatten och ett neutralt disk/rengringsmedel. Sklj drefter noga.
Justering av lutning
Kontrollera att stekbordet r plant.

Lutning i sidled justeras med tv insexskruvar. Dessa
r placerade undertill p upphngningsbalken som haller stekpannan, p vardera sidan om upphngningbalkens infstning i pelaren.
Lutning framt eller bakt justeras enligt fljande: Tag
loss vnster sidoplt. Horisontallaget regieras med
justerskruven vid upphngningsbalken.
Elektrisl( anslutning
Medlevereras ej. Kan bestllas frn tillverkaren eller

via tillverkarens representant.
Installationsanvisning
CE- Direktiv
Stekbordet r tillverkat i verensstmmelse med EG-direktiv LVD 73/23/EEC, EMC 89/336/EEC och r som enskild enhet CE-godknd och markt CE.
Den elektriska anslutningen mste uHras enligt gllande normer och foreskrifter.
Effektledning 3-fas + jord anslutes i kopplingsboxen i
pelaren av behrig person.
Kontrollera p stekbordets dataskylt att rtt effektspnning erhllits. Stekbordets anslutning skall utgras av
en fast installation.
Stekbordet anslutes tili ntet genom inkoppling via
anlggningens central.
Kontrollera att ntet r frberett, eller kan belastas

med den aktuella strmmen och att det r frsett med
ordentlig skyddsjordning.
Svi effekt- som manverstrm skall vara avskrade. Skringen skall ha tillrcklig mrkstrm for att
kunna leverera erforderlig kraft til! stekbordet.
Stekbordet bor anslutas till eintet over en allpolig
brytare (leverantrens rekommendation), med vilken
strm-tillfrseln till stekbordets effekt- och manoverledning kan brytas.
Stekbordet r frsett med en yttre ekvipotential jordklmma, som finns placerad p baksidan av pelaren.
Tillbehr
Modell
16 78 00
16 78 01
GGS 460
GGM 460
GGP 460
Benmning
Ingjutningsram till modeil 16 80 32
Ingjutningsram till modeil 16 80 33, -34, -35
Golvbrunn tili stengolv
Golvbrunn tili massagolv
Golvbrunn tili plastmatta
Bruksanvisning
Anvndningsomrade
stekbordet r avsett att anvndas tili matlagning i alia
typer av storkk. Ngot annat anvndningsomrade an
matlagning r ej tilltet. Stekbordet fr ej anvndas som
frits.
Produktbeskrivning
stekbordet har jmn stektemperatur over heia stekytan,
stor kapacitet, arbetsbesparande, god ekonomi, och r
stjipbart.
Stekpannan r tillverkad av frstklassigt gjutjrn. Stekbordets yttersidor, pelare samt lock r tillverkad av sllpad
rostfri plat. Stekbordet r omsorgsfullt vrmeisolerat. Locket r uppfllbart och vl balanserat.
Regieringsorganen utgrs av kombinerad brytare och termostat i kombination med en kontakter. Kontaktorn r placerad i pelaren.
En signallampa indikerar nr strm r tillslagen. Med termostaten regleras varmen p stekytan steglst frn 100C
upp till 300C.
Framfr stekbordet kan golvgrop med galler placeras. Djup
minst 150 mm for att i mjligaste mn eliminera risken for
stank och verskljning vid en for hastig tmning av stekbordet. Golvgaller med ram eller golvgrop komplett med
ram avsedd att ingjutas i golvet, kan levereras mot srskild bestllning. Gallret r specieilt utformat for att undvika halkning.
Skerhetsinstruktioner
Spnningsfrande delar ! Vattenstrle fr ej riktas direkt mot kontrollpanelen eller dess nrhet. Vatten i kontakt med spnningsfrande delar medfr direkt livsfara.
Lt aldrig vatten komma i kontakt med uppvrmd stekbordshll. Detta kan leda till sprickor i gjutgodset med
kortslutning som fljd.
Hga temperaturer! Bordets stekande yta kan med termostaten regleras steglst frn 100C upp till 300C. Vid
dessa hga temperaturer skall stekspade anvndas vid
narkontakt med den stekande matrtten.
Eldslga ! Stektillsatser med lg flammpunkt kan innebra att eldslga uppstr. Anvnd alltid godknda stektillsatser. Om eldslga uppstr minimerar man syretillfrelsen genom att stnga locket. r inte detta tillrckligt stanger man av stekbordet och tcker springorna mellan hallen, locket och pipen med en brandfilt. Vid detta slckningsarbete skall skyddshandskar med handledskrage
anvndas.
Obs ! Vid ovanstende tillbud: Anvnd aldrig vatten.
Tekniska data
En dataskylt med stekbordets tekniska uppgifter finns placerad p pelarens nedersta vnstra de! (fig.3).
Om utrustningen inte anvnds

Om utrustningen inte skall anvndas under lngre tid
mste fljande instruktioner fljas:
Bryt effekt- och manverstrmmen tili Stekbordet, genom huvudstrmbrytaren eller i anlggningens central.
Rengr Stekbordet och alia tillbehr.
Lt locket st ppet s att luft kan cirkulera i utrymmet
och p s satt hindra att mgel och dlig lukt utvecklas.
Instekning
Stek in stekbordet. Anvnd drvid ett tunt lager matolja.
Anvndning (fig.2)
stall in termostatvredet (1.) p nskat lge. Signallampan (2.) tands.

Prova med en Ilten mngd stekfett att stekbordet har
rtt temperatur. Vid behov ndras termostatlaget. Var
noga med att ha stekytan i horisontallge.
Stekbordet r klart att anvndas.
Skrapa vid behov stekbordet under stekningen, t.ex.
fore ny pfyllning.
Vid avslutad stekning stall termostatvredet (1.) p lge
0. Signallampan (2.) slocknar.
Beredskapsvrme (fig.2)
Lt termostatvredet (1.) st p lge 5. Stekbordet kan
sedan snabbt komma upp i varme d det skall anvndas.
Rengring
Produkten skall vara avstngd och avsvalnad d rengring
sker. Anvnd varmt vatten och ett neutralt disk/
rengringsmedel. Anvnd inte stlull eller slipande
rengringsmatrial vid rengring av rostfria ytor. Om
rengringsmedel innehllande klor (t.ex. klorin) anvnts
mste skljningen gras extra noggrant. Klor och
klorfreningar i kontakt med rostfritt stl kan frorsaka
korrosionsangrepp. Fasta inbrnda stekrester i stekhllen
skrapas bort med stlborste, pimpsten eller i svrare fall
med stlspackelspade.
OBS ! Vattenstrle fr ej riktas direkt mot kontrollTag varsamt bort isoleringen som ligger under botpanelen eller dess nrhet. Vatten i kontakt med spntenplten och spara denna.
ningsfrande delar medfr direkt livsfara. Lt aldrig 7. Under isoleringen ligger presspltar som har till uppvatten komma i kontakt med uppvrmd stekbordsgift att hlla elementen p plats.
hall. Detta kan leda till sprickor i gjutgodset med kortLossa elledningarna, som kommer fram ur presspltslutning som fljd.
ens hl, vid kopplingsldan. Obs ! Spara steatitprlorna till de nya elementen. Lyft bort och renskrapa
Finns i anlggningen mer an ett stekbord till frfogande
pressplten (presspltarna).
br dessa delas upp mellan ktt och fisk, for att slippa 8. Under pressplten ligger en keramisk fiberplatta som
arbetsam och tidsdande rengring. Finns bara ett bord
ej gr att teranvnda. Rensa ren stekpannan frn
maste en noggrann rengring gras mellan dessa
denna och kasta den. Ny isolerplatta frn leverantmatsorter, annars kan de ta smak av varandra.
rens reservdelslager br bestllas tilisammans med
elementen.
9. Lyft bort elementen. Obs ! Glimmerbrickorna som r
vriga dokument:
placerade vid avslutningen av elementet skall teranReservdelskatalog (medlevereras ej)
vndas. Renborsta elementsparen.
EG-frskran (medlevereras ej)
10. Kontrollera att rtt elementspnning erhllits. Elementen monteras enligt ilggningsschemat. I vissa fall kan
elementen behva justeras med cirka plus minus tre
parlor.
r spiralen for lang krossar man lampligt antal parlor.
Spiralen fjdrar d tillbaka av egen kraft och blir korFel, orsak, tgard
tare.
r spiralen for kort lossar man ndsteatiten och komOjmn stekning
pletterar med parlor frn de gamla elementen.
1. Stekbordet r ej plant.
Obs 1 Glm ej glimmerbrickorna.
Flj instruktionerna 'justering av lutning' i installaElementndarna forses med de sparade prlorna och
tionsanvisningen.
anpassas till kopplingsbultarna. Obs I Var noggrann
2. Fastbrnda matrester.
vid fastdragningen tili kopplingsbultarna.
Se bruksanvisning: Rengring.
11. Omvand termontering sker.
Obs I Drag ej t presspltarna for kraftigt. Risk foreOjmn eller svag varme
ligger d att elementparlorna spricker.
1. Defekta skringar
2. Defekta elledningar
Byte av termostat
3. Element fungerar ej
Tilise att stekbordet r avstngt.
Kontrollera att presspltarna ligger an mot elemen- Bryt effekt- och manverledningen till stekbordet.
ten och att inte skruvarna lossnat.
Lossa termostatvredet och bakomvarande frontplt.
Flj Serviceinstruktionerna 'byte av element'.
Skruva loss termostaten. Tag bort elledningarna och
4. Termostat fungerar ej
drag fram termostaten endast ngon bulblngd. Klipp
Flj Serviceinstruktionerna 'byte av element.
av knseltrden s nra termostathuset som mjligt.
Linda, gia och tejpa fast knseltrden ordentligt kring
den nya termostatens bulb s att knseltrden gr att
Serviceinstruktioner
an Vanda som dragtrd.
Byte av element
Tippa stekpannan till max. Lossa luckan i stekbordets bottenplt och den lilla isoleringsbiten, s att terVid byte och bestllning av element las forst punkt 8.
mostatbulben blir synlig. Lossa bulben och drag fr1. Tilise att stekbordet r avstngt.
siktigt fram den nya.
2. Bryt effekt- och manverledningen till stekbordet.
3. Lossa effekt- och manverkablarna, som gr mellan Omvand termontering sker.
pelarens kopplingslda och stekbordets kopplingsutrymme, frn kontaktorn och kopplingsplinten. Tippa Allmant
bordet. Lossa spiralslangen i balken och drag ur de
Var noggrann med att stta tillbaka lsbrickorna p
redan lossade effekt och manverkablarna. Tippa tillsin rtta plats, eller byt ut dom emot nya. Vissa muttbaka bordet till arbetslge.
rar kan vara brnda och har drmed ftt en utmattad
4. Tag bort stekbordslocket och konsolen.
kvalitet. Byt ut dessa mot nya. Viktigt r ocks att alia
delar rengres val frn fastbrnt fett. Dar popnitar har
5. Lossa sidopltarna, samt de fyra skruvarna p vardera pelarsida vid upphgningsbalken. Pannan r nu
suttit kan man stta skruvar for att underltta for framklar att lyftas frn pelaren. Obs! Till detta lyft erfordas
tida arbete.
tv personer. Lgg pannan p ett underlag s att ratten kan rra sig fritt ovanfr golvet och s att vare sig
golv eller panna kommer till skada. Upphgningsbalken kan nu genom att vrida ratten, placeras dar den
r minst ivgen.
6. Lossa bottenplten. Luckan i platen skall sitta kvar.
Serviceanvisning

Tekniset tiedot
Malli
168032
168033
168034
168035
Paistopinta (mm)
500x450
700x560
1000x560
700x560
Paistinpannun syvyys (mm)
60
90
90
180
Maks. vaihevirta (A)
10
16
25
16
Teho (kW)
5,5
10,0
14,0
10,0
Paino (kg)
165
180
200
190
Liitntjnnite 1680320801 (V, Hz)
400 3-50
Liitntjnnite 1680320501 (V, Hz)
440 3-60
Suojausluokka
IPX4
Yleiset ohjeet
Jos tss ohjeessa ja tuotteen muissa asiakirjoissa
annettuja mryksi ei noudateta, saattaa sen turvallisuus vaarantua ja toimittajan takuu- ja tuotevastuu lakata olemasta voimassa.
Lue huolellisesti tss asiakirjassa annetut mrykset, koska niihin sisltyy tuotteen asennusta, kyttturvallJsuutta, kytt ja huoltoa koskevia trkeit
turvaohjeita. Silyt asiakirja niin, ett se on kaikkien kyttjien saatavilia.
Tuotteen asennus ja koekytt on annettava siihen
koulutetun asentajan suoritettavaksi valmistajan
ohjeiden mukaisesti. Katso alia olevat ohjeet sek
Asennusohje.
Tuotteen asennus, samoin kuin sen llitnnt, on suoritettava soveltuvan standardin ja mrysten mukaisesti.
Kaikki tuotteen huolto-, kunnossapito- ja korjaustyt
on annettava siihen koulutetun asentajan suoritettaviksi. Tuotteeseen saa vaihtaa vain alkuperisi varaosia. Katso Huolto-ohje* ja Varaosaluettelo*.
Tt tuotetta saa kytt ja huoltaa vain siihen koulutettu henkilo (kyttj).
Ennen tuotteen kyttnottoa on kyttjn:
hankittava hyvt tiedot sen kytst ja huollosta
luettava huolellisesti turvaohjeet ja varoitustekstit.
Eivt sislly toimitukseen. Tilattavissa valmlstajalta
tai valmistajan edustajalta.
Ennen asennusta
Puhdista valukehys betonijnteist. Puhdista kaikki nelj ruuvinreik MIO-kierretapilla.
Asennus
Poista pakkaus.
Huolehdi siit, ett ilma psee kiertmn esteett
paistinpannun ymprill. Sijoita paistinpannu kuvan 1
mukaisesti.
Aseta paistinpannu vaakasuoraan.
Asenna ja kirist aluslevyill varustetut kiinnitysruuvit.
Poista suojamuovi varovasti. Mahdolliset liimajnteet poistetaan sopivalla liuotteella.
Paistolevyt toimitetaan ruosteenestoljyll ruostesuojattuina. Puhdista levyt sek muut osat ja lisvarusteet lmpimll vedell ja neutraalilla astiapesu/puhdistusaineella. Huuhtele huolellisesti puhdistuksen
jlkeen.
Kaltevuuden st
Shkliitnt
Asennusohje
CE-direktiivi
Paistinpannu on valmistettu EY-direktiivien LVD 73/23/
EEC ja EMC 89/336/EEC mukaisesti ja se on erillisen
yksikkn CE-hyvksytty ja CE-merkitty.
10
Tarkasta, ett paistinpannu on vaakasuorassa.

Kaltevuutta sdetn sivusuunnassa kahdella kuusioruuvilla. Nm sijaitsevat paistinpannua kiinnipitvn kiinnityspalkin alia, palkin pilarikiinnityksen molemmilla puolilla.
Kaltevuutta eteen ja taakse sdetn seuraavasti:
Irrota vasen sivulevy. Vaaka-asento sdetn kiinnityspalkin luona olevalla struuvilla.
Shkliitnnt on suoritettava aina voimassa olevien

normien ja mrysten mukaisesti.
Verkkokaapeli 3-vaihe + maa liitetn pilarissa olevaan kytkentrasiaan ptevn asentajan toimesta.
Tarkasta paistinpannun arvokilvest, ett liitntjnnite on oikea. Paistinpannun shkliitnt on tehtv
kiinten asennuksena.
Paistinpannu liitetn verkkoon slikkeskuksen kautta.

Tarkasta, ett verkkoa voidaan kuormittaa kytettvll virralla ja ett se on varustettu kunnollisella suojamaadoitukseila.
Verkko- ja ohjausvirta on suojattava sulakkeilla. Sulakkeen nimellisvirran on oltava riittv, jotta paistinpannuun voidaan sytt tarvittava jnnite.
Paistinpannu on liitettv shkverkkoon moninapaisen katkaisimen kautta (toimittajan suositus), jolla virransytt paistinpannun verkko-ja ohjauskaapeliin voidaan katkaista.
Paistinpannu on varustettu ulkoisella jnnitteentasausruuvilla, joka on sijoitettu pilarin taakse.
Korkest lmptilat! Termostaatilla paistopinnan lmptilaa voidaan st portaattomasti vlill 100-300G.

Kuumalla paistopinnalla valmistettavaa ruokaa on ksiteltv paistinlastalla.
Liekit! Alhaisen leimahduspisteen omaavat paistoaineet
saattavat sytty palamaan. Kyt aina hyvksyttyj paistoaineita.
Liekit tukahdutetaan sulkemalla kansi. Jos tm ei riit
tukahduttamaan liekkej, paistinpannun virta katkaistaan
ja paistolevyn, kannen ja nokan vliset raot peitetn
palohuovalla. Sammutustyss on kytettv pitkvartisia suojaksineit.
Huom! Sammuttamiseen ei koskaan saa kytt vett.
Lisvarusteet
Tekniset tiedot
Malli
16 78 00
16 78 01
GGS 460
GGM 460
GGP 460
Pilarin vasempaan alaosaan on sijoitettu paistinpannun

tekniset tiedot sisltv arvokilpi (kuva 3).
Nimitys
Valukehys malliin 16 80 32
Valukehys malliin 16 80 33, -34, -35
Lattiakaivo kivilattiaan
Lattiakaivo valulattiaan
Lattiakaivo muovimattoon
Kyttohje
Kyttkohteet
Paistinpannu on tarkoitettu ruoanvalmistukseen kaikentyyppisiss suurkeittilss. Kytt muuhun tarkoitukseen
kuin ruoanvalmistukseen on kielletty. Paistinpannua ei saa
kytt rasvakeittimen.
Tuotekuvaus
Kallistettava paistinpannu on tehokas, tyt sstv ja
taloudellinen ja sen paistolmptila on tasainen koko paistopinnalla.
Paistinpannu on valmistettu ensiluokkaisesta valuraudasta. Paistinpannun ulkosivut, pilari ja kansi on valmistettu
hiotusta ruostumattomasta levyst. Paistinpannu on
lmperistetty huolellisesti. Paistinpannussa on avattava
ja hyvin tasapainotettu kansi.
Pydn stlaitteistoon kuuluvat katkaisin ja termostaatti
sek kontaktori. Kontaktori on sijoitettu pilariin.
Merkkivalo syttyy, kun virta on kytkettyn. Termostaatilla
paistopinnan lmptilaa voidaan st portaattomasti
vlill100-300C.
Paistinpannun eteen voidaan tehd ritilll varustettava
lattiakaivo. Kaivon on oltava vhintn 150 mm syv liian
nopeasta paistinpannun tyhjentmisest johtuvien roiskeiden ja ylitulvimisen vaaran eliminoimiseksi. Lattiaan valettavaksi tarkoitettu kehyksell varustettu lattiaritil tai
tydellinen kehyksell varustettu lattiakaivo on saatavana erikoistilauksesta. Ritil on erikoismuotoiltu liukastumisen estmiseksi.
Jos laitetta ei kytet

Jos laite on pitkn kyttmttmn, on noudatettava
seuraavia ohjeita:
Katkaise paistinpannun tehonsytt- ja ohjausvirta
pvirtakytkimell tai laitoksen keskuksesta.
Puhdista paistinpannu ja kaikki sen lisvarusteet.
Jt kansi auki nun, ett ilma psee kiertmn tilassa ja estmn homeen ja pahan hajun muodostumisen.
Sisnpaisto
Kuumenna paistinpannussa ohut kerros ruokaljy ennen ensimmist ruoanvalmistuskertaa.
Kytt (kuva 2)
Knn termostaattivnnin (1) haluttuun asentoon.

Merkkivalo (2) syttyy.
Kokeile pienell mrll paistinrasvaa, ett paistinpannun lmptila on oikea. Muuta tarvittaessa termostaatin asentoa. Varmista, ett paistopinta on vaakasuorassa.
Paistinpannu on kyttvalmis.
Kaavi paistinpannua tarvittaessa paiston aikana, esim.
ennen uutta tytt.
Aseta termostaattivnnin (1) paiston jlkeen asentoon 0. Merkkivalo (2) sammuu.
Valmiuslmp (kuva 2)
Knn termostaattivnnin (1) asentoon 5. Tst asennosta paistinpannu kuumenee nopeasti seuraavaa kytt
vrten.
Puhdistus
Paistinpannun virta on katkaistava ja paistinpannun annettava jhty ennen puhdistusta.Kayta lmmint vett
ja mietoa astianpesu-Zpuhdistusainetta. l kyt tersvillaa tai hankaavia puhdistusaineita ruostumattomien pintojen puhdistukseen. Jos kytetn klooria (esim. kloriTurvallisuusohjeet
Jnnitteiset osat! Vett ei saa suihkuttaa suoraan kytt- Ini) sisltv puhdistusainetta, huuhtelu on suoritettava
paneeliin tai sen lheisyyteen. Vesi aiheuttaa jnnitteislin erityisen huolellisesti. Joutuessaan kosketuksiin ruostuosiin pstessn vlittmn hengenvaaran. l koska- mattoman terksen ksnesa kloori ja klooriyhdisteet saatan pst vett kuumalle paistolevylle. Vesi vol aiheuttaa tavat aiheuttaa korroosiovaurioita. Paistolevylle kiinnipalaneet ruoanthteet kaavitaan irti tersharjalla, hohkakivalutavaran halkeamisen ja oikosulun.
11
vell tai valkelssa tapauksissa terskaapimella.

HUOM! Vett ei saa suihkuttaa suoraan kyttpaneeliin tai sen lheisyyteen. Vesi aiheuttaa jnnitteisiin
osiin pstessn vlittmn hengenvaaran. l koskaan pst vett kuumalle paistolevylle. Vesi voi
aiheuttaa valutavaran halkeamisen ja olkosulun.
Jos laitoksessa on kytss useampia paistinpannuja,
llha- ja kalaruoat on valmistettava eri palstinpannuissa
tyln ja alkaavlevn puhdistuksen vlttmiseksl. Jos
pyti on vain yksi, se on puhdistettava huolelllsesti nlden ruokalajien vlill, muussa tapauksessa ruoat volvat
saada makua tolslstaan.
Muut asiakirjat:
Varaosaluettelo (el sislly toimltukseen)
EY-vakuutus (ei sislly toimltukseen)
Huolto-ohje
Vika, syy, toimenpide
Eptasainen paisto
1. Palstlnpannu el ole vaakasuorassa.
Noudata asennusohjeessa kalllstuksen sdst
annettuja ohjeita.
2. Kilnnipalaneet ruoanthteet
Katso kyttohjeen kohta: Puhdistus.
Eptasainen tai heikko lmp
1. Vlalliset sulakkeet
2. Vlalliset shkjohdot
3 Lmpelementtl el tolml
Tarkasta, ett purlstuslevyt palnuvat lmpelementtej vasten ja ettelvt ruuvlt ole Irronneet.
4. Termostaatti ei toimi
Noudata huolto-ohjelden kohdassa "Lmpelementin valhto" annettuja ohjeita.
Huolto-ohjeet
Lmpelementin vaihto
Ennen lmpelementin valhtamista ja tilaamlsta lue kohta 8.
1. Varmista, ett palstlnpannu on kytketty tolminnasta.
2. Katkaise paistlnpannun tehonsytt- ja ohjausvlrta.
3. Irrota pllarin kytkentraslan ja paistlnpannun kytkenttllan vliset tehonsytt- ja ohjauskaapellt kontaktorlsta ja llittimest. KIppaa pyt. Irrota klerreletku
palkista ja ved Irrotetut teho- ja ohjauskaapellt Irtl.
KIppaa pyt takalsln tyasentoon.
4. Irrota paistlnpannun kansi ja konsoll.
5. Irrota sivulevyt sek kaikki nelj ruuvia molemmilta
pilarislvullta kilnnltyspalkin kohdalta. Pannu voldaan
nyt nostaa pllarlsta. HuomI Nostamlseen tarvitaan
kaksi henkil. Aseta pannu alustalle nun, ett kslpyr psee lilkkumaan esteett lattian ylpuolella
ja ettel lattla tai pannu vaurloidu. Kiinnityspalkkl voldaan nyt sljoittaa ksipyr pyrittmll palkkaan,
jossa se on mahdollisimman vhn tiell.
6. Irrota pohjalevy. Levyn luukku on jtettv paikalleen.
Irrota pohjalevyn alapuolella oleva eriste varovasti ja
12
pane se talteen.
7. Eristeen alia on purlstuslevyt, joiden tehtvn on plt lmpelementlt paikallaan.
Irrota shkjohdot, jotka tulevat puristuslevyn relst
kytkentraslan kohdalta. Huom! Sst steatlittihelmet uusille lmpelementeille. Nosta pois ja kaavi puhtaaksl puristuslevy (purlstuslevyt).
8. Puristuslevyn alia on keraaminen kuitulevy, jota ei vol
kytt uudelleen. Puhdista palstlnpannu puhtaaksl
kuitulevyst ja hvit levy. Toimlttajalta on tllattava
lmpelementtej tilattaessa mys uusi eristelevy.
9. Nosta lmpelementlt pois. Huom! Lmpelementtlen phn sljoitetut klillealuslevyt on kytettv uudelleen. Puhdista lmpelementtien urat.
10. Tarkasta, ett lmpelementin jnnite on oikea.
Lmpelementlt asennetaan sijoituskaavion mukaisesti. Jolssakin tapauksissa on lmpelementtej sdettv noin +/- kolmella helmell.
Jos klerukka on liian pitk, murskataan soplva mr
helml. Klerukka joustaa silloin taaksepln omasta voimastaan ja lyhenee.
Jos klerukka on liian lyhyt, irrotetaan ptysteatiitti ja
llstn helml vanhasta lmpelementist.
Huom! l unohda klillealuslevyj.
Lmpelementin hampaat varustetaan talteen otetulllahelmllljasovitetaan klinnityspultteihin. Huom! Suorlta kiristys klinnityspultteihin huolelllsesti.
11. Takaisinasennus suorltetaan pinvastaisessa jrjestyksess.
Huom! l kirist puristuslevyj liian tlukalle. Muussa
tapauksessa elementtihelmet saattavat rikkoontua.
Termostaatin vaihto
Varmista, ett palstlnpannu on kytketty tolminnasta.
Katkaise paistlnpannun tehonsytt- ja ohjausvlrta.
Irrota termostaattivnnln ja takana oleva etulevy.
Kierr termostaatti Irtl. Irrota shkjohdot ja ved termostaattia esiin vain muutaman termostaattikuvun
pituuden verran. Katkaise tunnistinlangat mahdollisimman lhelt termostaattikoteloa. Kri, silmukoi ja
teippaa kiinni tunnistinlangat kunnolla uuden termostaattikuvun ymprille nun, ett tunnistinlankoja voldaan kytt vetmiseen.
KIppaa palstlnpannu riasentoonsa. Irrota luukku
paistlnpannun pohjalevyst ja pieni eristepala nun, ett
termostaattikupu tulee nkyviin. Irrota kupu ja ved
uusi varovasti esiin.
Takaisinasennus suorltetaan pinvastaisessa jrjestyksess.
Yleist
Aseta lukkolaatat huolelllsesti takalsln oikeille paikollleen
tai vaihda ne uusiin. Jotkut mutterit ovat saattaneet palaa, mik on volnut vsytt nilden materiaalin. Vaihda
ne uusiin. Trke on mys puhdistaa kaikki osat hyvin
kiinnipalaneesta rasvasta. Pop-niittien palkalle voldaan
asentaa ruuvlt huoltotiden helpottamiseksi.

Tekniske spesifikasjoner
Modeli
168032
168033
168034
168035
Stekyta (mm)
500x450
700x560
1000x560
700x560
Stekpannans djup (mm)
60
90
90
180
Maks. fasestrm (A)
10
16
25
16
Effekt (kW)
5,5
10,0
14,0
10,0
Vekt (kg)
165
180
200
190
nikoplingsspenning 1680320801 (V, Hz)
400 3-50
nikoplingsspenning 1680320501 (V, Hz)
440 3-60
Beskyttelsesklasse
IPX4
Generelle anvisninger
Hvis forskriftene i dette og utstyrets vrige dokumentasjon ikke flges, kan sikkerheten settes p spill
og leverandrens garanti- og produktansvar opphre.
Les nye forskriftene i dette dokumentet, eftersom

det inneholder viktige sikkerhetsopplysninger vedrrende installasjon, driftssikkerhet, bruk og vedlikehold av produktet. Oppbevar dokumentet slik at det
er tilgjengelig for alle brukere.
Installasjon og testkjring m foretas av en tekniker
med relevant opplring og etter fabrikantens anvisninger. Se nedenfor samt Installasjonsanvisning.
Installasjon av produktet, samt dets tilkoplinger, skal
utfres iflge gjeldende normer og forskrifter.
All service, vedlikehold og reparasjon skal utfres av
en tekniker med relevant opplring. Det m kun benyttes originaldeler ved utskiftinger. Se Serviceanvisning* og Reservedelkatalog*.
Betjening og stell skal kun utfres av personale (operatr) med opplring p dette produktet.
Fr utstyret tas i bruk skal operatren
tilegne seg gode kunnskaper om betjening og stell.
g svrt grundig gjennom sikkerhetsinstruksjoner og
varseltekster.
Flger ikke med. Kan bestilles fra fabrikanten eller
via fabrikantens representant.
Fr montering
Rengjr stperammen for betongrester. Rens de fire skruehullene med en MIO gjengetapp.
Montering
Ta av emballasjen.
Det er viktig med god luftsirkulasjon rundt stekebordet. Sett stekebordet som vist p Fig. 1.
Sett stekebordet plant.
Monter og trekk til festeskruene som er utstyrt med
skiver.
Lsne den beskyttende plasten forsiktig. Evt. limrester fjernes med et passende lsningsmiddel.
Stekehellen er ved leveranse antirustbehandlet med
antirustolje. Rengjr stekehellen samt vrige deler og
tilbehr med varmt vann og et nytralt oppvask/vaskemiddel. Skyll godt.
Justering av heiling
Elektrisl( tiil(opling
Installasjonsanvisning
CE-direktiv
Stekebordet er fremstilt i henhold til EU-direktiv LVD 73/

23/EF, EMC 89/336/EF og er som separat enhet CEgodkjent og CE-merket.
Kontroller at stekebordet str plant.

Heiling mot sidene justeres med to sekskantskruer.
De er plassert p undersiden av opphengsbjelken som
holder stekeplaten, p hver side av opphengsbjelkens
feste i sylen.
Heiling forover eller bakover justeres p flgende
mate: Ta ls venstre sideplate. Stekebordets vannrette stilling justeres med justeringsskruen ved opphengsbjelken.
Elektriske tilkoplinger m kun utfres i samsvar med

alle gjeldende normer og forskrifter.
Effektledning 3-fase + jord koples til koplingsboksen i
sylen av en kvalifisert person.
Stekebordets tilkopling skal utfres som fast installasjon.
13
Bde effektog merkestrm skal sikres. Sikringen skal

ha hy nok merkestrm til levere ndvendig kraft til
stekebordet.
Stekebordet br koples til strmnettet over en flerpolet bryter (leverandrens anbefaling), som kan brukes for bryte strmtilfrselen til stekebordets effektog styreledninger.
Stekebordet er utstyrt med en ytre ekvipotensial jordingsklemme p baksiden av sylen.
Tekniske data
Tilbehr
Model!
16 78 00
16 78 01
GGS 460
GGM 460
GGP 460
Betegnelse
Stperamme til modell 16 80 32
Stperamme til modell 16 80 33, -34, -35
Gulvgrop til stengulv
Gulvgrop til stpt gulv
Gulvgrop til plastmatte
Bruksanvisning
Bruksomrde
Stekebordet er beregnet p bruk til matlaging i alle typer
storkjkken. Andre bruksomrder enn matlaging er ikke
tillatt. Stekebordet skal ikke brukes til frityrsteking.
Produktbeskrivelse
stekebordet har en jevn temperatur over hele stekeflaten
og stor kapasitet, den er arbeidsbesparende, konomisk
og kan tippes.
Stekebordet erfremstilt av frsteklasses stpejem. Stekebordet utside, syle samt lokk er fremstilt av slipte, rustfrie piater. Stekebordet er omsorgsfullt varmeisolert. Lokket kan feiles opp og er godt balansert.
Stekebordet reguleres ved hjelp av en kombinert bryter
og termostat i kombinasjpn med en kontaktor. Kontaktoren er plassert i sylen.
En signallampe lyser nr strmmen er p. Med termostaten reguleres varmen p stekeflaten trinnlst fra 100 C
opptil 300 C.
Foran stekebordet br det plasseres gulvgrop med rist.
Dybden skal vre minst 150 mm for eliminere faren for
sprut eller overflom ved en rask tmming av stekebordet.
Gulvrist med ramme eller gulvgrop komplett med ramme
klar for innstping i gulvet kan leveres som egen bestilling. Gitteret er spesielt utformet for vre sklisikker.
Si kkerhetsinstru kser
strmfrende deler! Vannstrler skal ikke rettes direkte
mot eller i nrheten av kontrollpanelet. Vann i kontakt
med strmfrende deler medfrer direkte livsfare. La aldri
vann komme i kontakt med oppvarmet stekebordshelle.
Dette kan fre til sprekker i stpegodset og fre til kortslutning.
Hye temperaturer! Bordets stekeflate kan reguleres
trinnvist med termostaten fra 100 C opptil 300 C. Ved
disse hye temperaturene skal det brukes stekespade
ved nrkontakt med den stekende matretten.
14
Flammer! Steketilsetninger med lavt flammepunkt kan

fre til at det oppstr flammer. Bruk alitid godkjente steketilsetninger.
Hvis det skulle oppst flammer minimerer man lufttilfrselen ved lukke lokket. Hvis dette ikke er tilstrekkelig
slr man av stekebordet og dekker pningene mellom
hellen, lokket og helletuten med et brannteppe. Ved slukningsarbeidet skal det brukes egnede vernehansker med
mansjetter.
NB! Ved brann skal man ALDRI bruke vann.
Et dataskilt med tekniske detaljer om stekebordet er plassert nederst til venstre p sylen (Fig. 3).
Hvis utstyret ikke er i bruk

Hvis utstyret ikke skal brukes p lengre tid m flgende
instrukser flges:
Bryt effektog styrestrmtilfrselen til stekebordet
gjennom hovedstrmbryteren eller i anleggets sentral.
Rengjr stekebordet og alt tilbehr.
La lokket st pent slik at luft kan sirkulere fritt og
dermed hindre utviklingen av mugg og vond lukt.
Innsteking
Stek inn stekebordet. Bruk et tynt lag matolje.
Bruk (Fig. 2)
Sett termostatbryteren (1) p nsket innstilling. Signallampen (2) fennes.

Prv med en liten mengde stekefett om stekebordet
har riktig temperatur. Ved behov justeres termostatinnstillingen. Pse at stekeflaten alltid er plan.
Stekebordet er klart til bruk.
Skrap av stekebordet under steking ved behov, f.eks,
fr ny pfylling.
Ved avsluttet steking stilles termostatbryteren (1) p
0. Signallampen (2) slukkes.
Beredskapsvarme (Fig. 2)
La termostatbryteren (1) st p innstilling 5. Stekebordet
kommer da raskt opp i riktig temperatur nr det skal brukes.
Rengjring
Produktet skal vre sltt av og avkjlet fr rengjring.
Bruk varmt vann og nytralt oppvask/vaskemiddel. Bruk
ikke stlull eler slipende materialer ved rengjring av rustfrie fiater. Hvis det er brukt rengjringsmidler som inneholder klor (f.eks, klorin), s m skyllingen utfres ekstra
grundig. Klor og klorforbindelser i forbindelse med rustfritt stl kan forrsake korrosjonsangrep. Fastbrente matrester p stekehellen skrapes bort med stlbrste, pimpsten eller stlspatel.
NB! Vannstrler skal ikke rettes direkte mot eller i
nrheten av kontrollpanelet. Vann i kontakt med
strmfrende deler medfrer direkte livsfare. La aldri
vann komme i kontakt med oppvarmet stekebordshelle. Dette kan fre til sprekker i stpegodset og fre
til kortslutning.
Hvis kjkkenet har mer enn ett stekebord til disposisjon

br disse fordeles p kjtt og fisk for unng arbeidskrevende og undvendig rengjring. Hvis man bare har et
bord m man foreta en grundig rengjring mellom disse
matsortene, ellers kan de ta smak av hverandre.
vrige dokumenter:
Reservedelliste (flger ikke med)
EF-forsikring (flger ikke med)
Serviceanvisning
Feil, rsal(er, utbedring
Ujevn staking
1. Stekebordet er ikke plant.
Flg instruksjonene under Justering av helling i
installasjonsanvisningen.
2. Fastbrente matrester
Se under Rengjring
Ujevn eller svak varme
1. Defekte sikringer
2. Defekte strmledninger
3. Elementet fungerer ikke
Kontroller at pressplatene ligger mot elementet og
at skruene ikke har lsnet.
Flg serviceinstruksjonene under Bytte element
4. Termostaten fungerer ikke
Flg serviceinstruksjonene under Bytte element
Servicelnstruksjoner
Bytte element
Ved bytte og bestilling av element, les frst punkt 8.
1. Pse at stekebordet er sltt av.
2. Bryt effektog styreledningen til stekebordet.
3. Lsne effektog styrekablene som gr mellom sylens koplingsboks og stekebordets koplingsboks, fra
kontaktoren og kontakten. Tipp bordet. Lsne spiralslangen i bjelken og trekk ut de allerede lsnede effektog styreledningene. Sett bordet tilbake i arbeidsstilling.
4. Ta bort stekebordslokket og konsollen.
5. Lsne sideplatene samt de fire skruene p hver side
av sylen ved opphengsbjelken. Pannen er n klar til
lftes fra sylen. NB! Lftingen m utfres av to
personer. Legg pannen p et underlag slik at det er
tilgang til bryteren og slik at hverken gulvet eller pannen skades. Opphengsbjelken kan n plasseres der
den er minst i veien ved vri p bryteren.
6. Lsne bunnplaten. Luken i piaten skal ikke fjernes.
Ta forsiktig bort isolasjonen under bunnplaten og legg
isolasjonen til side.
7. Under isolasjonen ligger det pressplater som skal
holde elementet p plass.
Lsne strmledningene, som stikker ut av pressplatens hull, ved koplingsboksen. NB! Spar p steatittperlene til det nye elementet. Lft bort preisplaten(e)
og skrap den (dem) ren.
8. Under pressplaten ligger det en kjeramisk fiberplate

som ikke kan brukes p nytt. Rens stekeplaten for
denne og kast den. Ny isolasjonsplate br bestilles
fra leverandrens reservelager samtidig med elementet.
9. Lft av elementet. NB! Glimmerskivene som er plassert ved avslutningen av elementet skal brukes p
nytt. Brst elementsporene rene.
10. Kontroller at spenningen p det nye elementet stemmer overens med strmnettet. Elementet monteres
som vist p ileggingsskjemaet. I visse fall m man
justere elementet med (pluss minus) ca. tre perler.
Hvis spiralen er for lang slr man i stykker passe antal! perler. Spiralen trekker seg da tilbake av egen kraft
og blir kortere.
Hvis spiralen er for kort, lsner man endesteatitten
og kompletterer med perler fra det gamle elementet.
NB! Ikke glem glimmersklvene.
Elementendene utstyres med perlene som er til overs
og justeres etter koplingsboltene. NB! Vr nye ved
tiltrekkingen av koplingsboltene.
11. Montering utfres i omvendt rekkeflge.
NB! Ikke trekk til pressplatene for kraftig. Elementperlene kan sprekke.
Bytte av termostat
Pse at stekebordet er sltt av.
Bryt effektog styreledningene til stekebordet.
Lsne termostatbryteren og frontplaten bak den. Skru
ls termostaten. Ta bort strmledningene og trekk
termostaten noen flerlengder frem. Klipp av flerledningen s nr termostathuset som mulig. Flertrden skal s vikles, tres inn i og teipes godt fast
rundt fleren p den nye termostaten slik at man kan
trekke i flertrden.
Tipp stekeplaten maksimalt. Lsne luken i stekebordets bunnplate og den lille isolasjonsbiteh, slik at termostatfleren blir synlig. Lsne fleren og trekk forsiktig frem den nye.
Montering utfres i omvendt rekkeflge.
Generelt
Vr nye med sette lseskivene tilbake p riktig plass,
eller bytt dem ut med nye. Noen muttere kan ha blitt brent
og nedslitt. Bytt ut disse med nye. Det er ogs viktig at
alle deler rengjres godt for fastbrent fett. Der det har
sittet popnitnagler kan man erstatte disse med skruer slik
at fremtidig vedlikeholdsarbeid blir enklere.
15
DK
Tekniske specifikationer
Model
168032
168033
168034
168035
Stegeflade (mm)
500x450
700x560
1000x560
700x560
Stegepandens dybde (mm)
60
90
90
180
Max. fasestrm (A)
10
16
25
16
Effekt (kW)
5,5
10,0
14,0
10,0
Vgt (kg)
165
180
200
190
Tllslutningsspnding 1680320801 (V, Hz)
400 3-50
Tlislutningsspnding 1680320501 (V, Hz)
440 3-60
Kapslingsgrad
IPX4
Generelle anvisninger
Opstilling
Fjern emballagen.
En god luftcirkulation er vigtig omkring stegebordet.
Anbring stegebordet som vist i fig. 1.
Anbring stegebordet plant.
Montr og spnd fastgrelsesskruerne, der er forsynet med spndeskiver.
Fjern forsigtigt beskyttelsesplasten. Eventuelle limrester fjernes med et egnet oplsningsmiddel.
Stegepanden er ved levering rustbehandlet med rustbeskyttelsesol ie. Rengr panden samt de vrige dele
og tilbehr med varmt vand og et neutralt opvaske-/
rengringsmiddel. Skyl derefter alle dele grundigt af.
Hvis forskrifter i dette og udstyrets vrige dokumenter ikke flges, kan dets sikkerhed sttes over styr
og leverandrens garanti- og produktansvar ophrer.
Ls forskrifterne I dette dokument omhyggeligt igen

da det indeholder vigtige sikkerhedsoplysninger med
hensyn til installationens driftssikkerhed, brug og
vedligeholdelse af produktet. Opbevar vejledningen
sledes, at den er tilgngelig for alle brugere.
Installation og test skal udfres af specialuddannettekniker og i henhold til producentens instruktioner.
Se nedenfor samt installationsanvisningen.
Installation af produktet skal udfres i henhold til
gldende normer og forskrifter.
Al service, vedligeholdelse samt reparation skal udfres af en specialuddannet tekniker.
Kun originalreservedele m benyttes ved udskiftning.
Se Serviceanvisning* og Reservedelskatalog*.
Hndtering og pleje m kun udfres af specialuddannet personale (operatr).
Inden udstyret tages i brug, skal operatren
- skaffe sig gode kundskaber i hndtering og pleje.
- meget omhyggeligt g igennem sikkerhedsinstruktioner og advarselstekster.
Medleveres ikke. Kan bestilles hos producenten eller via producentens reprsentant.
Installationsanvisning
CE direktiv
stegebordet er fremstillet i overensstemmelse med EU
direktiv LVD 73/23/EF, EMC 89/336/EF og er som
enkeltenhed CE-godkendt og CE-mrket.
Fr opstilling
Rengr nedstbningsrammen for betonrester. Rens de
fire skruehuller med en M10 gevindtap.
16
Justering af hldning
Kontrollr, at stegebordet str plant.

Hldning til siden justeres med to insexskruer. Disse
er placeret under ophngningsbjlken, der holder
stegepanden, p hver side af ophngningsbjlkens
fastgrelse i sjlen.
Hldning fremad eller tilbage justeres som flger:
Fjern venstre sideplade. Stegebordets vandrette position reguleres med stilleskruen ved ophngningsbjlken.
Elektrisk tilslutning
Den elektriske tilslutning skal udfres i henhold til alle
gldende normer og forskrifter.
Effektledning 3-faset + jord tilsluttes i koblingsdsen i
sjlen af en aut. tekniker.
Kontrollr p stegebordets typeplade, at der er den
korrekte effektspnding. Stegebordets tilslutning skal
best af en fast installation.
Stegebordet tilsluttes nettet gennem tilkobling via anlggets central.
Kontrollr, at nettet er forberedt for eller kan belastes
med den aktuelle strm, og at det er udstyret med en
passende beskyttelsesjordledning.
Bde effektog styrestrm skal vre forsynet med
sikringer. Sikringernes mrkestrm skal vre hj nok
til at kunne levere den forndne kraft til stegebordet.
stegebordet br tilsluttes elnettet via en flerpolet afbryder (leverandrens anbefaling), hvormed strmtilfrslen til stegebordets effektog styreledning kan
afbrydes.
Stegebordet er udstyret med en ydre kvipotential
jordklemme, der er placeret p bagsiden af sjlen.
lukke lget. Er dette ikke tilstrkkeligt, slukker man for

stegebordet og dkker sprkkerne mellem grill, lg og
rr med brandfilt. Ved dette slukningsarbejde skal der
anvendes beskyttelseshandsker med hndledskrave.
OBS! Brug aldrig vand i tilflde af brand.
Tekniske data
Tilbehr
Model
16 78 00
16 78 01
GGS 460
GGM 460
GGP 460
Benvnelse
Indstbningsramme til model 16 80 32
Indstbningsramme til model 16 80 33, -34,
-35
Gulvbrnd til stengulv
Gulvbrnd til stbt gulv
Gulvbrnd til plasttppe
Brugsanvisning
Anvendelsesomrde
Stegebordet er beregnet til brug ved madlavning i storkkkener af enfiver art. Andet anvendelsesomrde er ikke
tilladt. Stegebordet m ikke anvendes som friturekar.
Produktbeskrivelse
Stegebordet har en jvn stegetemperatur over hele stegefladen, stor kapacitet, god konomi, er arbejdsbesparende og kan vippes. Stegepanden er fremstillet af frsteklasses stbejern. Stegebordets udvendige sider, sjler samt lg er fremstillet af slebet rustfri plade. Stegebordet er omhyggeligt varmeisoleret. Lget kan vippes
op og er godt afbalanceret. Reguleringsudstyret bestr af
en kombineret afbryder og termostat i kombination med
en kontaktor. Kontaktoren er placeret i sjlen. En signallampe viser, nr stegebordet tilfres strm. Med termostaten reguleres varmen p stegefladen trinlst fra 100C
op til 300C.
Foran stegebordet kan der placeres et gulvaflb med rist.
Dybde mindst 150 mm for s vidt muligt at eliminere risikoen for stnk og overskylning ved en for hurtig tmning
af stegebordet. Gulvrist med ramme eller gulvaflb komplet med ramme, beregnet til indstbning i gulvet, kan
leveres efter srlig ordre. Risten er specielt udformet til
at vre skridsikker.
Sikkerhedsinstruktioner
Spndingsfrende dele ! Der m ikke rettes en vandstrle direkte mod betjeningspanelet eller i nrheden
heraf. Vand i kontakt med spndingsfrende dele medfrer direkte livsfare. Lad aldrig vand komme i kontakt
med det opvarmede stegebords grill. Dette kan forrsage
dannelse af revner i stbegodset med kortslutning til flgeHje temperaturer! Bordets stegeflade kan med termostaten reguleres trinlst fra 100C op til 300C. Ved disse
hje temperaturer skal der anvendes en paletkniv ved
nrkontakt med de fdevarer, der tilberedes.
Brand ! Stegetilstninger med et lavt flammepunkt kan
forrsage brand. Brug altid godkendte stegetilstninger.
Hvis der opstr brand, minimerer man lufttilfrslen ved at
En dataplade med stegebordets tekniske oplysninger er

placeret p sjlens nederste venstre del (fig. 3).
Hvis udstyret ikke er i brug

Hvis udstyret ikke skal anvendes i lngere tid, skal flgende instrukser flges:
Afbryd effektog styrestrmmen til stegebordet p
hovedafbryderen eller i anlggets central.
Rengr stegebordet og alt tilbehr.
Lad lget st bent, s luften kan cirkulere i rummet
og dermed forhindre dannelse af mug og drlig lugt.
Fr brug
Stegebordet skal steges til. Brug et tyndt lag madolie til
dette forml.
Anvendelse (fig. 2)
St termostatknappen (1) p den nskede temperatur. Signallampen (2) tndes.

Prv med en lille mngde stegefedt, at stegebordet
har den rette temperatur. Drej p termostatknappen
efter behov. Srg for at stegefladen er vandret.
Stegebordet er klar til brug.
Skrab stegebordet af efter behov under stegningen,
f.eks, fr ny pfyldning.
Efter afslutettet stegning skal termostatknappen (1)
sttes p 0. Signallampen (2) slukker.
Beredskabsvarme (fig. 2)
Lad termostatknappen (1) st p 5. Stegebordet kan s
hurtigt opvarmes yderligere, nr det skal bruges.
Rengring
Udstyret skal vre slukket og klet af, nr det rengres.
Brug varmt vand og et neutralt opvaske/rengringsmiddel. Brug ikke stluld eller rengringsartikler med slibemidler ved rengring af rustfrie overflader. Hvis der er
brugt rengringsmidler indeholdende klor (f.eks, klorin),
skal skylningen gres ekstra omhyggeligt. Klor og klorforbindelser i kontakt med rustfrit stl kan forrsage rustangreb. Fastbrndte stegerester p stegegrillen skal skrabes af med en stlbrste, pimpsten eller i vanskeligere
tilflde med en stlspartel.
OBS! Der m ikke rettes en vandstrle direkte mod
kontrolpanelet eller i nrheden heraf. Vand i kontakt
med spndingsfrende dele medfrer direkte livsfare. Lad aldrig vand komme i kontakt med det opvarmede stegebords grill. Dette kan forrsage dannelse
af revner i stbegodset med kortslutning til flge.
Hvis anlgget omfatter mere end et stegebord, br disse deles op mellem kd og fisk for at undg besvrlig og
tidskrvende rengring. Er der kun et stegebord, skal
det rengres omhyggeligt mellem disse madtyper, da de
ellers kan f en eftersmag.
17
vrige dokumenter:
Reservedelsliste (medleveres ikke)
EU-forsikring (medleveres ikke)
Serviceanvisning
Fejl, rsager, udbedring
Ujvn stegning
1. Stegebordet str ikke plant.
Flg instruktionerne for justering af hldning i installationsanvisningen.
2. Fastbrndte madrester.
Se Brugsanvisning: Rengring.
Ujvn eller svag varme
1. Defekte sikringer.
2. Defekte elledninger.
3. Elementet fungerer ikke.
Kontrollr, at pressepladerne ligger tt mod elementet, og at skruerne ikke sidder ls.
Flg serviceinstruktionerne for udskiftning af element.
4. Termostaten fungerer ikke.
Flg serviceinstruktionerne for udskiftning af element.
Serviceinstruktioner
Udskiftning af element
Ved udskiftning og bestilling af element, ls frst pkt. 8.
1. Srg for at der er slukket for stegebordet.
2. Afbryd effektog styreledningen til stegebordet.
3. Lsn effektog styrekablerne, der gr mellem sjlens koblingsdse og stegebordets koblingsdse, fra
kontaktoren og klemrkken. Vip bordet. Lsn spiralslangen i bjlken og trk de allerede lsnede effektog styrekabler ud. Vip bordet tilbage i arbejdsstilling.
4. Fjern stegebordets lg og konsollen.
5. Lsn sidepladerne og de fire skruer p hver side af
sjlen ved ophngningsbjlken. Panden kan nu lftes af sjlen. OBS! Der skal vre 2 personer om dette lft. Lg panden p et underlag, s grebet kan
bevge sig frit over gulvet, s hverken gulv eller pande beskadiges. Ophngningsbjlken kan nu placeres, hvor den er mindst i vejen, ved at dreje p grebet.
6. Lsn bundpladen. Lgen i pladen skal Ikke fjernes.
Fjern forsigtigt den isolering, der ligger under bundpladen og gem denne.
7. Under isoleringen ligger der nogle presseplader, der
har til opgave at holde elementerne p plads.
Lsn elledningerne, der kommer ud af pressepladens
hul,
ved koblingsdsen. OBS! Gem steatit-perlerne til de nye elementer. Lft pressepladen (pressepladerne) af og skrab den/dem rene.
8. Under pressepladen liggeren keramisk fiberplade, der
ikke kan genbruges. Rens stegepanden for denne og
smid den bort. En ny isoleringsplade br bestilles sammen med elementerne fra leverandrens reservedelslager.
18
9. Lft elementerne af. OBS! Glimmerbrikkerne, der er

placeret for enden af elementet, skal bruges igen.
Brst elementrillerne rene.
10. Kontrollr, at der tilfres den rette elementspnding.
Elementerne monteres iflge ilgningsskemaet. I
nogle tilflde er det ndvendigt at justere med ca.
plus/minus 3 perler.
Er spiralen for lang, knuser man et passende antal
perler. Spiralen fjedrer s tilbage af egen kraft og
bliver kortere.
Er spiralen for kort, lsner man endesteatitten og
supplerer med perler fra de gamle elementer.
OBS! Glem ikke glimmerbrikkerne.
Elementenderne forsynes med de gemte perler og
tilpasses koblingsboltene. OBS! Vr omhyggelig ved
fastspnding af koblingsboltene.
11. Delene monteres igen i omvendt rkkeflge.
OBS! Spnd ikke pressepladerne for hrdt, da dette
kan f elementperlerne til at revne.
Udsl(iftning af termostat
Srg for at der er slukket for stegebordet.
Afbryd effektog styreledningen til stegebordet
Lsn termostatknappen og den bagved liggende frontplade. Skru termostaten ls. Fjern elledningerne og
trk termostaten en smule frem - kun en kuglelngde. Klip flertrden af s tt p termostathuset som
muligt. Vikl flertrden om, st den i og tape den
godt fast om den nye termostats kugle, s flertrden kan anvendes som trktrd.
Vip stegepanden s meget som muligt. Lsn lgen i
stegebordets bundplade og det lille isoleringsstykke,
s termostatkuglen bliver synlig. Lsn kuglen og trk
forsigtigt den nye frem.
Montr delene igen i omvendt rkkeflge.
Generelt
Srg for at stte lseskiverne tilbage p deres rigtige
pladser eller udskift dem med nye. Nogle mtrikker kan
vre blevet brndt og dermed slidt ned. Udskift disse
med nye. Det er ogs vigtigt at rengre alle dele omhyggeligt for fastbrndt fedt. Der hvor der har siddet popnitter, kan man stte skruer for at gre senere indgreb lettere.
GB]
Technical specifications
Model
168032
168033
168034
168035
Frying area (mm)
500x450
700x560
1000x560
700x560
Depth of frying pan (mm)
60
90
90
180
Max. phase load (A)
10
16
25
16
Output (kW)
5,5
10,0
14,0
10,0
Weight (kg)
165
180
200
190
Supply voltage 1680320801 (V, Hz)
400 3-50
Supply voltage 1680320501 (V, Hz)
440 3-60
Enclosure class
IPX4
General instructions
If the instructions in this and the equipment's other
documents are not followed, its safety could be jeopardised, and the supplier's guarantee and product
responsibility will become invalid.
Read the instructions in this document carefully, as it

contains important safety information concerning in
stallation, operational safety, usage and maintenance. Keep it in a place which is accessible to all users.
Installation and test running must be carried out by a
qualified technician and according to the
manufacturer's instructions. See below as well as in
stallation instructions.
Installation and connection of the product must be
carried out according to applicable standards and directives.
All servicing, maintenance and repairs must be carried out by qualified technicians. Only original spare
parts may be used. See Servicing Instructions* and
Spare Parts Catalogue*.
Maintenance and operation may only be carried out
by personnel specially trained for this purpose (operator).
Before the equipment is put into use, the operator
must:
Acquire a good knowledge of operation and maintenance.
Study the safety instructions and warning notices very
carefully.
Not included. Can be ordered from the manufacturer
or via the manufacturer's representative.
Installation instructions
CE Directives
The frying table has been manufactured in accordance
with EU directives LVD 73/23/EEC, EMC 89/336/EEC and
has been CE approved and marked as an individual unit.
Before placement
Remove any concrete remains from the frame in the floor.
Clean the four screw holes with an MIO screw tap.
Placement
Remove the packaging.

Good air circulation around the table is important. Place the table according to fig. 1.
Make sure the table is perfectly level.
Fit and tighten the retaining screws with washers.
Remove the protective plastic carefully. Any traces of
adhesive can be removed using a suitable solvent.
The cooking surface is protected by anti-corrosive oil.
Clean the surface, the other parts of the unit and accessories using warm water and a neutral detergent.
Rinse thoroughly.
Adjusting the tilt
Check that the frying table is level.

Sideways tilt can be adjusted by means of the two
hexagonal screws. These are located underneath the
suspension beam which holds the frying pan, on each
side of where the suspension beam is fixed to the
column.
Fonward or backward tilt can be adjusted as follows:
Remove the metal plate on the left-hand side. The
horizontal position can be adjusted by turning the adjustment screw next to the suspension beam.
Electrical connection
Electrical connections must be carried out in accordance with all applicable standards and directives.
Power cable 3-phase + earth to be connected to the
distribution box in the column by a qualified technician.
Check on the table's rating plate that the power supply is correct. The frying table's connection must be a
fixed installation.
The frying table is connected to the grid via the main
distribution box.
Check that the grid is able to carry the appropriate
current, and that it is equipped with a proper protecti19
ve earth.
Both the power supply and the operating current must
be fused. The fuse must have sufficient rated current
to be able to supply the frying table with the necessary power.
The frying table should be connected to the mains via
a multi-pole safety switch (manufacturer's recommendation) which can be used to switch off the electrical
supply to the table.
The table is equipped with an outer equipotential earth
terminal connection located on the back of the column.
Accessories
Model
16 78 00
16 78 01
GGS 460
GGM 460
GGP 460
Designation
Frame for cementing into the floor. Fits model 16 80 32
Frame for cementing into the floor. Fits model 168033, 34, 35
Drain for stone floors
Drain for compound floors
Drain for plastic carpeted floors
Instructions for use

Areas of application
The frying table is intended for food preparation in all types of catering kitchens. Use of the table for any other
purpose than food preparation is not permitted. The frying table may not be used as a deep fat fryer.
Product description
The frying table has an even frying temperature over the
entire cooking surface, large capacity, is labour-saving,
economical and can be tilted.
The frying pan is made from top quality cast iron. The
outer sides, column and cover are made from polished
stainless steel. The frying table is thoroughly heat insulated. The cover can be lifted up, and is well-balanced.
The controls consist of a combined switch and thermostat in combination with a relay, which is located on the
column.
A pilot light indicates when the power is switched on. The
thermostat is used to regulate the temperature of the cooking surface from anywhere from 100C up to 300C.
A recessed floor drain covered by a grid can be installed
in front of the frying table. It must be at least 150 mm
deep in order to avoid as far as possible the risk of splashing and overflowing if the table is emptied too quickly.
The floor grid with frame or recessed floor drain complete
with frame for cementing into the floor can be specially
ordered. The frame has a special anti-slip design.
High temperatures! The cooking surface of the table can

be regulated by means of the thermostat from 100C up
to 300C. A spatula must be used when handling food
being cooked at these high temperatures.
Fire! Flavouring ingredients with a low flash-point could
catch fire. Always use approved flavouring ingredients.
If the food does catch fire, minimise the oxygen supply by
closing the cover. If this does not extinguish the fire, switch
off the frying table and cover the openings between the
cooking surface, the cover and the pipe with a fireproof
blanket. Protective gloves which cover the wrists must be
worn during fire-fighting operations.
N.B. In the above situation: Never use water!
Technical data
A rating plate stating the frying table's technical details is
located on the lower left-hand section of the column (fig.
3).
If the equipment is not being used

If the equipment will not be used for a long period of time,
the following instructions must be followed:
Disconnect the frying table's power supply and operating current by means of the main circuit breaker or
the main distribution box.
Clean the frying table and all accessories.
Leave the cover open so that air can circulate, thus
preventing mould and unpleasant smells from developing.
Before use
Before using the frying table, it must be seasoned with a
thin layer of cooking oil.
Use (fig. 2)
Set the thermostat (1) to the required temperature.

The pilot light (2) will light up.
Check if the correct temperature has been reached
by adding a small amount of fat to the frying pan. If
necessary, alter the thermostat setting. l\/lake certain
that the surface of the pan is horizontal.
The frying table is ready to use.
If necessary, scrape the frying surface while frying
e.g. before adding a new batch of food.
Twist the thermostat knob (1) to 0 when frying has
been completed. The pilot light (2) will switch off.
standby heat (fig. 2)

Leave the thermostat (1) on setting 5. The frying table
can then be quickly heated up when it is to be used.
Cleaning
The product must be switched off and have cooled down
before cleaning. Use warm water and a neutral dish-washing detergent or cleanser. Do not use steel wool or abrasive cleaning material when cleaning stainless steel surSafety instructions
faces.
If using detergent containing chlorine,rinseextreLive parts! Water may not be directed towards the conmely
thoroughly.
Chlorine and chloride compounds which
trol panel or its vicinity. Water coming into contact with
come
into
contact
with stainless steel can cause corrosilive parts carries a direct safety risk. Never allow water to
come into contact with the hot cooking surface. This could on. Remains of food burnt onto the cooking surface can
be scraped off using a steel brush, pumice-stone, or in
lead to cracking, and consequent short circuiting.
20
severe cases, a steel spatula.

the pan on a raised base so that the knob is well clear
N.B. Water may not be directed towards the control
of the floor, and neither the floor nor the pan will be
panel or its vicinity. Water coming into contact with
damaged. By twisting the knob, the suspension beam
live parts carries a direct safety risk. Never allow water
can now be placed in a position where it is least in the
to come into contact with the hot cooking surface.
way.
This could lead to cracking, and consequent short 6. Remove the bottom panel. The hatch in the panel must
circuiting.
be left in place. Carefully remove the insulation lying
on the bottom panel, and save it.
If there is more than one frying table on the premises, 7. The presser plates are located under the insulation.
these should be used for frying meat and fish respectiveThese are for holding the elements in place. Disconly, in order to avoid time-consuming cleaning routines. If
nect the electrical cables protruding from the holes in
there is only one frying table, it must be thoroughly cleathe presser plates, next to the distribution box. N.B.
ned between cooking these different types of food, or the
Save the steatite beads for the new elements. Remtastes could be transferred to one another.
ove and scrape the presser plate/s clean.
8. Under the presser plates, there is a ceramic fibre plate which cannot be reused. Remove it from the frying
Other documentation
pan and discard it. A new insulation plate should be
Spare parts list (not supplied)
ordered from the suppliers' spare parts division at the
EU-assurance (not supplied)
same time as the elements.
9. Remove the elements. N.B. The mica discs located
at the end of the elements are to be reused. Clean
the element recesses with a brush.
10. Check that the voltage for the elements is correct.
Problem, cause, what to do
The elements are to be installed according to the installation plan. In certain cases the elements could
Uneven frying
need adjusting by approximately three beads. If the
1. The frying table is not level.
spiral is too long, break off the appropriate number of
Follow the instructions for "Adjusting the tilt" in the
beads. The spiral will then automatically spring back
installation instructions.
and become shorter. If the spiral is too short, loosen
2. Burnt-on remains of food
the end steatite beads and complement with beads
See instructions for use: Cleaning
from the old element. N.B. Do not forget the mica
discs. Fit the beads saved to the ends of the elements
Variable or weak heat
and adjust to the coupling bolts.
1. Defective fuses.
N.B. Be careful when tightening the coupling bolts.
2. Defective electrical connections.
11. Reverse the procedure to reassemble.
3. The heating elements are not working.
N.B. Do not tighten the presser plates top much, as
Check that the presser plates are properly pressed
the element beads could break.
against the elements, and that the screws are not
loose.
Replacing the thermostat
Follow the servicing instructions, "Replacing the ele- Make sure that the frying table is switched off.
ment".
Disconnect the power and operating cables.
4. The thermostat is not functioning.
Remove the thermostat knob and the front panel be Follow the servicing instructions, "Replacing the elehind it. Unscrew the thermostat. Remove the electrimenf.
cal cables and pull the thermostat forward by just one
bulb length. Cut off the sensor wire as near to the
Servicing instructions
thermostat housing as possible. Bind, loop and tape
the sensor wire firmly around the bulb of the new therReplacing the elements
mostat so that the sensor wire can be used to pull.
When replacing and ordering elements, read point 8 first. Tilt the frying pan as far as possible. Remove the hatch
1. Make sure the frying table has been turned off.
and the small piece of insulation in the bottom panel
2. Switch off the power and operating current to the fryof the frying table, so that the thermostat bulb is viing table.
sible. Remove the bulb and carefully pull the new one
3. Disconnect the power and operating cables, which
into place.
run between the column's distribution box and the fry- Reverse the procedure to reassemble.
ing table's connection box, from the contactor and
the terminal block. Tilt the table. Disconnect the spiral General
hose in the beam and pull out the loosened power Be careful to replace the locking washers correctly, or
and operating cables. Return the table to its working exchange them for new ones. Certain nuts could be burnt,
position.
and have deteriorated in quality. Replace these with new
ones. It is also important that all parts are cleaned tho4. Remove the cover and the console.
5. Loosen the side panels as well as the four screws on roughly, and all burnt fat removed. Where there were preeach side of the column next to the suspension beam. viously blind rivets, these can be replaced with screws in
The pan can now be lifted off the column. N.B. It is order to simplify future work on the equipment.
recommended that two persons lift off the pan. Place
Directions for servicing
21
H] Electrolux
Reservdelskatalog
Spare Parts Catalogue
Ersatzteilliste
FP50T, FP70T, FP100T. FP70TD

168032XXXX, 168033XXXX, 168034xxxx, 168035xxxx
168032xxxxS, 168033xxxxS, 168034xxxxS, 168035xxxxS
Stekbord
Frying table
Kippbratpfanne
3-563
D O C . N O . 47813 36-17
EDITIONS
01.01
2M
-117
,101
102
-103
-104
105
ILLUSTRATION 202 10
Stekbord modeil 168032
Antal
Pos. Quantity
Anzahl
101
102
103
104
105
Art.nr
Art. no
Art. Nr
Utgva
Edition
Ausgabe
3
Illustration 20210
Benmning
520 41 46-00 Kolviager

520 41 65-00 Gasfjder
467 76 54-00 Axel
461 45 61-70 Konsol
520 39 76-00 Anslutnings plint
Description
Bezeichnung
Piston bearing
Gas spring
Shaft
Bracket
Ternninal block
Kolbenlagerung
Gasfeder
Achse
Konsole
Klemmleiste
Mnad
Month
Monat
01
r
Year
Jahr
01
Anm.
Notes
Anin.
107
108
109
767 51 12 -09
767 51 11 -09
467 89 02-00
467 88 74-00
467 88 72-00
Kontaktor
Kontaktor
Axel
Draglnk
Axel
Contactor
Contactor
Shaft
Brake rod
Shaft
Kontaktor
Kontaktor
Achse
Zuggelenk
Achse
110
111
112
113
114
467 88 73-00
467 89 82-00
467 90 16-02
467 89 03-00
461 44 41-02
Lagring
Hylsa
Ratt
Lagerfste
Lager
Bearing
Sleeve
Knob
Bearing holder
Bearing
Lagerung
Hlse
Drehkopf
Lagerbefestigung
Lager
115
116
520 53 40-00 Transformator

552 22 21-03 Automatskring
Transformer
Automatic fuse
Transformator
Automatsicherung
1).
1).
117
520 49 74-00
Lock for lid
Marin Schnappschloss
2).
106
Locklsning
1). Marin utfrande 400, 440 V / Marine execution 400, 440 V / Marine Ausfhrung 400, 440 V
2). Marin utfrande / Marine execution / Marine Ausfhrung
Fet Stil = ndring
Bold print = Change
Fettdruck = nderung
1).
ILLUSTRATION 202 11
Stekbord modell 168032
Antal
Pos, Quantity
Anzahl
101
102
103
104
105
1
2
1
1
1
1
106
107
108
109
110
1
1
1
12
2
111
Art.nr
Art. no
Art. Nr
467 89
461 45
477 64
477 64
476 09
476 09
Utgva
Edition
Ausgabe
3
Illustration 20211
Benmning
98-00 Look
67-01 Axel
70-00 Isoierpiatta
96-00 Isoierplatta
69-23 Element
69-25 Element
Description
Bezeichnung
Lid
Shaft
insulation
insulation
Heating element
Heating element
Decl<el
Achse
Isoiierplatte
Isoiierplatte
Heizl<rper
Heizkrper
464 29 61-13
462 41 72-01
467 80 41-00
463 92 69-01
477 64 20-00
Vred
Giimlampa
Termostat
Glimmer
Klmma
Knob
Glowing lamp
Thermostat
Glimmer
Clamp
Drehknopf
Glimmlampe
Thermostat
Glimmer
Klammer
467 89 97-00
Handtag
Handle
Handgriff
Fet Stil = ndring

Bold print == Change
Fettdruck = nderung
1). Marin utfrande 440 V / Marine execution 440 V / Marine Ausfhrung 440 V
Mnad
Month
Monat
01
r
Year
Jahr
01
Anm.
Notes
Anm.
stekbord modell 168033, -34, -35
Antal
Pos. Quantity
Anzahl
Art.nr
Art. no
Art. Nr
Benmning
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
1
1
1
2 2
1 1
2
Bezeichnung
467 76 52-00
467 76 51-01
477 77 09-02
477 77 09-00
477 77 09-03
477 77 09-01
Koivlager
Gasfjder
Konsol
Konsol
Konsol
Konsol
Piston bearing
Gas spring
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Kolbenlagerung
Gasfeder
Konsole
Konsole
Konsole
Konsole
467 76 54-00
461 42 68-70
520 39 76-00
767 51 12-09
767 51 11-09
Axel
Anslutnings plint
Anslutnings plint
Kontaktor
Kontaktor
Shaft
Terminal block
Terminal block
Contactor
Contactor
Achse
Klemmleiste
Klemmleiste
Kontaktor
Kontaktor
Axel
Draglnk
Draglnk
Axel
Faste
Shaft
Brake rod
Brake rod
Shaft
Attachement
Achse
Zuggelenk
Zuggelenk
Achse
Befestigung
Lagring
Hylsa
Ratt
Bearing
Transformator
Knob
Bearing
Transformer
Lagerung
Hlse
Drehknopf
Lager
Transformator
Automatskring
Automatic fuse
Automatsicherung
467 89 02-00
467 88 74-01
1 467 88 74-03
1 467 88 72-01
1 467 89 03-00
110
111
117
Description
Mnad
Montti
Monat
01
r
Year
Jahr
01
Anm.
Notes
Anm.
16 80 33
16 80 34
16 80 35
112
113
114
115
116
Utgva
Edition
Ausgabe
3
Illustration 20212
467 88 73-00
467 89 82-00
467 90 16-02
461 41 62-02
520 53 40-00
2 552 22 21-03
Fetstil= Andring
Bold print = Change
Fettdruck = nderung
Lager
Sleeve
1). Marin utfrande 400,440 V / Marine execution 400,440 V / Marine Ausfhrung 400,440 V
1).
Stekbord modell 168033, -34, -35
Antal
Quantity
Anzahl
Art.nr
Art. no
Art. Nr
Utgva
Edition
Ausgabe
3
Illustration 20213
Description
Bezeichnung
Locl<
Locl<
Lager
Axel
Distans
Lid
Lid
Bearing
Shaft
Distance
Deckel
Deckel
Lager
Achse
Distanz
461 45 98-01
461 46 84-01
477 64 68-00
477 64 69-00
477 64 20-00
Lagring
Gasfjder
Klmma
Bearing
Gas spring
Insulation
Insulation
Clamp
Lagerung
Gasfeder
Isolierplatte
Isolierplatte
Klemme
467 80 41-00
464 29 61-13
462 41 72-01
476 09 69-15
476 09 69-19
476 09 69-17
476 09 69-21
Termostat
Vred
Glinnlampa
Element
Element
Element
Element
Thermostat
Knob
Glowing lamp
Heating element
Heating element
Heating element
Heating element
Thermostat
Drehknopf
Glimmlampe
Heizkrper
Heizkrper
Heizkrper
Heizkrper
467 76 14-00
477 64 77-00
114 24 24 24 463 92 69-01
115 1 1 1 467 89 97-00
Isolerplatta
Isolerplatta
Glimmer
Handtag
Insulation
Insulation
Glimmer
Handle
Isolierplatte
Isolierplatte
Glimmer
Handgriff
Pos.
Benmning
16 80 33
16 80 34
16 80 35
101
461
461
461
461
477
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
109
110
111
112
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 -
2
2
1
2
113
Fet Stil = ndring

Bold print = Change
Fettdruck = nderung
46
44
45
45
80
36-71
20-71
95-01
84-01
93-00
Isolerplatta
Isolerplatta
1). Marin utfrande 440 V / Marine execution 440 V / Marine Ausfhrung 440 V
Mnad
Month
Monat
01
r
Year
Jahr
01
Anm.
Notes
Anm.
Dataskylt
Rating plate
Kennschild
1
1
1
r ' J ' l 1 Model:

k ^ \ J 1 Model;
ISer.No.
1
Max phaseload:
Produktnummer
Product number c;^^
Produktnummer
Tot.
KW
XM^
KW 1
Tot.
KW
XMK
KW 1
A 1
V\ter pressure:
1 Prod Nr.
MADE IN
Wiring diagram:
16803xxxxx(S) = Marin utfrande / Marine execution / Marine Ausfiirung
Notes:
Ledningsdiagram
Wiring diagram
Etschema
Shkkaavio
Elskjema
[SE]
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
16 80 32
13 L2 LI
Kontakter
Element
Termostat
Signallampe
Transformator
Skring
^_ali
zr
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Kontaktori
Lmpelementti
Termostaatti
Merkkivalo
Muuntaja
Sulake
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Kontaktor
Element
Termostat
Signallampe
Transformator
Sikring
A.
B.
C.
O.
E.
F.
Kontaktor
Varmeelement
Termostat
Signallampe
Transformator
Sikring
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Contactor
Heating element
Thermostat
Signal lamp
Transformer
Fuse
16 80 33
16 80 34
16 80 35
^
L2 11
(T
fig.4
206991^
,fk
-SO
,A
c=A
c==A,
=A.
=A
v"^!*^*
^:ltilMia
- ^
=A.
H Electrolux
Refrigerators,
ER25M/45M/55M/75M
'
Model ER25M - interior
Model ER25M
MARINE DIVISION
Phone
+46 322 74 000
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail
DOMESTIC TYPE REFRIGERATOR
CFC-FREE REFRIGERATION
SYSTEM AND INSULATION
5, 7, 9 AND 13 L FREEZER
COMPARTMENT
MANUAL DEFROSTING
(ER25M/45M/55M)
PUSH-BUTTON DEFROST
THERMOSTAT (ER75M)
ADJUSTABLE INTERIOR SHELVES
LAMINATED WORK TOP
FOUR MODELS- FOUR SIZES
These free standing refrigerators are suitable

for all fresh and frozen food products in all
shipboard installations. All models are supplied with deck bearer fittings and door
catches.
The refrigerators have white enamelled housing and the top is provided with a laminated
table top giving an extra working space.
Interior is equipped with storage shelves and
egg tray. Models ER45M, ER55M and
ER75M are also equipped with salad drawer
and internal light.
Model ER25M is supplied with a drip tray
which should be located on the top shelf, all
the other models are supplied with a drip tray
which should be located on runners immediately below the freezer compartment.
The refrigerator is equipped with reversible
hinge type and delivered with lockable door
for right or left hand hanging.
Forfirrtherspecifications, please see overleaf.
11-859
DOC.NO.
EDITION 2
11-859BM
10.02
REFRIGERATORS ER25M, ER45M, ER55M, ER75M

Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm
1. Rear deck bearer

2. Front deck bearer
3. Elearic cord
Specification - dimensions
Dimensioner mm
Model/Type
W
ER25M
ER45M
636
457
515
500
135
850
ER55M
ER75M
590
533.5
630
1230
Capacity
litres
(gross)
Freezer
mpartment
litres
82
113
142
215
13
530
150
INSTALLATION
Electrical
The unit is delivered withal.Smlong earthed 3-wire cord
provided with an European (Schuko) plug.
General
This is a domestic type refrigerator. In many cases the unit
can be left freestanding and be secured from moving ace.
to the instruaion for shipboard installation.
Specification
Model/Type
Number
of
shelves
ER25M
ER45M
ER55M
ER75M
11-859
Weight kgs
Refrigerant
R 134a
Voltage V
110-115 1-50/60
230 1-50/60
Loading
kW
0.1
net
gross
Shipping
volujne
m'
20
25
0.210
25
30
0.270
31
36
0.330
39
44
0.430
Fuse
slow A
10
Operation and
IVIaintenance for
Technical Appliances
ER-series
12024 lss.2 Nov'01
Bognor Regis
West Sussex
P022 9Na
Great Britain
Tel+44 (0)1243 863161

Fax i-44 {0)1243 825440
mail: techprod@lec.co,uk
CONTENTS
BEFORE STARTING
POSITIONING
INSTALLATION
2
2
OPERATION
BEFORE SWITCHING ON
STARTING
CLEANING YOUR APPLIANCE
STORAGE
DOORS
USEFUL HINTS
WALL MOUNTING
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
OPTIONAL EXTRAS
DATA LOGGER
CHART RECORDER
MAINS FAILURE ALARM
3
3
3
SAFETY AND SERVICING

ELECTRIC PLUG WIRING (UK ONLY)
EUROPEAN VARIANTS
SAFETY NOTES
HANDLING
AFER SALES SERVICE
BEFORE SERVICING
DISPOSAL
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
J\BORATORY REFRIGERATORS
.R202LR502LR902LR1602
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
DEFROSTING
-ABORATORY FREEZERS
SU25 ISU55 ISU95 ISU1605 ISF15
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
DEFROSTING
-ABORATORY REFRIGERATOR / FREEZERS
SR25 ISR55 IST45 IST55
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
DEFROSTING
.OW TEMPERATURE LABORATORY FREEZERS
.Fl 21 LS381 LC200LX200
OPERATION
TEMPERATURE CONTROL (LF121 LS381 LC200)
TEMPERATURE CONTROL (LX200)
DEFROSTING
6
6
7
7
VIARINE REFRIGERATORS AND FREEZERS

^25(t)M(E) R45(t)M(E) R55(t)M(E) R75(+)M(E) U25(t)M(E)
ER25(t)M(E) ER45(t)M(E) ER55(t)M(E) ER75(t)M(E)
EU25(t)M(E)
FITTING THE DECK BEARERS
8
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
8
DEFROSTING
8
DOOR ORIENTATION
8
Page 1
BEFORE STARTING
STARTING
Please read these instructions thoroughly before operating

your cabinet.
When unpacking and cleaning is complete allow the cabinet to

stand for 2 hours for the refrigerant to settle. Plug the mains
lead of your appliance into a suitable earthed socket and
switch on.
POSITIONING
In order to ensure optimum performance, do not put your
appliance near a source of heat, such as a cooker, boiler or
radiator. Also try to avoid locations where the sun shining
through glass can raise the room temperature.
A cold location is undesirable as it may cause slow defrosting.
When using for the first time, run the appliance for 24 hours
before loading with products to make sure it is operating
correctly.
INSTALLATION
Your cabinet is easy to keep clean. Regular cleaning is

important for health reasons.
It is important to install your appliance with a minimum 50mm

clearance at the sides and the top and 75mm clearance at the
back to allow free circulation of air. A spacer for the
recommended gap at the back is provided with these
instructions and is fitted as shown in the diagram. Remove the
electrical plug at the rear of your cabinet from part 'A' and
slide on part 'B'.
~J|iB
CLEANING YOUR APPLIANCE
Exterior:
Use a good wax polish which will clean and polish the cabinet
in one easy application. Do not use an aerosol polish as the
spray may damage plastic parts.
Interior:
Before using for the first time, and after defrosting, the interior
of your appliance should be cleaned. Switch off and unplug
from the mains supply. Remove all the shelves and baskets.
Wipe the inside with a soft cloth dampened with a weak
solution of washing-up liquid, one without a fragrance is
recommended. Rinse with clean warm water and dry
thoroughly. Avoid water getting into any electrical fittings,
switches, lights etc. as this may cause serious electrical
damage.
Do not use detergents to clean the magnetic door seal, this
may be cleaned using warm soapy water and then dried
thoroughly.
The above spacer instructions do not apply to the 1602 size of

cabinets and the low temperature laboratory freezers. The
1602's have an integral spacer fitted while the hinges of the
low temperature laboratory freezers ensure the necessary
spacing.
Stand the appliance on a hard smooth surface (not on carpet)
in order to maintain the necessary ventilation under and
around the cabinet. Your appliance should stand level or with a
slight tilt backwards. If it tilts forwards it could stop the door
closing and sealing properly. On front opening cabinets there is
one (or on larger models two) adjustable feet underneath the
front corners which you can adjust until your appliance stands
firm and level. On top opening models check that the cabinet
stands firmly on the floor to prevent rocking and to ensure
correct sealing of the lid.
Do not use wire wool, scouring powders or disinfectants of any

kind.
STORAGE
A wide variety of products can be stored but you must take
care to store them correctly. Air has to circulate freely around
the interior of the cabinet, so shelves must not be covered with
paper. Wherever possible leave spaces between packages and
containers. Warm products must be allowed to cool before
storing in the refrigerator and to prevent transfer of odours
and drying out, items should be separately packaged or
covered.
DOORS
To close the door, apply a gentle pressure until the magnetic
door gasket seals against the cabinet face. Do not 'slam close'.
Check periodically to see that there are no gaps between the
gasket and the cabinet face.
OPERATION
BEFORE SWITCHING ON
Remove all packaging materials, external and internal.
Clean the interior of your appliance (See the section "Cleaning
your Appliance").
Check that the voltage indicated on the data plate at the rear
of your cabinet conforms with your electricity supply.
Ensure that the appliance is earthed.
Page 2
If the door is fitted with a lock, this is secured by turning the

key a quarter turn. It is recommended that a note is made of
the key number and kept in a secure place, in the event that
the key is lost.
On some of the models the doors are reversible, i.e. a right
handed door can be turned into a left handed door. To do this
proceed as follows:
Remove shelves and containers from within the cabinet.

Carefully lay the cabinet onto its back, preferably onto
something soft such as a dust sheet, to prevent scratching to
the floor and the cabinet.
Unscrew the adjustable foot (if applicable). Remove the two
screws from the lower front hinge and the front foot or the
adjustable foot plate. Remove the lower hinge from the door.
When the standard mains lead is used, the bottom of the

cabinet should not be more than 1 m above the electrical
supply socket.
Mark out and drill the wall according to the dimensions given
in the following diagram. Insert the rawl plugs. Align the
cabinet mounting holes to the rawl plugs and hold the cabinet
in position e.g. by standing it on a table. Screw in the four
screws to fix the cabinet
Slide the door towards the base of the cabinet, thus

disengaging the top hinge pin from the location hole in the top
of the door.
513 mm
If the cabinet has a door handle, unscrew the two screws

holding it in place. Locate the two hole blanking screws on the
other side of the door and remove. Re-attach the handle and
the hole blanking screws in their new positions.
Unscrew the two screws holding the top hinge bracket, swap
the position of the bracket to the other side of the cabinet and
re-attach (on some models the upper hinge pin simply pushes
into a hole in the front fascia).
Slide the door onto the top hinge pin. Insert the lower hinge pin
into the door. Screw the hinge in place together with the front
hinge foot (if applicable) which should be fixed so that the
screw is towards the back of the cabinet. Attach the front feet
or the adjustable foot plates and adjustable feet. Stand the
cabinet upright and check that the door is correctly aligned
and that the magnetic seals fit snugly all round and that there
are no gaps. If adjustments are necessary, lay the cabinet onto
its back and alter the position of the lower hinge.
To close the door apply a gentle pressure until the magnetic
door gasket seals against the cabinet face. Do not "slam close".
Check periodically to see that there are no gaps between the
gasket and the cabinet face.
USEFUL HINTS
If your appliance is to be out of service for any length of time
ensure that the interior is carefully cleaned and dried. Leave
the door open and disconnect the plug from the mains socket.
Carry out regular cleaning according to instructions.
See that vibration noises are not caused by objects in contact
with your appliance and each other.
Don't pack shelves too tightly or obstruct the even distribution
of cold air.
Don't leave the cold control at its coldest setting longer than
necessary, freezing of the contents may occur.
WALL MOUNTING
The LR202, ISU25 and ISR25 models can be supplied with wall
mounting brackets.
Before wall mounting the cabinet ensure that the wall is sound
and will take the weight of the cabinet and its contents. Use
suitable securing screws. No lOx IV2" round head screws are
recommended and, if necessary, use suitable rawl plugs.
Pages
OPTIONAL EXTRAS
DATA LOGGER
If a data logger is fitted, instructions for its use and
maintenance is supplied in a separate leaflet.
CHART RECORDER
Instructions for the use and maintenance of the chart recorder,
if fitted, are supplied in a separate leaflet. A rechargeable NiCd
AA size battery is fitted to the recorder. The door is closed with
a key and a note should be made of its number, in case it is
lost.
MAINS FAILURE ALARM
The alarm circuit is powered by a 12Vdc rechargeable battery,
it is continuously recharged when the cabinet is in operation
and is maintenance free.
To activate the alarm circuit, operate the orange push button
switch located on the control panel which will illuminate. The
alarm circuit is now operational and should a failure occur to
the electricity supply a buzzer will sound and a red warning
light will come on. The alarm can be silenced by pressing the
switch to disconnect the alarm.
The battery can activate the alarm circuit for 24 hours. After
this time the battery will require 48 hours of normal cabinet
running before it is fully recharged.
During periods when the cabinet is not in use, the battery may
lose its charge. As previously stated, it will require 48 hours to
fully recharge.
SAFETY AND SERVICING
EUROPEAN VARIANTS
THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED

If this appliance is fitted with a non-rewirable plug for which
your socket is unsuitable the plug should be cut off and an
appropriate plug fitted. The removed plug must be disposed of
as insertion of the plug into an electrical socket is likely to be
dangerous.
If the model code ends with an 'E' (e.g. ER452ME instead of

ER452M) the cabinet will have been built for the continental
european market and will have a european plug fitted.
Ensure that the appliance is earthed.

Ensure that the appliance is disconnected from the mains
supply before attempting to remove light covers (if fitted).
ELECTRIC PLUG WIRING (UK ONLY)

The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with
the following code:
GREEN AND YELLOW - EARTH
BLUE - NEUTRAL
BROWN - LIVE
QREEN& YELLOW
Ensure that the appliance is disconnected from the mains

supply before cleaning internally or defrosting.
Do not store flammable or explosive substances in the
appliance.
HANDLING
13AMP
FUSE
BROWN
BLUE
SAFETY NOTES
CORD
CLAMP
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of your appliance

may not correspond with the coloured marking identif/ing the
terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
CONNECT GREEN & YELLOW coloured wire to plug terminal
marked 'E' or earth symbol 4^ or coloured green or green and
yellow.
CONNECT BLUE coloured wire to plug terminal marked 'N' or
coloured black.
CONNECT BROWN coloured wire to plug terminal marked 1 ' or
coloured red.
Do not push excess mains lead into the compressor
compartment.
If it is necessary to change the fuse in a moulded plug and the
fuse cover is detachable, it must be refitted after the fuse has
been changed. If the fuse cover is lost or damaged the plug
must not be used until a replacement is gbtained.
It is important that the colour of the replacement fuse cover
corresponds with the coloured insert or as indicated in
embossed words on the base of the plug. Replacement fuse
covers are available from the Spares Department, Lee
Refrigeration pic. at the address on the rear cover of this
leaflet.
When a non-rewirable plug or a rewirable 13 Amp (BS 1363)
plug is used it must be fitted with a 13 Amp ASTA approved
(BS 1362) fuse. If any other type of plug is used it must be
protected by a 15 Amp fuse either in the plug or at the
distribution board.
RADIO INTERFERENCE: This appliance complies with current
British and European Standards and CE Directives.
Your appliance may use isobutane (R600a) gas as its

refrigerant. This gas has a high environmental compatibility
but it is also combustible. When transporting, installing or
disposing of the appliance, care should be taken that no parts
of the refrigerating circuit are damaged. In order to avoid
hazardous mixtures of gas and air in the event of a refrigerant
gas leak, the appliance should be sited in a room having a
minimum volume of 1m^ for every 8 grams of R600a, a room
measuring 4m long x 3m wide x 3m high will have a volume of
36ml
If the appliance contains R600a it will be stated on the 'DATA
PLATE' label along with the quantity used.
AFTER SALES SERVICE
If service should be required please contact the retailer who
supplied the appliance. Give them the date of purchase, the
model and serial number (found on the 'FOR SERVICE QUOTE' or
'DATA PLATE' label) and state the nature of the fault.
BEFORE SERVICING
If something appears to be wrong, before calling the Service
Engineer, which could be expensive, check the following: The plug on the mains lead fits securely into the electrical
socket.
Check that the fuse is intact.
Check that the mains switch is'ON'.
See that the cold control is correctly set.
Ensure that the door closes firmly and check gasket sealing.
DISPOSAL
If you are disposing of an old cabinet, break off any latches and
hinges as a safeguard against small children trapping
themselves inside.
The refrigerant used in your appliance and the insulation
materials require special disposal procedures. Ensure that none
of the pipes on the back of the appliance are damaged prior to
disposal.
Up to date information concerning options for disposal can be
obtained from your retailer or local council office.
Page 4
LABORATORY REFRIGERATORS
LR202 LR502 LR902LR1602
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
The temperature control thermostat may be found under the
front fascia at the top of the refrigerator. On the model
LR1602 the temperature control is located in the lower front
panel. These are fully adjustable, with position 1 being the
warmest and position 6 being the coldest. Adjust the
thermostat to your required temperature in conjunction with a
thermometer.
The recommended storage temperature for general laboratory
products is considered to be +2C to +10C
Prolonged use of the coldest setting may freeze some products
stored inside the refrigerator. Location, room temperature, the
number of times you open and close the door and the
frequency of defrosting will all effect the temperature in your
refrigerator. The control setting may have to be varied to allow
for these.
DEFROSTING
A rise in temperature of frozen items during defrosting will

shorten the storage life. It is best to carry out a full defrost
when stocks are at their lowest. Ensure that areas out of sight
are completely defrosted.
On certain models a defrost tray is provided, with the small
basket removed, this should be slid into position under the
bottom freezing shelf. A suitable container should then be
placed under the hole in the shelf to collect the defrost water.
Defrosting should be carried out as quickly as possible and can
be assisted by placing a bowl of hot water in your appliance
and closing the door as far as possible.
NEVER use electrical heaters such as hair driers, fires or hot air
blowers.
When defrosting is complete, wipe the inside of the cabinet
with a weak solution of washing up liquid, one without a
fragrance is recommended. Dry the cabinet and replace shelves
and baskets.
Restart the appliance. Don't replace frozen items until the
appliance has reached its operating temperature.
LABORATORY REFRIGERATOR / FREEZERS

ISR25 ISR55 IST45 IST55
The appliance has an automatic defrost system which requires

no special operation on the part of the user. When the cold
control has been correctly set the appliance will periodically
switch off. It will not switch on again until all the frost that
has accumulated on the cold plate in the fridge compartment,
has melted. The defrost water will fall into the trough
underneath the bottom edge of the cold plate and run down
the drain into the plastic defrost water evaporation tray sitting
on top of the compressor.
It is important that the drain does not become blocked. If the
drain does become blocked it can be cleared with a piece of soft
wire such as a pipe cleaner. Service calls to unblock drain holes
are chargeable.
LABORATORY FREEZERS
ISU25 ISU55 ISU95 ISU1602 ISF5
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
front fascia at the top of the refrigerator. This is fully
adjustable, with position 1 being the warmest and position 6
being the coldest.
The recommended storage temperature for general laboratory
products is considered to be +2Cto +10C in the refrigerated
compartment, -IS'C in the freezer.
DEFROSTING
MODEL ISR25 and ISR55
These models are supplied with a drip tray which is located on
runners immediately below the freezing compartment. Its
function is to collect water during defrosting.
On the ISR 55 a baffle plate is provided at the rear of the tray
and this should be positioned as follows:
TEMPERATRE CONTROL
front fascia at the top of the refrigerator. This is fully
being the coldest. The recommended storage temperature of
the freezer is-18C.
DEFROSTING
A heavy frost deposit on the inside of the freezer compartment
is undesirable because ice acts as a form of insulation and
affects freezing performance. To maintain performance the ice
must be removed whenever a heavy layer has built up.
Scrape off the soft residue of surface frost with a wooden or
plastic spatula. Collect the removed frost and throw it away. Do
not use sharp instruments to remove frost. It may cause
damage.
For a complete defrost, unplug the appliance, remove all items
and transfer them to another freezer.
Page 5
a) In the extended position, i.e. sloping outward and backward

for normal refrigeration use and during defrosting.
b) Lying flat in the tray for colder main cabinet temperature
and to reduce internal humidity.
There is also a loose plastic panel in the base of the drip tray.
This panel is necessary to ensure the correct operation of the
cabinet and must be replaced after cleaning and defrosting.
To defrost:
1) Remove all items and transfer them to another freezer.
Extend the flap on the drip tray.
2) Disconnect the mains supply. Do not reconnect until
defrosting is complete.
3) When defrosting is finished, remove the drip tray, empty the
water out, wipe dry, put the baffle to its normal position and
replace the drip tray under the freezing compartment.
Reconnect to the mains supply and replace items in the
freezing compartment.
MODEL IST45 and IST55

There is a defrost tray stored on the top shelf of the freezer
compartment. Remove this tray and place it on the runner
where the freezer basket is normally stored. A suitable
container should be placed under the hole in the tray to collect
the defrost water. Any loose frost or defrost water will fall onto
the tray and when defrosting is complete the tray can be
removed and the contents thrown away.
When defrosting is complete, replace the tray and basket and
restart the appliance. When the freezer has reached its
operating temperature, replace the frozen items.
The fridge compartment has an automatic defrost system
which requires no special operation on the part of the user.
When the cold control has been correctly set the appliance will
periodically switch off. It will not switch on again until all the
frost that has accumulated on the cold plate in the fridge
compartment, has melted.
The defrost water will fall into the trough underneath the
bottom edge of the cold plate and run down the drain into the
plastic defrost water evaporation tray sitting on top of the
compressor.
It is important that the drain does not become blocked. If the
drain does become blocked it can be cleared with a piece of soft
wire such as a pipe cleaner. Service calls to unblock drain holes
are chargeable.
LOW TEMPERATURE LABORATORY FREEZERS
LF121 LS381 LC200LX200
OPERATION
The recommended operating temperature of the cabinets is as
follows:
LF121:-20Cto-40C.
LS381:is-20Cto-35C.
LC200: is -20C to -50X.
LX200: is -50C to -80C.
In order to achieve these low temperatures the cabinet should
be sited in such a way that it has at least 150mm clearance all
round to allow for adequate ventilation and the ambient
temperature should not exceed 25C.
Dixell
Press and hold the SET key for at least 2 seconds. The set
point will be displayed and the LEDs of the first and digits
will flash.
Use the @ and S rocker key to alter the set point.
Store the new value by pressing SET key or by waiting for
15 seconds.
LED
*
#
MODE
ON
FLASHING -
LED2
FLASHING -
ON
-
FUNCTION
Compressor running
Programming phase
(flashing with LED2)
Anti-short cycle delay
enabled
Programming phase
(flashing with ^ )
Alarm signal
In Pr2 indicates the
parameter is also
present in Pri
Function and Parameters Menu

Alterations to parameters should only be done by qualified
personnel.
To access the function menu press the SET and ra keys for
3 seconds, the label of the first function is displayed. The
and @ are used to scroll through the menu. By pressing the
SET key the currently displayed function is enabled.
List of Functions
Pri includes all user accessible parameters.
Pr2 includes all instrument parameters (at installer level). It
can be accessed through a security code. It is possible to
modify all parameters and to add or remove parameters
from Pri by pressing SET + @. When a parameter is
enabled at user level LED UM is on.
LOC Keyboard lock. When enabled the 'POP flashing message
is displayed for a few seconds and then the keys are
locked. Only the set point display is enabled. The key board
is unlocked by pressing the @ and @ keys together.
Out exits the menu.
If no key is pressed for 15 seconds the instrument switches
back to temperature display mode.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL (LF121 LC200 LS381)

These cabinets are supplied with
electronic temperature controllers.
To display the temperature set point press the SET key, the
value will be displayed for 5 seconds. The temperature set point
is modified as follows:
model XRl IOC
The controller is located on the front of the cabinet along with

a green power indication light, which will illuminate when
there is power to the cabinet.
LED2
To access parameters in Pr2 a security code is required. Enter

the function menu, select label Pr2 and press the SET key. The
'PAS' flashing message will be displayed, shortly followed by
'0 - -' with a flashing zero. Use the @ a n d @ keys to input the
security code, confirming each digit with the SET key.
The security code is 321.
Thefactory settings for user accessible parameters (Pri) are:
The controller has been factory set and generally the settings
will not require modification.
Page 6
Set
(set point)
Hy
(hysteresis)
(0.2C...+12.0C)
LS381
LF121
LC200
-35
-40
-50
ALC (alarm configuration)

(O = related to set point
1 = fixed to absolute value)
TEMPERATURE CONTROL (LX200)

These cabinets are supplied with CAL 9900 PID temperature
controllers.
ALU (alarm band upper)

10
(O to 50C degrees above set point)
The controller is located on the front of the cabinet along with

a green power light and a red alarm switch. Full details of its
operation and setting can be found in the manufacturers
leaflet. The set point of the controller is factory set at -80C.
ALL (alarm band lower)

10
(0 to 50C degrees below set point)
Aid (alarm delay)
5
(0 to 120min. between alarm
condition and alarm signalling)
The factory settings for non-user accessible parameters (Pr2)
are:
LS
minimum set point)

- 57C... SET)
-57
US
maximum set point)

SET... + 99C)
-20
AC
anti-short cycle delay)

p... 30 min.)
dAO alarm delay at start-up)

0... 720 min.)
OdS outputs delay at start-up)
0 ... 120 min.)
DEFROSTING
Before defrosting, remove al items and transfer them to
another freezer.
Carefully scrape off any frost build-up with the plastic scraper
provided or with a wooden or plastic spatula. Collect the
removed frost in a clean dustpan and throw it away. Do not use
sharp instruments to remove frost, they may cause damage.
If a more thorough defrost is required, switch off and unplug
the appliance, proceed as above and when the loose frost has
been cleared, place a bowl of hot water inside the freezer and
close the lid. Any remaining ice will melt and the water should
be removed with a sponge or something similar. When
defrosting is complete, clean and dry the inside as described in
'Cleaning Your Appliance' and switch on. When the freezer has
reached its operating temperature, replace the items previously
removed.
120
Ot
probe calibration offset)

-12to+12C)
CF
measurement unit)
0 = Celsius, 1 = Fahrenheit)
During the initial pull-down the cabinet temperature is likely to

be in alarm condition and will remain so until the freezer
temperature is within the designated alarm band.
To mute the alarm, press the red alarm switch. The alarm will
be muted but will remain illuminated until the freezer is down
to temperature. Upon reaching the set point temperature the
alarm light will go out and the audible alarm will recommence
to sound. De-activate the alarm switch to return to the normal
monitoring mode of the controller.
COn freezer on with faulty probe) 45

0... 120 min.)
A rise in temperature of frozen items during defrosting will

shorten the storage life. It is best to carry out a full defrost
when stocks are at their lowest. Ensure that areas out of sight
are completely defrosted.
COF ^freezer off with faulty probe) 15

0... 120 min.)
The controller is fitted with an audible alarm and remote alarm
outputs. These can be muted by pressing any of the keys
although LED So will remain on until the alarm condition is
rectified
Page 7
NEVER use electrical heaters such as hair driers, fires or hot air
blowers.
MARINE REFRIGERATORS
R25(t)M(E) R45(t)M(E) R55(+)M(E) R75(t)M(E) U25(t)M(E)
ER25(t)M(E) ER45(t)M(E) ER55(t)M(E) ER75(t)M(E)
EU25(t)M(E)
Position the cabinet to the rear deck bearer so that the deck
bearer is against the compressor mounting plate as figs.2 and
4.
Where (t) represents 1, 2, 3 or 4:

1
110 - 1 1 5 V, 50/60 Hz, right hand hung door.
2
220 - 240 V. 50 Hz, right hand hung door.
3
110 - 1 1 5 V, 50/60 Hz, left hand hung door.
4
220 - 240 V. 50 Hz, left hand hung door.
Where (E) represents a european model.
FiniNG THE DECK BEARERS
The cabinets are supplied with deck bearers whose function is
to prevent movement of the cabinet.
onyeeiONA'SSTBtiiBi
They are fitted as follows:

Attach the rear deck bearer to the deck as shown in figs.1 and
2.
S7iTini
MINIMUM
Fig.4 DECK BEARER FIXING
Fix the front deck bearer to the deck.
The distances of the deck fixing holes indicated in Fig.4 are
shown in Table 1.
MODEL
OVERALL
DEPTH
515mm
DIMENSION 'A'
R&ER25C)
R&ER45n
R&ER55(*)
590mm
R&ER75(*)
630mm
Where (*) denotes 1, 2,3 or 4
457mm
534mm
573mm
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
280inmCRS.
The temperature control thermostat may be found on the
underside of the front fascia, just above the door. This is fully
being the coldest. The recommended storage temperature for
refrigerators +0C to +5C and for freezers is -18C.
Fig.1 REAR VIEW SHOWING DECK BEARER FIX
Prolonged use of the coldest setting may freeze some products

stored inside the refrigerator. Location, room temperature, the
number of times you open and close the door and the
frequency of defrosting will all effect the temperature in your
appliance. The control setting might have to be varied to allow
for these.
B7tnin
MINMUM
Fig.2 REAR DECK BEARER FIXING
Attach the front bearer to the cabinet as shown in fig.3 using
two M5 X 16mm bolts and serrated washers.
DEFROSTING
The method of defrosting of refrigerators is the same as that
for Laboratory Refrigerators ISR25 and 55.
The method of defrosting of freezers is the same as that for
Laboratory Freezers.
FROMT
DOOR ORIENTATION
DECK
BEARER
The doors on the 'ER' and 'EU' models can be changed from
right to left hand hanging and vice-versa, refer to the section
on 'Doors'.
The doors on the 'R' and 'U' models are either left or right
handed and can not be changed.
Fig.3 FRONT DECK BEARER FIXING
Pages
SPARES MANUAL
ER452yE
Reffigeration pic
lustration No. Description
Part No
WORKTOP FRONT COVER
A 4536
DOOR ASSEMBLY
EV 14740
HINGE PIN
S 1049
DAIRY DOOR
A 4460
DAIRY SHELF
A 2677
PACKAGE SHELF
A 2675
EGG TRAY
A 2683
BOHLE SHELF
A 4379
LIGHT SWITCH
E2735
10
LIGHT HOUSING
A 4389
11
LIGHT BULB HOLDER
E 1426
12
LIGHT BULB
E767
13
LIGHT COVER
A 4388
14
EVAPORATOR DOOR
91235
15
EVAPORATOR DOOR HINGE PIN
D348
16
EVAPORATOR SHROUD
91234
17
EVAPORATOR SHROUD FIXING RIVET
A 988
18
EVAPORATOR DOOR SPRING
D345
19
EVAPORATOR
EL 2635
20
ICE TRAY
A4138
21
THERMOSTAT PHIAL RETAINING CLIP
7962
22
CONVECTION BAFFLE PLATE
91023
23
DRIP TRAY
91306
24
DRIP TRAY PANEL
91305
25
SHELF
103013
26
SALAD BIN LID
A 2853
27
SALAD BIN
A 2852
28
LOWER HINGE ASSEMBLY
S 1058
29
FRONT HINGE FOOT
A 4391
30
REAR FOOT
A 4390
31
ADJUSTABLE FOOT
A 2767
32
ADJUSTABLE FOOT PLATE
51677
33
THERMOSTAT
E2764
34
THERMOSTAT KNOB
A 4386
Page 1 of4
SPRES MANUAL
ER452ME
PRISUSI
MARINE Refriger-stor
Reffigeraticrs p!ir
illustration No . Description
Part No
35
RELAYP.T.C. 103N0016
E2625
36
TERMINAL BLOCK COVER
E 1645
37
COMPRESSOR, DANFOSS TL4G, 220-240V, 50/60Hz
C1016
38
COMPRESSOR MOUNTING RUBBER
19296
39
COMPRESSOR SECURING BOLT, M6 x 25
B 1104
40
PLAIN WASHER, M6 x 20mm O.D.
B 1106
41
MOUNTING SLEEVE
19297
42
SPRING WASHER, M6
B 1107
43
NUT, M6
B1105
44
MAINS LEAD
E2504
45
UNIT BEARER
41479
46
CONDENSER
N 1202
47
DRIER lOg
N 1184
48
WALL SPACER
S 843
49
WALL SPACER CARRIER
S 842
50
REAR DECK BEARER
EV 14666
51
FRONT DECK BEARER
EV 14665
52
FRONT DECK BEARER SECURING SCREW, M5 x 16
B 1076
53
SERRATED WASHER, M5
B1077
Page 2 of4
iWmImlA
Mw:m
Page 3 of4
yAlteefnaerster
;PARES MANUL
mwmGS
Refrigeration pic
ER452ME
MARINE Refrigerator
sumy
SCHBMTIC WIRINQ DIAQRAM

OHK
COUXJR
BIAOC
BL
BUIE
BR
BROWN
9ff
ORSlANDYHlflW
COMFKESSOR
ON
8/Y
LIQHT SWITCH
BL
BR
BL
BR
m.
BR
THEHMOSIAT
SUPPLY
LIGHT SWITCH
<r^
tew LAMP
COMPRESSOR
Page 4 of4
BL
UUMP
aRCUIT DIAGRAM
BR\
BR BL
BR
<r^
SO
N L
1EW
7w
Â.
r-Jk
C=L
c = &
0^
!?!?''*-.-(
=JV.
"Ji-^'''^'^'
c=Jk
c=A
* WA:L
Ol
S] Electrolux
Washer-extractors EW402E60, EW 1030F;
Washer-dryer EW 1289W
Model EW 402F.60
"-..
I",
Model EW 1289W
Model EW 1030F
MARINE DIVISION
Phone +46 322 74 000
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail
STAINLESS STEEL DRUM
ZINC COATED STEEL CABINET
EASILY OPERATED CONTROLS
NO-SPIN BUTTON FOR DELICATE

COTTON OR LINEN ITEMS
REDUCED COMSUMPTION OF
WATER, ENERGY AND DETERGENT
BUILT IN WATER DRAIN FILTER
The washer-extractors EW 402F.60, EW

1030F and washer-dryer EW 1289W are
domesdc type machines for reliable light duty
washing on board.
On models EW402F.60 and EW 1030F is
the program selected by a program selector
dial, located on the control panel. The control
panel is also provided with a temperature
selector dial, an ON/OFF button, several
options buttons and pilot lamp. The detergent dispenser drawer, located in the front of
the machine, has different compartments for
pre-wash, main wash, softener and bleaching
agent.
On model EW 1030F are the program, temperature and special program selected by one
selector dial located on the control panel. The
control panel is also provided with several
options buttons and pilot lamps. The detergent dispenser drawer, located in the front of
the machine, has different compartments for
pre-wash, main wash and softener.
The machines are delivered with clear installation instructions, easy to follow manual and
technical documentation.
The design facilitates disassembly and ease
service on board.
For further specifications, please see overleaf
19-006
DOC.NO.
EDITION 4
19-006BM
04.04
WASHER-EXTRACTORS EW 402E6O AND EW 1030F, WASHER-DRYER EW 1289W

Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm
1. Water inlet hose 1.3 m with 3/4" gas

thread spout
2. Electrical cord 1.3 m with earthed plug
3. Water drain hose 1.75 m (int. diameter
16.5 mm, ext. diameter 21.5 mm)
Specification - dimensions in mm
Model/Type
408
50
523
38.5
552
24
415
75
552
24
520
40
EW 402R60
540
EW 1030F
600
EW 1289W
850
620
Specification
Model/Type
EW 402F.60
Spin
rpm
Drum
volume, Itrs
42
Max rated
washing
capacity/load
kgs
Max rated
drying
capacity/load
kgs
4-5
400
EW 1030F
46
700-1000
EW 1289W
54
1200
Voltage V
Loading
kW
Weight kgs
Fuse A
230 1-60
3.5
gross
66
70
68
72
81
84
2.2
230 1-60
0.380
10
230 1-50
7
net
2.1
Installation
The washer-extractor is delivered with adjustable metallic feet covered with rubber. The feet are fixed in brackets.
To remove feet during installation the brackets around the feet must be unscrewed also.
For keeping it positioned and secured use Deck mounting kit STO 02 69 (available as optional accessories).
Deck mounting kit STO 02 69 - position ofholes (models EW402F.60 and EW1030 only):
dk
Jt
^
20.
42 J I ^ J ^
^
77
523-
77K20.
0 12(10x)
80.5
150
I 465
150
t
fi2^
80.5,
552677-
19-006
62
Shipping
voliune
m
0.420
WASHING MACHtNE
INSTRUCTION BOOKLET
W 402 F
124 972 570
Electrolux
YOUR NEW WASHING MACHINE

This new washing machine meets all
requirements for a modern washing of laundry
with reduced consumption of water, energy and
detergent.
The temperature selector dial allows you to
choose personally the suitable washing
temperature for your laundry.
The automatic cooling of the washing water
from 95C to 60C before draining will
prevent plastic pipes of your drainage system
from being deformed.
A Ecological hints
In order to obtain water and energy savings and
to protect the environment, we advice you to
follow these instructions:
Whenever possible, wash the maximum load
for the selected programme, without
overloading the drum.
Use a programme with prewash only for
heavy soiled items.
Measure out detergent according to the water
hardness, degree of soiling and quantity of
laundry being washed.
With adequate pre-treatment, stains and
limited soiling can be removed; the laundry
can then be washed at a lower temperature.
Select "Quick wash" for lightly soiled laundry.
v& Environment protection

Packaging recycling
Materials marked with the t^) symbol are
recyclable. To enable them to be recycled, they
must be placed in the appropriate collection
areas (or containers). Check with your local
authorities.
>PE<= polyethylene
>PS<= polystyrene
>PP<= polypropylene
Washing machine scrapping

When the appliance is to be scrapped, cut off
the power supply cable and make the door
closing device inoperative to avoid it becoming a
death trap for a child.
Use authorised disposal sites for your old
appliance.
Help to keep your country tidy!
The symbols you will see on some paragraphs of this booklet have the following meaning:
A
CD
Important information concerning the

safety in the use of your machine.
Disregarding this information might
lead to damages.
Information for correct use of your
machine and to obtain the best
performance.
Important information concerning
environment protection.
Our contribution to the protection of the

environment: we use recycled paper.
CONTENTS
Important information
Description of the appliance
Detergent dispenser drawer

and programme chart
Technical specifications
Installation
6
6
7
7
7
Unpacking
Positioning
Water inlet
Water drainage
Use
Control panel
Washing hints
Sorting the laundry
Temperatures
Before loading the laundry
Maximum loads
Laundry weights
Removing stains
Detergents and additives
Quantity of detergent to be used
International wash code symbols
Washing programmes
Operating sequence
8
8
.9
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
11
12-13
14-15
Maintenance
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
Bodywork
Water inlet filter
Drain filter
Emergency emptying out
The dangers of freezing
Something not working
18-19
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
It is important that this instruction book be kept with the appliance for future reference. If you sell or
give the appliance away, make sure that the book is passed to the new owners so that they can
familiarise themselves with its operation and relevant warnings.
The following warnings are provided in the interests of overall safety. You must read them carefully
before installing or using the appliance.
Installation
When unpacking the appliance, check that it
is not damaged. If in doubt, do not use it and
contact the Service Centre.
All internal packing must be removed before
using the appliance. Serious damage may be
caused to the machine or adjacent furniture if
the protective transit devices are not
removed or are not completely removed.
Refer to the relevant paragraph in the
instruction book.
Any electrical work required to install this
appliance must be carried out by a qualified
electrician.
Any plumbing work required to install this
appliance must be carried out by a qualified
plumber.
After having installed the machine, check that
it is not standing on its electrical supply cable.
If the appliance is placed on a carpeted floor,
ensure that air can circulate freely between
the adjustable feet and the floor.
Use
This appliance is designed for domestic use.
It must not be used for purposes other than
those for which it was designed.
Do not overload the appliance. Follow the
instructions in the instruction book.
Only wash fabrics which are designed to be
machine washed. Follow the instructions on
each garment label.
Make sure that all pockets are empty.
Objects such as coins, safety pins, pins and
screws can cause extensive damage.
Do not machine wash garments saturated
with petroleum, methylated spirits,
trichlorethylene, etc. If such fluids have been
used to remove stains prior to washing, wait
until they have completely evaporated from
the fabric before placing garments in the
appliance.
Place small items such as socks, belts, etc. in
a cloth bag or pillowcase to prevent them
getting trapped between the drum and the tub.
Use only the recommended quantities of

fabric softener. An excessive amount could
damage the laundry.
Leave the porthole door slightly ajar when
the appliance is not in use. This preserves
the door seal and prevents the formation of
musty smells.
Always check that water has emptied out
before opening the door. If not, drain the
water following the instructions in the
instruction book.
Always unplug the appliance and shut the
water tap after use.
Service/repair
In the event of a fault, do not attempt to
repair the appliance yourself. Repairs carried
out by inexperienced persons may cause
damage.
If repairs are needed, contact an authorised
service centre and ask for genuine spare
parts.
Safety
This appliance is designed to be used by
adults. Children must not be allowed to touch
the controls or play with the product.
During high temperature wash cycles the
glass door becomes very hot. Do not touch it.
Pets sometimes climb into washing
machines. Check the drum before each use.
DESCRIPTION OF THE APPLIANCE

1
2
3
4
5
6

Programme chart
Control panel
Door handle
Drain filter
Adjustable feet
Detergent dispenser drawer and

programme chart
|Mj m L ^
Symbols
I II
Prewash
1111
Main wash
V ^**^?^<^
Fabric softener
There is a programme guide in the interior part
of the detergent dispenser drawer.
1 \' 71^
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
Height
Width
Depth
85 cm
60 cm
54 cm
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE/FREQUENCY

TOTAL POWER ABSORBED
MINIMUM FUSE PROTECTION
220-230V/60 Hz
2250 W
10A
WATER PRESSURE
Minimum
Maximum
5 N/cm^
80 N/cm^
MAXIMUM LOAD
Cotton
Synthetics, delicate fabrics
Woollens
5
2
1
SPIN SPEED
kg
kg
kg
400 rpm
C V This appliance complies with the following EEC Directives:

73/23/EEC of 19/02/73 relating to low voltage
89/336/EEC of 03/05/89 relating to electromagnetic compatibility
INSTALLATION
Unpacking
All transit bolts and packing must be

removed before using the appliance.
You are advised to keep all transit devices so

that they can be refitted if the machine ever has
to be transported again.
1. Using a spanner, unscrew and remove the
rear right-hand bolt and lay the machine on
its back, taking care not to squash the hoses.
This can be avoided by placing one of the
corner packing pieces between the machine
and the floor.
Remove the polystyrene blocks from the

bottom of the machine and release the two
plastic bags.
Carefully remove the right-hand bag (1) then
the left-hand bag (2) by pulling them towards
the centre of the machine.
4. Set the machine upright and remove the two

remaining bolts from the back.
5. Pull out the three plastic spacers from the
holes into which the bolts were fitted.
6. Plug the open holes with the plugs which you
will find at the back of the appliance.
Positioning
Install the machine on a flat hard floor.
Make sure that air circulation around the
machine is not impeded by carpets, rugs etc.
Check that the machine does not touch the wall
or other kitchen units.
Carefully level by screwing the adjustable feet in
or out. Never place cardboard, wood or similar
materials under the machine to compensate for
any unevenness in the floor.
^:2^^
/^
Tojll
?020-<
^ ^ ^ ^
J^ ^
Wj
Water inlet
Connect the water inlet hose to a tap with a 3/4"
thread after having inserted the small filter "A"
supplied with the machine.
The other end of the inlet hose which connects
to the machine can be turned in any direction.
Simply loosen the fitting, rotate the hose and
retighten the fitting, making sure there are no
water leaks.
The inlet hose must not be lengthened. If it is
too short and you do not wish to move the tap,
you will have to purchase a new, longer hose
specially designed for this type of use.
Water drainage
The end of the drain hose can be positioned in
three ways:
Hooked over the edge of a sink using the
plastic hose guide supplied with the
machine. In this case, make sure the end
cannot come unhooked when the machine is
emptying.
This could be done by tying it to the tap with a
piece of string or attaching it to the wall.
In a sink drain pipe branch. This branch must
be above the trap so that the bend is at least
60 cm above the ground.
Directly into a drain pipe at a height of not
less than 60 cm and not more than 90 cm.
The end of the drain hose must always be
ventilated, i.e. the inside diameter of the drain
pipe must be larger than the outside diameter of
the drain hose.
The drain hose must not be kinked. Run it along
the floor; only the part near the drainage point
must be raised.
This machine is designed to operate on a
220-230 V, single-phase, 60 Hz supply
Check that your domestic electrical installation
can take the maximum load required (2.25 kW),
also taking into account any other appliances in
use.
Connect the machine to an earthed socket,
in accordance with current wiring regulations.
The manufacturer declines any

responsibility for damage or injury through
failure to comply with the above safety
precaution.
Should the appliance power supply cable
need to be replaced, this should be
carried out by our Service Centre.
USE
Control panel
iS(
l<^ ts)
^rr^^rr^
ooo o
2 3 4
5 ON/OFF button
1 Programme chart
It will help you to choose the most suitable
washing programme for your laundry.
2 Spin suppression button 1^

Depress this button when you have to wash
particularly delicate cotton or linen items in order
to exclude all the spinning phases.
3 Half load button iV3)

Select this button to reduce water consumption
on the rinse cycle when washing a half load of
cottons or linens.
4 Intensive rinse button
5 6
By depressing this button on programmes for

cotton and linen the machine will perform the
rinses with high water level.
To be used in areas where the water is very soft
or for people allergic to detergents or who have
very delicate skin.
Depress this button to start the programme.

Depress it again to stop the programme or to
switch the machine off.
Before selecting or changing an ongoing
programme the machine must be switched off.
6 Operating pilot light

This light is on whilst the machine is operating
and goes out at the end of the programme.
7 Temperature selector dial #

Turn this dial to select the washing temperature.
Position -)f= cold wash.
8 Programme selector dial

To select the required programme, turn this dial
cloclowise until the programme letter is exactly
opposite the pointer.
(3 Washing hints
Sorting the laundry
Follow the wash code symbols on each garment
label and the manufacturer's washing
instructions.
Sort the laundry as follows:
whites, coloureds, synthetics, delicates, woollens.
Temperatures
95=
for normally soiled white cottons and

linen (e.g. tea cloths, towels,
tablecloths, sheets...)
60
for normally soiled, colour fast

garments (e.g. shirts, night dresses,
pyjamas....) in linen, cotton or
synthetic fibres and for lightly soiled
white cotton (e.g. undenwear).
-)f (cold) for delicate items (e.g. net curtains),

mixed laundry including synthetic
30-40 fibres
and woollens bearing the label
pure new wool, machine washable,
non-shrink
Before loading the laundry

Never wash whites and coloureds together.
Whites may lose their "whiteness" in the wash.
New coloured items may run in the first wash;
they should therefore be washed separately the
first time.
Make sure that no metal objects are left in
the laundry (e.g. hair clips, safety pins, pins).
Button up pillowcases, close zip fasteners,
hooks and poppers. Tie any belts or long tapes.
Remove persistent stains before washing. Rub
particularly soiled areas with a special detergent
or detergent paste.
Treat curtains with special care. Remove hooks
or tie them up in a bag or net.
Maximum loads
Recommended loads are indicated in the
programme charts.
General rules:
cotton, linen: drum full but not too tightly
packed
synthetics: drum no more than half full
delicate fabrics and woollens: drum no more

than one third full.
Washing a maximum load makes the most
efficient use of water and energy.
For heavily soiled laundry, reduce the load size.
Laundry weights
The following weights are indicative

bathrobe
1200 g
napkin
100 g
quilt cover
700 g
sheet
500 g
pillow case
200 g
tablecloth
250 g
towelling towel
200 g
tea cloth
100 g
night dress
200 g
ladies' briefs
100 g
man's work shirt
600 g
man's shirt
200 g
man's pyjamas
500 g
blouse
100 g
men's underpants
100 g
Removing stains
Stubborn stains may not be removed by just
water and detergent. It is therefore advisable to
treat them prior to washing.
Blood: treat fresh stains with cold water. For
dried stains, soak overnight in water with a
special detergent then rub in the soap and
water.
Oil based paint: moisten with benzine stain
remover, lay the garment on a soft cloth and dab
the stain; treat several times.
Dried grease stains: moisten with turpentine,
lay the garment on a soft surface and dab the
stain with the fingertips and a cotton cloth.
Rust: oxalic acid dissolved in hot water or a rust
removing product used cold. Be careful with rust
stains which are not recent since the cellulose
structure will already have been damaged and
the fabric tends to hole.
Mould stains: treat with bleach, rinse well
(whites and fast coloureds only).
Grass: soap lightly and treat with bleach (whites
and fast coloureds only).
Ball point pen and glue: moisten with acetone
(*), lay the garment on a soft cloth and dab the
stain.
Lipstick: moisten with acetone as above, then

treat stains with methylated spirits. Remove any
residual marks from white fabrics with bleach.
Red wine: soak in water and detergent, rinse
and treat with acetic or citric acid, then rinse.
Treat any residual marks with bleach.
Ink: depending on the type of ink, moisten the
fabric first with acetone (*), then with acetic acid;
treat any residual marks on white fabrics with
bleach and then rinse thoroughly.
Tar stains: first treat with stain remover,
methylated spirits or benzine, then rub with
detergent paste.
(*) do not use acetone on artificial silk
Quantity of detergent to be used

The type and quantity of detergent will depend
on the type of fabric, load size, degree of soiling
and hardness of the water used.
Water hardness is classified in so-called
"degrees" of hardness. Information on hardness
of the water in your area can be obtained from
the relevant water supply company, or from your
local authority.
Follow the product manufacturers' instructions
on quantities to use.
Use less detergent if:
- you are washing a small load
- the laundry is lightly soiled
- large amounts of foam form during washing.
Detergents and additives

Good washing results also depend on the choice
of detergent and use of the correct quantities to
avoid waste and protect the environment.
Although biodegradable, detergents contain
substances which, in large quantities, can upset
the delicate balance of nature.
The choice of detergent will depend on the type
of fabric (delicates, woollens, cottons, etc.), the
colour, washing temperature and degree of
soiling.
All commonly available washing machine
detergents may be used in this appliance:
- powder detergents for all types of fabric,
- powder detergents for delicate fabrics (BO^C
max) and woollens,
- liquid detergents, preferably for low
temperature wash programmes {60C max)
for all types of fabric, or special for woollens
only
The detergent and any additives must be placed
in the appropriate compartments of the
dispenser drawer before starting the wash
programme.
If using concentrated powder or liquid
detergents, a programme without prewash must
be selected.
Pour liquid detergent into the dispenser drawer
compartment marked QiJ just before starting
the programme.
Any fabric softener or starching additives must
be poured into the compartment marked ^
before starting the wash programme.
Follow the product manufacturer's
recommendations on quantities to use.
10
Degrees of water hardness

Degrees
Level
Characteristic
1
2
3
4
soft
medium
hard
very hard
German
dH
French
T.H.
0-15
0- 7
16-25
8-14
26-37
15-21
more than 21 more than 37
S) International wash code symbols

These synnbols appear on fabric labels, in order to help you choose the best way to treat your laundry
Energetic wash
Xas7
Km/
\327
Max. wash
temperature
95C
Max. wash
temperature
60C
Max. wash
temperature
40C
Delicate wash
\g7
Bleaching
w
Max. wash
temperature
30C
X^^MJ
Hand wash
Bleach In cold water
Do not bleach
Hot iron
max 200C
Warm iron
max 150C
Lukewarm iron
max 110C
Dry cleaning
Dry cleaning
in all solvents
Dry cleaning in
perchlorethylene,
petrol, pure alcohol,
R 111 & R 1 1 3
Dry cleaning
in petrol,
pure alcohol
andR 113
Drying
H
Flat
n a
On the line
Do not
wash
at all
\30/
Ironing
l^
On clothes
hanger
Do not iron
Do not
dry clean
K?5| higti
l^c^ temperature
1 ^ 1 '
uUJi temperature
Tumble dry
Do not
tumble dry
11
Energetic programmes for cotton and linen

Maximum load: 5 kg
Progr.
Temp.
Type of laundry
Whites
with prewash
(heavy soiled)
60-95
60-95 without prewash
Whites
(normally soiled)
Coloureds
with prewash
(heavy soiled)
40-60
30-40 lightly soiled laundry
Coloureds
(normally soiled)
Quick wash
Cycle description
Possible
options
Prewash
Wash at 60-95C
4 rinses
Long spin
Wash at 60-95C
4 rinses
Long spin
Prewash
Wash at 40-60C
4 rinses
Long spin
WW
Wash at 40-60C
4 rinses
Long spin
Wash at 30-40C
4 rinses
Long spin
Rinses
4 rinses with liquid

additives, if required
Long spin
Short spin
Drain and short spin
mm
1^
The temperatures indicated are the optimum temperatures for each programme and depend on the
type of laundry and degree of soiling.
12
Gentle programmes for synthetics, mixed fabrics, delicates and wool

Maximum load: 2 kg, wool: 1 kg
Progr.
Type of laundry
Temp.
Synthetics
with prewash
(heavy soiled)
Cycle description
Prewash
Wash at 40-60C
3 rinses
Water left in tub
40-60
30''-40 Delicates
Wash at 30-40C
3 rinses
Water left in tub
30-40 W o o l ^
Wash at 30-40C
3 rinses
Water left in tub
Synthetics
(normally soiled)
Possible
options
Wash at 40-60C
3 rinses
Water left in tub
Rinses
3 rinses with fabric softener

Water left in tub
Drain
Draining of water
The temperatures indicated are the optimum temperatures for each programme and depend on the
type of laundry and degree of soiling.
The water of the last rinse of these programmes is not emptied out to avoid any creasing in the
clothes. To drain water, select programme M or F.
13
CD Operating sequence
Before washing your first ioad of iaundry, we
recommend tfiatyou run a cotton cycle at 60C,
with the machine empty, in order to remove any
manufacturing residue from ttie drum and tub.
Pour lialf a measure of detergent into the main
wash compartment and start up the machine.
1. Place the laundry In the drum

Open the door.
Place the laundry in the drum, one item at a
time, shaking them out as much as possible.
Close the door.
2. Measure out the detergent

Pull out the dispenser drawer until it stops.
Measure out the amount of detergent
recommended by the manufacturer in a
graduated cup and pour it into the main wash
compartment LOJ. If you wish to carry out a
prewash, pour detergent into the appropriate
compartment marked |_!J.
1
RiH?
3. Measure out the additive

if required, pour fabric softener into the
compartment marked without exceeding the
MAX mark.
4. Select the desired option

Depress SPIN-SUPPRESSION 18 and/or HALF
LOAD IV2) and/or INTENSIVE RINSE W button,
if required.
5. Select the temperature

Turn the selector dial to the required
temperature setting.
14
JSl
IV2) t ^
ooo
6. Select the programme and start it

Turn the programme selector dial clockwise to
the required wash programme and depress the
ON/OFF button: the operating pilot light comes
on and the machine starts to operate.
B~~~-
'^
'flj ) ) !
M0043^_
--*"*-^-_
7. At the end of the programme

The machine stops automatically, the operating
pilot light goes out.
If you have selected a gentle programme which
ends with water in tub, drain the water before
opening the door.
It is normal to have to wait for about 2 minutes
before being able to open the door to allow the
safety lock to release.
Depress the ON/OFF button again to switch the
machine off.
Remove the laundry.
Turn the drum by hand to make sure it is
completely empty, so as to avoid any forgotten
items being damaged in a subsequent wash
(e.g. shrinking) or their colour running into a
load of whites.
Release any button which has been depressed.
Turn the water tap off and unplug the machine.
Leave the door ajar to air the machine.
15
MAINTENANCE
1. Bodywork
Clean the outside of the machine with warm
water and a neutral, non-abrasive household
detergent. Rinse with clean water and dry with a
soft cloth.
Important: do not use methylated spirits,
solvents or similar products to clean the
bodywork.
2. Detergent dispenser drawer

After a while, detergents and fabric softeners
leave deposits in the drawer.
Clean the drawer from time to time by rinsing it
under a running tap. To remove the drawer from
the machine, press the button in the rear lefthand corner.
To facilitate cleaning, the top part of the additive
compartments can be removed.
Detergent can also eventually accumulate inside
the drawer recess: clean it with an old
toothbrush. Refit the drawer after cleaning.
3. Water inlet filter

If you notice that the machine is taking longer to
fill, check that the filter in the water inlet hose is
not blocked.
Turn off the water tap.
Unscrew the hose from the tap and remove the
filter.
Clean it with a stiff brush.
Refit the filter and screw the hose back onto the
tap.
16
4. Drain filter
The drain filter collects threads and small
objects inadvertently left in the laundry. Check
regularly that the filter is clean.
Open the filter door.
Place a container under the filter and unscrew it.
Pull out the filter.

Clean the filter under a running tap, then refit it,
screwing it fully in.
P0133
5. Emergency emptying out
6. The dangers of freezing
If the water is not discharged (drain pump is

blocked, filter or drain hose are clogged),
proceed as follows to empty out the machine:
pull out the plug from the power socket;
close the water tap;
if necessary, wait until the water has cooled
down;
place a bowl on the floor;
put the drain hose end into the bowl and let
the water come out.
Should it not be possible to have access to the
drain hose because, for example, the appliance
is built in the kitchen furniture, slightly loosen the
drain filter after placing a bowl on the floor, to let
the water come out slowly.
At the end screw the filter again.
If the machine is exposed to temperatures below

0C, certain precautions should be taken.
Turn off the water tap.
Unscrew the inlet hose.
Unhook the drain hose from the rear support
and position the end of this hose and that of
the inlet hose in a bowl. Run the draining
programme until the selector dial is in the
"Stop" position.
Switch the machine off.
Screw the inlet hose and reposition the drain
hose.
When you intend to start the machine up
again, make sure that the room temperature
is above 0C.
17
SOMETHING NOT WORKING

Problems which you can resolve yourself
m Problem
. Possible cause
The machine does not start up:
Check that the door is firmly closed.

Check that the machine is plugged in and
that there is power at the socket.
Check that the main fuse has not blown.
Check that the programme selector dial is
positioned correctly and the ON/OFF button
depressed.
The machine does not fill:
Check that the water tap is open.

Check that water is coming out of the tap.
Check that the inlet hose is not squashed or
kinked.
Check that the filter in the inlet hose is not
blocked.
Check that the door is closed.
The machine fills then empties

immediately:
The end of the drain hose is too low. Refer to

relevant paragraph in "water drainage"
section.
Check that the drain hose is not squashed or
kinked.
The drain filter is blocked. Clean it.
A gentle programmawhich ends with water in
the drum or option has been selected.
The machine does not empty

and/or does not spin:
There is water on the floor:
Too much detergent or unsuitable detergent

(creates too much foam) has been used.
Check whether there are any leaks from one
of the inlet hose fittings. It is not always easy
to see this as the water runs down the hose;
check to see if it is damp.
Check that the drain hose is not damaged.
Check that the drain filter has been refitted
correctly after cleaning.
Unsatisfactory washing results:
Too little detergent or unsuitable detergent

has been used.
Stubborn stains have not been treated prior
to washing.
The correct temperature or programme was
not selected.
18
Problem
. Possible cause
The machine vibrates or is noisy:
Check that all the transit bolts and packing

have been removed.
Check that the machine is not resting against
anything.
Check that the support feet are resting firmly
on the ground.
Check that the laundry is evenly distributed in
the drum.
Maybe there is very little laundry in the drum.
The door will not open:
The programme is still running.

The door lock has not yet been released.
There is water in the drum.
Water is not visible in the

machine:
The machine, which is the result of modern

technology, runs in a very economical way
with low water consumption. Performance is
nevertheless excellent.
If you are unable to identify or solve the

problem, contact our service centre. Before
telephoning, make a note of the model, serial
number and purchase date of your machine: the
Service Centre will require this information.
rV
Mod.
Prod. No.
Si
19
s Electrolux
SPARE PARTS LIST

Household washing machines
iisifiipifs V ^
2520
PNC
Brand
Model
Market
914789667
Electrolux
EW402F
SG
Washing machines,
front-loaded
Electrolux-Zanussi
Corso Lino Zanussi
1 - 33080 Porcia
Italy
Fax +39 (0)434 394096
Pubi.No.
599342598
2000/6/1
ZP
300A
530
9143003528
page 1
Exploded view no. :P09143003528

PNC
914789667
Pos
300
300A
303
308
310
312
323
323A
330
514
521
523
530
586
597
597A
999
Model
EW402F
Description
Part No.
50262 08 000 / 0
1246 80 5 1 8 / 6
1248 87 5 3 0 / 2
1240 13 6 0 0 / 0
1242 75 801 11
1240 20 801 / 5
1240 12 2 1 3 / 3
1242 06 1 1 0 / 7
50226 26 200 / 9
1247 84 2 0 0 / 6
1246 44 5 0 0 / 9
1246 58 6 0 4 / 2
50252 03 500 / 6
1240 00 7 0 0 / 3
1247 12 1 0 0 / 5
1247 12 1 1 0 / 4
1249 72 5 7 0 / 4
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
kit,cabinet,front,P61/5/S V/B
cabinet,back,wliite,P62/3/5/ Z-V/B
stand, P65
Hinge,bull's eye
sieve flap
glass,porthole
FRAME FLAP-,INNER
Frame,in front
kit,Foot,ferrule
locking bush,Foot,back
Bung,clamp,cabinet
Bracket, Hose,electric cable,JS/WD
kit,Handle,porthole
Fixing angle,foot,in front
lock,Foot,front
lock. Foot, back
user's guide,(en)
page 2
page 3
Exploded view no.:P09143004106

PNC
914789667
Pos
001
003
004
005
006
007
010
Oil
012
013
013A
019
037
110
125B
130
531C
540
550
550A
597
999
Model
EW402F
Part No.
1243 09 6 0 0 / 3
1245 80 7 3 0 / 8
1246 30 3 0 0 / 0
50234 43 800 / 5
1242 52 8 0 0 / 6
50226 73 500 / 4
1247 26 5 0 0 / 0
1240 34 4 0 0 / 0
1247 32 7 9 0 / 9
1249 27 1 0 0 / 6
1249 27 1 1 0 / 5
50228 67 600 / 8
1240 20 9 0 0 / 5
1240 83 4 0 0 / 0
50221 74 700 / 4
1240 15 2 0 3 / 1
1240 22 2 0 0 / 8
1240 39 4 0 0 / 5
1240 07 5 0 8 / 3
1245 89 5 0 0 / 6
1240 06 2 0 0 / 8
1241 34 201 / I
1243 36 9 5 0 / 9
Description
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
timer,(F50/1J)RID. ELBI
adjustable thermostat
main motor,2/12 400 SOLE
Valve,enema
PUMP.DRAIN
kit,delayer,porthole
heater
CAPACITOR
Pressure switch,2-Niveau,certainity
Calipers
Key board
Signalling lamp.green
Connection block
Hose,pressure switch
locking ring,o-ring,pump,(29,82)
gasket.Thermostat, Probe
Screw, main motor, bob
clamp
Protection,delayer.Door
guard,drain pump
stopper, Capacitor,cable
Harness, 124.13420/
harness,main
page 4
page 5
691-9017^6

PNC
914789667
Pos
115
125
125A
130
130X
150
150A
250
251A
253
255X
257
257A
260
260B
262
264
531
531B
531C
531D
563
591
999
Model
EW402F
Part No.
1240 16 7 4 0 / 1
50068 76 300 / 7
50097 07 200 / 8
1240 15 9 0 3 / 6
50063 24 800 / 4
1245 11 001 / 8
1246 71 1 1 0 / 3
1240 29 0 0 8 / 8
1240 1 7 2 1 0 / 4
1240 21 1 0 0 / 1
50061 78 200 / 4
1240 18 201 / 2
1240 29 9 4 0 / 2
1240 19 501 / 4
1247 82 5 0 0 / 1
50252 27 1 0 0 / 7
1240 21 4 0 0 / 5
1240 21 8 1 0 / 5
1242 72 5 0 0 / 8
1240 22 3 0 0 / 6
1249 27 3 0 0 / 2
1240 04 121 / 8
50097 58 600 / 7
1240 22 0 0 0 / 2
1240 25 7 0 0 / 4
Description
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
rubber bellow
connection ring,rubber be!low,tub
lock ring,rubber bellow,cabinet
gasket,tub
GASKET
Trog,in front
DRUM,OUTER,REAR
Drum,complete
Shock absorber
drive belt, 1217J4
BEARING
Ballast, rear,
bob,front,13,5Kg Gl8/19
Spring,suspension,tub
retaining spring,heater
kit,drum paddle,45L
Pulley
Screw,clamp,pulley,M8X24
Screw,lock,tub
Screw
Screw,bob,front
bolt,cushion
lock washer.pulley
Screw.bearing spider
CROSS PIECE DRUN
page 6
111
page?

PNC
914789667
Pos
106
109
110
110A
HOB
HOC
HOG
111
112
114
118
120
130
130F
140
143
145
148
260
307
338
509
509A
521
540C
541
541A
563
Model
EW402F
Part No.
1246 23 1 1 0 / 2
1246 24 6 0 0 / 1
1240 83 1 0 3 / 0
1240 16 0 2 0 / 8
1240 1 6 2 1 0 / 5
1246 60 4 1 2 / 6
1247 34 2 3 0 / 4
1245 07 8 4 0 / 5
1240 88 1 1 0 / 0
1240 83 2 3 3 / 5
1246 24 5 1 0 / 2
1240 08 8 0 2 / 9
1240 14 9 0 0 / 3
1240 15 1 0 0 / 9
1246 23 311 / 6
1240 10 1 0 0 / 4
1248 47 9 6 0 / 0
1246 24 2 0 0 / 0
1240 14 8 0 0 / 5
1246 24 3 1 0 / 7
1242 91 6 0 0 / 3
1247 42 8 0 0 / 4
1240 04 4 0 0 / 6
1240 08 6 1 0 / 6
1246 64 6 0 0 / 2
1246 08 6 0 8 / 4
1247 34 1 0 3 / 3
1240 04 2 0 0 / 0
Description
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
jet,solenoid valve
conveyor.Container cup.detergent
drain hose,tub,manifold
Pipe
Breather hose
Pipe
Pipe,l=230mm
inlet hose,water
Draining hose
air chamber.air
water distributor
Fluff strainer
sieve seal
sealing
Container cup,detergent
adjuster,distributor, water
Filter case
syphon
Spring,distributor,Container cup
detergent drawer,3SC/RID
end piece. Drainage hose
lever,water distributor
Cam lever
stopper,closure,fluff filter
Tube clip
Holder.piple
Holder,solenoid
bolt,distributor
pages
SUPPLIED TOGETHER
LIVRES ENSEMBLE
ZUSAMMEN GELIEFERT
FORNITI INSIEME
520
^^500*
500A*
510*
page 9

PNC
914789667
Pos
042
313
500
500A
502
510
51OA
519
520
523
525
525B
Model
EW402F
Part No.
1247 63
50237 27
1249 25
1249 25
1247 36
1243 09
1248 21
1247 10
1240 37
1246 03
1247 36
1247 98
510/3
100/7
760/9
810/2
800/2
370/3
640/8
001 n
003/9
556/0
000/9
403/0
Description
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Lampholder.complete.green
TOP
Knob.timer
KNOB THERMOSTAT
Toggle bottom piece,(timer)
control panel.complete.silkscreened
programme card.(en)
cam,brown
Flange.bracket.thermostat
Bracket.command
Push button.keyboard
Push button.white.ON/OFF
page 10
Motor
124 871833b
Blue
Brown
Bloct
Pink
I ight-blue
Violet
Oronge
Door s a f e t y
i n t e r lock
124,33695/
White
CL) cn
d
Blue
r r r B>'
Violet
Violet
Blue
Drain
pump
3
Pilot
Pressure swi tch
lamp
11
( A i r chamber on t u b )
^^
Adjustable
ttiernostot
Light-blue
Hhile
-OFF button
, a
Orange
Blue
Copaci t o r
0:
Wtiile
Super rinsing button
Brom
Brown
3 lack
"srar
?BtACK:
J u n c t i o n box
Half load button
Earth*^
(>>
Viole
Violet
Hi'
Tub eart
Heating element eortti
tor eortti
While
White
Cold water inlet valve
! RED
No-spin button
Grey
Grey
P00ZP300000844
Adjustable thermostat Adjustable thermostat
Air chamber on tub
Air chamber on tub
Capacitor
Capacitor
Door safety interlok
Drain pump
Drain pump
Earth
Earth
Heating element earth Heating element earth
Heating elements (washing)
Half load button
Half load button
Junction box
Junction box
Motor
Motor
Motor earth
Motor earth
No-spin button
No-spin button
ON/OFF button
ON/OFF button
Pilot lamp
Pilot lamp
Pressure switch
Pressure switch
Timer motor
Timer motor
Tub earth
Tub earth
Violet
Violet
White
White
Red
Red
Pink
Pink
Orange
Orange
Light-blue
Light-blue
Grey
Grey
Brown
Brown
Blue
Blue
Black
Black
page 12
Heat i ng elements
(wash!ng'
^7^-
ON/OFF button
(,9),S'Z
dOlS
Nivua
(SSW-AS) dOlS
kJ
09
69
89
1
II
II
i9
a
.S'2+td
.fi'3
99
Nivua
99
.9'3+ld
.fi'Z
1.9
Z9
m-08
.S'Z+ld
(3+a)3
(S).S'Z+ld
3-a
.9+ld
3-a
.9+Id
3-a
.9+Id
_l
09
6
m-tt
.S+td
3-a
.9'3
1
1
1
1
1
m-08
S+td
Nivua
3-a
.S* I d
^t-
62
9Z
3-0
NIdS
,9+Id
NIdS
'
\_
m-oe
Hi
Zl
3-0
.9+Id
3-0
.9+Id
3-0
.9+Id
3-0
,9* Id
3-0
,9+Id
EL
II
11
fCO
CD
LO
UO
1 \
<: i
1
J
CO
CO
CO
CNJ
CO
CO
II
1
1 t1
1
CO
s
s
1
il
CM
CO
CNJ
!
1
CM
CM
i-O
CM
CM
CO
CM
CM
CM
.w.
CM
CM
CJJ
1
1
CO
CD
CO
ii
_ c
T
t^
LO
t o
CO
.1 1
1 1
t o
LO
CM
ZL
LL
OL
CD
f--
UJ
116-OE
a.
E
08-06
LU
1
06-OC
c
0
II
CO
LO
csj
1
1
CD
LO
OJ
CO
II
III
II
CO
11
1
1
LO
CO
1 1
1 1
[I
II
1
1
II
CNJ
^3-
C3
CO
CO
CO
II
II
II
[ ]1 1 . 1
Y
1. 1-[I
[ ]1 1 . 1
T
-
1.i[J
1 .. 1111 1
[ ]I
1 II
II 1
11
II
^3-
-J
o
u.
II
1
1
VI
3-0
.9+Id
o
lO
CO
"-0
1[ ] 1
1 [ \_] 1
1\_ 1
i-i
1[ ] 1
1 [J
1
II 1
*
CO
LO
co
09-OG
1
1
1
Lt
9E
ze
L
8Z
3-0
3-0
NIVUQ
,9'Z
3-0
.9+Id
1
u
z
1
1
1
1
CO
8L
L\.
91
9L
3-a
,9+Id
Q
oe-OE
i,N
_!_
co
LO
-r
\ <
II
- 1
u
4
eo
OUJ
1
1
CD
CSJ
1-
U-
111
1 '
0
30
61.
3-0
3-0
3-0
.S+|.d
NIVUQ
3-0
.9+td
1
1
n ^
a
ot-oc
m
ee
09-oe
09-oe
1 19
]}
,.U
II
*9
9
NIVUQ
.S'J
.S'2+Id
.S'Z+ld
w-oe
.9'Z+W
Sfr
.S'Z+ld
3-0
,S+ld
.S'Z+ld
.9+Id
.9
9 .C
Cj-j
3-a
.S+|.d
U
Nivua
..iL
9Z
NIdS
.9'Z+U
.9+Id
n
ez
dOlS
.9+Id
3-0
.9+Id
Nivua
,9+Id
Nivua
,9'J
oe
9 ,C
,9+Id
..9 ,e
.9+W
..9 ,e
NIVUQ
NIdS
Nivua
NIdS
3-0
.9+Id
3-0
.9+Id
(3+0)3
(.9).9'2+td
3-Q
.9+kd
UJ
CO
z
o
li
r-
1i
CM
CO
e>^
CC
CO
1 ^7
. to
T-
i r9
ea c9
CO
CD
^
c3
CO
O
cil
c
C
T--
> 2
CO
3 O
(O
i n
O
CO
O
1
1
" 3
CM
tr
CM 1 Q
C
t o
Q
C^
C
^
UJ
..
1
t o
CO
lO
UJ
CM
U-
e CO
L^
lO
CO
pi
CO
CO
ob
1 Q
r i - r--
ca
<D
- ^
r
! 5
CO
UT^
^
U
LL. L
C O c9
u- u- u
^ a
06-OS
08oe
os-oe
06-OE
-X-
iI
06-oe
( | 3 A a | | S | . ) B i u | | ( l n | | 06-oe
|j = td
0 8 0=
S3
Buiiquini snoioBiA
06-oe
Guiiqiuni iem-euQ
=n
o
LU
o
m
S.
m
c
c
ii 1
il ! i
TO
Ol
r =-1; *
o . "C:
a>
T3
C
LU
CO
0)
(O
k_
= 5.:
Ml
it E
Ot-OE
Z.'
= ^
-;
Buiiquini eieoiiSQ
OS-OE
=Q
Ot-OE
124\309600.en
' s
~
^
^\
S I
1.
to
1 1
i
c= o
(S
_c CD
"o
> o 1
- CJ CO r g
(O
j5
e i l 1.=
s n <
o
CC
Q .
CO
CJ
e
cJ
c
CO
i5
,v
_o o
o o
Motor
124 8 7 1 8 3 3 b
Blue
BlacI:
Pink
Lighl-blue
Violet
Orange
Door sofet
i nterlock
124.33695/
WTF
3lue
DU
Violet
Violet
Blue
D r a i n pump
5^^
3
Pilot lamp
Pressure swi tcti
31
( A i r chamber on t u b )
TE
Blank
Adjustable
thermostat
a
a
tiqtil-blue
Vfliile
-OFF button
Orange
Blue
Capoci t o r
0:
White

Black
"rar
2BIACK:
Junct i o n box
Half load button

Violet
Violet
Eartti'
RED
Hi'
@>-"
lub eartti
No-spin button
Grey
Grey
tor eartti
Heat ing element eartti
Wtiite
Wtiite
, CL
P00ZP300000844
Adjustable thermostat Adjustable thermostat
Air chamber on tub
Air chamber on tub
Capacitor
Capacitor
Drain pump
Drain pump
Earth
Earth
Heating element earth Heating element earth
Half load button
Half load button
Junction box
Junction box
Motor
Motor
Motor earth
Motor earth
No-spin button
No-spin button
ON/OFF button
ON/OFF button
Pilot lamp
Pilot lamp
Pressure switch
Pressure switch
Timer motor
Timer motor
Tub earth
Tub earth
Violet
Violet
White
White
Red
Red
Pink
Pink
Orange
Orange
Light-blue
Light-blue
Grey
Grey
Brown
Brown
Blue
Blue
Black
Black
page 12
Heat i n g e l e m e n t s
Iwosh i n g '
ON/OFF button
TliViE
lmnihinhhhii
(minutes)
FUNCTIONS
O) a
a
o
_
1 i! ii ii ills 1
B ^ = ^
S A -a ^
E E E
1 1 1 III
1 H S E
=
<=>
TUMBLING
S S a l s S S S i S S S S S S S S i S o
2 2? =
= a 0 =
Q =
^
TEMPERATURE
WATER
LEVEL
LU 3
OL
11
Rinse hold
A1-A2
13-T
Recirculation pump :4:

Drain (half load)
B3-B4
B3-B5
12-T
12B
Direct timer (esding

Healing
B3-B2
B3-B1
11-T
11-B
Motor (wasli)
Drain pump
1sl-2nd level
C4-C5
C2-C3
8-B
7-T
C1-C3
D3-D4
7-B
6-T
Cooling *
Super rinse -i-
So
So
1 ill 1
M M
\/\
LI
A
So
uumuuu
STEPS
Program start
So
no
rI
__[
UU
r Tt n"7:1
U-U-LJ
-Y_-_
SKSS55!S?S!?S!55S5a5SSSSSS
D_. _ E_
G H J- K k M
S
i m
1 E

E E
E
E E E E EE E EE E EE E
m
m m m
mm m m m m
m 1 m m m m m

H H
m H
m
m mH

H
m
m
1
B
"
_ B C _ _
mm4 m
mm
Sm
D3-D5
6-B
2nd level
Motor (spin)
D3-D2
D3-D1
5-T
5-B
Motor (wash)
Motor (spin)
E3E4
4-T
B H H H Hi IB H H
E3E5
4-B
Reversing
Reversing
F1F2
36T
F1F3
36-B
Capacitor (spin)
F3F4
F3F5
37-T
37 B
Spin
D3-D1
38-B
H IB H H H H H
IP H B H
^_ ^_ ^_ ^ ^_ ^_ ^_
^_ ^M ^_ ^_ ^_ ^^ ^_ ^_ ^^ ^_ ^^M ^_
^^ ^^ ^^ ^^ ^ ^^ ^^ ^ B ^* ^^ ^* ^^ ^^ ^* ^* ^* ^^^^ ^ ^*^^
B n
~ i
[H B
B H
H H H H n ^ B B H
H H ai H
mm
H H
"
H H
4-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 45 47 48 49 50 51 62 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
H

I
I
- ~
- I
=
s
H i 5 m 5 m i "
m
1
m 1
m-
'
5 sec
*NotforF50andF51
^
m E
m
300 se
''
- - - ! 5 - 5 5
m m E ii m m E m 5 E i i ii
m 1 m 1 m m 1m
n As 5
fi E m r
L
-l
1
124 309600C.EN
'
rr-.. - ^
c==A
> om
c=JV.
c=A.
= J V .
c==A
c=!V.
,ly
cn
4^
B] Electrolux
Tumble dryers,
EDE 425 M.60, EDE 41 IM
Type EDE 425 M.60, model 16 70 49
MARINE DIVISION
Phone +46 322 74 000
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail pa.marlneinfo@electrolux.se
TWO TEMPERATURE SETTINGS,

COTTON AND SYNTHETIC
ZINC COATED STEEL CABINET
LARGE CAPACITY DRUM IN

STAINLESS STEEL
EASILY OPERATED CONTROLS
FILTEREASYTO REMOVE FOR

CLEANING
The EDE 425 M.60 and EDE 41IM are

domestic type tumble dryers.
The machines are of simple and reliable
constrution and are easy to operate.
The drying time is selected by a time selector
knob located on the control panel.The control panel is also provided with program
chart, push buttons for low temperature
and cool tumbling and pilot lamp.
For further specifications, please see overleaf
19-022
DOC.NO.
EDITION 6
19-022BM
12.01
TUMBLE DRYERS, EDE 425 M.60, EDE 41 IM

Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm
1=MI
oo
"(1))
cI
'
-^
850
H-
51080
-440-
170
570
1. Rear exhaust 0 100 mm
2. Alternative exhaust - left or right side
3. Electrical cord 1.6 m with earthed plug
45.
510
H 4^
600
Specification
Model
16 70 49
EDE411M
Type
Max rated
capacity/load
kgs
230 1-60
EDE 425 M.60

EDE411M
Voltage V
net
gross
Shipping
volume
m3
28
32
0.400
Weight kgs
Loading
kW
Fuse A
2.2
10
230 1-50
Optional extras:
Model
ST00270
Description
Stacking kit ST00270:
Stacking kit for mounting on top of washer extractor EW 401F or EW 643F

(separate instruaion delivered with machine)
Installation:
The tumble dryer is to be secured. Use angle bars or similar (not included in delivery)
to keep it positioned. Leave air gap underneath to allow air to circulate freely.
19-022
Subject to charges without notice.
Bracket (2 pes.)
/
Round bar 0 6 (4x)
UJ
60
TUMBLE DRYER
INSTRUCTION BOOKLET
EDE 425
^25 996 631
iectrolux
YOUR NEW TUMBLE DRYER

This tumble dryer will give your wash that soft, relaxed feel whatever the weather.
Extremely high quality standards both during development and manufacturing guarantee a long
service life for your appliance.
Maximum economy in the operation of your dryer is achieved through very frugal electricity
consumption and short drying times.
Energy saving tips
^ In the interest of tlie

environment
To save energy we recommend that you follow

these hints:
Try to load the maximum capacity of the
machine as small loads are uneconomical.
Always load well spun laundry. The higher the
spin speed, the lower the electricity
consumption and the shorter the drying times.
Do not over-dry laundry, this avoids creasing
and saves energy.
Clean the filter regularly to avoid excessive
drying times and high electricity consumption.
Ventilate the room well. The room temperature
should not exceed +35C during drying.
Materials marked with the symbol O are

recyclable.
Check with your local Council or
Environmental Health Office to see if there
are facilities in your area for re-cycling this
appliance.
When the appliance is to be scrapped, cut off
the power supply cable and make the door
closing device unusable to prevent young
children from being trapped inside.
Help to keep your country tidy - use
authorised disposal sites for your old
appliance.
How do we help to protect the environment?
We use recycled paper!
Guide to use the Instruction Book

The following symbols will be found in the text to guide you throughout the instructions:
Safety instructions
LLI Hints and tips
A Environmental information
CONTENTS
Warnings
Page
Description of tlie appliance
Page
Installation
Page
Positioning
Page
Fitting the vent iiose
Page
6-7
Door reversal
Page
Page
Stacking kit (optional accessory)
Page
Use
Page
Control panel
Page
Use of controls
Page
Drying Times
Page
10
Drying sequence
Page
11
Useful hints
Page
12
Maintenance
Page
i3
External cleaning
Page
13
Cleaning the door
Page
13
Cleaning the filter
Page
13
Servicing
Page
14
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
Height
Width
Depth
85 cm
60 cm
57 cm
Voltage/Frequency
Max. power absorbed
220-230 V/60 Hz
2200 W (1OA)
DRYING CAPACITY
Cotton, linen
Synthetics
5 kg
2.5 kg
WARNINGS
It is most important that this instruction book

should be retained with the appliance for
future reference. Should the appliance be
sold or transferred to another owner, or
should you move house and leave the
appliance, always ensure that the book is
supplied with the appliance in order that the
new owner can get to know the functioning of
the appliance and the relevant warnings.
These warnings have been provided in the
interest of safety. You MUST read them
carefully before installing or using the
appliance.
INSTALLATION
Any electrical work required to install this
appliance should be carried out by a qualified
electrician or competent person.
Make sure that the appliance does not stand
on its electrical supply cable.
If the machine is situated on a carpeted floor,
please adjust the feet in order to allow air to
circulate freely.
This tumble dryer is designed to be vented
through to the open air. It should have its own
ventilation system which should not be joined
with any other ventilation system connected to
any other appliance.
USE
Always unplug the appliance after use.
Clothes which are dripping wet should not be
placed in the dryer.
Never tumble dry items that have been in
contact with chemicals such as dry
cleaning fluid. These are of a volatile
nature and could cause an explosion.
As some bulky items such as duvets and
eiderdowns should be dried in large
commercial machines because of their bulk,
check with the manufacturer of the item if it is
suitable for drying in a domestic machine,
even if the dry weight of the item is within the
limit advised.
Always check that no cigarette lighters have
been left in pockets.
Leave the porthole door slightly ajar when not
in use to preserve the door seal.
The fluff filter must be cleaned after every use.
Do not operate the appliance with a damaged

filter as this may cause a fire.
Do not overload the appliance.
Do not allow fluff to accumulate around the
dryer.
SERVICE/REPAIR
Under no circumstances should you attempt to
repair the machine yourself. Repairs carried
out by inexperienced persons may cause
injury or serious malfunctioning. Refer to your
local Electrolux Service Centre. Always insist
on genuine Electrolux spare parts.
GENERAL SAFETY
It is dangerous to modify or try to modify the
specifications of this appliance in any way.
This appliance is designed to be used by
adults. Children should not be allowed to
touch the controls or play with the product.
Pets and small children may climb into tumble
dryers. Check your appliance each time before
use.
Keep all packaging well away from children.
DESCRiPTiON OF THE APPLIANCE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Worktop
Programme chart
Low Temperature Button
Cool Tumbling Button
Drying Time Selector Dial
IVIains-On Light
Rating Plate
Door Handle
Fluff filter
Adjustable feet
11 Side vent outlets

12 Ringnut
13 Rear vent outlet
INSTALLATION
Positioning
It is recommended that, for your convenience, the
machine is positioned close to your washing
machine.
Whilst drying, the tumble dryer will expel a certain
amount of warm, very moist air, and this should
be removed from the room as quickly as possible
to prevent condensation. In an extremely well
ventilated room or close to an open window, this
may occur naturally.
However, in general, it is better to carry the
dryer's exhaust outside via the 100 mm diameter
flexible hose supplied with the appliance; ending
either temporarily at an open window, or
permanently at a fixed ventilation grille, fitted to
an exterior wall or window.
The tumble dryer must be installed in a clean
place, where dirt does not build up.
Make sure there are no obstructing items or
material near the air-intake louvres provided at
the back (e.g. paper, rags etc.).
To keep vibration and noise to a minimum when
the dryer is in use, it should be placed on a firm,
level surface.
Once in its permanent operating position, check
that the dryer is absolutely level with the aid of a
spirit level. If it is not, raise or lower the two
adjustable feet at the front of the machine until it
is.
The feet must never be removed.
Do not restrict the floor clearance through
deep-pile carpets, strips of wood or similar.
This might cause heat build-up which would
interfere with the operation of the appliance.
Important
When operating the tumble dryer, the room
temperature must not exceed 35C, as it may
affect the performance of the appliance.
Fitting the vent hose

To simplify the installation, there is a choice of
vent outlets: one at the back, the others in the left
and right-hand side.
Connect the hose to whichever is the more
convenient by pulling the ring nut (A) from the
vent outlet at the back, screwing it on to the hose
and pushing it firmly back into place.
The unused vents should now be sealed with the
special snap covers provided.
Advice: If the hose is long and the room

temperature low, the moisture might condense to
water inside the hose. This is an unavoidable
natural phenomenon. To prevent this water from
lying in the hose or flowing back into the tumble
dryer, it is advisable to drill a small hole (dia.
3 mm) in the lowest point of the hose and to
place a small container below it.(See picture,
point A).
Once connected to the dryer, run the vent hose to
the desired outlet point, ensuring that the run's
overall length is less than 2 m, and that it
contains no more than two bends. As to the outlet
itself, if you have decided on a fixed wall/window
grille, a good local builder's merchant should be
able to supply you with the necessary fittings and
installation advice.
It is important not to connect the

vent hose to, for example, a cooker
hood, or a chimney or flue pipe
designed to carry the exhaust from
a fuel burning appliance.
Note that to avoid condensation problems, it is

essential that the dryer be fitted with the flexible
hose to carry its "exhaust" at least beyond the
kitchen units; preferable outside the kitchen.
In order to prevent the appliance from
overheating, it is important that the steam
exhaust is unobstructed.
Therefore, in case of a permanent hose fitted to
an exterior wall or ceiling, it must be ensured an
exhaust capacity of at least 150 m^/h.
If the dryer is fitted next to kitchen units,
make sure that the vent hose is not squashed.
If the hose is partially squashed, drying
efficiency will be reduced, resulting in longer
drying times and higher energy consumption.
If the hose is completely squashed, the safety
cut-outs with which the machine is fitted may
operate.
Door reversal
To make it easier to load or unload the laundry
the door can be reversed.
This operation must be carried out by
qualified personnel.
*
/ ' ^
C3
^\,^
r ^
Operate as follows:
- Remove the door by unscrewing the two screws
(1) fastening the hinge to the cabinet (Fig. A).
- Remove the safety catch (2) and the plug (3) by
bending the two fastening tags (Fig. A).
- Refit the safety catch (2) and plug (3) on the
door by reversing their positions (Fig. B).
- Remove the plastic plate (4) by unscrewing the
two fastening screws (Fig. A).
- Refit the plastic plate (4) on the opposite side
(Fig. B).
- Refit the door by screwing in the two screws (1)
which fasten the door to the cabinet (Fig. B).
f PK
3 J
[ill r>i
mm
y-'"^
CD ^ \ ^
/ 2 \ \ \
''"ini
^/fv^V
M?!
Stacking kit
This machine is designed to operate on a 220230 V, single-phase, 60 Hz supply.
A special stacking kit is available through your

dealer, to enable the mounting of the dryer on
top of your washing machine.
Check that your domestic electrical installation

can take the maximum load required (2.2 kW),
also taking into account any other appliances in
use.
Connect the machine to an earthed socket, in
accordance with current wiring regulations.
Important
If the socket in your house is not earthed, you
have to do a separate earth connection using the
special green and yellow ground wire which you
can find on the back of your appliance. This wire
has to be connected to an efficient earth.
If, instead, your domestic wiring system is
already earthed, this wire must not be used and
we suggest you to simply cut it off and to throw it
away.
The manufacturer declines any

responsibility for damage or injury
through failure to comply with the
above safety precaution.
USE
Control panel
ir
f=^>v o
s Electrolux
OO
j]
23
))1
1 Programme Chart
4 Drying Time Selector Dial
This will help you to select the correct time for

drying.
The selector dial incorporates two drying cycles,

one of up to 120 minutes at a high temperature
for cotton and linen, and one of up to 80 minutes
at a low temperature for synthetic fabrics.
To set the machine to the selected time, turn the
dial clockwise until the time you want coincides
exactly with the pointer.
NEVER attempt to turn the dial in an
anticlockwise direction.
When selecting the drying time, you should
remember that it includes a 8 minute cooling
phase (position ^ on the dial).
This phase should not be shortened, stopped or
avoided, as this could cause skin burns or
damages to the laundry.
2 Low Temperature Button V'

Press this button to reduce the temperature when
drying particularly delicate cotton or linen items.
In this case you should select a longer drying
time.
On the programmes for synthetics the
temperature is automatically reduced.
Therefore it is not necessary to depress this
button.
3 Cool Tumbling Button %,

By depressing this button the heat is cut off. This
is particularly useful to freshen the laundry (e.g.
to remove a persistent odour of moth-balls).
Additional drying
If at the end of the programme the laundry is still
too damp, set the dial for a further period of
drying (remembering to take into account the
cooling period).
5 Mains-On Light
This lights up when the machine starts operating
and goes out at the end of the programme.
Drying Times
Cottons
Selector dial: up to 120 minutes
Degree of drying required
Degree of spin given

rpm
800-1000
Quantity
kg
Drying times
mins
85-105
2.5
60-75
80-100
2.5
55-70
75-95
2.5
40-55
70-90
2.5
35-50
Quantity
kg
Drying times
mins
2.5
50-60
30-35
0.5
25-30
2.5
40-50
Store dry
1200
800-1000
Iron dry
1200
Synthetics
Selector dial: up to 80 minutes
Degree of drying required
Store dry
Iron dry
Degree of spin given

rpm
650
650
Never overfill the drum (do not load large quilts, for example).
The laundry must be suitably spin dried in your washing machine before being placed in the tumble
dryer (500rpm minimum).
Drying times vary according to:
- The type of laundry
- The size of the load
- The degree of spinning prior to drying
Drying times are given as a guide only. Experience will soon enable you to estimate the drying time
needed for your usual laundry loads.
Do not start by selecting a long drying time. It is better to determine the required degree of dryness by
gradually increasing the drying time.
For a mixed load (cotton and resistant synthetics, for example) select the time for the most delicate
fibres and increase it by 10 mins.
10
T] Drying sequence
Before starting up for the first time it is advisable
lo load a few moist cloths into the dryer and to let
it run for about 20 minutes. This ensures that no
dust and dirt is left in the drum.
1. Load the laundry

Open the door by pulling the catch fonwards.
Load the items one at a time, shaking them out
loosely and close the door.
Please check the laundry does not get caught
between the door and filter.
2. Select the required option

Depress Cool Tumbling or Low Temp. Buttton, if
desired.
3. Select the drying time

Turn the selector dial clockwise to the desired
time, in the high or low temperature section,
depending on the laundry: the mains-on light
illuminates and the machine starts operating.
4. When drying is completed

The machine stops automatically, the mains-on
light goes out.
If the laundry is still too damp, select a further
brief drying time, bearing in mind that during the
last 8 minutes the dryer carries out the cooling
and anti-crease treatment phase.
Clean the filter after every drying programme.
A clean filter ensures correct functioning of
the appliance.
11
Useful hints
Try to load to the maximum capacity of the
machine as small loads are uneconomical.
For information, here is a list of the average
weights of some common laundry items.
Sheet
700-1000 g
Tablecloth
400 - 500 g
Kitchen towel
70-120 g
Table napkin
50-100 g
Towelling hand towel
150-250 g
1000-1500 g
Bathrobe
Man's shirt
200 - 300 g
Pillowcase
100-200 g
Man's pyjamas
400 - 500 g
Ladies' nightdress
200 - 250 g
Never tumble dry the following:
Particularly delicate items such as net curtains,
woollen, silk, fabrics with metal trim, nylon
tights, bulky materials such as anoraks,
blankets, eiderdowns, sleeping bags, feather
quilts and any items containing rubber foam or
materials similar to rubber foam.
Always follow the instructions on garment
labels.
O
normal drying (high temperature)
delicate drying (low temperature)
do not tumble dry
Close pillowcases and covers with fasteners to

prevent small laundry items getting tangled
inside them. Close press studs, zips and hooks
and tie belts and apron strings.
Sort laundry according to type and degree of
drying required.
Do not over-dry laundry, this avoids creasing
and saves energy.
Avoid drying dark clothes with light coloured
fluffy items such as towels as they could attract
the fluff.
The laundry must be thoroughly spun before
tumble drying.
Easy-care items, too, e.g. shirts, should be
briefly pre-spun before drying (depending on
crease resistance approx. 30 seconds or using
the special brief spin programme of your
washing machine).
12
Knitted textiles (knitted undenwear) may shrink

a little during drying. Please do not overdry
items of this type. It is advisable to allow for
shrinkage when choosing the size of new
purchases.
You can also put starched items into your
dryer. However, to achieve the desired
starched effect, choose the programme "iron
dry". To remove any starch residues, wipe out
the internal drum after drying with a moist cloth
and then rub it dry.
To avoid a static charge when drying is
completed, use either a fabric softener when
you are washing the laundry or a fabric
conditioner specifically for tumble dryers.
Remove the laundry when the dryer has
finished drying.
If individual items are still damp after drying,
set a brief post-drying time, but at least 20
minutes. This will be necessary particularly for
multilayered items (e.g. collars, pockets, etc.).
MAINTENANCE
You must disconnect the appliance from the
electricity supply, before you can carry out any
cleaning or maintenance work.
External cleaning
Use only soap and water and then dry
thoroughly
From time to time, apply a little wax furniture
cream with a soft cloth.
Important: do not use methylated spirit, diluents
or similar products.
Cleaning the door

Clean periodically the interior part of the door to
remove any fluff.
Accurate cleaning ensures correct drying.
Cleaning the filter

Your dryer will only function well if the filter is
clean.
The filter collects all the fluff which
accumulates during drying and it must therefore
be cleaned at the end of each programme with a
damp cloth.
The filter cannot be removed.
Do not be alarmed by the amount of fluff. It is not
due to excessive wear caused by the dryer. All
fabric loses fluff when drying but it goes unnoticed in the air. In a tumble dryer it simply
collects in the filter.
13
SERVICING
Before contacting your local Electrolux Service Centre, please make the following
checks:
Problem
Possible cause
The dryer does not start up
The door is open.

The plug is not fitted into the wall socket.
There is no electricity supply from the wall
socket.
The time selector dial is not set correctly.
The dryer does not dry properly
The filter is clogged.

Insufficient drying time.
The selected cycle is not suitable for the
laundry.
Excessive laundry load.
The dryer is not correctly installed.
If, after the above checks, there is still a fault, call

your local Electrolux Service Centre.
Please make sure you give the model and serial
number of the appliance.
This information can be found on the rating plate
(see picture).
f\
b
P0307/
14
Mcjd.,.,
Prod. No
Ser. No
'
HI Electrolux
DISTRI
SERVICE MANUAL
TUMBLE-DRYERS
TUMBLE-DRYERS
SERIE P51 NEW
ELECTROLUX ZANUSSI
ELETTRODOMESTICI S.p.A.
VIA GIARDINI CATTANEO, 3
I - 33170 PORDENONE (ITALY)
Fax (0434)394096
Pubiication-No.
599 33 15-85/6
970219
EN/SERVICE/EB
INDEX
Operating principle
page
Constructional features
Cabinet
Drum
page
page
page
5
5
5
Main electronic parts

Heating unit
Themnostats
Timer
Fan motor unit
page
page
page
page
page
7
7
7
8
8
Accessibility & serviceability

Worktop
Timer
Indicator light
Door microswitch
Control panel
Controls support
Cabinet side
Motor
Capacitor
Thermostat
Back panel cover
Heating element
Rear drum support
Back panel
Drum
Sealing felt ring
Door
Filter
Door reversal
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
9
9
-3-
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
1 - Heating unit
2 - Drum
3 - Door
4 - Filter
5- Fan
6 - Exhaust duct
><^^ Cold air

^^
Warm air
This appliance is of the type discharging humid air in the an"

the ambient and forces it through a heating unit (1).
The warm air then passes through the drum (2) in which the laundry to be dried has been placed, thus
removing humidity present in it.
The air then passes through the lint filter (4) and flows out through the discharge pipe (6) into the ambient
from which it was originally taken.
A flexible hose may be connected to this discharge pipe so as to discharge the humid air somewhere else.
The hose mustn't be longer than 2 m.
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
-4-
CABINET
1 - Base
2 - Flexible hose
3 - Ring nut
4-Cap
5 - Back panel cover
6 - Back panel
7 - Side panels
8 - Cross piece
9 - Duct
10 - Front panel
11 -Joint
12 - Filter
Cabinet/Side panel/Back panel/I

1Parts made of painted sheet metal fastened together by means of self-threading screws and hooked to the
base.
The base is made of Carboran material.
DRUM
1 - Front flange
2 - Central band
3 - Back flange
4 - Internal ribs
Parts 1-2-3 are seam-folded together. The tumble rios are lasienea oy means or screws.
Parts making up the dmm may be of sheet steel (AISI 430), of galvanised sheet-iron or may be of both zinc
and steel. The dmm shaft is riveted to the back flange.
-5-
Air tightness at the bacli

1 - Felt ring
2 - Drum
3 - Back panel
Drum back support
4 - Antifrictior) washer
5 - "Benzing" ring
6 - Back panel
7 - Drum shaft
8 - Support provided with
a bushing fitted on the back panel
Front support and drum seal
9 - Supporting flange
10 - Felt ring
11 -Drum
Drum drive system
^
-
Motor-to-drum belt drive (1)

Motor (2) fastened at the bottom to the side
Belt stretcher (3) to increase the belt's winding angle
Fan blade-assembly directly mounted to the motor shaft
Drum reversibility on some models. The heating element in
this case is excluded during the anticlockwise rotation phase
due to the reduced ventilation
j/f
1
V.
VV
i)
y^
23
MAIN ELECTRICAL PARTS

HEATING UNIT
1 - Filament heating element

2 - Safety thermostat
3 - Manually resettable thermostat
4 - Ceramic boards
5 - Casing
Double-filament heating element provided with ceramic boards and galvanised sheet iron frame. The heating
element power can be, according to the models, 1400 + 600 or 1400 + 1000 W.
Two overheat protection thermostats are fastened to the casing.
Safety thermostat
Two thermostats are used to cut out the heating elements in case of ventilation failure.
Safety thermostat cut-out in case of ventilation failure (automatically resettable)

Safety thennostat cut-out In case of ventilation failure (manually resettable) by depressing the button
CYCLING THERMOSTAT
Automatically resettable cycling thermostat to limit maximum air temperature. Manually resettable cycling
thennostat to limit maximum air temperature .
Usually closed , opens at 54C.
-7
TIMER
- Electromechanical timer Including two timing sections for the drying time.
The first from 0 to 120 min. for drying fast fabrics.
The second from 0 to 80 min. for drying delicate fabrics. When the delicate fabrics section is selected one of
the heater branches is excluded.
It also includes fast cams for drum tumbling reversal and to exclude the heating function.
Manual rotation must always be clockwise.
FAN MOTOR UNIT
Single-phase asynchronous motor provided with an overload cut out.
ACCESSIBILITY & SERVICEABILITY

FROM THE WORKTOP
- Disassemble the worktop by unscrewing the two back screws and sliding it out towards the back of the
machine
1 - Timer
2 - Indicator liglit
3 - Door microswitcli
TIMER
Remove the knob (see figure), remove the knob flange (see figure);
undo the two fastening screws. On some models remove the control
panel before removing the knob.
INDICATOR LIGHT
Widen out the conveyor's back tags and
slide out the lamp.
DOOR MICROSWITCH
Disconnect leads from the microswitch, widen fastening tags and
slide it out upwards and then inwards
CONTROL PANEL
Disengage it from the controls support interior (fastening teeth)
CONTROLS SUPPORT
Unscrew the two top screws and slide it out upwards
FROM THE RIGHT HAND SIDE

- Disassemble the worlctop
- Disassemble the right hand side by unscrewing the two top screws fastening it to the front panel and to the
back panel and then slide it out upwards and then outwards.
4
5
6
7
- Motor/fan unit
- Capacitor
- Tension spring
- Cycling thermostat
MOTOR
Disengage the tension spring, remove the belt from the pulley, disconnect the leads from the tenninal board
and from the condenser, disengage the tags fastening the front and back motor supports and rotate them
outwards until they slide out of their seatings.
CAPACITOR
Disconnect leads, lower the engaging tags and slide the capacitor out of its seating by pulling it towards the
machine's back panel.
CYCLING THERMOSTAT
Widen the fastening tags and remove it from its seating.
10-
FROM THE BACK PANEL COVER

Undo the screws fastening the back panel
9 - Heating element
10 - Back drum support
HEATING ELEMENT
Remove the two screws fastening it to the back panel, disconnect wiring.
SSAFETY THERMOSTATS
In case of failure, replace the whole heating unit.
REAR DRUM SUPPORT

Remove the "Benzing" ring and the spacer ring from the drum's shaft, remove the three screws fastening the
support and pull outwards.
11 -
FROM THE BACK PANEL

After having removed the back panel cover, remove the worktop, undo the screws provided at the top and
fastening the back panel to the cross bar and to the sides, and at the back undo the screws fastening the
back panel to the base, disengage the tags provided on the base and slide out the back panel.
3 - Door microswitch
4 - Motor
5 - Capacitor
7 - Cycling thermostat
14 - Front sealing felt ring
DRUM AND DRIVE BELT

They may be removed after having removed the back panel.
FRONT SEALING FELT RING

It may be removed after having removed the back panel.
BACK SEALING FELT RING

Widen out the back panel tags and slide out the back sealing felt ring
WARNINGI
Do not damage the felt ring when refitting it
The seam of the back sealing felt ring must tie turned towards the bottom of the black panel.
12
ACCESS FROM THE DOOR

DOOR
To accede to the door undo the screws fastening the hinge
.-^-'^k.t..
FILTER
To replace the filter screen, without disassembling the
front panel and the duct, operate as follows:
- take out the filter screen by means of pliers as shown
in figure. Make sure that the plastic supports are not
being damaged.
- fit the new filter
Q
DOOR REVERSAL
k#'%
On some models it is possible to reverse the door

opening.
Operate as follows:
'y.
1 Remove the door by unscrewing the two screws

fastening the hinge to the cabinet
2 - Remove the safety catch and the plug by
bending the two fastening tags by means of a
screwdriver
3 - Remove the plug with a screwdriver by bending
the two fastening tags
4 - Remove the plastic plate by unscrewing the two
fastening screws
5 - Refit the plug on place of the safety catch
6 - Refit the safety catch
7 - Refit the plastic plate on place of the hinge
8 - Refit the door and fasten the hinge to the cabinei
with the two screws.
v'^^--4'
rT
-.---
x?^-
r
' \
5
6
' ^ ~ -
" ' - - . .
13
-4
-"
SPARE PARTS LIST
s Electrolux
Household drying equipment
D I S T R I P R T S 0^
4545
PNC
Brand
Model
Market
916092013 03
Electrolux
EDE425M
KR-PH
Electrolux-Zanussi
Corso Lino Zanussi
1 - 33080 Porcia
Italy
Fax +39 (0)434 394096
Publ.No.
599354648
2002/9/24
PLY
Tumbler
driers
(excl
condense driers)
^^^ I12OB
20J
120A'1
523 A J
120c
255A
130
9163005230

PNC
916092013 03
Pos
120
120A
120B
120C
130
130A
250
253
255A
262
520
520A
523
523A
538
550
Model
EDE425M
Part No.
1253 00 501 / 9
1253 00 401 12
1253 06 101 12
1253 01 301 / 3
1250 02 8 0 5 / 5
1250 12 9 2 0 / 0
1255 12 101 12
1255 02 8 1 0 / 0
125013411 / 9
1255 1 2 7 1 0 / 0
1254 03 401 / 8
1250 23 2 0 3 / 8
1253 06 001 / 4
1253 00 801 / 3
50099 25 000 / 8
1255 06 1 0 7 / 7
Description
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Filter.upper
Filter, lower
Assembly,filter,upper
Assembly,filter,bottom
Sealing,drum,in front
Gasket.back, basket
Storage basket,complete,inox,ZK SM/DOOR NEX1 (3R)
Drive belts, 1=1884
Bearing,back,complete
Drum paddle
Flange, reinforcement, bearing
Assembly,flange,bolt
Bracket,filter,upper
Carrier,filter,bottom
Spacer washer
Coat, bolt, basket
-309
9163005195

PNC
916092013 03
Pos
110
130
130A
135
260
260A
303
308
309
312
322
323
324
325
326
330
334
520
520A
521
521A
523
527
530
550A
563A
563C
999
Model
EDE425M
Part No.
1250 22 0 1 0 / 8
1250 00 1 0 3 / 7
1250 97 8 1 0 / 1
1254 02 2 0 9 / 6
1240 13 9 0 0 / 4
1250 20 2 0 0 / 7
1254 27 1 2 0 / 6
1250 07 8 0 0 / 1
1254 00 3 0 0 / 5
1250 06 7 0 0 / 4
1250 09 3 0 4 / 2
1250 24 9 1 0 / 7
1254 02 1 1 0 / 6
1250 07 0 0 0 / 8
1254 26 4 0 2 / 9
1254 26 4 1 2 / 8
1250 11 9 0 2 / 9
1254 26 5 1 2 / 5
1250 03 901 / 1
1250 06 8 0 0 / 2
1250 07 2 0 0 / 4
1250 09 0 0 0 / 6
1254 16 0 0 0 / 3
1250 09 1 0 0 / 4
1242 06 0 0 0 / 0
1254 30 4 0 5 / 6
1240 13 8 0 0 / 6
1250 07 1 0 0 / 6
1259 96 6 3 0 / 5
Description
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Steam exhaust hose,flexible,2.5 m.

Sealing
Sealing,conductor
Channel drainage,SOFT
Spring,Catch,porthole
Spring
Stand,NX1
Hinge,buirs eye
Cover,Back panel.NEXUS 1/4
Bull's eye
Cross girder,upper
Frame,bull's eye
Front panel.white.
Hook,bull's eye
Side panel,left,Z V/B NEXUS4 VENT.
Side panel,right,Z V/B NEXUS VENT.
Foot
Back panel,NEXUS4
Flange,Catch
Flange.buH's eye,behind
Feed plunger
Lid
Bracket,Harness,NEX/4 COND.
Ferrule,DX 0502B
Handle,porthole
Coat,Back panei.NXI
Bolt, Catch, porthole
Peg,mikroswitch
Instruction book,(GB)
SUPPLIED TOGETHER
LIVRES ENSEMBLE
ZUSAMMEN GELIEFERT
FORNITI INSIEME
502
510*
500*
9163003972

PNC
916092013 03
Pos
042
313
500
502
510
51OA
523
525
Model
EDE425M
Description
Part No.
1247
1250
1254
1254
1254
1254
1254
1247
63
34
11
02
11
16
02
36
410/6
400/7
311 / 9
901 / 8
170/9
302/3
013/2
000/9
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Lampholder,assy,green
Table top,P5IS ALFA
Dial,siikscreened
Toggle bottom piece
Control panel,complete,silk-screened
Programme plate,(en)
Bracket,command,SOFT
Push button,keyboard
523A
9163005233

PNC
916092013 03
Pos
001
003A
004
010
Oil
013
016
019A
037
159
260A
523
523A
999
Model
EDE425M
Description
Part No.
1251 10 621 /5
1250 02 420/3
1252 05 707/8
1254 36 500/8
1250 02 032/6
1249 27 100/6
50220 74 700 / 5
50252 51 500/7
1254 22 720/8
1250 01 911/2
1250 01 500/3
1250 36 200/9
1254 03 503/1
1254 37 000/8
1254 37 100/6
3792 81 700 / 3
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Timer.RID 150 ELBI TB

Thermostat,54c
Assembly,main motor,+RIDUTT.SOLE 60HZ
Heater,230/1400+600 I RCA
Interference capacitor,8MF DUCATI
Keyboard, I D ROLD
Switch,bull's eye
Pilot light
Connection box,ITW
Fan wheel
Spring
Assembly,motor holder,front
Assembly,motor holder
Harness
Harness
Supply cable,3X1 XI600
Product specification 91609201303 EDE425M
General data
Power supply:
Dinnensions (HxWxD):
Cavity volume:
Rotary speed:
Absorbed power:
220 / 60 V/Hz
85x60x57 cm.
108 dm3
55 g/m
2200 W
General features
Timer
Type:
125 110621
Cycling thermostat
Temperature:
54 C
Heating element
Absorbed power:
Resistance:
Absorbed power:
Resistance:
Heating thermostat:
Safety thermostat:
1400W
33,5 Ohm
600 W
78 Ohm
92 C
160 C
Main motor
Insulating class:
Absorbed power:
Rotary speed:
Absorbed current:
Running/starting winding res.:
Start capacitor:
F
140 W
2600 g/m
1,2 A
29 / 29 Ohm
400 / 8 y/\xF
(/i
z
Q
1
C 5 C 5 I O C 3 0 0 O C 3 C J C 5 C J C 3 0 J C C 3 O
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
Q.
Heating
B3-B2(b4)
Heating
Line
C4-C1(b2)
A1-A2(t5)
Motor
Motor
D4-D1(t32)
D4-D2(b32)
Heating element
D4-DS(b31)
125 110621
L D m m u J L U u J i J U u j m L O m u J i i j m L u a l m m L i J L i j m L D m L D m i i J u j m O
1
M
1 1
300sec
125 110621 .EN
125 433600b
Motor capaci tor
hieat ing element
Junction box +
Anti-interference f i Iter
TT
Motor
nMJl
P0PLY300000042
Anti-interference filter Anti-interference filter
Cool button
Cool button
Door switch
Door switch
Earth
Earth
Heating elements
Heating elements
Junction box
Junction box
Low temperature button Low temperature button
Mains-on light
Mains-on light
Motor
Motor
Motor capacitor
Motor capacitor
Overheat protection thermostat
Overheat protection thermostat
Thermostat
Thermostat
Timer motor
Timer motor
Violet
Violet
Transparent
Transparent
Red
Red
Green-yellow
Green-yellow
Grey
Grey
Brown
Brown
Blue
Blue
Black
Black
125 433600c
A-2
Q.A-3
o
<?--
oo-
Door swite
A-1
Tiiermostat
IB-4(C4)
C-1
CD
.B-3
Ant i-interference
^[er
^
Eortti
Moins-on I ight
3-4
Timer motor
^6-2
M
. .
N! dearth onl
Motor copocitor
Cool b u t t o n
:i
\i
Il00+600h
i 1400 W H
Overheat protection
thermostats
Thermostat
D-4
D-5
3.
Door
sw i I c h
] KOMM 1
=^
c=A
=A
^^jy
=A
=-^
era
LOiPART
Washer extractor, W455H
j j)ffgig-gBaipwgr'"ife
^yseoSy
"^^
""fiiHIIIIHIIIIHIIIH. ,t9s.,.jiMt/
Model W455H
LOfPART B
P.O. Box 694
Phons
+46 322 66 83 60
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail
ioipartioipart.se
Exclusive Sales of
HI E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment
COMPASS CONTROL
MICROPROCESSOR
AWS SYSTEM FOR PRECISE WATER

DOSAGE
HIGH EXTRACTION FORCE
STAINLESS AND GALVANIZED

STEEL IN ALL VITAL PARTS
POWDER PAINTED CABINET
ENAMELLED FRONT PANEL
SLIP-LOCK DOOR HANDLE
WATER-OPERATED DRAIN VALVE
Washer extractor W455H with Compass

Control microprocessor offers fast efficient
wash programs for normal textiles, mixed
fabrics and wool. The start and programs are
selected by a control knob fitted on the
control panel together with a large and clear
display. The display presents the available
washing programs, options and addiuonal
functions. The machine is fitted with two
Quick Start buttons for choosing two preset
washing programs.
Thanks to the Automatic Weighing System
(AWS) the machine works with precise water
dosage. The high extraction force guarantees
an efficient dewatering. The machine is
equipped with front moimted four compartment soap box.
The door is with gasket and strong hinges is
built for heavy duty operation and provided
with slip-lock handle for easy operation and
immediate opening and unloading.
The washer extractor W435His designed for
connection to cold and hot water and
equipped with an industrial motor with three
speeds for gende wash, normal wash and
extraction.
The drain valve is operated by water pressure.
A right-angle drain hoseisapart of delivery.
The machine must be secured to the floor.
For fiirther specifications, please see overleaf.
19-113
DOC.NO.
EDITION 1
19-113L
11.05
WASHER EXTRACTOR W455H
Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm
gi=]0
595-
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Drain hose, dimensions:
Control panel
Three compartment soap box
Door opening 0 255 mm
Cold water conneaion R 3/4" (DN 20), rec. water pressure 200-500 kPa
Hot water conneaion R 3/4" (DN 20), rec. water pressure 200-500 kPa
Drain outlet 0 50 mm ext., capacity 160 1/min.
Elearical connection, cable 1.5 m
Positioning of machines:
480-
(Attach the drain hose to the machine's drain

outlet and install so it empties min 25 mm
above the floor drain or waste water channel.)
Marine installation:
M 10
Marine installation (see below):
NOTE!
The maximtmi value for rolling is 15 and for
stamping 8.
The machine should be bolted to the foundation ace. to instructions in Installation manual, Marine installation.
min. 20*
680
20
20
-595-
* rec. 500
Specification
Model/Type
Capacity,
filling factor
1:10 kgs
W455H
Inner drum
volume litres
5.5
diameter mm
Total rating
kW
440 3-60
4.5
400 3-50
4.9
Weight kgs
332
Shipping
volume m^
Fuse A
depth mm
452
53
Voltage V
10 slow
net
gross
99
109
0.470
*other voltages available on request

Specification
Type
Specification - consumption data for program "Normal"\60/ *

Drum speed rpm
wash
G-tactor
extraction
Max floor load

at extraction
IcN
W455H
35*/54
1300
1.20.3
425
* extra gentle speed on Mild and Wool programs
Frequency of the
dynamic force
Hz
Type
Total time minutes
W455H
46
20
Water consumption
litres
Energy
consumpdon kWh
cold/hot
motor/heating
52/9
0.2/0.35
* at water temperature: cold water 15 C, hot water 65 "C

Specification sound levels
Type
Solid sound level

in dB (A)
Airborne sound
level dB (A)*
Vibration level
m/sec^
Vibration speed
mm/sec
W455H
74
51/71
0.36
57
* wash/extraaion
19-113
Subject to chang6$ without notice.
Installation manual
W450H, W455H
438 9067-51
05.03
Contents
Contents
Technical data
Installation
Siting
Mountings
Mechanical installation
Water supply
Drain
Electrical installation
Machine connection options
Connection of external liquid supplies
Function checks
Marine installation
3
7
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
17
18
The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes to design, material and/or
specifications without notice.
!\
Safety
/\
This machine can only be used with water. Never use dry cleaning
agents.
Do not allow children to operate the machine.
Do not hose down or spray the machine with water.
All mechanical and electrical installation must be carried out by
Do not bypass the door locking device.
Should the machine malfunction, please report the fault to the
technician responsible for the machine.
Technical data
Technical data
Innerdrum, volume
diameter
depth
Drum speed
wash
extraction
Heating
electricity
steam
hot water
W450H
W455H
litres
mm
53
452
53
452
mm
332
332
rpm
35/54
1100
35/54
1300
4.4
4.4
305
102
425
102
G-factor
Weight, net
kg
Connections
Water valves
connection
BSP
DN20
3/4"
Capacity at 300 kPa

Drain valve
l/min
17
outer 0 mm
50
Draining capacity
l/min
160
Technical data
1
2
3
4
5
e
7
8
Control panel
Soap box
Door opening 255
Cold water
Hot water
Drain, valve
Drain, pump
&
Gi
595
680
850/875*
305
660
80
195
60
90
80
650
' Adjustable height, 25 mm
H-H=^
/
c
F
;
r^
8
^
,,
n
H /
(oT^
^ 5
\ ^J
^ \
if
'
1 ^
p\
r _t
*
^
".
Technical data
Frequency of the
dynamic force
Hz
20
Max floor load

at extraction
kN
1.20.3
Sound levels
Solid sound level in dB (A)

re 10-3 mm/sec (44-707 Hz)
Airborne sound level
dB (A) re 2x105 Pa
Vibration level
(m/sec^)
Vibration speed
(mm/sec)
A = Standard
B = With insulation
* = Wash/extraction
76
62
51/71*
45/59*
0.36
0.66
57
83
Installation
Installation
Leave the machine on the pallet on which it was
delivered until the installation site has been
prepared to receive it.
Siting
Install the machine close to a floor drain or open
waste water channel.
The following clearances are recommended for
easier installation and servicing:
Fig.
at least 500 mm between the machine and the

wall behind it.
at least 50 mm on each side of the machine,
whether it is next to a wall or to other
machines.
A clearance of 70 mm may be required
between the machine and the 130-litre tumble
dryer depending on which way the dryer's door
opens.
r(^
Rec.
500 mm
Installation
Mountings
In transit the machine's drum is locked in place
by three locking devices between chassis and
drum.
Instructions for installing machine and removing
transit locking devices, step by step:
Remove the packaging.
Remove the components shipped inside the
drum.
Fig.
Remove the front panel by undoing the two

screws on its bottom edge.
Remove the rear panel by undoing the
screws.
Fig.
Remove the three transport securities, one at

the front and two at the back. Save the
transport securities if the machine needs to be
moved sometime in the future.
The machine can be lifted in bottom frame.
r<^
Installation
Mark and drill 2 holes (0 8 mm) about 40 mm
deep in the positions shown.
530 490
C
35
125 290 150 40
H
50
= position of feet
O = drilling points for expander bolts

The machine shall be lifted in the bottom
frame.
Place the machine over the two drilled holes.
Check that the machine is placed in level.
Adjust with the feet.
It is of utmost importance that the machine

is placed in level, from side to side as well
as front to rear. If the machine is not
properly leveled, It may result in out-ofbalance without a real out of balance in the
drum.
Insert the expansion bolts supplied in the
holes drilled in the floor. Fit the washers and
Installation
10
Water supply
XT)
Each water supply line to the machine should be

fitted with a manual shut-off valve and debris filter
to facilitate servicing. Check the local regulations
to determine whether non-return valves are
required.
Connection hoses should be of the quality
required according to regulations in the country of
use.
Water pressures:
minimum: 60 kPa (0.5 kp/cm2)
maximum: 0.5 MPa (5 kp/cm2)
recommended: 0.2-0.5 MPa (2-5 kp/cm2)
Hoses and pipes should be flushed through
before being connected to the machine. Make
sure the hoses have no sharp bends or angles.
r<2>
The machine can have one or two supply hoses,

DN 20 (R 3/4").
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Machine with cold water intake only.

Machine with hot and cold water intake.
Machine with hot and cold water intake, but
plumbed for cold only because hot not available.
Both valves must be connected even if there is
only one water supply present.
r(2>
Installation
Drain
11
r
Direct discharge
Fig- Attach the drain hose to the machine's drain
(T) outlet and install so it empties (min 25 mm)
above the floor drain or waste water channel.
Pump drain
F'9- Position the highest part of the drain hose
(2) 65050 mm above the lowest part of the
machine.
Make sure that there are no kinks in the hose.
r<^
650
+50 mm
Installation
12
Electrical installation
Electrical installation must be carried out by an authorised electrician.

Install a multi-pole switch for the machine's electrical supply.
Connect the machine's cable to the switch.
Checl< that the earth has been connected in the correct way.
Fig.
Fuse ratings are given in the table.

For the rating of the supply cable, check the local regulations.
Min. outer diameter for supply cable 0IO mm.
r<^
Heating type
type
Voltage
type
Total rating
kW
Fuse
A
El. 4.4 kW
400-415V 3NAC 50 Hz
10
20
25
208-230V 1 AC 50 Hz
4.7
4.8
4.8
2.7
El. 4.4 kW
230V 3AC 50/60 Hz
El. 4.4 kW
230-240V 1 AC 50/60 Hz
El. 2,2 kW
El. 3.0 kW
380V 3AC T 50/60 Hz
3.5
El. 3.3 kW
400V 3AC T 50/60 Hz
EI. 3-3 kW
200V 3AC 50/60 Hz
aa
as
EL 4.0 kW
44QV 3AC T 50/60 Hz
4.5
El. 2,2 kW
208-240V1 AC 50/60 Hz
Non heated
208-240V 1 AC 50/60 Hz
2.7
0.9
1.1
200V 1AC 50/60 Hz
16
10
10
16
10
16
10
10
Installation
Machine connection options
13
Xi>
301
302
303
Switchover or reconnection of the machine

may only be performed by qualified,
authorised personnel.
Tilis macliine can be switched/reconnected
foilowing the options set out below.
The machine cannot be switched from

50 Hz to 60 Hz or vice versa.
1^
r
f
Reconnection/switchover of this type

cannot be performed on machines fitted
with a transformer.
4AI<W
Fig.
Connection option 400 V 3NAC 4.4 kW
Fig.
Connection option 230 V 3AC 4.4 kW
r-
Fig.
Connection option 230 V 1 AC 4.4 kW
Fig.
Connection option 230 V 1 AC 2.7 kW
In cases where the machine data plate

does not state the new voltage option, this
should be added to the plate.
2a67A
r<^
301. L
302,303, N/L
Installation
14
Connection of external liquid

supplies
r
Machines fitted with connectors.

Connect the pump equipment to connections
Fig.
A and B on the washing machine.
(T)
Connect the signal cable to B and the power
supply to A.
l\/lachines without connectors.
Connect the external pump equipment for
liquid washing detergent to the 1/0 board,
which is located to the right of the incoming
power supply.
The I/O card has edge connectors for
connecting external pumps.
r^
3
2
5
4
7
6
^
O
Fig.
/TN
^-^
Edge connectors on the I/O board can be

loosened for connecting cables.
9
8
11
10
12
13 15
17 19
14 16
18
Installation
Outputs
Fig-
Connect external power supply (e.g. 24V DC)

for pumps to 9 and 10. If an internal power
supply (from the washing machine) is being
used, it can be taken from 1 (N) and connected to 9 and from 2 (L) and connected to 10.
Connection 11 is neutral. Max load on the
outputs 0.5 A.
15
r(3>
si
nS-
Signals for pumps 1 -4 are connected to 12-15

where connector
Washing detergent signal 1
12
13
14
15
-Q-
O-tJ
Coni44ACn>C
Q
S
mQ
Com 1(I0-240AC
II
NQ
lopte Inp-I
l0PI0lw>4iontotnp-t-
Input 1
Opto iflp*r
Input 4
Input 2
Inputs
0^
Inputs
it1
CMQ-
Output2
Outputs
The signal level can be 5-24V DC/AC or 100240V AC. For 5-24V, the signal reference is
connected to 3 and for 100-240V to 4.
Potentials on the inputs cannot be mixed.
NB! The I/O board will be damaged if the
voltage on connection 3 is too high, >24V.
Fig.
Output4
Outputs
Connection 8 can be connected if the washing

program is to pause, e.g. while washing
detergent is being dosed.
r<^
Dosing system
;:^
OV o _
Pause signal
24V DC o -
Com 100-24^.^.
-\\-
n Q
lOpto lnp.h
Input 1
^ Q
lOpto Inp-h
Input 2
lOQ
lOpto lnp.h
Inputs
IO0
lOpto lnp.h
Input 4
NQ^
<MO-
Com
Output 1
Com
Outputs
Outputs
i
Output 4
Installation
16
r-(>
Detergent tank
1 1
\ ]
Interiock out
Com 5-24AC/DC
Com 100-240AC
Ly
4'
Input 1
Fig.
Fig
e
e
e
e
e
e
Input 2
Inputs
O0
lOpto lnp.h
CMQ-
Connection 7. If this is connected, an error

message will be displayed if any of the
chemical tanks are empty. The washing
program will continue, however.
Fit the connecting unions provided and
connect the hoses to the unions.
r(I>
Input 4
Installation
Function checks
17
r<J>
Perform the following checks once the machine is

installed:
@
Open the manual water valves.

Turn on the power at the external switch.
Fig
Put detergent into compartment 2 (Main wash).
Select a 60 program with the control knob (1).

Press the knob.
Check:
Fig
that the drum rotates normally and that there

are no unusual noises.
6217,6179,6182
that there are no leaks in water supply/drain

connections.
that water passes through the detergent
compartment and fabric conditioner
compartments.
that the door cannot be opened during a
program.
r<iy
Installation
18
Marine installation
r<^
This machine can be installed in marine

installation.
The maximum value for rolling is 15 and

for stamping 8.
Fig
Fig
*D
The machine shall be placed as shown in fig.

Mark the two holes (A) on the floor plate on the
site of machine installation.
Fig
Drill the two holes with 8.5 mm.
Fig
Thread the holes with M 10.
r
r-
Installation
Fig
Thread up the four feet of the machine as

much as possible.
19
r<5>
Place the machine at its site.

Place the spacers (B) between machine and
floor.
Fig
Fig
Tighten the machine to the floor with the two

bolts.
Adjust the feet of the machine to the floor and
lock them with the nuts.
S"
B] Electrolux
ELECTROLUX LAUNDRY SYSTEMS
Lundtoftegaardsvej 93A, DK-2800 Lyngby, Denmark
Telephone: +45 4526 4800. Telefax: +45 4526 4801
Internet: www.electrolux.com/laundrysystems
E-mail: els.info@electrolux.com
Operating Manual
W450H, W455H
xxxxxxx-xx
04.50
Contents
Contents
General
Control Panel
Control knob
Display
Preset buttons
Washing Program
Start Menu
Start
Options
Delayed start
Info
Auto restart
Go back
Washing Functions
Start
Rapid advance
Pause
Changing washing program after starting
Detergent Drawer
Display Information
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
4
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
9
10
Handling
Starting With Preset Button
Starting With Control Knob
11
11
11
Error Messages
13
Maintenance
15
The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes to design and

material specifications.
Safety
/ ^
This machine can only be used with water. Never use dry cleaning
agents.
Do not allow children to operate the machine.
Do not hose down or spray the machine with water.
All mechanical and electrical installation must be carried out by
Do not bypass the door locking device.
Should the machine malfunction, please report the fault to the
technician responsible for the machine.
General
Control Panel
F'9- The control panel is used to choose the washing program with options and
1) to start and stop the machine. The panel houses a control knob and a display.
Some machines also have two preset buttons.
r
Preset buttons
Alternative 1
Display
Alternative 2
Control knob
Fig.
Fig.
Control knob
r<iy
The control knob is used to select washing

program, options and any other available
functions.
Turn the knob until the required option is shown
on the display.
Confirm your choice by pushing in the knob.
Repeat this procedure until all the required
options have been chosen.
V^
r-
6180
XA)2
General
Display
Fic|. The display presents the available washing
(T) programs, options and additional functions. The
up and down arrows on the right-hand side of the
display indicate that there are more options available in the current menu.
rNORMAL
While in operation, the display also shows other

information intended for the user; refer to the
heading "Display Information".
Note!
If there is not enough room to show all the
text on the display, the first part will be displayed briefly before the text scrolls to the
side to display the second part. This sequence will be repeated as long the text in question is activated.
Preset buttons
Fig- The machine can be fitted with two buttons for

choosing two preset washing programs.
Pushing one of these buttons will activate the
corresponding washing program directly and the
machine will start automatically.
Refer to the section "Programming the Preset
Buttons" in the programming manual for how to
program the preset buttons alternative 2.
X/02
r(5>
Alternative 1
Alternative 2
51-
General
Washing Program
On delivery, the machine is programmed with
a washing program family (e.g. Economy,
Sport, etc.) containing up to 8 different washing
programs adapted to the range of uses to which
the machine is intended. The washing programs
differ depending on the family to which they
belong.
The following washing programs can be
available:
r^Sh
NORMAL 90
r^zh:
60
7) Washing program Normal, max 95C.
NORMAI. 60
Fi(
S Washing program Normal, max 60C.

Fig.
r<iy-.
8} Washing program Normal, max 40C.
HO
NORMAI. 40
Washing program Perma-Press, max 60C.

Half load.
Fig.
Washing program Perma-Press, max 40C.

Half load.
3)
Washing program Delicate, max 30C.

Half load.
Washing program Handwash,

max 30C. Half load.
6183
r<Ih:
FP 60
r^
HO
PP 4 0
r-.
DELICATE 3 0
r^^.
^n
HANCWASH
6187
y
X/02
General
Start Menu
^
@
A start menu will appear on the display once a

washing program has been selected. Here, you
can complement the selected washing program
with up to two options (on certain machines),
sel-ect how the machine is to start and obtain
information on the selected washing program.
Refer to the respective headings for more
information.
START
OPTION
DELAY START
INFO
AUTO RESTART
GO BACK
Start
The washing program starts immediately after
pressing the control knob.
Options
Fig. Before starting, the selected washing program
(u) can be complemented with up to two options.
The activated option is indicated on the display
under the name of the washing program as
"Option 1", "Option 2", etc. The following options
can be available:
"PRERINSES"
The selected washing program is complemented

with two prerinses of 2 minutes each.
HS>Activated
option
IH3N0RMAL 60
OPnoNi
{OPTION
6210^
rSELECT OPTION
PRERINSES
"PREWASH"
Rg. Alt. 1: The selected washing program is comple@
mented with a cold prewash for 6 minutes.
Alt. 2: The selected washing program is complemented with a 40 prewash for 5 minutes.
r^
SELECT OPTION
"HEAVY SOILED"
g)
Alt. 1 The selected washing program is complemented with a cold prewash for 6 minutes,
the time for the main wash is extended for
4 minutes and at temperatures above 41 ,
the temperature is increased by 8.
PREWASH
4
r^g^
SELECT OPTION
HEAVY SOILED
X/D2
General
Alt. 2: The selected washing program is complemented with a 30 prewash for 6 minutes,
main wash extended 4 minutes.
Alt. 3: The selected washing program is complemented with a 30 prewash for 5 minutes,
the main wash is extended for 4 minutes
and at temperatures above 40, the temperature is increased by 5.
r^
SELECT OPTION
t
NO PREWASH
_/
r^
SELECT OPTION
"NO PREWASH"
Ra Prewash will be excluded from the selected

@ washing program.
"LIGHT SOILED"
Fjg- The temperature is lowered 5 and the main
(}y wash shortened by 4 minutes.
"N
LIGHT SOILED
y
r^
>
SELECT OPTION
QUICK WASH
"QUICK WASH"
Ficj. The machine excludes the selected washing
(20) program's prewash and shortens spin drying
by 2 minutes.
r^
"HIGHER LEVEL"
SELECT OPTION
Fig. All the levels for the selected washing program

@ are increased by 5 units.
HIGHER LEVEL
"RINSE STOP"
Fi^ The selected washing program stops before the
(22) final rinse. To fill with water and continue with
the washing program, the control knob must be
pressed in.
r^
SELECT OPTION
t
RINSE STOP
"EXTRA RINSE"
Fjg-
Gives an extra rinse in the selected washing

program.
r%SELECT OPTION
EXTRA RINSES
X/02
General
"GENTLE EXTRACTION"
3)
Alt. 1: Spin drying in the selected washing program is excluded between rinses and the
final spin dry is 20 seconds.
r^
SELECT OPTION
GENTLE
Alt. 2: Spin drying in the selected washing program is excluded between rinses and the
final spin dry is 2 minutes.
"SHORT EXTRACTION"
Fig.
(25)
r^
SELECT OPTION
Final spin dry in selected washing program is

shortened by 4 minutes.
SHORT
"EXTRA EXTRACTION"
^
Final spin dry in selected washing program is

extended by
2 minutes.
r^
SELECT OPTION
"EXTRACTION (TIME)."
Fig@
The duration of the final spin dry in the selected

washing program can be set to 10 seconds, 15
seconds, 30 seconds or 4 minutes.
EXTRA
i
i
Hg^.
SELECT OPTION
t
EXTRACTION
x/02
General
Delayed start
In this menu, you can set a delay of up to 99
hours and 59 minutes before the machine starts
the selected washing program.
S)
The arrow in the menu indicates the column

being adjusted. Turn the l<nob clocl<wise to set
the desired number. Turn the knob anticlockwise
to move to the next column. Press the knob to
confirm after completing the settings.
r^
DELAYED START
HOURtHIITOTES
00:00
r^
NOT
ALLOWED
FUNCTION
The time left to start starts when the setting has

been confirmed.
It will be indicated on the display if the selected
washing program does not allow this function.
Info
This menu presents information on the selected
washing program.
imNQRHAL 6D
r@"
xxxx
Auto restart
Fi(
^1
In this menu, you can set the number of times

the machine will automatically restart the
selected washing program, up to 999 times.
The arrow in the menu indicates the column
being adjusted. Turn the knob clockwise to set
the desired number. Turn the knob anticlockwise
to move to the next column. Press the knob to
confirm after completing the settings.
The machine will start straight away once the
number has been confirmed.
S)
r^
IffiJNORHAL 6D
AUTO RESTARTS
0000
The auto restart function will be zeroed after

using the rapid advance function in the selected
washing program.
It will be indicated on the display if the selected
washing program does not allow this function.
Go back
Return to the program selection menu.
XA)2
General
Washing Functions
START
Activated
option
pS: Turn the control knob to the START row. Press

(32) the knob to start the selected program.
F15- On machines equipped with preset buttons, the
(33) preset washing program can be started with the
respective button.
RAPID ADVANCE
OPHDNl
START
r@>-
Turn the control knob while the washing program

is in progress.
The different steps of the washing program will
be shown on the display. Turn the knob to the
desired program step and press. The machine
will now jump to the selected step and continue
the program from there.
LBSNORMAL 6G
Alternative
r^
PAUSE
3)
Press the control knob to turn on the pause

function. Restart the washing program by
pressing the control knob again.
Note!
The door will be locked and the drain valve
closed during the pause.
r@"
RAPID ADU.
Changing washing program after starting
HAINWASH
p9: Press the control knob to start the pause

(^ function. Turn the control knob to the new
program and press.
The water will be emptied from the machine, after
which it will start from the beginning of the new
washing program.
HAINH&SH 3
DRAIN 1
EXTRACTION 1
r-
r%
K^
i
\
J
yum
General
Detergent Drawer
(M^ \ I /
Pi'ewash, powder or liquid detergent
\ 11 / Main wash. Two compartments, one for

' powder detergent and one for liquid.
Fabric softener, liquid
XA)2
General
10
Display Information
Fig- During the wash, the remaining time for the
selected washing program will be shown at the
bottom of the display. The time is given in minutes.
To calculate the remaining time, the machine uses
a model calculation based on average times.
X/D2
rliSUNORNAL Sn
MAINUA5H1
TIME LEFT 2G
IHandling
Starting With Preset Button
Empty any pockets.
r
\ i i vlly
Add the correct amount of detergent and

softener.
Note!
Refer to the dosages on the detergent
packaging. Do not overdose.
Press the preset button for the desired

program.
If the machine has a slot meter, insert the
correct money/tokens.
Note!
Pushing one of these buttons will activate
the correspondlngwashing program
directly and the machine will start
automatically.
6250
r^
X1/D1
Handling
Select the desired washing program with the

control knob and confirm by pressing the
knob.
?^
Add any options to the selected washing

program. Select from the list with the control
knob and confirm by pressing the knob.
Fi(
Note!
Max two options can be chosen for
eachwashing program
r
60
r<>
IKINORMAL 6U
DPnONl
If the machine has a slot meter, insert the

correct money/tokens.
t OPTION
Add the correct amount of detergent and

softener.
Note!
Refer to the dosages on the detergent
packaging. Do not overdose.
Select START with the control knob and press
the knob.
rl^NORMAL 6
DPnONl
START
6179/6180
X1/01
Error codes
Error Messages
Fig.
(T)
r<^
A fault in the program or in the machine is

indicated by an error message comprising
an error code and a descriptive text.
The washing program and the error code can
be reset before restarting by holding in the
START button/knob for at least 10 seconds
or turning off the power to the machine.
CodeText
Cause/Action
001 NO WATER
Water level acknowledgement not received in time.

IVIake sure the water cocks are open.
002 DOOR OPEN
Door position acknowledgement not received during

program. Open and close the door.
003 DOOR LOCK FAIL
Door lock acknowledgement not received in time. Open

and close the door.
007 OVERFILLED
Water level above established safety limits during

program. Try to restart the machine.
010 WATER LEFT
Water above established level after drain. Make sure

the drain is not blocked by lint or foam. Try to restart the
machine.
Contact service personnel for other error messages.
X/02
Maintenance
Maintenance
Daily
Clean the door seal from detergent residue.
Make sure the door is not leaking.
Clean the detergent drawer and wipe off the machine with a damp rag.
Make sure the drain valve is not leaking.
Start the machine and make sure the door is locked during the program.
Rapid advance the program to stop and make sure the door cannot be
opened until after the program is complete.
Monthly
Check that valves, hoses and connections are not leaking.
Remove any lint from the drain connection, joints in the drain pipe, etc.
Every three months
When chemicals have collected on the edges of the panels:
Unplug the power cable.
Turn off the water supply and release the pressure from the inlet hoses.
Remove the water inlet hoses from the back of the machine and clean or
change the inlet filter.
Clean the detergent drawer thoroughly.
Take off the top and front machine panels.
Wash away detergent and other chemicals from the panels to stop them
rusting.
Make sure there are no leaks inside the machine. Repair as necessary.
Clean the seal around the door.
Refit the top and front panels.
X1/D1
H] Electrolux
Lundtoftegaardsvej 93A, DK-2800 Lyngby, Denmark
Telephone: +45 4526 4800. Telefax: +45 4526 4801
Internet: www.electrolux.com/laundrysystems
E-mail: els.info@electrolux.com
H] Electrolux
Reservdelskatalog
W450H, W455H
DOC. NO.
EDITION
438 9021-15
50.2004
Group
Grupp
List of issues
W450H,W455H
Illustration
100797
100799
101178
101906
102234
102235
102236
102237
102238
102239
102240
102241
102242
102243
102247
102248
102249
102250
Page
37
39
29
31
9
11
13
19
41
7
17
15
21
25
23
33
35
27
Table of contents
Inlet valve 3/4", 3-way
Electric drain valve
Electrical drain valve
Panels
Door and door lock
Control panel
Electric components connection
Frame
Program mechanism
Outer and inner drum
Motor control
Water connections
Hoses
Detergent container
Liquid detergent
Drain valve
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
5
W450H,W455H
Table of contents
Innehllsfbrteckning
Frame
Panels
Door and door lock
Control panel
Program mechanism
Motor control
Hoses
Water coimections
Drain valve
Detergent container
Liquid detergent
Stativ
Pltar
Lucka och luckls
Manverpanel
Ytter- och innertrumma
Programverk
Eldetaljer anslutning
Motorstymrng
Slangar
Vattenanslutningar
Avloppsventil
El. avloppsventil
Elektrisk avloppsventil
Tvttmedelslda
Flytande tvttmedel
Tilloppsventil 3/4",3-vgs
Tilloppsventil 3/4",l-vgs
Page/Sida
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
102239
Group
Grapp
Page
Sida
7
W450H,W455H
Frame
Stativ
Item
Quantity
Art.No
Pos.
Antal
Art.nr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
* 28
29
30
* 31
32
33
34
35
36
37
W450H
W455H
1 1
1 1
1 1
RQ RQ
4 4
1 1
2 2
1 1
4 4
1 1
1 1
8 8
8 8
12 12
8 8
1
3
Description
Benmning
472 9901-81
438 5143-01
438 5143-03
471 7864-02
471 8194-01
472 9901-26
438 0027-01
471 8305-04
471 7807-02
732 2118-01
472 9901-25
471 8149-11
471 8149-01
471 8502-25
732 2118-01
471 9746-01
Bottom plate
Bottom plate
Bottom plate
Clip
Foot
Frame
Tensioner
Screw
Tension plate
Locking nut
Spring strut
Rubber buffer
Rubber buffer
Washer
Locking nut
Motor
Bottenplatta
Bottenplatta
Bottenplatta
Clips
Fot
Ram
Spnne
Skruv
Sprmbricka
Lsmutter
Fjderben
Gummibufifert
Gummibuffert
Bricka
Lsmutter
Motor
471 9740-53
438 5123-01
438 5124-01
438 5124-02
471 8356-01
725 2461-51
471 8502-14
732 2118-01
438 5146-01
Sensor
Bushing
Spacer tube
Spacer tube
Screw
Screw
Washer
Locking nut
Cover
Drain valve
Hose clamp
Distance piece
Pump
Bracket
Rubber buffer
Cover
Transformer
Transformer
Sensor
Bussning
Distansrr
Distansrr
Skruv
Skruv
Bricka
Lsmutter
Skydd
Avloppsventil
Slangklmma
Mellanstycke
Pump
Hllare
Gummibuffert
Skydd
Transformator
Transformator
736 2840-51
438 5020-02
438 5175-01
438 5197-01
438 5478-03
438 5478-11
438 5021-01 Connection

438 5025-01 Hose
736 2840-51 Hose clamp
Drain valve
Anslutning
Slang
Slangklmma
Avloppsventil
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
102239/1
Month
Mnad
Year
r
2004
Info
Notes
Info
Ainnrkning
3 Incl. insulation
3
3 El. drain valve
3 M5
3
3 Complete
3
3 M8X60
3 18x8,4x2
3 M8
1,2 Set of 4
1
1
3
3 M8
1,2 SOLE
Not used
1,2
3
3 L= 187,5
3 L=22,5
3 M8X220
3 M8X50
3 BRB 8,4X17
3 M8
3
1,2 See illustr. 101082
3 050-63
3
See illustr. 102247
3
3
3 See illustr. 102247
1,2 100-120-200V/230V
1,2 380-400-440-480V/230V
Not used
3
3
3 050-63
See illustr. 101178
Issue
01
102234
Month Year
11
04
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
9
W450H,W455H
Illustration
Illustration
Panels
Pltar
102234/1
Item
Quantity
Art.No
Pos.
Antal
Art.nr
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
W450H
W455H
1
1
1
1 1
2 2
1 1
1 1
2 2
1 1
4 4
4 4
2
4
1
2
1
2
4
1
2
1
16
17
18
19
20
21
2
1
1
7
1
1
2
1
1
7
1
Description
438 5079-21
438 5079-30
438 5079-70
432 6307-01
471 8196-01
438 5081-16
438 5114-01
471 8341-24
432 6328-01
471 8454-07
438 5109-02
438 5086-03
438 5086-07
471 8196-01
438 5101-01
438 5101-11
471 8196-01
432 6309-02
432 6309-01
432 6314-02
432 6314-01
438 5335-01
432 6311-01
471 2437-15
432 6320-01
432 6310-01
Front panel
Front panel
Front panel
Strip
Plug
Door
Hinged joint
Screw
Panel plate
Rivet
Guide pin
Panel
Side panel
Side panel
Plug
Rear panel
Rear panel
Plug
Brace bracket
Brace bracket
Top panel
Top panel
Guide
Brace
Plug
Clamp
Door
Benmning
Frontplt
Frontplt
Frontplt
List
Plugg
Lucka
Gngled
Skniv
Panelplt
Nit
Styrpiime
Panel
Sidoplt
Sidoplt
Plugg
Bakstycke
Bakstycke
Plugg
Stagplt
Stagplt
Topplock
Topplock
Styming
Stag
Propp
Klamma
Lucka
Issue
Utgva
Month
Mnad
Year
r
11
2004
Info
Notes
Info
Anmikning
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
White
Grey
Grey, with pump
Grey
M5X12
Seeillustr. 102236
White
Grey
White
Grey
White
Grey
White
Grey
Issue
01
102235
Month Year
11
04
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
11
W450H,W455H
Door and door lock

Lucka och lucklas
Item
Qua.
Art.No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Description
432 7112-01 Door

472 9904-91 Door
Door
Glass
Gasket
432 1955-01 Knob
Knob
Bushing
Ball
Spring
Screw
472 9913-01 Kit, lock shaft
Lock shaft
Washer
Bushing
Torsion spring
725 2366-61 Screw
432 1956-01 Cover washer
432 2620-09 Logotype
432 6332-01 Trim panel
Benmning
Lucka
Lucka
Lucka
Glas
"Packning
Vred
Vred
Bussning
Kula
Fjder
Skruv
Kit, lsaxel
Lsaxel
Bricka
Bussning
Vrid^der
Skruv
Tckbricka
Logotype
Dekorplt
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
102235/1
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
Complete
Complete
1,2
M6SF 6X12
Month
Mnad
Year
r
2004
Issue
01
102236
Month Year
11
04
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
13
W450H,W455H
Control panel
Manverpanel
Item
Qua.
Art.No
Pos.
Ant
Arl.iir
Description
432 6329-01
432 6328-01
472 5783-02
432 2615-01
471 7781-03
432 6320-01
Panel
Panel plate
Panel sign
Type plate
Sign
Clamp
Benmning
Panel
Panelplt
Panelskylt
Typskylt
Skylt
Klamma
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
102236/1
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
Month
Mnad
Year
r
2004
W455H
NEUTRAL
See illustr. 102240
Issue
01
102241
Month Year
11
04
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
15
W450H,W455H
Ytter- och innertrumma
Item
Qua.
Arl.No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.Tir
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
3
6
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
Description
438 5058-01
471 9222-59
471 8502-14
732 2118-01
472 9903-78
438 5119-02
472 9901^2
471 8317-06
438 5137-06
438 5115-01
438 5127-01
731 2316-42
438 5117-02
472 9904-83
471 8357-01
438 5061-01
438 5118-01
471 8524-01
471 8358-02
471 8502-26
438 5176-01
471 7700-12
471 9813-01
471 9813-02
471 4494-01
472 9913-22
471 8192-01
471 8502-05
413 2960-01
End piece
Tension strap
Screw
Washer
Locking nut
Drum
Inner drum
Lifter
Lifter
Screw
Outer drum
Bracket
Gasket
Nut
Back plate
Repair kit
Seal
"Ball bearing
Ball bearing
Screw
Shaft
Screw
Gasket
Pulley
Spring washer
Screw
Washer
Bushing
V-belt
Heating element
Heating element
Blind flange
Sensor
Bushing
Washer
Cable set
Bennming
Gavel
Spnnband
Skruv
Bricka
Lsmutter
Trumma
Innertrumma
Valk
Valk
Skruv
Yttertrumma
Hallare
Packning
Mutter
Bakgavel
Renoverings sats
Ttning
Kullager
Kullager
Skruv
Axel
Skruv
Packning
Remskiva
Fjderbricka
Skruv
Bricka
Bussning
Kilrem
Element
Element
Blindflns
Givare
Bussning
Bricka
Ledningssats
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
102241/1
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
3
3
3 M8X140
3 BRB 8,4X17
3 MS
1 Complete
1
1 Kit
1
3
3 El. heated
3
3
3 M6
1
1,2
3
1
1
3
3
3
3
1,2
1,2 2,2kW 230V
1,2 2,2kW 240V
3
1,2 Complete
1,2
3 NB 6x22
3 Heating
Month
Mnad
Year
r
11
2004
Issue
01
102240
Month Year
11
04
Page
Sida
17
Group
Grapp
W450H,W455H
Program mechanism
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
Programverk
102240/1
Item
Qua.
Art.No
Pos.
Ant,
Art.nr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Description
Benmning
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
Programverk
Kretskort
Display
Programvljare
Vred
"Gimimibricka
Fjder
Hylsa
Lock
Programvljare
Fjder
Skruv
Lock
3 Complete
L2 CPU
1,2
1,2 Complete
432 6342-01
Program mechanism
Printed circuit board
Display
Program selector
Knob
Rubber cushion
Spring
Sleeve
Cover
Program selector
Spring
Screw
Cover
471 8346-02
413 3280-01
413 3274-20
432 6325-01
432 6324-01
471 4673-95
413 2901-01
413 3274-02
413 3084-03
413 3274-10
413 3275-01
432 6326-01
Bracket
Screw
Cable set
Cable set
Cover
Cover
Sign
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cover
Hllare
Skruv
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Kpa
Kpa
Skylt
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Skydd
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1,2
3
432 6802-01
432 8701-01
432 8702-01
472 9904-92
471 7848-01
432 6342-01
438 9659-01
432 6341-01
Month
Mnad
Year
r
11
2004
3
1,2 Complete
3
Not used
20-pole
4-pole
Front
Rear
Door lock
4-pole D-bus
4-pole P-bus
4-pole M-com
5-pole Level control
Issue
01
102237
Month Year
11
04
Group
Gnipp
Page
Sida
19
W450H,W455H
Illustration
Illustration

Eldetaljer anslutning
Item
Qua
Alt.No
Pos.
Anl.
Art.nr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*
*
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1
1
2
Description
423 6308-01 Component panel

432 6805-01 Power supply
471 8750-14 Fuse
Fuse
413 3082-01
413 3084-02
413 3084-01
413 3274-02
413 3274-01
413 3084-03
413 3182-01
413 2902-01
413 2903-01
413 3182-02
413 3088-01
413 3086-01
413 3082-01
471 8759-01
471 8759-51
438 9636-22
438 9636-23
413 2950-01
471 7859-12
471 7859-16
432 6320-01
438 8720-01
471 7977-03
471 8861-01
471 8863-01
413 3275-01
432 6803-01
432 6323-01
413 3086-02
413 3086-03
432 6830-01
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Block
Cover
Contactor
Contactor
Cable set
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
Grommet
Cover plug
Level guard
Level guard
Cable set
Cover
Cable set
Cable set
Issue
Utgva
102237/1
Benmning
Komponentplt
Strmfbrsrjning
Skring
Skring
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Plint
Kpa
Kontaktor
Kontaktor
Ledningssats
Klmma
Klmma
Klamma
Genomfbring
Tckpropp
Nivvakt
Nivvakt
Ledningssats
Kretskort
Skydd
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Kretskort
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrknmg
Month
Mnad
Year
Ar
2004
3
1
1,2 5A slow
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1,2
1,2
3
3
3
3
3
3
2-pole
4-pole P-bus
4-pole P-bus
4-pole D-bus
4-pole D-bus
4-pole P-bus
2-pole Drain
2-pole El-drain
2-pole Pump-drain
Heating
8-pole Cold water
6-pole Cold water
2-pole Cold water
50Hz
60Hz
Heating
Lower part
Upper part
See illustr. 102247

See illustr. 102247
3 5-pole Level control
1,2 1/0-card
3
3 6-pole Hot water
2-pole Hot water
1/O-card
Issue
01
102242
Month Year
11
04
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
21
W450H,W455H
Motor control
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
Motorstyrning
102242/1
Item
Quantity
Art.No
Pos.
Antal
Art.nr
W450H
W455H
1
1
2
2
I
1
1
1
Description
471 9785-01
432 6313-01
471 8196-01
432 6320-01
413 2990-01
438 5233-01
413 3274-10
413 3084-01
432 6312-01
Motor control
Mounting plate
Plug
Clamp
Cable set
Clamp
Cable set
Cable set
Cover
Benmning
Motors tyming
Fstplat
Plugg
Klamma
Ledningssats
Bygel
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Skydd
Month
Mnad
Year
r
11
2004
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
Complete
4-pole M-com
4-pole P-bus
Issue
01
102247
Month Year
11
04
Group
Gmpp
Page
Sida
23
W450H,W455H
Illustration
Illustration
Hoses
Slan gar
102247/1
Item
Qua
Art.No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nr
1
* 2
*
*
3
4
5
* 6
7
8
9
* 10
11
12
13
14
* IS
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
RQ
RQ
RQ
Issue
Utgva
Description
438 5018-01
471 8269-11
471 8269-12
471 8269-13
471 7871-07
736 2837-51
471 6858-85
471 7873-01
471 6858-86
438 5032-01
736 2819-51
471 7871-08
471 6858-82
736 2825-51
438 5022-01
736 2840-51
438 5174-03
438 5025-01
471 8139-03
471 8688-13
438 5026-01
438 5039-01
736 2828-51
471 7871-06
438 5034-01
471 7872-02
471 8139-09
472 9903-72
438 5024-01
438 5023-01
471 2401-52
471 8142-03
471 2265-69
471 2440-36
471 2442-41
471 8861-01
471 8863-01
877 5211-08
736 2816-51
438 5191-01
438 5187-01
736 2843-51
471 7871-08
471 7887-01
Hose
Pump
Pump
Pump
Hose clamp
Hose clamp
Hose
Cable tie
Plug
Hose
Hose clamp
Hose clamp
Drain hose
Hose clamp
Discharge
Hose clamp
Cover
Hose
Hose
Nipple
Hood
Hose
Hose clamp
Hose clamp
Cover
Clamp
Hose
Pressure chamber
Pressure chamber
Pipe
Nipple
Hose sleeve
T-pipe
Hose
Hose
Level guard
Level gimrd
Hose
Hose clamp
Hose
Hose
Hose clamp
Hose clamp
Clip
Benmning
Slang
Pump
Pump
Pump
Slangklmma
Slangklmma
Slang
Buntband
Plugg
Slang
Slangklmma
Slangklmma
Avloppsslang
Slangklmma
Avlastning
Slangklmma
Skydd
Slang
Slang
Nippel
Huv
Slang
Slangklmma
Slangklmma
Skydd
Klamma
Slang
Tryckkammare
Tryckkammare
Rr
Nippel
Slanghylsa
T-rr
Slang
Slang
Nivvakt
Nivvakt
Slang
Slangklmma
Slang
Slang
Slangklmma
Slangklmma
Clips
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
1,2 Drum-pump
1,2 50Hz
1,2 60Hz
1,2 DE
3
3 048-54
1
3
3
1 Circulation
3
3
1 Pump-drain
3 032
3
3 050-63
3
1 Drum-Drain
1
1 1/8"
3
3
3
3
3
3
1 L=1650
1 Complete
1
3
3
3 L=250
3
1 L=90
1 L=70
1
1
1 Per 1 m
3 013-19
1
1
3 063-73
3
3
Month
Mnad
Year
r
11
2004
Issue
01
102243
Month Year
11
04
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
25
W450H,W455H
Water connections
Vattenanslutningar
Item
Qua,
Art.No
Pos.
Anl.
Art.nr
Benmning
RQ
RQ
Valve
Valve
Ventil
Ventil
RQ
Valve
Ventil
Gasket
Nipple
Nipple
Filter
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
Nipple
Hose
Hose clamp
Hose
Hose
Hose
Tool
Cover washer
Packning
Nippel
Nippel
Filter
Magnetventil
Magnetventil
Nippel
Slang
Slangklmma
Slang
Slang
Slang
Verktyg
Tckbricka
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Description
3
RQ
RQ
I
1
1
1
RQ
471 8199-01
438 0056-03
471 8688-13
471 8693-21
471 8243-07
471 8243-08
471 8688-12
877 5211-08
736 2816-51
471 8139-01
471 8102-07
471 8139-12
471 4792-01
472 6761-01
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
102243/1
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
Month
Mnad
Year
r
11
2004
1-way See illustr. 100799

3-way See illustr. 102245,
102246
4-way See illustr. 102244,
102245
3
3 Black, 3/4"
3 1/8"
3
1,2 230V 50Hz
1,2 208-240V 60Hz
3 1/4"
1 Per 1 m
3 013-19
1 L=330
1 L=1250
1 L=1350
3
3
Issue
01
102250
Month Year
11
04
Group
Grapp
Page
Sida
27
W450H,W455H
Drain valve
Avloppsventil
Item
Pos.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Qua.
Ant.
Description
Art.No
Benmning
Art.nr
438 0093-02
438 0051-01
471 8195-01
438 0054-01
438 0053-01
438 0055-01
438 0052-01
471 7801-07
432 6300-01
471 7871-02
471 8688-13
Drain valve
Lower frame
Diaphragm
Piston
Housing
Gland
Cover
Spring
Hose
Hose clamp
Nipple
Avloppsventil
Underdel
Membran
Kolv
Hus
Gland
Lock
Fjder
Slang
Slangklrmna
Nippel
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
102250/1
Info
Notes
Info
Amnrkning
1,2 Complete
1
1
3
3
3
3
1
1
3
1 1/8"
Month
Mnad
Year
Ar
11
2004
Issue
01
101178
Month Year
05
94
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
29
W450H,W455H
Illustration
Illustration

El. avloppsventil
Item
Qua.
Art.No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nr
101178
Description
472 8754-21
725 2327-61
735 2146-01
438 5177-01
471 7871-08
471 7871-07
438 5184-01
736 2840-51
736 2837-51
Issue
Utgva
Drain valve
Screw
Washer
Hose
Hose clamp
Hose clamp
Hose
Hose clamp
Hose clamp
Benmning
Avloppsventil
Skruv
Bricka
Slang
Slangklmma
Slangklmma
Slang
Slangklmma
Slangklmma
Month
Mnad
1 6
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
1,2 See illustr. 101906

3 M6SF 5X12
3 M5
1
3
3
1
3 050-63
3 048-54
Year
r
Issue
01
101906
Month Year
07
00
Page
Sida
31
Group
Grapp
W450H,W455H

Elektrisk avloppsventil
Item
Qua,
Art.No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Description
472 8754-21
438 5181-02
471 9727-01
471 8341-24
735 2146-01
471 8341-19
731 2312-01
472 6016-00
7211252-35
472 6017-00
471 7804-01
438 5182-02
471 8340-12
472 6015-00
472 6013-00
736 2849-51
472 6012-00
438 5189-01
471 8341-24
471 7864-02
438 5020-02
736 2840-51
762 3131-01
471 7691-01
471 8341-24
732 2114-01
438 5199-01
Drain valve
Bracket
Motor
Screw
Washer
Screw
Nut
Piston
Pin
Shaft
Torsion spring
Cover
Screw
Piston
Hose
Hose clamp
Rubber ring
Hose connection
Screw
Clip
Distance piece
Hose clamp
Insulator
Sign
Screw
Locking nut
Washer
Benmning
Avloppsventil
Konsol
Motor
Skruv
Bricka
Skruv
Mutter
Kolvstng
Pinne
Axel
Vridfjder
Skydd
Skruv
Kolv
Slang
Slangklmma
Manschett
Slanganslutning
Skruv
Clips
Mellatistycke
Slangklmma
Isolator
Skylt
Skruv
Lsmutter
Mellanlgg
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgiva
101906/1
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
1,2
3
1,2 220V 50/60HZ
3 M5X12
3 M5
3 M4X40
3 M4
1
3
3
1
3
3 RTS 3,5X9,5
1
1
3 077-93
1,2
3
3 M5X12
3 M5
3
3 050-63
3
3
3 M5X12
3 M5
3
Month
Mnad
Year
r
2000
Issue
01
102248
Month Year
11
04
Group
Gnipp
Page
Sida
33
W450H,W455H
Illustration
Illustration
Detergent container
Tvttmedelslada
Item
Art.No
Pos.
Art.nr
102248
Description
4326361-01
432 6363-01
432 6364-01
438 5082-01
Issue
Utgva
Detergent container
Box
Siphon
Handle
Sign
Benmning
Tvttmedelsbehallare
Lada
Hvert
Handtag
Skylt
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
Complete
Month
Mnad
Year
r
11
2004
Issue
01
102249
Month Year
11
04
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
35
W450H,W455H
Liquid detergent
Flytande tvttmedel
Item
Qua.
Pos.
Ant.
Rq
1
Rq
Rq
Description
Art.No
Art.nr
4326361-01
471 8144-11
438 4265-01
471 8682-02
471 8682-03
Detergent container
Hose
Bracket
Hose nipple
Hose nipple
Benmning
Tvttmedelsbehllare
Slang
Vridskydd
Slangnippel
Slangnippel
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
102249
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
Month
Mnad
Year
r
11
2004
See illustr. 102248

L=360
100797
Issue
Month
01
12
Year
89
Group
Page
Grupp
Sida
37
W450H,W455H

Item
Qua.
Art.No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.iir
Description
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
8236-52
8236-56
8236-60
8236-62
8236-64
8236-57
8236-68
8236-66
8236-65
8236-73
8236-76
6860-15
6860-16
6860-17
6860-18
6860-19
6860-20
8234-98
8234-92
8234-94
8234-95
8234-96
4792-01
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve
Coil
Coil
Coil
Coil
Coil
Coil
Diaphragm
Diaphragm
Filter
Restrictor
Restrictor
Tool
Benmning
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Spole
Spole
Spole
Spole
Spole
Spole
Membran
Membran
Filter
Strypbricka
Strypbricka
Verktyg
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
100797/1
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1
3
3
3
Month
Mnad
Year
r
2000
208-240V
208-240V
208-240V
208-240V
208-240V
208-240V
208-240V
EPDM 2, 120V 60Hz 3-way
EPDM 2, 240V 60Hz 3-way
3-way
120V Green
120V Orange
120V White
Green
Orange
White
NITRIL
EPDM USA
2,51/min
5,51/min
Issue
01
100799
Month Year
12
89
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
39
W450H,W455H

Tilloppsvent 3/4",l-vgs
Item
Qua.
Alt.No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nr
Description
471 8234-51
471 8234-52
471 8234-53
471 8234-56
471 8234-58
471 8234-61
471 8234-62
471 8234-63
471 6860-15
471 6860-16
471 6860-17
471 6860-18
471 6860-19
471 6860-20
471 8234-98
471 8234-92
471 8234-94
471 8234-95
471 8234-96
471 4792-01
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve
Coil
Coil
Coil
Coil
Coil
Coil
Diaphragm
Diaphragm
Filter
Restrictor
Restrictor
Tool
Benmning
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Ventil
Spole
Spole
Spole
Spole
Spole
Spole
Membran
Membran
Filter
Strypbricka
Strypbricka
Verktyg
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
100799/1
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
1,2 208-240V
1,2 50Hz/60Hz
1,2 120V 60Hz
1,2 208-240V
1,2 208-240V
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2 120V Green
1,2 120V Orange
1,2 120 V White
1,2 Green
1,2 Orange
1,2 White
1,2 NITRIL
1,2 EPDM
1
3 2,51/min
3 5,51/min
3
Month
Mnad
Year
r
2000
Issue
01
102238
Month Year
08
04
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
41
W450H,W455H
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
102238/1
Item
Qua,
Art.No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nr
Description
471 8240-71
471 8240-72
471 6860-18
471 6860-19
471 6860-20
471 8240-91
471 8234-92
471 8234-94
471 8234-95
471 8234-96
471 8234-97
471 4792-01
Valve
Valve
Coil
Coil
Coil
Coil
Diaphragm
Filter
Restrictor
Restrictor
Restrictor
Tool
Benmning
Ventil
Ventil
Spole
Spole
Spole
Spole
Membran
Filter
Strypbricka
Strypbricka
Strypbricka
Verktyg
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
1,2 4-way Complete

1,2 4-way Complete
1,2 Green
1,2 Orange
1,2 White
1,2 Grey
1,2 EPDM
1
1 2,51/min
1 5,51/min
1 1 Ol/min
1
Month
Mnad
Year
r
11
2004
00 00 00 00
-1^ -1^
to lO to to to
O J O J U ) U > U J U J U > U J U ) L J L * i U J U ) U 3 U J O J U > L J L * J U J L * J U J O J L J U ) U J U J O J L * J L * J h J i
I I I P--
K>
"O
o
t-j
I
4^ 4^ 4^ 4i. 4^ 4i- 4^ -t^ 4s^ 4^ 4^ 4:^ 4^ 4^ 4^ 4^ ^
4^ 4i. 4^
K> bO
Ô ^
o
o
to I'
> o o o o
SJ
\0
(-ft
o
K>
^
o
0
L^ U) Ul U> U>
-^ Lft U \0
O O O
i _
o v O ^
N L A 4
tOUitOS)LJUJtO^-
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
K - * > - ' h - H - ^ - H - ^ H - ^ - ^ \ 0 0 0 0 0
0 ^ 0 4 ^ - P ^ 4 i ^ 4 ^ L * J U J L J L J O
^ t O V 0 ^ 4 ^ t O ' 0 ^ ^ ^ t O ^ ^ J L ^ t O > -
tOUJ
^ ^ - O - O
0 0 0 0 0 0
N a s L A L
- 4 i ^ ^ ^
^
0
A
O
^ - ^
0 0 0
- ^ O
O - ^
O
O
O
O
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
N O N O N a \ O N O N L A L A
O O O O O O O O O O O t O O
O O O O O O O t O t 0 4 i >
U)
o to o o
o o o o o o s^
toojtototototototo
i O O O O O
u>
ON ^
L/l L A LA L A L A L A t o 2 o o L A LJ O N U i 4 ^ U J t o ^
I
o S3 I - *
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
O S J S ) t O t O t O t O t O t 0 1 s J S ) t O t O
^ 4 ^ U > L J U > L J L J L J U J U J U J
O O a N O N O N a N O N O N a N O N O N
O O O O O O O O O O ^ O O - P ^ U J ^ - L A O N O t O
oâN4i.4^4^-^^-l^-^^-^-^4^4i^4^4^4i--|i^-î'-F^-^^-t^-ti4^4^-^-î-ô
L*->UJL^L^L^LJLOUJUJWUJLtJLOL>>>Li>>UJOJUJLJLJLh}L^LOOJUJVO
ios)SitototosJtotototosJlotototototoiototototototO'
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
^ - j - o - - j ~ o - o - - j ^ ^ ^ ^ i - ^ - o - j - o ^ - o - - a ^ j - j ^ i ^ ^ ~ o - j - - o
4 : i . 4 ^ 4 ^ 4 i . 4 . 4 i - 4 ^ 4 ^ - F ^ 4 ^ ^ - ^ 4 ^ 4 i - - t ^ 4 ^ 4 i - - f i - - P ^ - t ^ 4 i . 4 i > . 4 : > . - f ^ 4 ^ 4 ^
0 0 0 0 - ^ ^ J O N O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O - J - - 0 ^ - - J O N - t ^ - ^ - t ^ 4 i ^ 4 i . t O O \ O N
O O 0 0 O ^ 0 ^ 0 N a ^ a ^ a ^ 0 ^ O ^ O ^ 0 ^ 0 N a ^ 0 ^ O ^ a N 0 ^ L A L A L A ^ ) ^ ^ ) ^ O - 0 ^ - t > - P k L ^ J O 0 N L A L ^ J
4 i . ^ H - o
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O t O t O t O t O L J 4 ^ t O O < l H - L A ^ a N
^j^^-j-JONONONa>aNaNO\ONONONONOONaNONONaNON4^4^4^4i^4i^-t-tototototo\o^
<'OJ
OJU>i'
t O S > I O I O t 0 4 ^ 4 ^ 4 ^ L ^ L O L O L O L O L O L J U ) U > O J L * ^ L * J L * J 4 ^ 4 ^ U J U J . F ^ L J L t J 4 ^ L * ^ L * J 4 ^ L O U J L J U J U ^ L * J L U O J L a
^ - - \ O i - - ' ' L A - J L h i L ^ L f c > L A L A i - - i - - '
- 0 - 0 ^ - 0 ^ - 0 - - J - 0 ^ - - 0 ^ ^ - 0 ' ' 1 - - ^ ^ ' ' ^ O ^ i ' ' s D - O i ' ^ - O ^ O ^ ^ ^ ^ V O ^ ^ L A
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
L A L A L A L A 4 ^ L J L J O J U > L J U J L * 3 L J L . J L . J t O t O t O t O I
O O O O ^ . f t < - f t ^ ^ t - f t 4 ^ 4 ^ - ^ 4 i ^ 4 ^ ^ - O O N O N a N - ( i . 4 i . 4 i - 4 i
t O t O t O I O t 0 4 i ^ O O - ^ O N a \ ^ - ^ ^ 0 - O L A V O v O ^ O L O L O O
lototo
4i- OJ t o I'
o o o o oo
to to to to lo
L t J L t J ^ U J L ^ J L ^ J ^ J ' ' ^ U J L A ^ L A - ^ ^ J ^ J ^ J ^ - - J L A
tototo
^ oo VO ^
O
O O O O O O O '
H-h-^
H - H - ^
LO
t a-- tt o
O tt o
O
^^ -- ^
^ L A L A ^ ^ J ^ L A L A L A L A ^ V O ^ ' O V O ^ O U J ^ V O ^ ^ L A L A O J L * J
O O O - J ^ ^ ^ l ^ ^ ^ ^ - O
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 0 0 0 - J - ^ ^ - 0 ^ ^ - 0 - 0 a
- i * > ' ' I ' I ' 4
to
O O H ^ ^ ^ - L I J N J
N J ' ^ O N L f t ^ O N U ) U J ^ - - J 4 ^ - F a . U > v O O O - J ' ^ 4 ^ v C i ^ ^ O N a N K ) ^ v O v o v o
LrtL/it^^^t^tÛ)tyi<_ftUt^t^t^t^<^t^t^<^LrtLAL/ityiLrt<^wiUi(^tyiu
o o o
^ i ^ ^ ^ h ^ H - ^ ^ K-N-h i - ' K - . ^ i - ' ^ ^ O O O O O O O o o o o o
t o t o to
0 0 0 0 ^ - J ^ ^ 4 ^ 4 ^ 4 ^ U J t O t O ( O t O ' ' > ' ' I p * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - J ~ O ^ J o <-/ u j t j j LJ
t o ON U L f t
4i.4s^^4:^4i.4i.4^4i.4^4i.4:i.4s,4i.4s^4^4i.4s,4.4:,4.4^4i.4i.4^4^4i.^4:^4i.4i.4;.4.4i.4i4i.^4i.4i.4i.4i,
O O O
^ ^ i _
* j 5 v
O N O
ON o oo oo' O O O O O O O O
UJ to ^
K ) â^ --J -t>. 4:Û>

LJ LJ VO Ô
O J O J LJ LJ L*J U ) Ul U ) U ) UJ UJ OJ U > O J O J U ) L ^ L * J U 1 L ^ U J U > U > L * J U > U ) U ) U ) L * J U J O J U : > U J O J U J U ) L J U J U J U > U ) U J U > L*J U ) U J U > U > U > U> U> U> UJ UJ U > U J LJ U J O J t > J LJ L ^ O J U J U J L*J
OO OO OO OO OO OO OO 00 oo oo oo oo o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 0 0 0 0 o o 0 0 o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 oo oo oo oo oo 00 oo oo oo oo 0 0 0 0 o o 0 0 OO t o
<-rt L r t U l U l ^ ^ L / l U t L f t L f t L f t <-/! t ^ t-/l L/l ^^ 4^ o o
ô oo t^ (^ ^^ ^^ VI U ) t ^ l-ft Ui LA
o o o o o o s
4^ 4^. 4^ ^
O aâ^4^4ûJ^JSito^JKô^Jtoôôs3^--H-H-H-H-H-oooo^J^(-/1^-nooo^^-J^^^<I--Joocoooooooooooooo^
to o o o to
o o o o o o
oo
o
(O
4:. 4^ ^ 4:^ 4i^ 4i^ 4^ 4:^ 4^ 4^ 4i^ 4:^ 4:^4^4^4i.4^4^4^4^4i^4^4^4^^4^4i.4i.4^4:i.4.^4ii.-(^4^-l^-fi.4^4^4^4i^ ^
to to
oo
-J
o
to
o
cro
2:
o
Page
Sida
2
Numerical index/Nummerregister
Art.No/Art.iir
471 8693-21
471 8750-14
471 8759-01
471 8759-51
471 8861-01
471 8861-01
471 8863-01
471 8863-01
471 9222-59
471 9727-01
471 9740-53
471 9746-01
471 9785-01
471 9813-01
471 9813-02
472 5783-02
472 6012-00
472 6013-00
472 6015-00
472 6016-00
472 6017-00
472 6761-01
472 8754-21
472 8754-21
472 9901-25
472 9901-26
472 9901-42
472 9901-81
472 9903-72
472 9903-78
472 9904-83
472 9904-91
472 9904-92
472 9913-01
472 9913-22
721 1252-35
725 2327-61
725 2366-61
725 2461-51
7312312-01
7312316-42
732 2114-01
732 2118-01
732 2118-01
735 2146-01
735 2146-01
736 2816-51
736 2816-51
736 2819-51
736 2825-51
736 2828-51
736 2837-51
736 2837-51
736 2840-51
736 2840-51
736 2840-51
736 2840-51
736 2843-51
736 2849-51
762 3131-01
877 5211-08
877 5211-08
Page/Sida
25
19
19
19
19
23
19
23
15
31
7
7
21
15
15
13
31
31
31
31
31
25
29
31
7
7
15
7
23
15
15
11
17
11
15
31
29
11
7
31
15
31
7
15
29
31
23
25
23
23
23
23
29
7
23
29
31
23
31
31
23
25
Page/Sida
Art.No/Art.nT
Page/Sida
Art.No/Art.nr
Page/Sida
B] Electrolux
ELECTROLUX LAUNDRY SYSTEMS SWEDEN AB
341 80 Ljungby, Sweden. Telephone +46 372 661 00. Telefax +46 372 133 90
Internet: www.electrolux-wascator.com E-mail: els.info@electrolux.se
Power bus (P-bus)

N interlock
1
L interlock
2
N
3
L
4
Data bus (D-bus)
Data
1
CLK
2
GND
3
+9VDC
4
L_''^^:M
Date
2005-09-28
User
Iy9chg
Format
A4
ELS
SE-341 80 LJUNGBY SWEDEN
Electric Documentation
WASHER EXTRACTORS
Principle schematic
Page 1
of 5
43232002616
A1
Q. CL 0.
0.
ii ii h a 11
n a
II
Woad* * *
Inpl ^
Serv
'J'
PB1
4^
-RSJST^
Emerg
FreewT T
D-bus
n .03 / Data bus .
Coin I
m TT
UevelT
_. Data bus / /3.03
rL
JtiL
Temp
54' - f j " ^ ,
12
82
uMr%m
D-bus
A5
PSU board
+9VDC
-^1.03/L (fuse)
/1.03/N(fuse)_^
^\-
P ^
Date
2005-09-28
User
lyQchg
Format A4
ELS
Elofitric
Documentation
1^
WASHER EXTRACTORS
^'rinciple schematic
Page 2
of 5
43232002616
m .
A1
" 1 1 12 1 3 1 4 1 5
Ifct
idi^
TY
P-busr
X
ICX.
Con 16
XI932
A8
A7
_^ Power bus. /
-///-
1 P-bus r
l^fjf^H-ffi^mi'ytffl'^ if Con I7TStiT
Con 14
_^ Data bus. /
12.061 Data bus _ ^

/1.07 / Power bus.
TT
T ~ r
1 RS232, . . .
D-bus r - r ' T T , D - b u s l l l J P - l o a d .
. . . ^
;i
IL
A11
"5^^:
57 s^
0^ 4=
?J
7~T
U)
JH
i I i i ^ ^ j j i i i i i i i i I I
l
Serv
] [
/1.03/HEAT N ,
/1.03/HEAT L ,
wm
/*!
1 ^
<*
I*
"
PfelP^M^lel
"cfiTfi ^ *?! rîOT1Wi wTJ:
Program
selector
A9
Y24
" ^
Y22I A Y20
Y13
13
A Y12
A YIII
v^
Quick
Wash
Switches
Display
^
A101
Date
User
2005-09-28
Iy9chg
A4
ELS
WASHER EXTRACTORS
Principle schematic
Page 3
of 5
43232002616
ID.
Beskrivning
Description
Beschreibung
Description
AI
A5
A7
A8
A9
A11
A101
A104
A106
B1
B2
B3
84
E1
E2
Fl
F2
F13
K21
M1
S3
S4
T2
U1
Y1
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y20
Y22
Y24
Y80
Elektroniskt programverk
Power Supply Unit
Elektroniskt proaramverk disolav
Programvljare
Panelskylt
l/O-kort 1
Manverpanelmodul
Bakre elmodul
Vrmemodul
Temperaturgivare
Nivvakt
Rotationsaivare
Nivgivare tvttprogram
Varmeelement
varmeelement
Skring manver 5AT
Skring manver 5AT
Skrina Trafo sekundr
Vmiekonlaktor
Motor
Grnslaesbrvtare stnad lucka
Grnslgesbrytare lst lucka
Transformator motorstyming
Motorstvrnina
Ventil aviopp
Ventil inlopp kallt fack 1
Ventil inlopp varmt trumma
Inlet valve hot. soap box 2
Ventil inlopp varmt fack 4
Lucklsspole
Electronic timer
Elektronisches Programmwerk
Minuterie lectn>nique
Electronic timer, disolav

Program selector
Panel sign
I/O card 1
Control panel module
Rear electrical module
Heatina module
Temperature sensor
Level switch
Rotation sensor
Level transmitter wash program
Heating element
Heatina element
Fuse control system 5AT
Fuse control system 5AT
Fuse transfomier secondary
Heating contactor
Motor
Limit switch door closed
Limit switch door locked
Transformer motor controller
Motor controller
Drain valve
Inlet valve cold, soap box 1
Inlet valve cold, soao box 2
Inlet valve cold, soap box 3
Inlet valve hot, drum
Inlet valve cold, soao box 4
Inlet valve hot, soap box 4
Coil door lock
Elektronisches Proarammwerk. Disolav
Minuterie lectroniaue. cran
Panelschild
I/O-Karte 1
Steuerfeldmodul
Hinteres Elektromodul
Heizmodul
Temperaturênsor
Niveauschalter
Rotationssensor
Niveaugeber Waschprogramm
Heizelement
Heizelement
Sicherung Steuersystem 5AT
Sicherung Steuersystem 5AT _
Sicheruna
Heizkontaktgeber
Motor
Grenzpositionsschalter aeschlossene Tr
Grenzpositionsschalter verriegelte Tr
Transformator Motorsteuemng
Motorsteueruna
Ventil Abfluss
Ventil Einlauf Kalt Fach 1
Ventil Einlauf Warm Trommel
Ventil Einlauf Warm Fach 2
Ventil Einlauf Warm Fach 4
Spule Trverriegelung
Symbole panneau de commande

Carte E/S 1
Module panneau de commande
Module lectrique amre
Module chauffaae
Capteur de temperature
Intemipteur de niveau
Caoteur de rotation
Intemjpteur de niveau programme de lavage
Element chauffant
Element chauffant
Fusible commande 5AT
Fusible commande 5AT
Fusible
Contacteur chauffage
Moteur
Contact fin de course porte feme
Contact fin de course porte verrouille
Transformator Motorsteuemng
Contrleur du moteur
Vanne de vidange
Vanne d'admission, froid, bolte produits 1
Vanne d'admission. froid. botte oroduits 2
Vanne d'admission, froid, boite produits 3
Vanne d'admission, chaud, tambour
Vanne d'admission. chaud. boTte produits 2
Vanne d'admission, chaud, boite produits 4
Bobine verrouillage porte
Date
2005-09-28
User
Iy9chg
Format
A4
ELS
Electric
Documentation
1^
WASHER EXTRACTORS
^Component list
Page 4
of 5
43232002616
Rear view
A9
S3 S4a
S4b Y80
T2
2005-09-28
Date
User
Iv9chg
Format A4
ELS
WASHER EXTRACTORS
Component place list
Page 5
of 5
43232002616
1
/
;/.
I
4
r
I
I
I ordic
*2
1
1
LOiPAT
Tumble dryer, T4130
COMPASS CONTROL
MICROPROCESSOR
RESIDUAL MOISTURE CONTROL
TEMPERATURE AND TIME

SELECTION
STAINLESS STEEL REVERSING

DRUM
LOW ENERGY CONSUMPTION
ANTI-CREASE CYCLE
REVERSIBLE DOOR
SERVICE PROGRAM
STACKABLEONTOPOFW455H
^w^r-**
' f *T" nMlllillB
Model T4130
LOiPART AB
P.O. Box 694
SE 441 18 Allngss, Sweden
Phone
+46 322 66 83 60
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail
lolpart@loipart.se
Exclusive Sales of
E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment
The tumble dryer T4130 with Compass

Control microprocessor works with RMC
(Residual Moisture Control) for an accurate
drying result and a low energy consumption.
The start and programs are selected by a
control knob fitted on the control panel
together with a large and clear display.
The dryer has a reversing drum for less tangling oflarge items.
Anti-crease cycle in the end ofprogram means
that the drum rotates a few seconds every
minute untU the garment is removed.
The tumble dryer T4130 is provided with
service program for adjustment of different
parameters.
All vital parts are easily accessible for simple
service from front and rear.
The machine must be secured to the floor,
alternatively stacked on topofwasher extractor W455H using optional stacking kit..
Forfijrtherspecifications, please see overleaf.
19-117
DOC.NO.
EDITION 1
19-117L
11.05
TUMBLE DRYER, T4130

Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm
78
78
-tr
&
100
197
1. Door opening 0 370 mm

2. Elearical conneaion
3. Exhaust conneaion 0 100 mm
Specification
Innerdrum
Capacity, kg
Weight kgs
:4(
Model/Type
Voltage V
filling factor
1:24
filling factor
1:22
volume litres
diameter mm
5.5
6.0
130
575
T4130
400 3-50
440 3-60
Loading
kW
Fuse
A
5.3
10
net
gross
60
67
Shipping
volume m3
0.520
* other voltages available on request

Specification
Type
Total time
fiiU load*
Energy
consumption
kWh/load*
Evaporation
g/min
Energy
kWh/litre
water
evaporated
Heating
electricity
kW
Air outlet
mm
Evacuated air
m'/h
Pressure drop
max Pa
Sound level
dB(A)
T4130
34 min
2.75
81
0.93
5.1
0 100
260
60
<70
* At rated capacity 100% cotton load at 50% initial moisture dryed to 0%.
Positioning of machines:
Installation:
The tumble dryer is to be secured. The machine
is delivered with faaory mounted fittings for
attachment to the ship deck by means of 4 M8
bolts.
300*
175
fo
ot
416
|0
O.
Machine front
1MIi
573
100
. 12 5
Optional extra
Model
98 88 02
Description
Stacking kit
19-117
7n* *
595
Installation manual
T4130
487 03 32 61.00
EN-
Safety instructions
Safety instructions
1^
This machine is only intended for drying water-washed

garments.
Clothes that have been cleaned with chemicals/inflammable
liquids, must NOT be dried in the machine.
Remove clothes from the tumble dryer as soon as they are dry.
This prevents them from becoming creased, and reduces the
risk of spontaneous ignition.
The machine must not be used for drying foam rubber or
foamlike materials.
The machine must not be used for drying floor mops*.
The machine must not be used by minors.
The machine must not be hosed down with water.
Mechanical, electrical and gas installations must only be
carried out by authorised personnel.
If the machine has a fault, this must be reported as soon as
possible to the person in charge. This is important for your
own safety and for the safety of others.
Gas dryers only:
The machine is not to be installed In rooms containing cleaning
machines with perchloroethylene, TRICHLOROETHYLENE or
CHLOROFLUOROCONTAINING HYDROCARBONS as cleaning
agents.
What to do if you smell gas:
Do not try to light any appliance.
Do not touch any electrical switch; do not use any phone in
your building.
Evacuate the room, building or area.
Contact the laundry manager.
* Applies only to floor mops containing polypropylene.
The dryer must not be installed behind a lockable door or a

sliding door. In the rooms where the dryer is to be installed the
door hinges must be on the outer side.
Contents
Contents
Technical data
Dimension sketch
Unpacking
Positioning
Floor mounting
Door reversal
Installation on board a ship
10
Washing column
11
Condensate dryer
12
Installation of ventilating system
12
Electric installation
13
Evacuation system
14
Air principle
14
Freshair
14
Exhaust duct
15
17
Function check
18
The manufacturer reserves the right to modify design and

material specifications without notice.
Technical data
Technical data - T4130/4130C
Drum volume
Standard dryer
Condens
130 liter
130 liter
Weight:
Netto
48 kg
52 kg
Drum:
Diameter
Depth
Revolutions
G-factor
575 mm
500 mm
53 rpm
0.9
575 mm
500 mm
53 rpm
0.9
Capacity:
5,5 kg
5,5 kg
Heat effect:
5,1 / 3 , 2 k W
3,0 kW
0,13 kW
2800 rpm
3360 rpm
0,20 kW
2800 rpm
3360 rpm
Motor:
Effect
Revolutions 50 Hz
Revolutions 60 Hz
260 m3/h
Air consumption:
Piping:
Evacuation
Condensation water
0 100
1/2" hose to drain
Pressure drop:
Evacuation 50/60 Hz
max. 60 Pa
Sound pressure level:
< 70 dB (A)
< 70 dB (A)
Teclinical data
Dimension sketcii
595
735
A97_.
_|T1
^^1
'-
,44
- 1 -
49
510
CM
O
t
o
(O
CM
' '1
500
mi
T-
1
/
/
/
/
//////////////////////////////////////
Unpacking
Unpacking
Unpacl< the dryer from the pacl<aging.

There are no transportation fittings. Release
the dryer from the pallet by cutting the plastic
ribbon.
Positioning
Place the dryer in such a way that work can

be done as easily as possible by the user as
well as the service technician. The door is
reversible.
The distance to the wall or other equipment
behind the dryer should be min. 300 mm and
the distance to the sides min. 70 mm (if the
dryer is to be equipped with a coin box the
width of the coin box must also be added).
However, for the purpose of servicing the dryer
there should be free access to the bacl< of it.
The dryer can be positioned on a 55-litre

washing machine to form a washing column.
IVIeclianical installation
Fig Adjust the dryer to ensure that it is horizontal
^2) and stands firmly on all 4 feet.
The max, height adjustment is 14 mm.
Floor mounting
Fig The dryer can be installed directly on the floor
(^ and fastened by means of the accompanying
Fasten the cups by means of the
screws.
A drilling plan is given in fig. 3
in the form of alternative 1 (from
the rear) or 2 (from the side),
depending on the space for
mounting the rocl<er brackets B.
Drill the rawlplug holes using a 10
mm drill.
42,5
510
42,5
Alt.1
Door
Door reversal
1. Disconnect the power supply to the dryer.

2. Loosen the hinge mounting and push it down to
allow the door to be lifted off. See step 4.
Unscrew the hinge mounting.
NB! Hold the door securely while loosening the
screws.
3. Unscrew the
cover screws at the
opposite side and
loosely attach the
hinge mounting.
Screw in the cover
screws where the
hinge was
previously
mounted.
Upper pivot
7. Release the
locking plates by
loosening the barb
with a screwdriver.
8. Lift off the back
panel. Press the
locking plates out,
swap them over and
press into position.
Lower pivot
TOP
4. Dismount the handle.

Place the door on a non-abrasive base.
5. Remove all screws (A=14 pes.) from the edges.
6. Remove the upper and lower pivots.
TOP
r
i^11
9. Turn the back panel 180 (half a turn) as shown.

10. Assemble the door. Tighten the screws along the
edges. Fit the upper and lower pivots.
Mount the handle.
11. Mount the door. Push the hinge mounting

upwards and tighten the screws.
12. Test the door (use washers to adjust the hinge if
necessary). Check that door pin (B) is aligned with
the microswitch aperture.
13. Connect the power to the dryer Finally, check
that the dryer stops when the door is opened.
10

if the dryer is intended for installation on
board a ship, fittings are mounted from factory
(instead of ifeet) on the dryer for attachment to
the ship floor by means of 4 M8 bolts.
Drilling plan, see fig. 1.
12,5
573
Front
12,5
Washing column
Washing column
The dryer can be installed on top of a 55-litre
washing machine WE455H or on a 130-litre
dryer T4130(C).
The lower machine must be levelled and rest
on all four feet.
Fig Place the frame on the top plate of the
' ^ lower machine, ensuring that the holes for the
fastening bracket A are at the rear.
Screw the dryer feet of the upper machine all

the way home to ensure that they do not touch
the top plate of the lower machine.
Lift the dryer into position, thereby making
sure that the machine fronts flush.
Fig As a protection against tilting, the two
accompanying plate screws are to be inserted
in either side in holes B.
If holes B are not provided in the side plates,

drill them with a 3.3 mm drill.
Note! If it is hard to read the display adjust
the contrast in the service menu (see the
programming manual supplied the dryer).
11
12
Condensate dryer
Condensate dryer
Kondenstumbleren har ikke aftrk
(evakuering) til det fri.
The air is circulated in a closed system
between the dryer and condensing unit.
The water in the garments condenses in the
condensing unit.
All the energy (3,4/2,4 kW) used for drying
the garments ends up in the room in the
form of heat.
During operation, the room experiences
a temperature increase, which results in
a need for ventilation.
The moisture ends up as water in the
drains.
Fig Note! The hose must be "sloping"
"i^ towards the drain and not form a water
trap.
Installation of ventilating system
r
For ventilation, a thermostatically

controlled fan, type EQ 250, is
used. It can be ordered as item
no 988 80 20 43.
Fig The fan is to be placed on a
wall facing the outside behind
the condensate dryer, while the
thermostat is placed further into
the room in an accessible place.
The fresh air intake must end

in the room in front of the dryer,
positioned diagonally from the fan.
Pressure drop max.: 10 Pa.
The fresh air requirement
per dryer is 750 m3/h (if the
temperature is kept constant).
The need for fresh air varies and is controlled
by the thermostat.
4 . :x:: ^ 1 1
# .
ifm^r
jfzrv <::>{
vC* uCXr . . ^ 4 K 4M>iin'>

M-vii-
' -.W ..jfr j - ' W ^ y ^ W f r Y
13
Condensate dryers
Ways to change over condensate dryers
To be carried out by qualified personnel
3 X 400/415V + N 3,4kW
A
3 X 200/230/240V 3,4kW
B1
1 X 230/240V 3,4kW
Applies to all dryer types
U1
HH"
H2
'1
HI
V6
V2
T"
W1
HI :2000W
H2: 1000W
V4-1
14
Installation
Evacuation system
(does nsi apply to condensate dryers)
Air principle
The ventilator creates low pressure in the
dryer, drawing air into the drum via the heating
unit.
The heated air passes through the garments
and the holes of the coarse filter.
Then the air flows through a lint screen
positioned in the door. After this, the air is
evacuated through the fan and the evacuation
system.
It is very important that the dryer gets enough
fresh air, see next section.
Fresh air
For the machine to work optimally with the
shortest
possible drying time, it is important
for the air input to the room to come from an
aperture from outside through which the same
amount of air is taken into the room as is
blown out. To avoid a draught in the room, the
air inlet should preferably be placed behind the
dryer.
The free area* of the air inlet aperture must
be five times the area of the exhaust duct.
The resistance in the grating/slats should not
exceed 10 Pa (0.1 mbar).
The air consumption is approx. 260 m^/h.
Note that grates/slatted openings often block
half the total area of the fresh air intake.
Remember to make allowance for this fact
when dimensioning.
* The free area is the area which the air can
flow through without resistance from grate/
slatted opening.
15
Installation
Exhaust duct
The exhaust duct must be smooth on the
inside (low air resistance).
The exhaust duct must lead to the outdoors.
The exhaust duct must lead clear of the
building as condensation may cause frost
damage to the building.
The exhaust duct must be protected against
rain and foreign objects.
Fig The exhaust duct must have gentle bends.
The exhaust duct must not be a shared duct
between
dryers and appliances using gas or
other fuels as their energy source.
When several dryers share an exhaust duct
Fig The exhaust duct diameter must increase after
' ^ each dryer.
The table below shows the exhaust duct

diameter and the necessary fresh-air inlet area.
Note! It is recommended that each dryer is
connected to a separate exhaust duct.
f\
The exhaust duct

diameter must not
be reduced.
** If the exhaust duct lenght exceeds 6 m the diameter must be increased.
No. of
dryers
Exhaust
m3/h
d
mm
Fresh air inlet

cm2
Exhaust duct
lenght 0-6m d
**Exhaust duct
lenght 6-50m d
260
0100
400
0100
0120
520
0100
800
0160
0200
780
0100
1200
0200
0250
1040
0100
1600
0250
0350
16
Installation
Evacuation system
Gentle bends
Several dryers share an exhaust duct
1XTlrff^f'
As
17
Installation
The dryer must be given a fuse group of its

own and switch in accordance with IEC 60947.
For each dryer, a multi-pole permanent switch
is to be placed in the permanent installation. It
must be easily accessible, but there must be
no mistaking it for the operating switch for the
dryer.
The motor features an integrated thermal fuse,
which is why motor protection in the installation
is unnecessary.
Remove the top plate of the dryer to connect
the cable. Install the dryer as a permanent
installation.
See dimensions in the table.
Function check, see next page.
The dryer must be equipped with
supplementary protection in accordance with
current regulations.
0'
External fan
'
A connection terminal is available for

controlling an external fan.
X2 1 - ^
Connection
of external
contactor
Standard
dryer
Condensate dryer
Voltage
Ext. connection
Max. 1,25A
(Does not apply for marine models)
Cable dimensioning table
Type
Powerintake
Heating
Fuse
400-440V
200-240V
230-240V
230-240V
3N / 3 AC
3 AC
3 AC
1 AC
5,3 kW
5.3 kW
3.4 kW
3,4 kW
5,1 kW
5.1 kW
3.2 kW
3,2 kW
10A
16A
10A
16A
400-440V
230-240V
230-240V
200V
3N / 3 AC
3 AC
1 AC
3 AC
3,4 kW
3,4 kW
3,4 kW
3,4 kW
3,0 kW
3,0 kW
3,0 kW
3,0 kW
10A
10A
16A
16A
18
Function check
Funktion clieck
Check whether the drum is empty and the door

has been closed.
Start the dryer
Check whether the door lock is working:
The drum must stop if the loading door is
opened.
Fig The dryer has a one-phased motor, which
r^ is why the direction of rotation (clockwise) is
^ ^ always correct.
Marine version
For dryers on board a ship (3-phase motor) the
direction of rotation must be checked.
If the direction of rotation is not correct, swop
two phases on the connection terminal.
Final test
Let the dryer work for 5 minutes on a program
that requires heat.
Then check whether the heating is working by
opening the front door and feel the heat.
If the above tests-points are in order, the dryer
is ready for use.
Service organisation/dealer
If deficiencies or errors are detected, please
contact your local service organisation/dealer.
W/^yyyy///y^^///y///^y^yyy/yy//y^yyyy/y
H Electrolux
ELECTROLUX LAUNDRY SYSTEMS DENMARK A/S

steitro 4, DK-5690 Tommerup, Telefon +45 63 76 20 00. Telefax +45 63 76 22 00.
Internet: www.electrolux.dk/laundrysystems E-mail: els. vaskerisysfswrerlectrolux.dk
Operating Manual
T4130
487033231.00
EN
Contents
Contents
Safety instructions
General
Control Panel
Control knob
Display
Drying Program
Drying Functions
Start
Stop
Changing drying program after starting
Handling
5
5
5
6
7
9
9
9
9
11
17
Error Messages
13
Maintenance
15
The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes to design and

material specifications.
Safety instructions
!\
Safety
This machine is only intended for drying water-washed garments.

Clothes that have been cleaned with chemicals/inflammable liquids,
must NOT be dried in the machine.
Remove clothes from the tumble dryer as soon as they are dry. This
prevents them from becoming creased, and reduces the risk of spontaneous ignition.
The machine must not be used for drying foam rubber or foamlike
materials.
The machine must not be used for drying floor mops*.
The machine must not be used by children.
The machine must not be hosed down with water.
Mechanical, electrical installation MUST only be carried out by qualified
personnel!
Report machine faults and refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
This is important for your own safety and for the safety of other users.
*Applies only to floor mops containing polyproylene.
Textiles as silk and wool must not be overdried
to avoid the risk of wrinkage.
General
Control Panel
Fig. The control panel is used to choose the drying program with options and
( j } to start and stop the machine. The panel houses a control knob and a display.
r^
Display
Control knob
Control knob
r<^
The control knob is used to select drying program

and any other available functions.
Turn the knob until the required program is

shown on the display.
Fig.
Confirm your choice by pushing in the knob.
Fig.
Repeat this procedure until all the required

functions have been chosen.
r<^
6180
General
Display
Fig.
The display presents the drying programs and

additional functions. The up and down arrows on
the right-hand side of the display indicate that
there are more options available in the current
menu. Turn the l<nob for next program.
Note!
If there is not enough room to show all the
text on the display, the first part will be displayed briefly before the text scrolls to the
side to display the second part. This sequence will be repeated as long the text in question is activated.
General
Drying Program
Tiie maciiine is programmed witli a number of
programs adapted to tiie range of uses to wliicli
tiie machine is intended.
Tiie following drying programs can be available:
^
Drying program EXTRA DRY.*
Drying program DRY.*
Fjg- Drying program iRON DRY 5 %.*
* Automatic program controlled by Residual

Moisture Control (RMC) to the specified dryness.
Fjg- Time program X yiNUTES program. Duration
( l ) depends on the selected time, up to 90 minutes.
r
IRON DRY 5%
15 MINUTES
r
15 MINUTES
30 MINUTES
General
Drying Functions
START
Fjg- Turn the control knob to the START row. Press
Cl) the knob to start the selected program.
r
EXTRA DRY
HIGH TEMP
START
CHANGE TEMPERATURE
STOP
^
Press the control knob to stop the program.
Ci) Restart the drying program by pressing the
control knob again.
Changing drying program after starting
r(I>
Fig. Press the control knob to stop the program. Turn

(3) the control knob to the new program and press.
r
DRY
IRON DRY 5%
Handling
Starting with control knob
Fig. Select tiie desired drying program with the
(T)
control knob and confirm by pressing the
knob.
11
r<T>
Fig. Turn knob clockwise to change drying

(2)
temperature.
EXTRA DRY
DRY
Fig. Press knob and select desired temperature:

(t)
HIGH (70 C), MEDIUM (60 C) or LOW (50
C).
Press knob to start.
r<?>
EXTRA DRY
On coin-operated machines the duration of the

program is controlled by the coin/token inserted
Pay for the desired time.
Select temperature and confirm by pressing

the knob.
Press knob to start.
Note!
The programmes EXTRA DRY, DRY and IRON
DRY 5% are not available on machines where
payment is done before the dryer is started.
HIGH TEMP
CHANGE TEMPERA
EXIT
r
SELECT TEMP
HIGH TEMPERA
MEDIDM TEMPERATURE
Error messages
Error Messages
Fig.
(T)
13
r<!>
A fault in the program or in the machine is

indicated by an error message comprising
an error code and a descriptive text.
The washing program and the error code can
be reset before restarting by holding in the knob
for at least 10 seconds or turning off the power to
the machine.
CodeText
Cause/Action
E10
INCORRECT PROGRAMMING
Programming error/incorrect or missing parameter(s).
Ell
DRYING ERROR WITH RMC PROGRAM

Maximum allowable RIVIC time exceeded (non-coin
operated models only).
El2
DRYING ERROR WITH AUTOSTOP PROGRAM

Maximum allowable Autostop time exceeded (noncoin operated models only).
E15 NO VACU1V1 DETECTED
The vacuum switch/pressostat does not shut within 12

seconds after the dryer is started.
For other error messages or repeated error messages, contact service personnel.
Maintenance
Maintenance
The following should be carried out at regular
intervals, depending on the frequency of use.
15
r^
Picture of removing the
lint screen from the door is
missing.
Daily
Check that the dnjm stops when the door is
opened.
Check that the lint screen in the door has
been cleaned. The lint screen must be
removed for cleaning. Use a soft brush or your
hand. Remember to re-install the lint screen.
Fig.
Fig.
Check that the gaskets around the coarse

filter/air condenser and the door gasket have
been cleaned. Clean with a moist cloth.
Check that the lint screen is unbroken.
Check that the machine will not start until the
start button has been activated.
Quarterly/Semi-annually
Check that the fresh-air intake at the rear of

the machine is not clogged by lint or blocked
in any other way.
Check that the evacuation system is tight and

that the ducts are not clogged by lint or dust or
blocked in any other way.
Wipe off/clean drum and lifters with citric acid

(Acidum citricum). If soap/softener residue
remains, it is recommended also to use a
coarse sponge.
The frequency of cleaning should depend on
the operating frequency - with a minimum of
once a quarter.
Remove the coarse filter for lint removal.
r^
Pscture of cleaning the iint
screeer) using a soft brush is
missing.
16
Maintenance
Annually
Checl< that the fresh-air intal<e to the room and
the vent ducts/pipes in and from the room are not
clogged by lint/dust or in any other way. Clean
as required, depending on the frequency of use.
Minimum once a year.
At least once a year the inside wearing parts of
the machine should be checked by a service
person and cleaned of lint.
H] Electrolux

Reservdelskatalog
T4130, T4130C
Tumble dryer
Torktumlare
DOC. NO. 487 0999-94

36.2005
EDITION
Group
Grupp
List of issues
T4130,T4130C
Illustration
200231
200234
200235
200236
200237
200238
200239
200240
200241
200242
200243
200244
200245
Page
31
11
23
29
15
17
7
9
13
19
21
25
27
Table of contents
Control unit
Control panel with Compass Control
Motor alternative
Transformer, marine/ condensation
Drum, compl.
Drum, condensation
Cabinet
Cabinet, condensation
Door complete
Rear panel, complete
Rear panel, condensation
Heater unit, el
Condenser unit
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
5
T4130,T4130C
Table of contents
Innehllsforteckning
Cabinet
Door complete
*Drum, compl.
'Drum, condensation
*Rear panel, complete
*Rear panel, condensation
Motor alternative
Heater unit, el
*Condenserunit
'Transformer, marine/ condensation
'Control unit
Kabinett
Kabinet, kondens
Manver panel med Compass Control
Lucka komplett
Trumma kompl.
Trumma, kondens
Bakstycke, komplett
Bakstycke, kondens
Motoralternativ
Uppvrmningsenhet, el
Kondensenhet
Transformator, marine/ kondens
Automatenhet
Page/Sida
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
I ssue Month Year

01
20 02 39
05
05
Group
Page
Grupp
Sida
7
T4130
Cabinet
Kab nett
Item
Qua
Att.No
Pos.
Ant
Art.nr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
487 1760-29
124 0459-01
487 1699-01
125 8323-00
487 1668-55
487 1668-96
488 0383-10
487 1959-10
487 1818-18
487 1670-40
4871671-40
487 1880-56
487 1749-89
125 8138-02
487 1760-31
125 8120-21
487 1973-24
487 1749-07
487 1749-06
725 2501-51
487 1749-05
732 2120-01
Description
Hinge
Plug
Plug
Reinforcement
Bracket
Guiding element
Screw
Sealing strip
Top panel
Spacer element
Cabinet
Hinge plate
Foot
Screen
Screw
Grid
Assembly set
Disc
Spacer element
Screw
Fitting
Locking nut
Benmning
Gangjrn
Plugg
Plugg
Frstrkning
Hllare
Gland
Skruv
Ttningslist
Topplt
Distansstycke
Kabinett
Gngjamsplt
Fot
Luftgaller
Skmv
Galler
Monteringssats
Skiva
Distansstycke
Skruv
Beslag
Lsmutter
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
200239/1
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
White
M4X10
Stainless
Grey
Grey
M5X12
Black
Marine
M10X50
M10
Month
Mnad
Year
Ar
2005
Issue Mcntn Yean

01
20 02 40
06
05
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
9
T4130C
Kabinet, kondens
Item
Qua
Art.No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
487 1760-29
124 0459-01
487 1699-01
125 8323-00
487 1668-55
487 1880-56
487 1668-96
488 0383-10
487 1959-10
487 1818-18
487 1668-35
487 1670-40
487 1671-40
487 1749-89
487 1760-31
125 8090-32
125 8120-21
Description
Hinge
Plug
Plug
Reinforcement
Bracket
Hinge plate
Guiding element
Screw
Sealing strip
Top panel
Guide pin
Spacer element
Cabinet
Foot
Screw
Condensing unit
Grid
Benmning
Gangjrn
Plugg
Plugg
Frstrkning
Hllare
Gngjarnsplt
Gland
Sknjv
Ttningslist
Topplt
Styrtapp
Distansstycke
Kabinett
Fot
Skruv
Kondensaggregat
Galler
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
200240/1
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
White
M4X10
Stainless
Grey
Grey
M5X12
Black
Month
Mnad
Year
Ar
2005
Issue Month Year

01
06
05
20 02 34
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
11
T4130,T4130C
Manver panel med Compass Control
Item
Qua
Art.No
Pos.
Ant,
Art.nr
487 2434-07
487 2434-00
432 6344-01
472 5788-01
487 2293-06
487 2293-07
487 2293-04
Description
Compas Control
Control panel
Locking ring
Panel sign
Type plade
Type plade
Instruction plate
Benmning
Compas Control
Manverpanel
Lsring
Panelskylt
Typskylt
Typskylt
Instruktionsskylt
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
200234/1
Info
Notes
Info
Anmri<ning
1,2
3
1,2
3
3 T4130
3 T4130C
3
Month
Mnad
Year
Ar
2005
Issue Month Year

01
20 02 dl
06
05
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
13
T4130,T4130C
Door complete
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
Lucka komplett
200241/1
Item
Qua
Art. No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
16
432 2620-09
487 1975-53
487 1920-83
487 2232-40
487 1760-32
488 0349-13
487 1880-10
487 1699-29
647 1253-01
125 8381-03
487 1668-54
487 1698-98
125 8398-04
125 8396-04
125 8598-00
487 1699-27
487 1749-80
Description
Sign
Front door complete
Door handle
Front door
Lock pin
Screw
Insert
Inner door
Rubber bushing
Seal
Bracket
Snap catch
Filter
Lint screen
Cover
Door gasket
Pin
Benmning
Skylt
Frontlucka komplett
Luckhandtag
Frontlucka
Lstapp
Skruv
Kuts
Innerdrr
Gummibussning
Ttning
Hllare
Snapls
Filter
Luddfilter
Avskrmning
Luckpackning
Stift
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
Electrolux
Grey
Silvergrey
Grey
K40X12
Stainless
Month
Mnad
Year
Ar
2005
Issue Month Year

02
20 02 37
08
05
Page
Sida
15
Group
Grupp
T4130
Drum, compl.
Trumma kompl.
item
Qua
Art. No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
487 0285-32
128 0024-30
647 1219-60
036 6160-01
125 8496-03
125 8384-09
128 0000-70
125 8692-01
487 1699-24
125 8388-23
128 0000-60
487 1760-35
487 0412-64
487 1749-12
471 1764-17
487 1880-07
487 0105-19
489 0112-57
732 2112-01
487 1699-84
487 1749-15
Description
Flange
Sealing ring
Lock
Switch
Stop
Flange
Seal
Angular slide componenet
Cover
Cover
Felt sealing
Microswitch
Cable set
Support roller
Drum
Lifter
Drive belt
Bearing housing
Locking nut
Bearing house with bearing
Flange
Benmning
Flans
Ttningsring
Ls
Brytare
Stopp
Flns
Ttning
Glidvinkel
Avskrmning
Huv
Filtttning
Mikrobrytare
Ledningssats
Stdrulle
Trumma
Valk
Drivrem
Lagerhus
Lsmutter
Lagerhus med lagring
Flns
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
200237/2
Info
Notes
Info
AnmrknIng
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Grey
Complete
M4
Month
Mnad
Year
Ar
2005
Issue Month Year

02
20 02 38
08
05
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
17
T4130C
Drum, condensation
Trumma, kondens
Item
Qua
Pos.
Ant.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Art.No
Art.nr
487 0285-33
128 0024-30
647 1219-60
036 6160-01
125 8496-03
125 8384-09
128 0000-70
125 8692-01
487 0281-64
487 2434-04
128 0000-60
487 1760-35
487 0412-62
487 1749-12
125 8742-03
125 8391-10
125 4041-00
487 2434-08
471 1764-17
487 1880-07
487 0105-19
489 0112-57
732 2112-01
487 1699-84
487 1749-15
Description
Flange
Sealing ring
Lock
Switch
Stop
Flange
Seal
Angular slide componenet
Thermostat
Bracket
Felt sealing
Microswitch
Cable set
Support roller
Ring
Seal
Temperature sensor
Bracket
Drum
Litter
Drive belt
Bearing housing
Locking nut
Bearing house with bearing
Flange
Benamning
Flans
Ttningsring
Ls
Brytare
Stopp
Flns
Ttning
Glidvinkel
Termostat
Hllare
Filtttning
Mikrobrytare
Ledningssats
Stodrulle
Ring
Ttning
Termogivare
Hllare
Trumma
Valk
Drivrem
Lagerhus
Lsmutter
Lagerhus med lagring
Flns
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
200238/2
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
Complete
OHS
Complete
Complete
NTC
NTC
Complete
Grey
Complete
M4
Month
Mnad
Year
r
2005
I ssue Month Year

02
20 02 i2
OB
05
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
19
T4130
Rear panel, complete
Bakstycke, komplett
Item
Qua
Art.No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
* 12
487 1747-29
487 1749-59
487 2434-05
647 1209-42
487 0289-09
647 1209-44
125 8112-15
487 1699-18
487 0289-01
487 1747-31
125 8148-00
725 2327-51
Description
Rear panel
Sensor
Cover plate
Sealing strip
Lock-nut
Sealing strip
Air channel
Casing
Cable glands
Air reducing plate
Felt sealing
Screw
Bennnning
Bakre plat
Sensor
Tackplt
Ttningslist
Kontramutter
Ttningslist
Luftkanal
Kpa
Kabelavlastare
Damperplt
Filtttning
Skmv
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
200242/2
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
Complete
M20
8x3x300
M20
M5X12
Month
Mnad
Year
Ar
2005
1 SSLB Month Year

02
20 02 i3
08
05
Page
Sida
21
Group
Grupp
T4130C
Rear panel, condensation
Bakstycke, kondens
Item
Qua
Art.No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
* 13
* 14
* 15
* 16
* 17
* 18
* 19
* 20
*21
22
*23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
487 1699-19
724 1297-01
487 1699-05
731 2312-01
487 1699-06
487 1699-49
125 8147-00
488 0383-10
487 1749-59
487 1668-66
487 0289-01
487 1747-62
647 1209-42
487 2434-05
487 0289-09
647 1209-44
471 6859-83
487 1747-32
125 8139-00
487 1699-18
487 1935-48
487 2434-12
487 2434-13
487 1973-25
487 1973-26
487 1973-27
487 1973-28
487 1973-29
487 1973-30
487 1697-05
487 1697-06
487 1747-85
487 1760-11
487 1747-63
487 1975-49
487 0412-63
Description
Hose
Screw
Fitting
Nut
Connection branch
Drain hose
Seal
Screw
Sensor
Rear panel
Cable glands
Guiding plate
Sealing strip
Cover plate
Lock-nut
Sealing strip
Membrane
Air channel
Cover
Casing
Button
Rail
Rail
Heating element
Heating element
Heating element
Heating element
Heating element
Heating element
Thermostat
Thermostat
Cover
Membrane
Guiding plate
Fan motor
Cable set
Benmning
Slang
Skruv
Beslag
Mutter
Anslutning
Avioppsslang
Ttning
Skruv
Sensor
Bakre plat
Kabelavlastare
Ledplt
Ttningslist
Tckplat
Kontramutter
Ttningslist
Membran
Luftkanal
Avskrmning
Kpa
Knopp
Skena
Skena
Varmeelement
Varmeelement
Varmeelement
Varmeelement
Varmeelement
Varmeelement
Termostat
Termostat
Avskrmning
Membran
Ledplt
Flktmotor
Ledningssats
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
200243/2
Info
Notes
Info
Annnrkning
Month
Mnad
Year
r
2005
3
M4X25
3
M4
3
3
1
M4X10
1,2 Complete
3
3 M20
3
1
3
3 M20
1 8x3x300
3
3
3
3
3 Reset
3
3
1,2 200V 1000/2000W Complete
1,2 230V 1000/2000W Complete
1,2 240V 1000/2000W Complete
1,2 254V 1000/2000W Complete
1,2 400V 2000/3000W Complete
1,2 440V 2000/3000W Complete
1,2 130C
1,2 180C
3
3 07,3
3
1,2 230-240V
3
Issue Month Year

01
OS
05
20 02 35
Page
Group
Sida
Grupp
23
T4130,T4130C
Motor alternative
Motora ternativ
Item
Pos.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Qua
AnI
Art.No
Description
Benmning
Art.nr
illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
200235/1
Info
Info
487 0285-30 Motor
Motor
487 0285-31 Motor
Motor
487 1714-18
487 1714-19
128 0033-50
128 0006-70
487 0127-20
487 1714-30
487 1714-31
487 0105-18
735 3114-00
487 2233-85
487 2233-87
487 2233-89
487 0105-18
735 3114-00
487 2233-96
487 1921-02
125 8168-21
034 4741-31
679 0010-70
487 0105-14
488 0386-13
Motor
Motor
Flakhjul
Lufthlje
Tryckpder
Motor
Motor
Bricka
Segerskring
Mellanhjul
Mellanhjul
Lsring
Bricka
Segerskring
Rem
Fjder
Motorkonsol
Gummidmpare
Skruv
Beslag
Skruv
Motor
Motor
Fan wheel
Air cover
Pressure spring
Motor
Motor
Washer
C-clamp
Pulley
Pulley
Locking ring
Washer
C-clamp
Belt
Spring
Motor bracket
Rubber buffer
Screw
Fitting
Screw
Month
Mnad
Year
Ar
2005
Notes
Anmrkning
Complete 200-240V
415 3NAC50HZ
Complete 200-240V
415V3NAC60HZ
Complete 400-480V
Complete 400-480V
1AC 50/60HZ
3AC 50/60HZ
D12
50Hz Complete
60Hz Complete
09
D12
50/60HZ
M5X12
1-3AC/4001-3AC/4003AC 50Hz
3AC 60Hz
Issue Month Year

01
20 02 Ai
06
05
Q.
Q.
CO - 2 i n
Q. CO CM
Q.
D
S S
m
*
li
i Z)
il
_c
C
0)
(0
O)
a>
^_
~ CM
0)
7
O)
_c
'c
"6
E
<
!C0
1
s
f
g
1c
<s
a.
.1
1
"ti
O
Z
E
o
^
<
"c
'c < <
1 :raE I
S 1 o.o.>
I
O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O
tt5<D<D<D<DCnO>CDO>0>rMO
Ô
2,ig
S t
T T L D ^
O
O
O O O - ^ O O O O O r f O O
O
O
t f o
"^
(DO)
-Jj-Jj
5 5
O
c-JS
. E ^ S
(n(Da>(Da>(D(D(D(D(Dgra(o
E E E E E E E E E E E p ^
CNCNCVJCMCVJtNCMCNtNCN
Z O )
C0COCOCMCSICMCN'>-C0C0COCMCN0slCVJCMCMCMCgCMrMCOCslCNC0
.(D
c
'C
o
<^
CO
-Jo
COCOT-
( D _
-v
Q.
s 21 i 1 l i 1 ^ ^ EEEEEEE 1 EEi 1 EE ^ c
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
C
-^"m
-Q
EEEEEEEEEE
(D
S ^
Q . c i _ i _ ( n c c ( D < D a > ( D ( D a j a ) ( u a ) ( U - j 5 - 5 ;
^ m ( o i ^ c o a > O T - N
--T-'.-T-^NOirM
: T C O < D Q O X X X X X X X X X X O I - I - Q Z I - I - U . W
E ^ 5 S g i
^ 5 > = . .E .E .E .E .E .g c c j . E E
E en c
D2.5,S?CE:cn<D.t:toa3a3<Da3<ua)<ua)<D0o^^.!2uâjE(D
c m < v :
D T - ^ M O ^ ^ O O O T - r O O J O T - N M ^ I O J O h - O O C M T - d l O T - T - O I O l O
o o n T - o r o o o a > n c M o r ~ o o o o o o o o h > h - h ~ i ^ i ^ c M o o o o ( 0 ^ ( v ^
oooinmoî>-ooo>h-eMininu)ininmu>mininh-h>i.ocMh-h-h-e>
o oMt CMMO
CM
. i ^ h- - i ~-- r' --r '~-i ^' r- >' --r
h --. o
v
c
O i o> -oc N
o ccos o
^ ô^r ^. h^- ^
--r ~
' -r -Tr - -^ o
^ <oDcOnM T
^ r .^c ^
inis.r.ts.mh>h.r<.i>>i>>r>.N.r-roh-r~r^h-Kh-h-h~h>h>ooT-r<.i>.h.ro
eo
T-
(NOOOOOOOIOOGpOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOQOOOfOGOOOOO^
T-cxcoîoor.ooo>o-(M
^T--
I ssue Month Year

20 02 45
02
08
05
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
27
T4130C
Condenser unit
Kondensenhet
Item
Qua
Art. No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
128 0012-60
647 1209-30
125 8132-05
647 1226-10
125 8135-24
647 1218-51
647 1201-75
487 0412-61
487 1760-04
647 1228-00
487 1669-30
647 1202-40
487 1668-94
125 8131-53
125 8098-06
Description
Benmning
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
200245/2
Info
Info
Fan blade
Shock absorber mat
Condenser housing
Float
Casing
Microswitch
Capacitor
Cable set
Pump
Hose
Bracket
Seal
Pipe
Condenser housing
Buttom plate
Flktblad
Dmpmatta
Kondensorhus
Flottr
Kpa
Mikrobrytare
Kondensator
Ledningssats
Pump
Slang
Hllare
Ttning
Rr
Kondensorhus
Bottenplt
Notes
Anmrkning
Upper
Complete
2MF
400-480V 3AC
Lower
Month
Mnad
Year
Ar
2005
Issue Month Year

02
08
05
20 02 36
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
29
T4130C
Transformer, marine/ condensation
Transformator, marine/ kondens
Item
Qua
Art. No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nr
Description
487 2434-06 Assembly plate

487 0281-51 Transformer
Benmning
Monteringsplt
Transformator
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
200236/2
info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
Month
Mnad
Year
r
2005
Issue Month Year

02
08
05
20 02 31
Group
Grupp
Page
Sida
31
T4130,T4130C
Control unit
Automatenhet
Item
Qua
Art.No
Pos.
Ant.
Art.nr
1
* 2
* 3
*
*
*
* 4
*
*
*
*
*
*
5
6
7
8
9
10
*
*
* 11
12
*
3
*13
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
14
15
16
17
1
487 2434-02
487 0412-51
487 0412-51
487 0412-50
487 0412-57
487 0412-60
487 0412-61
487 1600-16
487 2100-81
487 0281-16
487 2307-53
487 2307-33
487 0279-51
487 2434-03
487 1686-72
Description
Component plate
Cable
Cable
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Spacer sleeve
Spacer
Spacer plate
Relay
Fitting
Capacitor
Benmning
Komponentplt
Ledninger
Ledninger
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Kretskort
Kretskort
Distanshylla
Distans
Distansplt
Rel
Beslag
Kondensator
4871535-76 Capacitor
4871535-65 Catch
438 9636-12 Relay
Kondensator
Sprr
Rel
438 9636-13
438 9636-11
487 0281-50
487 0289-46
487 1535-79
487 0281-04
487 0274-14
488 7307-04
Rel
Rel
Transformator
Transformator
Kondensator
Anslutningsklmma
Skringshallare
Finskring
Relay
Relay
Transformer
Transformer
Capacitor
Connection clamp
Fuse holder
Precision fuse
487 1897-95 Precision fuse
Finskring
Illustration
Illustration
Issue
Utgva
200231/2
Info
Notes
Info
Anmrkning
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1,2
1,2
3
3
3
1,2
3
1,2
Month
Mnad
Year
Ar
2005
200-240V 1/3AC
230-240V 1AC Condensing
Condensing
400-480V 3AC
400-480V 3AC Condensing
Selecta II Sweden
Selecta II
Plastic
Plastic
24V DC
Selecta II
8pF 230-240V 1AC/230-480V
3AC
1,2 lOpF 200V 3AC Japan
3
1,2 230-240V 1AC/230-240V
3AC/400-415V3NAC
1,2 200V 3AC
1.2 400-480V 3AC
1,2
1,2 400-480V 3AC
1,2
3 5-pole
3
1,2 2,5AT 230-240V 1AC/400-415V
3AC
1,2 0,5A 400-480V 3AC
Condensing
a) ^
to ! 3
CL W
"w
E
0)
E
E
z
0
a
_c
(0
CO
W
"35
a>
<a
a.
<
<
(0
CO
CO
O)
"55
D.
CO
CO
Q.
z
tf
CO
CD
g
<
o
E
'k-
3
D)
CO
"S
Q.
<
<
CM(NCOT--,-c>JCMCM-.-CMT-pgC\JCMi-'
i ^ t ^ CO CO - ^ <3M TT- m lO I ^
CM CNJ T - CM CN <CM CM <- 1 -
CM
t^ CO
Ol0C0OOOC0'*l^t~-l0OOCMCM-*"*L0T-OOOOT-O'<-'<--^T-r--<-T-T-O
CMCN-<-T-CSICMCNC\J-<-
. T- o> t- N- T-^Rb loco^-cjjT-cOT-mt^tîv.tôjT-cnT-mt^mi
<to-<-'<-T-T-T-ommt^'*cOTi-'*'*-d-'*mcocDT-ootôir)inoooooo
T - T - T - I O T - T - T - K '
T - C O C O C M T - C O C O T -
mCD'g-CDt^COCO'ÔCMCO-'tmmcOtÔOCMCO
CO CO
CNJ CN <-
o o c n o o o c o m o o o o o o o o o o o T - ' ^
cococococotî^t^'^t'*-*'*'^'^'*-*'*'^
l
i
i
l
l
i
i
i
l
i
T
i
T
T
T
T
i
i
i
l
i
i
i
i
l
i
i
i
l
i
i
i
i
COCOCJ>C3>C3500'<-COCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCO t
OcOCOCDI^CMCMT-CMCncnc35CnO>CJ)CO<350)<DOOCOOr^t^->-CMCMCMCMO'*
C M C M C M C M C M C O C O C O ' * ' * ' * ' * ' * ^ ' - ' ^ ' * - * ' ^ t ^n OC aM) C
t
' * O O O O C O C O O ' < - T - O O O O O O O O T - T - ' < - C M C M i n - ^ C J > C M O - r - - i - T - T - C M T CMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCgCM O
OCOCOCOCOCOCOT-1-CMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCvjCMCMOCMCOmcOCOv-T-T-Tr ^ O O O O O O t ^ O O T - T - T - ' ^ . , - T - T - r - ^ T - T - T - - r - r - O T - C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C 0
t^COOOCOCOCOOOCOCJ)C3)t^t~.|^l^t^t^l^t^t^t^t^t^t^t^C3>'3-lfllO-i-T-CMCMCMm
CO0OCOCO0OC00OCOC00O'*^'*'<r'*'*'*'*'*'*'*'*'*trt^CMCMCMCOCOCOCOCOCO
r'J-'*'<t't'*'*'<t'*'^CDtD(DCOCD<DCOCOCD(D<DCDCOCDCDt^t^r~t^t^r^t^r^t^
oooocooocooococococococooocococooococo
T - T - T - T - ^ ^ C M - - -
CMCM
T - ^ ^ T -
T - T - , -
COT-CMCM
CMCMCMCMCMCMCMT-COCMT-CSICM
inu5inuiinioioininioincj>cnT-in'i-'<-T-t^t^tîntîni^<35->-cot^<j)t^T-r^c:>tâ>coinh~t^cj)int^cot^<j)-^coco-<-t^<3>t^T-T-',-'>-T--r--t-cO'<-incococo
CMCMCMCMCMCMCMC'4CMCMCM-<--^CMCMCgCMCM
t^COCJ)0->-CMCOCO-^CMm(35-<-CMT-CMCOinmcDI^CMCMlOlOa)C3>OCJ>Cn'*'<-CJ>C3)T-T-CMlOlOCOCOt^tÔCDCDmcOCMOOOO'<tmcDt^COCJ50<J)CO-<--<-Omi^
t^r^l^00C000CJ0OCMCMCMCMC0C0CDCDCDC0OOOT-'<--r-T-l0inc000CC)OT-Cs]CMC0C0C0c0C0T-r-OOT-iniO(3)C!0O'*'<-'<-CMCMCMCMCMCMC0'*l0C0O'*0000
inLotniomir3iocMtîî^h-t^h-i^h.t^t^cj>c3)cncno>(j>c:)Cj>c3>c:5C3)Cj)00ooooooococooooootô-<-mcDcj>cococococococoininoocMcoco
T-T-T-T-T-.^T-CO'*'d-'*'*Tr^t'*'^'^t^'t'*'*'*'*'*'*^'*'t'*'*tDCDCDCOCOCDCDCDCDT-T-OOCX5<X3CJOCOC3>CMCMCOWini^t^t^l~-t^r^t^t^t^
^~t^^,r^t^^^r^t^l^Kt>-^-l^^^t^t^l^r^t^t^r^t^r^^^t^l^t^t^r^r^t^t^l^t^l^l^t^t^t^cx5oocJooooo(X5ccocJ)CJ>c3)C3)CJ>c3>c35<35cnc3>c3>cc35csT-^
T - T - - ^ T - T - T - T - r - T - T - T - T - T - T - . ^ . ^ T - T - T - . t - . , - T - r - . ^ . ^ T - r - T - . , - . , - . r - T - . r - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - . t - T - T - - . - r - T - ' I - T - - < - - < - - < - - < - ' . - T - C M C M C M C N I C M
cooooooocococooocooocococococooooooocooo(cocococooooooooocooocooocococooocooooooooocococooocococx>ccocooococooooooocococc}oococooocc}
<-
CMCM
CMCM
COCMCMCMCMT-
CMCM'<-CMCM->--<-'<-CMCM'<-T-C\1CMCMCMCMCMCM
rîococointînc3>T-r-T-T-T-T-T-t^T-t^T-iO'<--i-'t-T-(35cot^cnT-t^t^c3>inr^t^c3>t>-cj>T-iow->-T-coi^(n'<-'<-<3>'-'<-iococoin'i-int^cocococoininin
<-CMCMCM-î-CM'>-CMi-CMCOCOCOCOCOCMCO-i-CM-r-cOCOCOCO
0000OOO00O0OO0O000000-<-T-r-T-'<--<--r--t-T--<--<--,-r-'<-T-T-T--.-T-T--,-T-'<-T-T-T-T-T-T-T--<-T-T-T-T--.-T-T-T-T-'<-T-T-T-T-
^COOT-CMCO'>t-<--^(35C3>CDOT-tÔ-^-r-CMCO'*intDC3>CDin'*ir5inCD'*CD(OOOOOOOOCM'<-CM10CDOOT--r-incDC}0<XJ<3>'*r^(J)0<J>'*'*OOC3>0-<-^lOCO
CD^-COCOCOCO(00000^ln^nlOCOtD(DCDCD(0(D^~t^T-cOt0^nlncDCJ>CnCJ)C35CO^t*Tl*tÔOOOC350000^<-T-CMCMCMCO^CO<nT-f-cOCOI^^^t^
i
i
i
i
i
i
t
i
i
i
l
T
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
T
T
l
l
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
T
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
T-lOinU5inininCJ>tn<J)CJ)CnCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMU3lOinOOOCOCOOOCOOOOOCOOOCJ>OOT--<-CDIÎ^t^lÔOC3>CJ5(3)a)Cn<3>C3>CJ5<35Cn<3>C3>CJ>cn'*-*'a-'*U5iniX5
CX500COCOCOOOOOCOOOOOCOOOT-'<--t-T-r-T-T-T-T-cOCOCOOCOtD<OCDCOCD(DCOCDtDI^Kt^l^COCJ>C>>CJ>C3>C3>C5CS<:5(3)CJ>CJ>t3)<J)CJ)CJ>CJ>CJ5C:>-<-'i-'>-T--.-T--<CMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCM->d-'*'*'*'*'*'<l-'*'*mmmCDtO(DCOtO<DCDCDCDCDtD<DCDCD<DeDeO(DCDCDCOCDCD<DCOCJCDCDCDCOCDCD(DCOCDt^l^l^t^t^t^t^
oooocooococooooococoocococoaooooooooocooocooocooooooococo(c3ococococooocooccooooocooocococococooooocococooococooooooocococoooooco
T-
CMCMv-
CMCMCM
CMCM-"-CM
Traaa>a>OTtTtT-Tr<ooT-
T-T-i-T-T-'t-T-T-T-r-i-T-T-CMT-T-x-T-CMCMT-T-CMf-T-COCOCOT-T-CM'^-CMCMr-T-CMCOCMCOCOCOCOCM
colot^^~^^^CJ)U3r^cn^.cnl^^^t^t^T-T-t35cot^cJ5colnt^^nr^cocou^t^colnt^t^l0^nt^lo^^coK^nl^coco^-T-T-T-lol^T-T-coc^ln^-co<-^nI-T-T-,-cn
CM'--"-
. -,
O C M C O C D m ' < - - < - c l i n ' ^ C M O O O T - O O C O C : > C J > C O O ' ^ ' * C O C O O - < - ' > - C O O O O O O O O O O O ( 3 5 i - - < - C M C O I ^ t - ~ C O
t^ -^ T- Tt Tf O O O O T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - - < - i - - t - C O C O C O C O C O C O C O C O C O ' * ' * l O C D C D h - h - O O O O O O O O O C D C O C D C D C D t ^ t ^ C } O h - - ^ T - T - - < - T - C M C M C M C M C M C M C M
O C 0 O O - i - C M C M 1 0 O C M O O O O C M O O O O O C M ' - O O O O O O O O O C 0 C 0 t ^ t ^ t ^ C D C 0 C 0 i n O O - < COI oI oI oI o

" l- i -l t - o
ol o T
- li - il- Tl - cl Ml T -l e o
i nl ol - t l- ml i nl
I
l
l
i
i
l
l
i
i
a
i
l
l
l
i
l
l
i
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
^ C3 o a> o> - O O O
OOCMOO-<-CM10CC35tÔO<XJCOCO'r-'*'*OOT-COOOCDCOCOCMCMCMOOOOOCDCM-<t'*COOTl-CDCDCD-*Tl-(3500mU5mini^'*-*C:5'<-->-T-Trt (D to m tn < l - C J ) C 3 > c n T - C M C M C O C O C O C O C O ' * T r e D C M C M C O O O O O O O t 3 5 C J > C 3 > < 3 > C J > C J ) C 3 5 C J > ' ^ t D O O O O O i - C M C M C O C M ' ^ C O C O C O D C D m o O O O O O C M r > ~ t ^ N - O O O O O O C X 3
^ T - - < - T - - ^ T - - ^ T - T - T - ' I - T - T - - r - r - T - T - T - T - - 1 ^ T - T - r - . , - ' , - ' ^ - ^ , - , - - r - T - T - ' , - T - ' . - ' , ^ ' , - ' , - ' ^ - ^ - ^ T t ' 5 r ' * ' * T t - t ' * ' * ' * ' * - * ' * ' * ' * ' t - < * - ' * ' * T t ' *
^ CD CD o o * C O O O O C O C O O O O O C O C O O O O C O C X 5 C } O C O C O O O C O O O C O C X 5 C X 3 0 0 C C O < X 5 ( C O C O C O O O O O O O O O O C M C D ( 3 5 C 3 5 C n i - T - C O i n O O O O O O O O O O O O
* CD CD t -^ i n i o i n u i i n i n i n i n i n i n i o u 5 i n u 5 U 5 i x 5 i n i n i i n i n i o i n i n u 3 i n i n i n i r ) U 5 i n c x 3 c x 3 c o o o o o c o c o o o o o c M C M o o o o c o - ^ T - - r - c M t ^ i ^ t ^ t ^ t ^ i ^ t ^ h - i ^ t ^ t ^ t ^
CO CO CO CM CM C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C N C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C N C M C O C O C O C O C O t ^ l ^ l ^ t ^ c n c O O O C O C O C O O O C O C O c n o O C O
o o o <- T-
Page
Sida
2
Numerical index/Nummerregister
Art.No/Art.nr
Page/Sida
Art.No/Art.nr
Page/Sida
Art.No/Art.nr
Page/Sida
Art.No/Art.nr
Page/Sida
31 Electrolux
ELECTROLUX LAUNDRY SYSTEMS DENMARK A/S
DK-5690 Tommerup, Denmark. Telephone +45 63 76 20 00. Telefax +45 63 76 22 00
Internet: www.electrolux-wascator.com E-mail: els.info@electrolux.dk
>
o
00
o
CO
CO
f^7ZT^Z7Cr-^Z7ZrCX^TXX2
CN
r^rS
CO
_i
Q
1-
CO
t-
in
CD
(C
a
h
>
o
lO
12
Hi'
CO
O 00
CM
>
o
Ol
II ri
>
!i!3
caiJiEaii rEarsai: ail.
I]
Ir^r^ / - ^ ^ r-w^ r^v^
^.^^.^^^ ^^.^^ ,^.^^ ^^.^^ .^^^^
Hi' z
SI
9A
t'A
2A
m
o
III
ce
^
o
5/'
^
t^
CO
CN
in
C35
00
CM
rr
CD
(TT
>
o
CO
o
o
Machine Access
CMS:
Coin Meter Single
CMSNB:
Coin Meter Single No Box.
CMD:
Coin Meter Double
CMDNB:
Coin Meter Double No Box.
Mu-
Coin meter 1
Coin meter 1
1
3
ESS:
Electrolux Single System
PCR:
Prepared for Card Reader
FÛ
1
; ; j - coini sv
o
coini
" ~ ~ "
Coinl GND W h i t e
^ ^
Coin2 5V
^
^ ^
CP:
Central Payment
Brown
Green
cam
Coln2 GND
0
1 CM
o CM
2 a.
3
t'^
Coin meter 2
2
"
2 CM
3 0-
::;;r" -"'"' o
coinl
B
Green
WhiteJ
^ - r,., ,v B'""
^
coinj
Green
JI^HT",.,.,, White
0
1 CM
3
' CO
2 CM
P9.
3 -
1
1
^ ^
^ H
Selecta II
Brown
11 11 1
Selecta
0
1 CM
Coinl 5V
coinl
P22-2
1-
0 CM
' Coinl GND P 2 2 - 3
PTC
3
1
;;;qpii^
Pii-3
p~
White I
[Brown
+/- 24V
OV
RUN (NC) (NO)
L
1
Selecta II
D1
^ ^ ^ " '
CP/CALCAD/FLEX
487 19 24 55
P22-0
P22-2
Coinl GND
C0in2
^M
ColnZ GND
P22-3
2s
Selecta I
coinl
Coinl GND
^^^
Coin2 5V
Ô
coin2
^ ^
Coin2 GND
P9.
0
1 CM
O CM
2 D.
1
PT
PTTC
;;;^piiî
P11-3
^^H
'
3
2
"
2 CM
3 "^
PTZ;
GND V^Z
i
^^^^H
3
1
2 CM
^
^^"^
P9
0
1 CM
Coinl 5V
S e l e c t a II
RX
s TX
i3 24V
"*
n._...
IFH II H
" S I
CM
p m
UJ
viwf ^JL'
P7
Payment System - Selecta version 2

Page
4/4
DRAWING NO.
487 19 52 87
REV.NO.
01
Hl'
srtq eieQ
Z a z a
OOcfl
eoiAjes
LUBjoJd
ZS
OQIU
9sn |euj8)U|
ZG2Sy
J|3
eZruZ
z
CUh-Ol-O
snq e;ea
w u u o
\> M lo O O ol lo o o Ol |o o o ol |o O O Ol lo o ol
CD o
O 5
z *
Oli-
Ho ol '^jo o ol '"lo o o o| n p o Q o Q 9I
o
0
0
0
y -
0
0
0
0
0
0
z
0
>
^
O. m
n 0
^
0
0
0
0
u
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
z 0
r:
0
0
0
X
I
111
<
o
>
iptwieu s i a
[o g ol J~\ To o o ol
m
5
1-
CL
o -2
">
(O
l
[]|
-i=rqvr
HOc
[oj
II
1^
:d_-3;fh-^-
r--
^f-lf-tzd--
+ i.
^-
i i - - ^ "
1%1>S-
og
Q& H
0 0 H
SS
1" V
a
<
li-I-
' o
^ L
k
^
d
:z
z
0
2
S
Q
0)
en
(S
CL
N.
CO
CM
tn
OJ
00
^
^
?5
o
c
(O
23:
H LU
CO Z
CO
"?
-! DL<
o:
^-
Q.
li
'
Z-9d
Z-Cd
z-w
=1
l-l
Z-9d
AO-
iS
l.-6d
Z-6d
Z-Sd
>
6-iai
r-|2
c-
ô
O-
N
CM
00
00
il
o,
o
IE
X
O
CO
>
o
00
o
o
o
>

H12 VXCVXCV

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

H12 VXCVXCV

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

0

RANGE 4 HOT PLATES+OVEN

COFFEE MACHINE M-2

UNIVERSAL MACHINE KU 2-4E

WATER BOILER 151

IRONING BOARD WALL MOUNTED

TILTABLE FRYING TABLE

DRYING TUMBLER EDE 425 M.60

How to contact us...

For Loipart LLC

For more information, please contact:

For Rest of Tlie World

STAINLESS STEEL EXECUTION

COMPACT DESIGN - LARGE

ADJUSTABLE FLANGED FEET

INCLUDING FRONT HAND RAIL

STORAGE CABINET OR OVEN FOR

MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS OF

TWO SIZES, SEVEN MODELS

These ranges are made entirely of AISI 304

Model 7BTSE2M40, 7BTSE2M44

Model 7BTOE3M40, 7BTOE3M44

DOC. NO. 5958 706 03

Do not wash the appliance with water jets.

This booklet describes a number of appliance models.

TABLE TECHNICAL DATA

Installation drawing (see fig. 1)

Do not use products containing chlorine (bleach, hydrochloric

All the packaging materials used are environmentally friendly.

Before installing or using the appliance, carefully read this

polyethylene : external wrapping film, instructions

expanded polystyrene: protective surround elements

Important; Installation and maintenance of tine aDOliance

rr INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLfiTsj

Place the appliance under Its extraction hood to insure the

ASSEMBLY OF TOP APPLIANCE ON SUPPORT

See the relative enclosed assembly instructions for the

III. INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

This appliance should be used only for cooking foodstuffs and it

Warning: during operation the cooking tops become very hot.

HOW TO USE THE COOKING TOP

All plates have a temperature limiting device, which interrupts

HOW TO USE THE OVEN

The resistor operating system is controlled by a four-positions

CLEANING AND SERVICING

SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE

" MARINE" - ELECTRIC COOKER

4 hot piates, 400 V

From ser. nr. / Da Ser. Nr. / 844

From ser. nr. / Da Ser. Nr. / 844

Pagina 1: Vista generale

Page 1: Main view

Pagina 2: Parti elettriche

Page 2: Electric component

Piastra 2600 W, 400 V, Dia. 220 mm

Electric plate 2600 W,

From ser. nr. / [) a Ser. N r . / 8 4 4

Pagina 2: Parti elettriche

Page 2: Electric component

Molla per piastra

Spring, tor plate

From ser. nr. / Da Ser. Nr. / 844

MORSETTIERA ALIMENTAZI ONE